PHYSICS

REVISION BOOKLET
 Copyright  EDUCATIONSQUARE
This study module contains copyright subject matter proprietary the content
development wing of Educationsquare, Ludhiana, India. No part of this module
may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by
any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopy, recording, or otherwise, by
anyone, without prior written permission from Educationsquare. Violators are
liable to be legally prosecuted.
CONTENTS

S. No. Topic Page No.

1 UNITS AND DIMENSIONS 4

2 MOTION IN ONE DIMENSION 7
3 VECTORS 9
4 MOTION IN TWO DIMENSION AND CIRCULAR MOTION 11
5 HOME ASSIGNMENT 14
6 FORCE AND FRICTION 29
7 HOME ASSIGNMENT 39
8 WORK, POWER AND ENERGY 56
9 COLLISIONS 58
10 HOME ASSIGNMENT 60
11 SYSTEM OF PARTICLE AND ROTATIONAL MOTION SUMMARY 67
12 HOME ASSIGNMENT 80
13 GRAVITATION 90
14 HOME ASSIGNMENT 95
15 ELASTICITY 103
16 HOME ASSIGNMENT 107
17 FLUIDS 110
18 HOME ASSIGNMENT 124
19 CALORIMETERY 132
20 THERMAL EXPANSION 134
21 HEAT TRANSFER 137
22 KTG 139
23 THERMODYNAMICS 141
24 HOME ASSIGNMENT 145
25 OSCILLATIONS 154
26 HOME ASSIGNMENT 159
27 WAVES 166
28 HOME ASSIGNMENT 180
29 WINDOW TO JEE/NEET 188
 UNIT AND DIMENSION
Physical Quantity: which can be measured and by (3) Time : 1 second is defined as the time interval of
which various physical happenings can be explained and 9192631770 vibrations of radiation in Cs-133 atom.
expressed in the form of laws of physics. Physical This radiation corresponds to the transition between
quantity (Q) = Magnitude × Unit = n × u two hyperfine level of the ground state of Cs-133.
i.e. n u = constant, or n1u1  n2u2  constant ; n  1/ u Practical Units
Fundamental quantities: which are independent of all (i) 1 fermi = 1 fm = 10–15 m
other quantities and do not require the help of any other (ii) 1 X-ray unit = 1XU = 10–13 m
physical quantity for their definition. (iii) 1 angstrom = 1Å = 10–10 m
Derived quantities: All other physical quantities can be (iv) 1 micron = m = 10–6 m
derived by suitable multiplication or division of different (v) 1 A.U. = 1. 49  1011 m
powers of fundamental quantities. (vi) 1 Light year = 1 ly = 9.46  1015 m
If length is defined as a fundamental quantity then area and (vii) 1 Parsec = 1pc = 3.26 light year
volume are derived from length and are expressed in term (viii) Chandra Shekhar unit = 1.4 times the mass of sun
of length with power 2 and 3 over the term of length. (ix) Metric tonne: = 1000 kg
Fundamental Units: any unit of mass, length and time in (x) Quintal : 1 Quintal = 100 kg
mechanics is called a fundamental, absolute or base unit. (xi) amu = 1.67  10–27 kg
Other units which can be expressed in terms of (xii) 1 Shake = 10– 8 sec
fundamental units, are called derived units. Sign Conventions for units and their symbols :
(1) CGS (Gaussian system) system: length: centimetre (1) No ‘s’ is added to the abbreviations of plural form of
(cm), mass: gram (g) and time: second (s) respectively. the unit. e.g cm cms  kg kgs
(2) MKS (Giorgi)system : length: meter (m), mass: (2) The units like “newton" should not be written as
kilogram (kg) & time second (s). “Newton”.
(3) FPS system : foot, pound and second are used (3) The abbreviations of the units (Name of scientists)
respectively for measurements of length, mass and time should be capital initial letter. e.g. N n.
(4) SI (International system of units) system: Double prefixes are not allowed. e.g. kg (Kilo is a
Quantity Unit Quantity Unit prefix used with gram) Mkg(not Mega KiloGram)
Length Metre (m) Temperature Kelvin Dimensions, Dimensional Formula & Dimensional
(K)
Mass Kilogram Amount of Mole Equation:
(kg) Substance (mol)
Time Second (s) Luminous Candela
Intensity (cd)
Electric Ampere (A)
Current
S.I. Prefixes
Power Prefix Symbol Power Prefix Symbol Principle of homogeneity of dimensions : All the terms
of 10 of 10 in a physical expression should have same dimensions.
1018 exa E 10–1 Deci d e.g. in v2 – u2 = 2as, the dimensions of v2, u2 & 2as
1015 peta P 10–2 Centi c should be same.
1012 tera T 10–3 Milli m
Uses of dimensional equation
109 giga G 10–6 micro 
1. Check the correct ness of a physical relation.
106 mega M 10–9 Nano n
103 kilo k 10–12 Pico p 2. To convert the one system of units to another.
102 hecto h 10–15 femto f 3. To derive the relation between different physical
101 deca da 10–18 Atto a quantities involved in a physical phenomenon.
(1) Length : Now a days metre is defined as length of Limitations of Dimensional Analysis:
the path travelled by light in vacuum in 1/299,7792,  While deriving a formula the proportionality constant
45 part of a second. cannot be found.
(2) Mass : The mass of a cylinder made of platinum-  The formula for a physical quantity depending on
iridium alloy kept at International Bureau of Weights other than mass, length, time cannot be derived it can
and Measures is defined as 1 kg. be checked only.
4
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 The equation or relation cannot be derived if it has count in significant figures.e.g. 0.0056 has two
more than one terms on any side. significant figures.
 The equations containing trigonometric functions, Rule 5. All zeros on the right of last non–zero digit are
logarithmic functions or exponential functions cannot not counted as significant figure. e.g. 159800
be derived it can be checked only. has only four significant figures.
 The relation cannot be derived if a physical quantity Rule 6. All zeros on the right of last non–zero digit
depends upon more than three factors. become significant, when they come from a
Dimensionless Quantities : measurement as 1500m has 4 significant figures.
1. Pure Numbers ,Trigonometric ratios,  are dimensionless. Change in the position of decimal point or by change
2. Terms involved in trigonometric ratios e.g. sin (2  c t / ) in Units of measured value does not change the number
3. Also ratio of physical quantities having the same of significant digits.
dimensions are dimensionless. e.g. Rounding Off a digit:
1. Relative Density 2. Angle 3. Strain 1. If the number lying after the definite digits is more
Physical quantities with same Dimensional formulae than 5 then the number prior to it is increased by one.
(i) Frequency, angular frequency, angular velocity & If it is less than 5 then the number prior to it remains
velocity gradient (M0 L0 T–1) unchanged e.g. 1.58  1.6 and 1.24  1.2
(ii) Work, energy, torque, internal energy, quantity of 2. If digit to be eliminated is 5 followed by zeros, then
light & heat (ML2T–2) the number prior to it remains unchanged if it is
(iii) Force, thrust, weight, energy gradient (MLT–2) even. And increased by one if it is an odd number.
(iv) Surface tension, surface energy, force gradient & e.g. 7.250  7.2 and 7.3507.4
spring constant (ML0T–2) 3. If digit to be eliminated is 5 followed by digits other
(v) Angular momentum and Planck’s constant (ML2T–1) than 0, then number prior to it increased by one
 A numerical correct physical relation is also Addition & Subtraction: In addition or subtraction, the
dimensionally correct. But a dimensionally correct number of decimal places in the result should equal to the
relation need not to be numerically correct. e.g. smallest number of decimal places of terms in the
T = (l/g) Dimensionally correct but not numerically operation. e.g. 5.63 + 9.1 = 14.73  14.7
T = 2  (l/g) Dimensionally & Numerically correct Multiplication & division: In multiplication or division,
 If units and dimensions of two physical quantities are the number of significant figures in the result should
same these need not represent same physical equal to the smallest number of significant figures of
character. terms in the operation. e.g. 3.8 x 0.125 = 0.475  0.48
 Two quantities having same dimensions need not Error: The difference in the true value and the measured
have same units as work (J) and torque (N–m) i.e. value of quantity is called error of measurement.
torque is not measured in joules. Absolute Error = Actual value – Measured value
Errors of Measurement : Relative Error = absolute error = x
Significant figures: The digits required to express a actual value x

physical quantity correctly, are called significant figures. Percentage Error = relative error x 100
Larger the number of significant figures obtained in a Combination of errors
measurement, greater is the accuracy of the measurement. 1. x = a + b x  ∆x = (a + b)  ( ∆a + ∆b )
Rule 1. All non-zero digits as well as zeros between 2. x = a – b x  ∆x = (a – b)  ( ∆a + ∆b )
non–zero digits are significant. e.g. 12038 has 3. x = an bm x   n a  m b 
x  a b 
five significant digits.
Rule 2. Ignore the zeros to the left and count those to 4. a n , x  a b 
x   n m 
the right. e.g. 0.720 has three significant figures. bm x  a b 

Rule 3. The powers of ten are not counted as significant  Random error can be eliminated by taking large
digits. e.g. 5.64 x 105 cm has three significant number of observations.
figures.  Error/ absolute error is not dimensionless quantity.
Rule 4. All zeros to right of the decimal point are not Relative error is dimensionless quantity
significant. but zeros on right after decimal are  Quantity having higher power should be more
accurately determined.

5
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
Important Dimensional formulae numerical value.
Gas constant (R) Joule/mol-K [M L T  ]
1 2 –2 –1  Solid angle subtended at a point inside the closed
Boltzmann constant (k) Joule/K [M1L2T– 2 – 1] surface is 4 steradian.
Coefficient of thermal  A measurement of a physical quantity is said to be
Joule/m-s-K [M1L1T– 3 – 1]
conductivity (K) accurate if the systematic error in its measurement
Stefan's constant () Watt/m2-K4 [M1L0T– 3 – 4] is relatively very low. On the other hand, the
Wien's constant (b) Metre-K [M0L1T 0 1] measurement of a physical quantity is said to be
Planck's constant (h) Joule-s [M1L2T–1] precise if the random error is small.
Coefficient of Linear  A measurement is most accurate if its observed
Kelvin–1 [M0L0T0 –1]
Expansion () value is very close to the true value.
Mechanical equi. of Heat
Joule/Calorie [M0L0T0]  For greater accuracy, the quantity with higher
(J)
power should have least error.
Vander wall’s constant (a) Newton-m4 [ML5T– 2]
Vander wall’s constant (b) m3 [M0L3T0]  The absolute error in each measurement is equal to
 The dimensional formula is very helpful in writing the the least count of the measuring instrument.
unit of a physical quantity in terms of the basic units.  The unit and dimensions of the absolute error are
 The dimensions of a physical quantity do not same as that of quantity itself.
value of 1 part on main scale (s)
depend on the system of units.  Least Count =
Number of parts on vernier scale (n)
 A physical quantity that does not have any unit
must be dimensionless.  Least count of vernier callipers
 Generally, the symbols of those basic units, whose value of 1 part of  value of 1 part of 
=   
dimension (power) in the dimensional formula is  main scale (s)   vernie r scale (v)
zero, are omitted from the dimensional formula.  Least count of vernier calliper = 1 MSD – 1 VSD
 The physical relation involving logarithm, exponential, where MSD = Main Scale Division
trigonometric ratios, numerical factors etc. cannot be VSD = Vernier Scale Division
derived by the method of dimensional analysis. Pitch(p)
 Least count of screw gauge =
 Physical relations involving addition or subtraction No. of partson circularscale(n)

sign cannot be derived by the method of  Smaller the least count, higher is the accuracy of
dimensional analysis. measurement.
 If units or dimensions of two physical quantities  Larger the number of significant figures after the
are same, these need not represent the same decimal in a measurement, higher is the accuracy
physical characteristics. For example torque and of measurement.
work have the same units and dimensions but their  Significant figures do not change if we measure a
physical characteristics are different. physical quantity in different units.
 The standard units must not change with space and  Significant figures retained after mathematical
time. That is why atomic standard of length and operation (like addition, subtraction, multiplication
time have been defined. Attempts are being made and division) should be equal to the minimum
to define the atomic standard for mass as well. significant figures involved in any physical
 The unit of time, the second, was initially defined in quantity in the given operation.
terms of the rotation of the earth around the sun as  Significant figures are the number of digits upto
well as that about its own axis. This time standard is which we are sure about their accuracy.
subjected to variation with time. Therefore, the  If a number is without a decimal and ends in one or
atomic standard of time has been defined. more zeros, then all the zeros at the end of the number
 Any repetitive phenomenon, such as an oscillating may not be significant. To make the number of
pendulum, spinning of earth about its axis, etc can significant figures clear, it is suggested that the number
be used to measure time. may be written in exponential form. For example 20300
 Poiseuille (unit of viscosity) = pascal (unit of may be expressed as 203.00×102, to suggest that all the
pressure) × second. That is : Pl : Pa- s. zeros at the end of 20300 are significant.
 Angle is exceptional physical quantity, which  1 inch = 2.54 cm 1 mile = 5280 ft = 1.609 km
though is a ratio of two similar physical quantities 1 foot = 12 inches = 30.48 cm = 0.3048 m
(angle = arc / radius) but still requires a unit
(degrees or radians) to specify it along with its
6
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 MOTION IN ONE DIMENSION
   
Position vector r  xˆi  yˆj  z kˆ .  v v 2  v1
(iii) Average acceleration: aa  
t t
Rest and Motion If a body does not change its position
as time passes with respect to frame of reference, it is The direction of average acceleration vector is the

 v
said to be at rest. direction of the change in velocity vector as a 
t
And if a body changes its position as time passes w.r.t. 
 
v d v
frame of reference, it is said to be in motion. Rest and (iv) Instantaneous acceleration = a  lim 
t  0 t dt
motion are relative terms. It depends upon the frame of (v) For a moving body there is no relation between the
references. direction of instantaneous velocity and direction of
Point object If the size of a body is negligible in acceleration.
comparison to its range of motion then that body is When particle moves with constant acceleration
known as a particle. Equations of motion (in scalar from) Equation of motion
Distance : It is the actual length of the path covered by a (in vector from)
moving particle in a given interval of time.   
  u  at ; s  ut  1 at 2 v  u  at ; s  ut  1 at 2
Displacement : Displacement is the change in position 2 2

vector i.e., A vector joining initial to final position. a   

  u  2as ;
2 2
s n  u  (2n  1) v .v  u .u  2 a.s ;
2
distance  |Displacement| 
  a
For a moving particle Distance > 0 s n  u  (2n  1)
2
but Displacement > = or < 0 Motion of Body Under Gravity (Free Fall)
For motion between two points, displacement is single If a body is projected vertically upward
valued while distance depends on actual path and so can
have many values.
Speed: The rate of distance covered with time is called
speed.
Uniform speed: When a particle covers equal distances in
equal intervals of time, (no matter how small the intervals 2h u u
2

t   ; u  2 gh ; h
are) then it is said to be moving with uniform speed. g g 2g
Average speed  Total distance travelled ; v  s
Time taken
av
t  Distance covered in last second of upward motion does
Time average speed v av 
Total distance covered =  1 t1   2 t 2   3 t 3  ...... not depend initial speed imparted to body. It is 4.9m.
Total time elapsed t1  t 2  t 3  ......
 Time of descent (t2) = time of ascent (t1) = u/g
Distance averaged speed vav 
2v1v2
v1  v2  If air resistance is to be taken into account, then the
Total distance covered d1  d 2  d3  ...... time of ascent is less than the time of descent. t2 > t1
av  
Total time elapsed d1 d 2 d 3 u2
   ...... u
1 2 3 time of ascent, t1 
g a
and h  2( g  a) ; time of
u
If speed is continuously changing with time then v 
 vdt descent, t2 
av ( g  a )( g  a )
 dt
 If a particle is thrown upward with some initial
Acceleration The time rate of change of velocity of an
velocity from a tower: take u=+ve, a= -ve, S = +ve if
object is called acceleration of the object.
  final position is above point of projection,
dv ; a  d v  d x
2
dv
a v S = -ve , if final position is below point of projection.
dt ds dt dt 2
(i) Uniform acceleration: If magnitude and direction of
the acceleration remains constant during particle
motion.
Value of g is 9 . 8 m/s or 980 cm/s or 32 feet/s
2 2 2

(ii) Non-uniform acceleration: if either magnitude or

direction or both of them change during motion.

7
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
Important points AB 1  AB 2 1  AB  2
t  v max .   S  AB  v S   A  B  t
1. There can’t be two positions or velocities of an object  AB  2  2 
at a particular instant. Distance – Time Graph :
2. In x-t graph slope of tangent at particular instant   The slope of x – t graph at any instant gives the
instant Velocity chord in given time interval  instantaneous speed of the particle. Note that slope =
average velocity tan , where  is the angle made by the tangent to the
3. If the x-t graph is perpendicular to the time axis, its graph with the X – axis.
velocity is infinity as slope tan 900 =. But this is not  Since, the distance covered is always positive so the
possible practically. x – t graph can’t be below the time axis.
4. If x-t graph is inclined to time axis at an angle more  For a particle moving with constant speed the x – t
than 900, the velocity is negative. graph is a straight line.
 The slope of x – t graph at any instant gives the
5. A man is at a distance ‘x’ from the bus, when the bus instantaneous velocity of the particle.
begins to move with a constant acceleration ‘a’,  For a particle moving with constant velocity the x – t
velocity with he should run towards it to catch V  graph is a straight line inclined to time–axis.
2ax Velocity – Time Graph :
6. Speed of boat = v0, speed of current = v  The area under v – t graph gives displacement
covered by particle.
t 1
 v
t0 v2
1 2 t1 II t2 t3
v0
t
time taken to go and return in still water = t0 I III
time taken in go & return when water is flowing = t
Distance = area I + area II + area III; Displacement = area
 t > to i.e. time taken is more when river is
II – area III – area I
flowing.
 For a particle moving with constant velocity, the v –t
7. A car leaves the station X for station Y every ‘t’
graph is a straight line parallel to t – axis.
minutes. Simultaneously, another car also leaves the
 For a particle moving with the constant acceleration
station Y for station X every ‘t’ minutes. The cars
the v – t graph is a straight line inclined to x - axis.
move at the same const. speed and go from X to Y or
Acceleration – Time Graph
vice-versa in ‘h’ hours. Then, the number of cars on
 The area under a – t graph gives the change in
the route = 2h / t  1
velocity of the particle.
8. If two bodies of different masses are made to fall from
 The a – t graph for a particle moving with
the same height, then time taken by them to reach the
constant acceleration is a straight line parallel to x –axis.
ground is same.
Acceleration – displacement Graph
A body starts from rest moving with constant acc. A for  v2  u2 
some time, then decelerate at rate B and comes to rest  The area under a – s graph gives   of the
 2 
then max. velocity reached , distance covered & total
particle.
time taken are given as

8
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 VECTORS
Physical quantities having magnitude, direction and given by the closing side or the nth side of the polygon
obeying laws of vector algebra are called vectors. taken in opposite order.
Example : The physical quantity current has both Subtraction of vectors
magnitude and direction but is still a scalar as it disobeys A  B  A  ( B) | A  B |  A 2  B 2  2 AB cos 
the laws of vector algebra.
Resolution of Vector into rectangular components
(1) Equal vectors: having equal magnitudes and same
R  Rx  R y , R  ˆi R x  ˆjR y , R x  R cos  & R y  R sin
direction.
(2) Parallel vector: having same direction & one vector R  R x ˆi  R y ˆj  R z kˆ
is scalar (positive) non-zero multiple of another cos 2   cos 2   cos 2   1
vector.
Scalar Product of Two Vectors
(3) Anti-parallel vectors: having opposite direction &
one vector is scalar non-zero negative multiple of (i) A . B  AB cos 
another vector. (ii) A . B  B . A
(4) Collinear vectors: parallel or anti-parallel vectors. (iii) A . (B  C)  A . B  A . C
(5) Zero vector (0 ) : having zero magnitude and arbitrary
 A.B 
direction (not known to us). When we multiply a (iv)   cos 1  
 AB 
vector with 0 the product becomes a null vector. The
resultant of two vectors of unequal magnitude can (v)   90 o ( A . B)min  0
never be a null vector. (vi) ( A)2  A . A  AA cos   A 2
(6) Unit vector : vector divided by its magnitude (Unit
vector has no dimensions) (vii) nˆ . nˆ  ˆi .ˆi  ˆj . ˆj  kˆ . kˆ  1

ˆ  A  A AA
ˆ gives
(viii) ˆi . ˆj  ˆj . kˆ  kˆ . ˆi  1  1 cos 90   0
A direction
A (ix) A. B (iAx  jAy  k Az ).(iBx  jBy  kBz )  [ A x B x  Ay By  A Z Bz ]
(7) Orthogonal unit vectors: ˆi , ˆj and k̂ Vector Product
(8) Polar vectors: having starting point or point of (i) C  A  B  AB sin nˆ
application Example displacement and force etc.
(ii) A  B  B  A
(9) Axial Vectors: These represent rotational effects and
are always along the axis of rotation. (iii) A  (B  C )  A  B  A  C
(10) Coplanar vector : Three (or more) vectors are called (iv)   90 o [ A  B]max  AB nˆ
coplanar vector if they lie in the same plane. Two (v) A  A  AA sin 0 o nˆ  0
(free) vectors are always coplanar.
Triangle Law of Vector Addition If two non zero (vi) ˆi  ˆi  ˆj  ˆj  kˆ  kˆ  0
vectors are represented by the two sides of a triangle (vii) A B  ˆi ( Ay Bz  Az By )  ˆj( A z B x  A x B z )  kˆ ( A x B y  A y B x )
taken in same order then the resultant is given by the sin  sin  sin 
Lami's Theorem  
180 –
closing side of triangle in opposite order. a b c


R A 2  B 2  2 AB cos
B sin 
tan     180 – 
A  B cos 
Parallelogram Law of Vector Addition 180 – 
If two non-zero vectors are represented by the two
adjacent sides of a parallelogram then the resultant is
given by the diagonal of the parallelogram passing
through the point of intersection of the two vectors.
Polygon Law of Vector Addition A vector can have only two rectangular components in
If a number of non zero vectors are represented by the (n plane and only three rectangular components in space.
– 1) sides of an n-sided polygon then the resultant is A vector can have any number, even infinite components.
(minimum 2 components)
9
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
Following quantities are neither vectors nor scalars : examples of tensor are refractive index, stress, strain,
Relative density, density, viscosity, frequency, pressure, density etc.
stress, strain, modulus of elasticity, poisson’s ratio,  The magnitude of rectangular components of a vector
moment of inertia, specific heat, latent heat, spring is always less than the magnitude of the vector
     
constant loudness, resistance, conductance, reactance, | A  B | | A  B |
 If , then angle between A and B is
impedance, permittivity, dielectric constant,
90°.
permeability, susceptibility, refractive index, focal
 Resultant of two vectors will be maximum when  =
length, power of lens, Boltzman constant, Stefan’s
0° i.e. vectors are parallel.
constant, Gas constant, Gravitational constant, Rydberg
2 2
constant, Planck’s constant etc.  Rmax  P  Q  2 PQ cos 0  | P  Q |
 Division of vectors is not allowed as directions  Resultant of two vectors will be minimum when  =
cannot be divided. 180° i.e. vectors are anti-parallel.
 Multiplication of a vector with –1 reverses its Rmin  P 2  Q 2  2 PQ cos 180  | P  Q |
direction.
  ˆ ˆ ˆ
 If A  B , then A = B and Aˆ  Bˆ .  The vectors i  j  k is equally inclined to the
   coordinate axes at an angle of 54.74 degrees.
 If A  B  0 , then A = B but Aˆ   Bˆ . 
    
 Minimum number of collinear vectors whose  If A  B  C , then A . B  C  0 .
     
resultant can be zero is two. A. B C  0 A. B
 If , then and C are coplanar.
 Minimum number of coplaner vectors whose      
resultant is zero is three.  If angle between A and B is 45°, then A . B | A  B |
    
 Minimum number of non coplaner vectors whose A1  A2  A3  ......  An  0
 If and A1  A2  A3  ......  An
resultant is zero is four.
then the adjacent vector are inclined to each other at
 Three vectors not lying in a plane can never add up
angle 2 / n .
to give a null vector.   
 A physical quantity which has different values in  If A  B  C and A 2  B 2  C 2 , then the angle between
 
different directions is called a tensor. For example : A and B is 90°. Also A, B and C can have the
Moment of inertia has different values in different following values.
directions. Hence moment of inertia is a tensor. Other (i) A = 3, B = 4, C = 5 (ii) A = 5, B = 12, C = 13
(iii) A = 8, B = 15, C = 17.

10
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 MOTION IN TWO DIMENSION AND CIRCULAR MOTION
Projectile : Any object that is projected in to air or space 3. Max. height attained H  u sin 
2 2

such that it moves under the effect of gravity only is g 2

called projectile.  Height is max. at θ = 900 & Hmax. = u2/2g
The path followed by the projectile is called its trajectory.  At max. height
While studying the motion of projectiles some assumptions K.E. = ½ mu2cos2θ P.E. = ½ mu2sin2θ
are taken as Loss in K.E. = gain in P.E. (at any point)
(1) There is no air friction. Total Energy is conserved at any point = ½ mu2
(2) The magnitude as well as direction of acceleration If  =450 both K.E & P.E are equal at top.
due to gravity is constant at every point of motion of 4. Horizontal range R  u 2 sin 2  2u x u y
projectile. g g
(3) The effect due to rotation of earth and  Horizontal Range is max. at θ = 450 & Rmax. = u2/g
(4) curvature of the earth is negligible.  R1=R2 if + = 900 (For complementary angles)
How a projectile moves  At landing point K.E. = ½ mu2
The motion of projectile can be considered as combination Change in horizontal velocity = 0
of two independent perpendicular motions. Time is only Change in vertical velocity = 2 u sinθ
common physical quantity in two directions. 5. Velocity of the projectile at any point
(i) Projectile moves with uniform velocity along v x gt
horizontal direction. v  v 2x  v 2y  u 2  g 2 t 2 & tan   
vy u
(ii) It moves with constant acceleration ( acc. due to where θ is the angle with the horizontal direction.
gravity ‘g’ ) along vertical direction. 2
 gt  gt sin 
6. Displacement: r  u t 1     ;
2
  u u
 2u sin   gt 
  tan 1  
 2u cos  

7. Angular momentum at highest point:  m u cos  sin 

3 2

2g
Projectile Motion : Important points
 Range is same whether the angle of projection is
(i) θ and (90 – θ)
(ii) 450+ & 450 – 
(iii) θ with horizontal and θ with vertical direction
 For the same horizontal range
T1 : T2 = tanθ : 1 = sinθ : cosθ
H1 : H2 = tan2 θ : 1 = sin2θ : cos2θ
R  4 H1H2 = g
T1T2 (H1 ,T1 at θ & H2 ,T2 at 90–θ )
2

 R  4H cot  , If range is n times the max. height i.e.

R = nH, tanθ = 4/n
 For max. range height attained and time of flight are
gx 2  x H = u2/4g = Rmax/4, T = u/2g
1. Equation of trajectory y  x tan  2u 2 cos 2   x tan 1  
 R
 If velocity of projection is made n times then height
2. Time of flight T  2u sin   2u y attained and range become n2 and time of flight
g g
become n times
 Time of ascending = Time of descending =½ T Horizontal Projectile O
u X

 2u sin  (Refer second diagram)

t1  t 2  T 1 g x2
g y y
2 u2 P(x, y)
g t1 t 2 x
 h
2
Y

11
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
  gt 
2 (5) If two projectiles are fired, always solve problem in
Displacement : r  ut 1    and   tan 1  gt  relative motion. In relative motion, relative
 2u   2u 
acceleration, a vertical axis= 0.
Instantaneous velocity: v  u 2  gt 2
2
 gt  ;
u 1    Circular Motion
u 
(1) Two dimensional non-uniform motion.
 gt 
  tan 1   (2) Case of variable velocity and variable
u 
acceleration. B
2h
Time of flight : T  (3) Displacement:  r  2r sin

g  A
2 O

Horizontal range: R  u
2h (4) Distance : d = length of the arc AB =
g r
Projectile Motion on An Inclined Plane (5) Angular displacement ( ): s    r
Time of flight : We know for oblique projectile motion Angular displacement is a axial vector quantity.
2u sin  2u  2u sin 
T or we can say T  ; T (6) Angular velocity () : Angular velocity of an object
g a g cos 
Y
in circular motion is defined as the time rate of
change of its angular displacement.
angle traced  d 
P X =  Lt 
time taken  t  0 t dt
ax=–g sin  t =T
 ay= g cos 
(7) v    r

O t =0
(8) Time period (T) : In circular motion, the time period
U y2 is defined as the time taken by the object to complete
Maximum height: H 
2a y one revolution on its circular path.
(9) Frequency (n) : number of revolutions completed by
 Maximum height on an inclined plane H  u sin 
2 2

2 g cos 
the object on its circular path in a unit time.
2
2
sin  cos(   )   2n
Horizontal range: R  2u T
2
g cos 
(10) Angular acceleration () : the time rate of change
 
(i) Maximum range occurs when     d  d 2
4 2 of its angular velocity.   Lt  
t  0 t dt dt 2
(ii) The maximum range along the inclined plane when
the projectile is thrown upwards is given by (11) a    r
u2 (12) For uniform circular motion since  is constant so
R max  d
g (1  sin  )  0
dt
(iii) The maximum range along the inclined plane when
(13) For non-uniform circular motion   0
the projectile is thrown downwards is given by
(14) Centripetal Acceleration
u2
R max  (1) Acceleration acting on the object
g (1  sin  )
undergoing uniform circular v
General approach in solving projectile problems
motion is called centripetal ac
(1) Select co-ordinate axes cleverly such that you can
acceleration.
exploit constraints/ conditions given in question. (2) It always acts on the object along
(2) Write down components of initial velocity, distances the radius towards the center of the circular path.
and acceleration along pre-decided axes.
(3) Magnitude of centripetal acceleration,
(3) Use equations of kinematics 2 2
v 4
2
v x  u x  a xt ; S x  u x t  1 / 2 a xt 2 ; v x  u x  2a x s x
2 a   2 r  4 2 n 2 r  2 r
r T
2 2
v y  u y  a y t; S y  u y t  1 / 2 a y t 2 ; v y  u y  2a y s y
(15) Centripetal force: Force acting perpendicular to
(4) Combine equations along x-axis and y-axis using direction of motion is responsible for changing
common physical quantity i.e. time (t). direction of the particle. This force is called
centripetal force. In circular motion it always acts
towards centre of circular path.
12
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 mv 2 m 4 2 r lowest point
F  m  2 r  m 4 2 n 2 r 
r T2 u A  5 gl Tension in the string will not be zero at
Work done by centripetal force is always zero. any of the point and body will continue
W = F. S = F  S cos = FS cos 90o = 0 the circular motion.
(16) Centrifugal force: It is an imaginary force due to u A  5 gl , Tension at highest point C will be zero
incorporated effects of inertia. Centrifugal force is a and body will just complete the circle.
fictitious force which has significance only in a 2 gl  u A  5 gl Particle will not follow circular
rotating frame of reference. Numerically it is equal to motion. Tension in string become zero
centripetal force. It acts opposite to centripetal force somewhere between points B and C
i.e. away from centre direction along radius vector. whereas velocity remain positive.
(17) Safe limit on level circular road: Friction will Particle leaves circular path and follow
provide centripetal force. v safe  rg parabolic trajectory.
u A  2 gl Both velocity and tension in the string
(18) Bending of A Cyclist
becomes zero at B and particle will
A cyclist provides himself the necessary centripetal
oscillate along semi-circular path.
force by leaning inward on a horizontal track, while
u A  2 gl velocity of particle becomes zero
v2 
going round a curve.   tan 1  

between A and B but tension will not
 rg  be zero and the particle will oscillate
(19) Banking of A Road: Maximum safe speed about the point A.
rg(  tan  ) (5) Constraint equation used: Body will leave
= v
1   tan 
contact with sphere, when Normal reaction is
(20) Non-Uniform Circular Motion zero. In that case weight or component of weight
    
a    r    will provide necessary centripetal force.
   at
a  at  ac a (6) If point object is attached with massless rod, then
Total acc. = Tangential acc.  minimum speed required at lowest point is 4 gr
ac P
+ centripetal acc. O instead of 5rg
| a t | |   r |  r sin 90   r.
o
(7) For circular motion we have –
    
| a c | |   |    sin 90 o =     ( r)   2
r  /r 2 (i) r  v
 
(21) Equations of Circular Motion (ii) r antiparallel to a c
 
 2  1   t 1 (iii) ac  v
  1t   t2
2  
(iv) ac  at
2 2
 2  1  2     
 n  1  (2n  1)   
2 (v)  ,  ,  are perpendicular to r , ac , at , v
  
(22) Motion in vertical circle: General approach (vi) r , ac , at and v lie in the same plane
(1) Always use law of conservation of energy
v  u 2  2 gh  u 2  2 gl(1  cos  ) C

[As h = l – l cos = l
(1 – cos)] D
l O B
(2) Apply Newton’s  v
h P
second law of motion.
u
mv 2 A
T  mg cos  
l
m 2
(3) T  [u  gl(2  3 cos  )]
l
(4) Conditions for vertical motion:
Velocity at Condition

13
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 HOME ASSIGNMENT
1. A motor boat covers a given distance in 6hrs moving 10. The motion of a body falling from rest in a resisting
down stream of a river. It covers the same distance in medium is described by the equation dv/dt = a –bv,
10hrs moving upstream. What time would it take to where a and b are constants. The velocity at time t is:
cover the same distance in still water? (A) a (1–b2t) (B) (1–e-bt)
(A) 5.5 hrs (B) 6.5 hrs (C) 7.5 hrs (D)8.5 hrs (C) abe-t (D) ab2(1–t)
2. A bullet loses 1/10th of its velocity in passing through 11. A ball is dropped vertically from a height d above the
a plank. The no. of planks needed to stop the bullet is: ground. It hits the ground and bounces up vertically
(A) 3 (B) 6 (C) 9 (D) 11 to a height (d/2). Neglecting air resistance, its
3. Wind is blowing west to east along two parallel velocity V varies with the height h above the ground
tracks. Two trains moving with same speed in as :
opposite directions have the stream track of one
double the other. The speed of each train is :
(A) equal to that of wind
(B) double to that of wind
(C) three times to that of wind (A) (B)
(D) half times to that of wind
4. A stick 1m in length is moving at 2.7 x 108 m/s. What
is the apparent length of slick?
(A) 10m (B) 0.22m (C) 0.44m (D) 2.4m
5. A ball is dropped on to the floor from a height of (C) (D)
10m. It rebounds to a height of 2.5m. If the ball is in 12. A ball is thrown upwards. Its height varies with time
contact with the floor for 0.01s, what is the average as shown. If the acceleration due to gravity is 7.5
acceleration during contact? m/s2, then the height h is :
(A) 1400 m/s2 (B) 2100 m/s2
2
(C) 700 m/s (D) 2800 m/s2
6. A juggler keeps n balls going with one hand, so that
at any instant, (n–1) balls are in air and one ball in the
hand. If each ball rises to a height of x meters, the
time for which each ball stays in the hand is : (A) 10m (B) 15m
(C) 20m (D) 25m
(A) (B)
13. Acceleration displacement graph of a particle moving
in a straight line is shown. The initial velocity of the
(C) (D)
particle is zero. The v –s graph of particle is
2
7. A bus starts moving with acceleration 2m/s . A
cyclist 96m behind starts simultaneously towards the
bus at 20m/s. After what time will the bus overtake
the cyclist?
(A) 10s (B) 12s (C) 14s (D) 16s
8. A driver sees red light ahead and stops his car (A) (B)
moving at 36km/hr in 10m. If moving at 72km/hr, the
stopping distance is 30m. Assuming same
deceleration and reaction time, the stopping distance
(C) (D)
with speed 54km/hr is :
14. A lion chases a deer 30m ahead of it and gains 3m in
(A) 20m (B) 40m (C) 18.75 m (D)15m
5s after the chase started. After 10s, the distance
9. A bees flies in a line from point A to another point B
between them is :
in 4s with a velocity of (t–2) m/s. The distance
(A) 16m (B) 17m
between A and B in meters is :
(C) 18 m (D) 9
(A) 2 (B) 4 (C) 6 (D) 8
14
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
15. A staircase contains three steps each 10cm high and 20cm must a particle be projected in the plane of square from A
wide. What should be the minimum horizontal velocity with speed v so that it strikes the point D :
(appr.) of a ball rolling off the uppermost plane so as to hit (A) sin-1(u/v) (B) cos-1(u/v)
-1
directly the lowest plane (C) sin (v/u) (D) cos-1(u/v)
(A) 1m/s (B) 2m/s 26. A particle is projected with a certain velocity at an angle α
(C) 3m/s (D) 4m/s above the horizontal from the foot of an inclined plane of
16. Two bodies are thrown horizontally from a point with inclination 300. If the particle strikes the plane normally
velocities of 3 ms–1 and 4 ms–1 in the opposite direction. then α is equal to :
What is the horizontal separation between two bodies (A) 300+ tan-1 (B) 450
√
when their velocities become perpendicular? √
17. A body is projected with velocity 19.6𝚤̂ + 10𝚥̂. Its (C) 600 (D) 300 + tan-1
horizontal range is : 27. A number if particles are projected from a given point with
(A) 20m (B) 40m equal speed in different directions in the same vertical
(C) 60m (D) 80m plane. At any point, they will lie on :
18. A particle is projected with a velocity v, so that its range (A) parabola (B) circle
on a horizontal plane is twice the greatest height attained. (C) hyperbola (D) rectangle
If g is acceleration due to gravity, then its range is : 28. A particle moves along a path ABCD as shown in the
(A) 4v2/5g (B) 4g/5v2 figure. Then, the magnitude of net displacement of the
3
(C) 4v /5g 2
(D) 4v/5g2 particle from position A to D is
19. A projectile is fired from level ground at an angle θ above
the horizontal. The elevation angle φ of the highest point as
seen from the launch point is related to θ by the relation
(A) tanφ = ¼ tanθ (B) tanφ = tanθ
(C) tanφ = ½ tanθ (D) tanφ = 2 tanθ
20. A ball is projected from the ground at an angle θ with the
horizontal. After 1 sec. it is moving at an angle 450 with
the horizontal and after 2 seconds it is moving (A) 10m (B) 5 2m
horizontally. What is the velocity of projection of the ball? (C) 9m (D) 7 2 m
(A) 10√3 m/s (B) 20√3 m/s 29. A car starting from rest is accelerated at constant rate until
(C) 10√5 m/s (D) 20√2 m/s it attains a constant speed v. It is then retarted at a constant
21. A particle is given an initial velocity of 𝚤̂ + 2𝚥̂. The rate until it comes to rest. Considering that the car moves
Cartesian equation of its path is (g = 10m/s2) with constant speed for half of the time of total journey,
(A) y = 2x –5x2 (B) y = x –5x2 the average speed of the car for the journey is
(C) 4y = 2x –5x 2
(D) y = 2x –25x2 v 3v
(A) (B)
22. A projectile of mass 2kg has velocities 3m/s and 4m/s at 4 4
two points during its flight in the uniform gravitational 3v
field of earth. If these two velocities are perpendicular to (C) (D) Data insufficient
4
each other, then the minimum K.E., of particle during its 30. Which one of the following situations is not possible?
flight is (tan370 = ¾) (A) A particle having zero velocity and non-zero
(A) 6.32 J (B) 8.40 J acceleration.
(C) 16.32 J (D) 5.76 J (B) A particle having velocity in positive x-direction
23. A ball is projected at an angle of 450 from a point lying 2m and acceleration along in negative x-direction.
from the foot of a wall. It just touches the top of the wall (C) A particle having velocity in positive x-direction
and falls on the ground 4m from it. The height of wall is : and acceleration along in positive z-direction.
(D) A particle having variable velocity, constant
(A) ¾ m (B) 4/3 m
speed and constant acceleration.
(C) 2/3 m (D) 1/3 m
31. An object starts from rest at x = 0, when t = 0. The object
24. Stones are fired at the same instant from the top and
moves in the x-direction with positive velocity after t = 0.
bottom of a vertical cliff at an angle α and β and they strike
The instantaneous velocity and average velocity are related
an object simultaneously at the same point. If the
by
horizontal distance of the object from the cliff is l and h is
dx x dx x dx x
the height of the cliff, then (A)  (B)  (C) 
(A) h = l(cotβ –cotα) (B) h = l(cosβ –cosα) dt t dt t dt t
(C) h = l(tanβ –tanα) (D) h = l(sinβ –sinα) dx x
(D) can be smaller than, greater than or equal to
25. A smooth square platform ABCD is moving towards right dt t
with a uniform speed u. At what angle θ with horizontal
15
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
32. A student noticing that an ant is crawling along a metre The most suitable acceleration-displacement graph will be
stick and decided to record the ant’s position after every 5s
interval, as ant is changing its direction of motion after
every 5s. The student makes a table as shown in figure.
From the table, determine the distance travelled by ant in 0
(A) (B)
to 20s interval.
Time (s) Position of ant (cm)
0.0 49.6
5.0 39.2
10.0 42.5 (C) (D)
15.0 41.0 38. The graph given below is a plot of position vs time. For
20.0 65.7 which of the labelled region is the velocity positive and the
(A) 16.1 cm (B) 39.9 cm acceleration negative
(C) 26.5 cm (D) 65.7 cm
33. Statement-I: The average velocity of a moving particle
may be zero for some time interval, although the average
velocity for a shorter interval included in the first interval
is not zero.
Statement-II: Displacement of a moving particle can
decrease as time passes.
(A) a (B) b
(A) Statement-I is true, Statement-II is true; Statement-II
(C) c (D) d
is a correct explanation for Statement-I
39. Each of the three graphs represents acceleration vs time for
(B) Statement-I is true, Statement-II is true; Statement-II
an object that already has a positive velocity at time t1.
is a not a correct explanation for Statement-I
Which graph/graphs show an object whose speed is
(C) Statement-I is true; statement–II is false
increasing for the entire time interval between t1 and t2?
(D) Statement-I is false; statement–II is true.
34. An object moves with constant acceleration a. Which of
the following expressions are also constant?
 vr 
r r d r 
dv dv d  v2   v



(A) (B) (C) (D) (A) Graph I only (B) Graph I and II
dt dt dt dt (C) Graphs I and III (D) Graphs I, II and III
35. A particle is moving along a straight line with acceleration 40. A body, initially at rest, starts moving along x-axis in such
‘a’= 3t – 6, where a is in m/s2 and ‘t’ is in second. Determine a way that its acceleration vs displacement plot is as shown
the instant at which the velocity of particle is same as that at in the figure. The maximum velocity of the particle is
the initial instant.
(A) 1s (B) 2s
(C) 3s (D) 4s
36. The velocity-displacement graph of a particle moving
along a straight line is as shown in figure. Find the velocity
of particle as a function of time. (A) 1 m/s (B) 6 m/s
(C) 2 m/s (D) None of these
41. Position-time graph is shown which is a semicircle from t
= 2s to t = 8s. Find tine t at which the instantaneous
velocity is equal to average velocity over first t seconds.

(A) et (B) 2et

t
(C) (e – 1) (D) e–t
37. The velocity-displacement graph of a particle moving
along a straight line is shown here.
(A) 4.8s (B) 3.2s
(C) 2.4s (D) 5s

16
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
42. A body starting from rest moves along a straight line with 46. Speed-time graph of a particle moving on an unknown path
constant acceleration. The variation of speed v with is as shown in figure. If particle never returns to its initial
distance s is position, then which of the following is/are correct(s)?

(A) (B)
(A) Magnitude of the acceleration of particle is maximum
between 4s to 5s.
(B) Acceleration of particle is zero between 2s to 4s.
(C) Magnitude of acceleration of particle may be
(C) (D)
43. The velocity-time graph of a body falling from rest under maximum between 2s to 4s.
gravity and rebounding from a solid surface is represented (D) Displacement of particle in 5s is 35m.
by which of the following graphs. 47. The velocity-time graph for the vertical component of the
velocity of an object thrown upwards and falling onto the
roof of a building is shown in figure. The height of the
building is

(A) (B)

(C) (D) (A) 10 m (B) 40 m

44. A body is thrown vertically upwards with such a velocity (C) 45 m (D) 50 m
that it reaches a maximum height of h. Simultaneously 48. A shell is fired from a gun at an angle to the horizontal
another body B is dropped from height h. It strikes the Graphs are drawn for its horizontal component of velocity
ground and doesn’t rebound. The velocity of A relative to vx, and its vertical component of velocity vy. The correct
B vs time graph is best represented by (upward direction is option is
positive).

(A)

(A) (B)

(B)

(C) (D)
45. From the velocity-time graph of a particle moving in straight line, (C)
decide which of the following is incorrect statement?

(D)

49. A balloon is ascending vertically with an acceleration of 1

(A) The particle crosses its initial position
ms–2. Two stones are dropped from it at an interval of 2s.
(B) The speed of the particle increases continuously
Find the distance between them 1.5s after the second stone
(C) The force on the particle is constant
is released. (g = 10ms–2)
(D) The acceleration of the particle is constant
(A) 55m (B) 45m
(C) 60m (D) 40m

17
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
50. Initial velocity and acceleration of two particles are as 55. Rain falls vertically down with a velocity 20 km/h and a
shown in figure.
man moves horizontally with a velocity 20 3 km/h
holding an umbrella. Find angle at which umbrella should
be held with vertical to protect himself from rain.
(A) 30 (B) 60 (C) 45 (D) 75
56. Rain pouring down at an angle  with the vertical has a
Assuming the shown direction as the positive, vBA versus speed of 10 m/s. A girl runs against the rain with a speed 8
time graph is as m/s and sees that rain makes an angle  with the vertical,
then relation between  and  is
4  5sin  4  5sin 
(A) tan   (B) tan  
4cos  5cos 
4  5cos  4  5cos 
(C) tan   (D) tan  
(A) (B) 4sin  5sin 
57. A thief on a motorcycle moving with a constant velocity 40
m/s crosses a stationary police jeep. At the instant, thief
crosses the police jeep, police jeep starts chasing him with a
constant acceleration of 2 m/s2. Find the time taken by police
jeep to catch the thief.
(C) (D) (A) 20s (B) 30s (C) 40s (D) 50s
51. Two ships P and Q are 10 km apart on a line running south 58. A dog is running towards a boy at rest with a constant speed
to north. Ship P is farther north and is streaming west at 20 10 m/s. When the dog is at a distance 60 m from the boy, he
km h–1 and ship Q is streaming north at 20 km h–1. What is starts running along a straight line with a constant acceleration
their distance of closest approach, and after what time are 1 m/s2. The dog will be able to bite the boy at a distance of
they closest?
(A) 3 2 km, 10 min (B) 5 2 km, 10 min
(C) 5 2 km, 50 min (D) None of these
52. A person in a stationary vehicle on a road has to hold his (A) 20m from starting point of boy
umbrella and drives the vehicle at 20 ms–1. He finds that (B) 30m from starting point of boy
rain drips are falling vertically on him. Find the speed of (C) 40m from starting point of boy
the rain drops with respect to (D) the dog can never bite the boy in this situation
(i) the road, and (ii) the moving vehicle 59. Rain is falling with a speed of 2 km/h and wind is blowing
40 40 40 20 horizontally at a speed of 3 km/h. To a boy moving on a
(A) ms 1 , ms 1 (B) ms 1 , ms 1 horizontal road, rain appears to fall vertically, then find the
3 3 3 3
speed of the boy.
20 40 20 20
(C) ms 1 , ms 1 (D) ms 1 , ms 1 (A) 2 kmh–1 (B) 3 kmh–1
3 3 3 3 (C) 4 kmh –1
(D) 5 kmh–1
53. The Telugu Desham Party has to start its procession in an 60. In the above question, find the speed of rain as observed by
area in Hyderabad where wind is blowing at a speed 20 km the boy.
h–1 and party flags with the symbols of a cycle, on the (A) 2 kmh–1 (B) 3 kmh–1
vehicles are fluttering along the north-east direction. If the (C) 4 kmh –1
(D) 5 kmh–1
procession starts with a speed of 14.14 km h–1 towards 61. A man is running to catch a bus standing at the bust stop
north, find the direction of flags on the vehicles. with a uniform speed of 4 m/s. When he is 15 m behind the
(A) 30 (B) 45 (C) 60 (D) 75 bus, bus starts with a uniform acceleration 0.5 m/s2. In how
54. Two particles are moving in the directions shown. Find the much time, the man catch the bus?
minimum separation between them, initial separation is (A) 4s (B) 6s (C) 10s
10m. (D) He cannot catch the bus
62. To a man walking with a speed of 2 km/h, rain appears to
fall vertically. If he moves with a speed of 4 km/h in same
direction, rain appears to fall at 30o with the vertical. The
actinal speed of rainfall is
(A) 2 km/h (B) 4 km/h
(C) 2 3 km/h (D) 6 km/h
(A) 2m (B) 4m
(C) 6m (D) 8m
18
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
63. Positions of two particles A and B are varying with time 71. An object is moving with uniform velocity of 8ms–1. When
according to the relations the object just crossed another object, the second one starts
x A   2t 2  4t  50  m and xB   t 2  6t  10  m and moves with uniform acceleration of 4 ms–2. The time
after which two objects meet, will be
The, minimum separation between A and B is (A) 8s (B) 4s (C) 2s (D) 3s
(A) 5m (B) 10m 72. Two particles move in the same straight line starting at the
(C) 15m (D) zero same moment from the same point in it. The first moves
64. A body thrown vertically up from the ground passes the with constant velocity u and the second with constant
height of 10.2 m twice in an interval of 10s. Its initial acceleration a. During the time elapses before the second
velocity is (Take g = 10ms–2) catches the first greatest distance between the particles is
(A) 48 ms–1 (B) 52 ms–1
(C) 63 ms –1
(D) 36 ms–1 u2 u a
(A) (B) (C) (D) 2au
65. Two bodies A and B start from rest and move for equal time 2a 2a u2
on a straight line. Body A has an accelerations of 2 ms–2 for 73. A ball is thrown vertically upward with a speed u. It
the first half of the total time and of 4 ms–2 for the second half. reaches a point B at a height h (lower than maximum
The body B has acceleration 4 ms–2 for the first half and 2 ms– height) after time t1. It returns to the ground after time t2
2 from the instant, it was at B during the upward journey.
for the second half. Which particle has covered larger
distance? Then t1t2 is equal to
(A) A (B) B h 2h
(C) neither A nor B (D) None of the above (A) (B)
66. A particle starts with an initial velocity of 10ms–1 and is
2g g
moving along a straight line with constant acceleration. When h 2 h
(C) (D) .
velocity of the particle is 50 ms–1, the acceleration is reversed g 3 g
in direction. The velocity of the particle when it again reached 74. A body released from the top of a tower falls through half
the starting point is the height of tower in 3s. It will reach the ground nearly
(A) 65 ms–1 (B) 45 ms–1 (A) 3.8 s (B) 5.25 s (C) 4.24 s (D) 7.21 s
–1
(C) 85 ms (D) 70 ms–1 75. Two balls of equal masses are thrown upwards along the
67. Two particles start simultaneously from the same point and same vertical direction at an interval of 2s, with the same
move along two straight lines, one with uniform velocity v initial velocity of 39.2 ms–1. Then, the balls collide at a
and other with a uniform acceleration a. If  is the angle height of
between the lines of motion of two particles, then the least (A) 73.5 m (B) 54.4 m
value of relative velocity will be at time given by (C) 83.5 m (D) 62.54 m
v v 1
(A) tan  (B) sin  76. A body covers first rd part of its journey with a
a a 3
v v 1
(C) cos  (D) velocity of 2 m/s, next rd part with a velocity of 3 m/s
a a 3
68. A ball A is thrown vertically upward with speed u. At the and remaining part of the journey with a velocity of 6 m/s.
same instant another ball B is released at height h. At time The average velocity of the body will be
t, the speed of A relative to B is 11 8 4
(A) u 2  gt (B) u 2  2 gh (A) 3 m/s (B) m/ s (C) m/s (D) m/ s
3 3 3
(D) u  gt
2 77. A body is released from the top of a tower of height h
(C) u
meter. It takes T second to reach the ground. Where is the
69. When a ball is thrown up vertically with velocity v0, it
reaches a maximum height h. If one wishes to triple the T
ball at time t second?
maximum height, the ball should be thrown with velocity 2
(A) v0 (B) 2v0 h
(A) at m from the ground
1 4
(C) 3v0 (D) v0 h
3 (B) at m from the ground
70. A body travelling with uniform acceleration crosses two 2
points A and B with velocities 20 ms–1 and 30 3h
–1
ms respectively. The speed of the body at mid point of A (C) at m from the ground
and B is
4
(D) Can’t say anything
(A) 25.5 ms–1 (B) 20 ms–1
–1
(C) 18.5 ms (D) 21.6 ms–1

19
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 78. The velocity of particle moving along a straight line as a
function of time is given by, v = 3t2 – 2t + 4. If the particle
is at origin at t = 0 then mark the correct statement(s)
(A) At t = 0, velocity and acceleration are opposite to each
other.
1 Which curve best represents the position of the bolt as a
(B) for 0t  s the particle is slowing down.
3 function of time?
(C) The position of particle at t = 1 s is 4 m. (A) A (B) D
(D) All of the above. (C) C (D) D
79. A particle starts from rest and moves with an acceleration 85. A body with zero initial velocity moves down an inclined
of a = [4 + | t – 3|] m/s2 where t is in second. The velocity plane from a height h and then ascends along the same plane
of the particle at t = 4 s is with an initial velocity, such that it stops at the same height h.
(A) 16.5 m/s (B) 21 m/s Considering friction to be present, in which case the time of
(C) 12.5 m/s (D) 4.5 m/s motion of longer?
80. The velocity of a particle which moves in a straight line is (A) Ascent (B) Descent
decreasing at the rate of 8 m/s per meter of displacement at (C) Same in both (D) Information insufficient
an instant when the velocity is 20 m/s and the displacement 86. A car travelling at constant speed of 20 m/s overtakes
is 14 m. The acceleration of the particle at this instant is another can which is moving at constant acceleration of 2
(A) 160 m/s2, decreasing with time m/s2 and it is initially at rest. Assume the length of each car
(B) 160 m/s2, increasing with time to be 5 m. The total road distance used in overtaking is
(C) 160 m/s2, decreasing with displacement (A) 394.74 m (B) 15.26 m
(D) 160 m/s2, increasing with displacement (C) 200.00 m (D) 186.04 m
81. The velocity-displacement curve for an object moving along 87. A train is travelling down a straight track at 20 m/s when
a straight line is shown in the figure below. its engineer applies the brakes, resulting in an acceleration
of –1 m/s2 (constant).How far does the train travel during a
50 s time interval starting at the instant the brakes are
applied?
(A) 200 m (B) 250 m
(C) Zero (D) 400 m
88. A rod of length l leans by its upper end against a smooth
At which of the points marked, the object is speeding up?
vertical wall, while its other end leans against the floor.
(A) 1 (B) 2
(C) 1 and 3 (D) 1,2 and 3 The end that leans against the wall moves uniformly
82. A particle is moving along X-axis whose acceleration is downward. Then
given by a = 3x – 4, where x is the location of the particle.
4
At t = 0, the particle is at rest at x  . The distance
3
travelled by the particle in 5 s is
(A) Zero (B) ; 42m (A) the other end also moves uniformly
(C) Infinite (D) None of these (B) the speed of other end goes on decreasing
83. For three particles A, B and C moving along x-axis, (C) the speed of other end goes on increasing
x-t graph is as shown below. (D) the speed of other end first decreases and then
increases
89. The displacement of the particle as a function of time is
shown in the figure. It indicates

Mark out the correct relationships between their average

velocities between the points P and Q
(A) v av, A  v av, B  v av,C (B) vav , A  vav , B  vav,C (A) the velocity of the particle is constant throughout
(B) the particle starts with a certain velocity but the motion
(C) vav , A  vav , B  vav,C (D) vav, A  vav, B  vav,C
is retarded till it stops
84. An elevator is moving upwards with constant acceleration. (C) the acceleration of particle is constant throughout
The broken curve shows the position y of the ceiling of the
(D) the particle starts with constant velocity, gets
elevator as a function of time t. A bolt breaks loose and
accelerated and finally moves with constant velocity.
drops from the ceiling
20
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
90. The velocity –time graph of a linear motion is shown in the dx dy dx dy
adjoining figure. The distance from the origin after 8 (A)  0, 0 (B)  0, 0
dt dt dt dt
second is
dx dy dx dy
(C) x  0, y 0 (D) x  0, y 0
dt dt dt dt
96. Statement-I: For a particle moving along a straight line or
in a plane, the average velocity vector over a time interval
can be equal to instantaneous velocity vector at the end of
(A) 18 meters (B) 16 meters the interval, even if velocity of particle is not constant.
r r uur
(C) 8 meters (D) 6 meters r 2  r 1 dr
91. An object is moving with a uniform acceleration which is Statement-II: 
t2  t1 dt
parallel to its instantaneous direction of motion. The
displacement velocity graph of this motion is : (A) Statement-I is true, Statement-II is true;
Statement-II is a correct explanation for Statement-I
(B) Statement-I is true, Statement-II is true;
Statement-II is a not a correct explanation for Statement-I
(C) Statement-I is true; statement–II is false
(D) Statement-I is false; statement–II is true.
97. Find the magnitude of average acceleration of minute hand
(A) (B)

of clock (length = 20 cm) when it rotates an angle of .
2
(A) 3.3  10–7 ms–2 (B) 4.4  10–7 ms–2
(C) 5.5  10–7 ms–2 (D) 6.6  10–7 ms–2
98. Two swimmers leave point A on one bank of the river to
(C) (D) reach point B lying straight across on the other bank. The
92. Two persons A and B stand at a distance x away from each first swimmer reaches point B by swimming at an angle
other in an open field. Wind blows from A to B with a with the straight course. The second one swims at right
velocity w: (1) A beats a drum and sound travels from A to angles to the stream and then walks the distance that he has
B in t1 seconds. (2) B beats a drum and sound travels from been carried away by the stream to get to point B. What
B to A in t2 seconds. If the velocity of sound in still air is v was the velocity u of his walking if both the swimmers
then v is equal to reached the destination simultaneously? The stream
2x x 1 1  velocity V0 = 2km/h–1 and the velocity V of each swimmer
(A) (B)    with respect to water equals 2.5 km/h–1.
t1  t 2 2  t1 t 2  (A) 1 kmh–1 (B) 2 kmh–1
x 1 1  2x (C) 3 kmh–1 (D) 4 kmh–1
(C)    (D) 99. A boat moves relative to water with a velocity which is 2
2  t1 t 2  t1t 2 times less than the river flow velocity. At what angle to the
93. A particle moving along the x-axis has a position given by stream direction must the boat move to minimize drifting?
x=16t e-t meters where t is in seconds, then how far is the (A) 60 (B) 120
particle from the origin when it just stops momentarily? (Do (C) 90 (D) 150
not consider its stop at t = ∞) 100. A river is 20m wide. River speed is 3 ms–1. A boat starts
(A) e/16 metre (B) e x 16 metre
with velocity 2 2 ms–1, at angle 45o from the river current
(C) 16/e metre (D) 16 metre
(relative to river). Find the time taken by the boat to reach
94. A ship travels downstream from point A to point B in two
the opposite bank.
hours and upstream in three hours. Then the time that it
will take a log of wood to cover the distance from A to B
is:
(A) one hour (B) 5 hours
(C) 12 hours (D) 7 hours
95. An object is moving in the x-y plane with the position as a
r
function of time given by r  x  t  ˆi  y  t  ˆj . Point O is
at x = y = 0. The object is definitely, moving towards O, (A) 2s (B) 5s
when (C) 7s (D) 10s

21
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
101. In the above problem, how far from the point directly av02
opposite to the starting point does the boat reach the (C) (D) None of these
opposite bank?
2g 2
(A) 50m (B) 60m 108. At any particular instant the motion of two particles is as
(C) 40m (D) 10m shown in figure. Determine the velocity of approach at
102. A river is flowing with a steady velocity 5 km/h. A man shown instant?
can swim with a speed of 4 km/h in still water. If we wants
to reach exactly opposite point on the other bank, then in
which direction must he aim
(A) 30 (B) 60
(C) 120 (D) None of these
103. Three particles A, B and C are situated at the vertices of
equilateral triangle of side a. Each particle starts moving with
a constant speed v in such a way that particle A always moves (A) 5 m/s (B) 8 m/s
towards B, B always moves towards C and C always moves (C) 3 m/s (D) 12 m/s
towards A. After how much tome will the particles meet? 109. A ball is thrown downwards from the edge of a very high
a 2a cliff with an initial speed that is greater than terminal
(A) (B) speed. Mark the correct statement about its acceleration.
v 3v (A) It is always acting in the upward direction.
3a 3a (B) It is always acting in the downward direction.
(C) (D)
2v 4v (C) Initially, it is acting in upward direction and then
104. Two person in identical steamers exert the same paddling it becomes zero.
effort and hence maintain the same speed relative to the (D) Initially, it is acting in upward direction and then it
water. One person paddles directly upstream, whereas the attains a non-zero constant value in the downward
other moves directly downstream. Considering downstream direction.
as the positive direction, an observer on shore determines the 110. Two concurrent forces, each of magnitude 5N, act at an
velocities of the two steamers as –1.2 m/s and 2.9 m/s angle of 1200. The magnitude of their resultant is:
respectively, the speed of river relative to shore is (A) 5N (B) 10 N
(A) 2.55 m/s (B) 1.7 m/s (C) 15 N (D) 5√3 N
(C) 4.1 m/s (D) 0.85 m/s 111. The force (3𝚤̂ − 𝚥̂ + 𝑘 ) N displaces a body from (1,2,0) to
105. In above question, the speed of each steamer relative to (3,4,5). Coordinates are in metre. The work done is :
river is (A) 9 J (B) 18 J
(A) 2.55 m/s (B) 1.7 m/s (C) 11 J (D) 29 J
(C) 2.05 m/s (D) 4.1 m/s 112. In a watch, the average velocity is maximum for the tip of :
106. A boat which can move with a speed of 5 m/s relative to (A) the second’s hand (B) the hour’s hand
water crosses a river of width 480 m flowing with a (C) the minute’s hand (D) none of these
constant speed of 4 m/s. What is the time taken by the boat 113. If 𝐴⃗  𝐵⃗ = 𝐵⃗  𝐶⃗, then 𝐴⃗ + 𝐵⃗ + 𝐶⃗ equals :
to cross the river along the shortest path? (A) zero vector (B) 2𝐴⃗ + 𝐵⃗
(A) 80 s (B) 160 s
(C) 𝐴⃗ + 2𝐵⃗ (D) none of these
(C) 240 s (D) 320 s
114. A passenger in a train drops a ball from the window of a
107. A particle is projected in vertical upward direction with
train running at an acceleration ‘a’. A fellow passenger,
velocity v0, but due to horizontal wind blowing towards
observes the ball falling along :
right the particle experiences a horizontal acceleration of a0
(A) a straight line with an acceleration ‘g’
m/s2 (constant). The horizontal distance travelled by
particle in a time interval in which its velocity vector (B) a straight line with an acceleration 𝑔 + 𝑎
rotated by 900 is (C) a vertical line with an acceleration 𝑔 + 𝑎
(D) a vertical line with an acceleration 𝑔 − 𝑎
115. An aeroplane moves 400m towards the north, 300 m
towards the west and then 1200 m vertically upwards. Its
displacement from the initial position is:
(A) 1300 m (B) 1400 m
(C) 1500 m (D) 1600 m
av02 v02
(A) (B)
2g 2g

22
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
116. Two particles having position vectors 123. 12 forces, each equal to P, act on a body. If each

r1  (3iˆ  5 ˆj ) meters and force makes an angle of 300 with the next one, the
 resultant of all the forces is :
r2  (3iˆ  3 ˆj ) metres are moving with velocities
 (A) zero (B) 3P
v1  (4iˆ  3 ˆj ) m/s
 (C) 6 P (D) 12 P
v2  (aiˆ  7 ˆj) m/s 124. P, Q and R are three coplanar forces acting at a
if they collide after some time, then the value of a is point and are in equilibrium. Given P = 1.9318
(A) 2 (B) 4
kgwt, Sinθ1 = 0.9659, the value of R is (in kgwt)
(C) 6 (D) 8
117. Two vectors 𝐴 and 𝐵 lie in a plane and another vector 𝐶⃗
⃗ ⃗
lies outside this plane. The resultant of these three vectors :
(A) can be zero
(B) can never of zero
(C) lies in the plane containing 𝐴⃗ + 𝐵⃗
(D) lies in the plane containing 𝐴⃗ + 𝐶⃗
118. A particle is moving westwards with a velocity of 12 m/s. (A) 0.9659 (B) 2
In 10s, the velocity changes to 5 m/s northwards. The (C) 1 (D) ½
average acceleration in this time is : 125. Two particles A and B are connected by a rigid rod
(A) zero
(B) 1.3 m/s2 towards N –W AB. The rod slides along perpendicular rails as
(C) 1.3 m/s2 towards N–E shown. The velocity of A to the left is 10m/s. The
(D) ½ m/s2 towards N –S velocity of B when α = 300 is
119. The co –ordinates of a particle moving in a plane are given
by : x = a cos pt and y = b sin pt, where a and b are positive
constants of motion with appropriate dimensions. The path
of the particle is:
(A) straight line (B) circle
(C) ellipse (D) parabola
120. A body starts from rest from the origin with an
(A) 9.8 m/s (B) 10m/s
acceleration of 3m/s2 along the x –axis and 4m/s2
(C) 5.8 m/s (D) 17.3 m/s
along the y –axis. Its distance from the origin after
126. The resultant of 𝐴⃗ & 𝐵⃗ is perpendicular to 𝐴⃗. The
second will be :
angle between 𝐴⃗ & 𝐵⃗ is
(A) 56 m (B) 64 m (A) cos-1(A/B) (B) cos-1(–A/B)
(C) 80 m (D) 128 m (C) Sin-1(A/B) (D) sin-1(–A/B)
121. What are the direction cosines of iˆ  ˆj  kˆ ? 127. The angle between Δ𝐴⃗ & 𝐴⃗ so that |Δ𝐴⃗|= Δ|𝐴⃗| is :
(A) 1,1,1 (B) 2,2,2 (A) 00 (B) 300
1 1 1 1 1 1 (C) 600 (D) 900
(C) , , (D) , ,
2 2 2 2 3 3 3 128. A parallelogram is formed with side 𝑎⃗ and 𝑏⃗. Let
122. Assertion: if 𝐴⃗. 𝐵⃗ = 𝐵⃗. 𝐶⃗ then 𝐴⃗ may not always 𝑑 ⃗ and 𝑑 ⃗ be the diagonals of the parallelogram.
Then a2+b2 = ?
be equal to 𝐶⃗.
Reason: The dot product of two vectors involves (A) d12+d22 (B) d12–d22
cosine of the angle between the two vectors. (C) (d12+d22)/2 (D) (d12–d22)/2
129. The coordinates of points P and Q are (3,2,–1) and
(A) if both assertion and reason are true and the
reason is correct explanation of the assertion (4,–3,2). A force 𝐹⃗ of magnitude 16N acts along
(B) If both assertion and reason are true, but reason the line PQ from P to Q. The unit vector along PQ
is not the correct explanation of the assertion would be :
(C) If assertion is true, but the reason is false (A) 5𝚤̂ − 5𝚥̂ + 3𝑘 (B) 𝚤̂ − 𝚥̂ + 𝑘
√ √ √
(D) If assertion is false, but the reason is true
(C) 𝚤̂ + 𝚥̂ + 𝑘 (D) 𝚤̂ − 𝚥̂ + 𝑘
√ √ √ √ √ √

23
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
130. A frictionless wire is fixed between A and B inside (A) 1200 (B) 600
a sphere of radius R. A small ball slips along the (C) 1800 (D) 900
wire. The time taken by the ball to slip from A →B 138. Two forces P and Q acting at a point are such that
will be : if 𝑃⃗ is reversed, the direction of resultant is turned
through 900, then
(A) P = Q
(B) P = 2Q
(C) P = Q/2
(D) no relation between P and Q
139. The vector of magnitude a is rotated through angle
Q. The magnitude of change in vector is :
(A) 2a sin(θ/2) (B) 2a cos(θ/2)
√ √ (C) 2a sin θ (D) 2a cos θ
(A) (B)
√ 140. If 𝚤̂ denotes unit vector for incident light ray, 𝑟̂ for
refracted ray in a medium of refractive index μ and
(C) 2 (D)
𝑛 unit vector along normal and directed towards
131. A body swims in a straight line to reach the other side incident medium, law of refraction is :
of a river. His velocity is 5m/s and the angle of swim (A) 𝚤̂. 𝑛 = 𝜇(𝑟̂ . 𝑛) (B) 𝚤̂ × 𝑛 = 𝜇(𝑛 × 𝑟̂ )
is 300 where does he reach on the other bank? (C) 𝚤̂ × 𝑛 = 𝜇(𝑟̂ × 𝑛) (D) 𝜇(𝚤̂. 𝑛) = 𝑟̂ × 𝑛
(A) 106m from B downstream 141. If 𝐴⃗ = 𝚤̂ + 𝚥̂ + 𝑘 , 𝐵⃗ = 2𝚤̂ + 𝚥̂ + 𝑘 , 𝐶⃗ = −𝚤̂ + 𝚥̂ −
(B) 186 m from B downstream
2𝑘 , then volume of the parallel pipe formed by
(C) 186 m from B upstream
these vectors is :
(D) 106 m from B upstream
(A) 1 unit (B) 2 units
132. The resultant of two vectors 𝑎⃗ and 𝑏⃗ is (C) 3 units (D) 4 units
perpendicular to 𝑎⃗ and its magnitude is half of the
142. If 𝑎⃗ & 𝑏⃗ are the intersecting force diagonals of a
magnitude of 𝑏⃗. The angle between 𝑎⃗ and 𝑏⃗ is cube of side x in a plane XOY and YOZ
(A) 300 (B) 600 respectively with sides of cube as axes, the
(C) 1200 (D) 1500
component of vector 𝑟⃗ = 𝑎⃗ × 𝑏⃗ are
133. A vector makes angles 600 and 600 with x and y
(A) x, –x, x (B) –x2, –x2, x2
axis. The angle it makes with z –axis is
(C) x2, –x2, x2 (D) x, x2, –x
(A) 600 (B) 450
143. If 𝑃⃗ + 𝑄⃗ + 𝑅⃗ = 0⃗ and out of these, two vectors are
(C) 300 (D) 00
equal in magnitude and third vector has magnitude √2
134. Given 𝐴⃗ + 𝐵⃗ = 𝑅⃗ & 𝐴⃗ + 2𝐵⃗ is perpendicular to 𝐴⃗. times that of any of these two vectors, then angles
Then among these vectors are :
(A) 2B = R (B) B = 2R (A) 450, 750, 750 (B) 450, 900, 1350
2 2
(C) B = R (D) B = 2R 0 0
(C) 90 , 135 , 180 0
(D) 900, 1350, 1350
 
135. Component of 3𝚤̂ + 4𝚥̂ perpendicular to 𝚤̂ + 𝚥̂ and in 144. If A and A are two non –linear unit vectors and if |
1 2
the same plane as 3𝚤̂ + 4𝚥̂ is :      
A1  A2 | =√3, then the value of ( A1  A2 ).(2 A1  A2 ) is
(A) ½ (𝚥̂ − 𝚤̂) (B) (𝚥̂ − 𝚤̂)
(A) 1 (B) ½
(C) (𝚥̂ − 𝚤̂) (D) (𝚥̂ − 𝚤̂) (C) 3/2 (D) 2

⃗ ⃗ 145. For motion in a plane with constant acceleration a ,
136. The projection of 𝐴 along 𝐵 is  
⃗ ⃗ ⃗ initial velocity v0 and final velocity v after a time ‘t’,
(A) 𝐴. 𝐵 (B) 𝐴. 𝐵
we have :
(C) 𝐵⃗. 𝐴 (D) 𝐴. 𝐵        
137. The resultant of two forces 3P and 2P is R. If the (A) v .(v  at )  v0 (v0  at ) (B) v .v 0  a t 2
    
first force is doubled then resultant is also doubled. (C) v .v 0  a.v 0 t (D) v0 .v0  a.v0 t
The angle between the two forces is :
24
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
146. The position vectors of four points A, B, C and D are (A) stone will hit the monkey
  (B) stone will pass above the monkey
a  2iˆ  3 ˆj  4 kˆ , b  3iˆ  5 ˆj  7 kˆ ,
  (C) stone will pass below the monkey
c  iˆ  2 ˆj  3kˆ , d  3iˆ  6 ˆj  9 kˆ (D) stone may hit the monkey
  153. A ball is thrown straight upwards and returns to the
respectively. Then vector AB and CD are thrower’s hand after 3 s in the air. A second ball is thrown
(A) coplanar (B) collinear at an angle of 300 with the horizontal. At what speed must
(C) perpendicular (D) none of these be second ball be thrown so that it reaches the same height
   as the one thrown vertically?
147. Given: P  A  B and P = A+B. The angle between
  (A) 15 m/s (B) 30 m/s
A and B is (C) 7.5 m/s (D) 22.5 m/s
(A) 00 (B) 900 154. A particle A is at rest and particle B moves in a circle with
(C) 1800 (D) 2700 A at its centre. The particle A will appear
0
148. A plane is inclined at angle of 30 with horizontal. (A) at rest if seen from B
 (B) to move in straight line if seen from B
The component of a vector A  10kˆ perpendicular (C) to move in a circle if seen from B
to this plane is (here z –direction is vertically (D) to move in parabola if seen from B
upwards) 155. The velocity at the maximum height of projectile is half of
(A) 5√3 (B) 5 its initial velocity u. Its range on the horizontal plane is
(C) 5√2 (D) 10 2u 2 3u 2
149. Two vectors of equal magnitude have a resultant (A) (B)
3g 2g
equal to one and half times the magnitude of either
vector. The cosine of the angle between the two u2 u2
(C) (D)
vectors is : 3g 2g
(A) 0.125 (B) 0.250 156. A body is projected horizontally from the top of a tower
(C) –2.7 (D) 0.8 with initial velocity 25 m/s. It hits the ground at an angle of
150. Two projectiles are projected simultaneously as shown in 370 with vertical, the speed of the particle when it hits the
1 ground is
the following figure. If they collide after s find out
2 125 250
(A) m/s (B) m/ s
angle of projection of particle P i.e., . 3 3
155
(C) m/s
3
(D) Information is insufficient
157. A plane surface is inclined making an angle  with the
horizontal. From the bottom of this inclined plane, a bullet
is fired with velocity v. The maximum possible range of
(A) 30 (B) 45 the bullet on the inclined plane is
(C) 60 (D) 120 v2 v2
151. Two particles P and Q are projected simultaneously from (A) (B)
g g 1  sin  
ground as shown in the following figure.
v2 v2
(C) (D)
g 1  sin   g 1  cos  
158. If R and H represents the horizontal range and maximum
height respectively of an oblique projectile, then
R2
 2 H represents
After what time will they meet? 8H
(A) 2s (B) 3s (A) maximum horizontal range
(C) 4s (D) can never meet (B) time of flight
152. A boy throws a stone aiming towards a monkey sitting on a (C) velocity of projectile at highest point
tree. At the instant when stone is thrown, monkey starts (D) None of the above.
falling freely under gravity, then
25
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
159. A projectile is projected with a velocity u at an angle  to 165. In the motion of a projectile falling freely under gravity, its
the horizontal. It just crosses the two poles of height h after (A) momentum is conserved
time t1 and t2 respectively. The time of flight of the (B) total energy is conserved
projectile is (C) potential energy is conserved
(A) t1 + t2 (B) 2t1 (D) energy and momentum both are conserved
(C) 2t2 (D) 2t1 – t2 166. A glass marble projected horizontally from the top
160. In above question, the horizontal separation between two of a table falls at a distance x from the edge of the
poles is
table. If h is the height of the table, then the
(A) u cos   2t1 (B) u cos  (t1 + t2)
velocity of projection is :
(C) u cos  (t2 – t1) (D) None of these
161. A ball is projected from ground with a speed of 30 m/s. g g
(A) h (B) x
After 1 s the vertical component of velocity of projectile is 2x 2h
5 m/s upward. The angle of projection of the ball is (Take
(C) gxh (D) gx+h
g = 10 m/s2)
167. What is the value of linear velocity if
 
(A) (B) 𝜔⃗ = 3𝚤̂ − 4𝚥̂ + 𝑘 and 𝑟⃗ = 5𝚤̂ − 6𝚥̂ + 6𝑘 :
6 4
(A) 6𝚤̂ + 2𝚥̂ − 3𝑘 (B) 6𝚤̂ − 2𝚥̂ − 8𝑘

(C) (D) None of these (C) 4𝚤̂ − 13𝚥̂ + 6𝑘 (D) −18𝚤̂ − 13𝚥̂ + 2𝑘
3
162. A fixed motor fires a bomb at an angle of 530 above the 168. A particle is projected from a point (0.1) on Y-axis
horizontal with a muzzle velocity of 80 m/s. A tank is (assume +Y direction vertically upwards) aiming
advancing directly towards the mortar on level ground at a towards a point (4, 9). It fell on ground along X-
constant speed of 5 m/s. The initial separation (at the axis in 1s.
instant mortar is fired) between the mortar and take, so that Taking g = 10 m/s2 and all coordinates in metres,
the tank would be hit is [Take g = 10 m/s2]
find the X-coordinate where it fell.
(A) 678.4 m (B) 614.4 m (A) (3, 0) (B) (4, 0)
(C) 64 m (D) None of these (C) (2, 0) (D) 2 5, 0  
163. A particle has been projected with a speed of 20 m/s. at an
angle of 300 with the horizontal. The time when the 169. A stone is projected from a horizontal plane, it
velocity vector becomes perpendicular to the initial attains maximum height H and strikes a stationary
velocity vector, is smooth wall and falls on the ground vertically
(A) 4 s below the maximum height. Assume the collision
(B) 2 s to be elastic, the height of the point on the wall
(C) 3 s
where ball will strike is
(D) Not possible in this case
164. A cannon fires a projectile as shown in the figure below.
The dashed line shows the trajectory in the absence of
gravity. The points M, N, O and P correspond to 1 s
interval.

H H
(A) (B)
2 4
3H
(C) (D) None of these
4
The lengths of X, Y and Z are respectively
(Take g = 10 m/s2)
(A) 5 m, 10 m, 15 m (B) 10 m, 40 m, 90
(C) 5m, 20 m, 45 m (D) 10 m, 20 m, 30 m

26
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
170. A railroad car is moving in the +X direction on a 173. Figure shows the direction of the total acceleration
straight and level track. A person in the railroad car and velocity of a particle moving clockwise in a
throws a ball. The ball follows trajectory shown in  5 
figure, relative to the railroad car. From an circle of radius   m at an instant of time.
 3
inspection of the trajectory, what can be concluded
Tangential acceleration at this instant is 5 m/s2.
about the motion of railroad car? Treat Y-axis
Which of the following statements is not correct?
along vertical.

(A) It is moving at a constant speed.

(B) It is speeding up.
(C) It is slowing down.
(D) None of the above can be concluded. (A) The centripetal acceleration is 5 3 m/s2
171. A shot is fired at an angle to the horizontal such
(B) Particle is speeding up
that it strikes the hill while moving horizontally.
(C) The net acceleration is 10 m/s2
Find the initial angle of projection.
(D) The particle is slowing down

2 3
(A) tan   (B) tan  
5 8
3
(C) tan   (D) None of these
2
172. A ball leaves a horizontal table with velocity
v0  5 m/s . The ball bounces elastically from a
vertical wall at a horizontal distance D (= 8 cm)
from the table, as shown in figure. The ball then
strikes the floor a distance x0 from the table (g = 10
m/s2). The value of x0 is

(A) 6 m (B) 4 m
(C) 5 m (D) 7 m

27
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 ANSWER KEY

28 A 65 B 102 D 139 A
29 B 66 D 103 B 140 C
30 D 67 C 104 D 141 C
31 D 68 C 105 C 142 C
32 B 69 C 106 B 143 D
33 A 70 A 107 C 144 B
34 B 71 B 108 A 145 A
35 D 72 A 109 C 146 B
36 B 73 B 110 A 147 C
37 B 74 C 111 A 148 A
38 B 75 A 112 D 149 A
39 D 76 A 113 A 150 B
40 A 77 C 114 B 151 D
41 B 78 D 115 A 152 A
42 B 79 B 116 B 153 B
43 A 80 C 117 B 154 A
44 C 81 A 118 C 155 B
45 B 82 A 119 C 156 A
46 C 83 B 120 B 157 C
47 B 84 B 121 D 158 A
48 A 85 B 122 A 159 A
49 A 86 B 123 A 160 C
50 A 87 A 124 C 161 A
51 C 88 B 125 D 162 B
52 C 89 A 126 B 163 B
53 B 90 D 127 A 164 C
54 C 91 C 128 C 165 B
55 B 92 B 129 D 166 B
56 B 93 C 130 C 167 D
57 C 94 C 131 C 168 C
58 D 95 C 132 D 169 C
59 B 96 C 133 B 170 C
60 A 97 C 134 C 171 C
61 B 98 C 135 A 172 A
62 B 99 B 136 B 173 D
63 C 100 D 137 A
64 B 101 A 138 A

28
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 FORCE AND FRICTION
Point Mass: An object can be considered as a point Contact forces: acts due to intermolecular interaction
object if during motion in a given time, it covers distance (i) Normal Reaction: When a body is placed on a rigid
much greater than its own size. surface, the body experiences a force perpendicular
Inertia: Inherent property of all the bodies by virtue of to the surfaces in contact.
which they cannot change their state of rest or uniform (ii) Friction: acts parallel to surfaces in contact, always
motion along a straight line by their own. 3 Types: opposes relative motion between surfaces. May be
Inertia of rest, motion & direction. static or kinetic. Static friction is variable/self-
Linear Momentum: Linear momentum of a body is the adjusting force, its value varies from 0 to flimiting.
quantity of motion contained in the body. p = mv flimitimg= maximum static friction = s N; fkinetic=kN,
p p v Here N= normal reaction
How to find direction of friction?
 Assume that there is no friction anywhere.
v m m
(a) (b) (c)  Find out object (say block) on which external force is
acting and draw FBD. Of course, this block will start
Newton’s First Law A body continue to be in its state of
moving in the direction of applied force.
rest or of uniform motion along a straight line, unless it is
acted upon by some external  Mark friction on both of its surfaces in the direction
Newton’s Second Law: The rate of change of linear opposite to applied force (direction of motion) as
momentum of a body is directly proportional to the friction force will always oppose relative motion.
external force applied on the body and this change takes  Start drawing FBD for other blocks placed in contact
place always in the direction of the applied force. with above bloc. Mark direction of friction force on
 dp  dp  
dv  dm blocks placed in contact with this block in equal and
F F  F m v
dt dt dt dt opposite pairs, as friction force between two surfaces
Newton’s Third Law To every action, there is always an in contact makes action and reaction pairs
equal (in magnitude) and opposite (in direction) reaction. Tension: The force exerted by the end T=F
Types of forces: Variable force: of taut string, rope or chain against
(i) Time dependent force: In case of impulse or motion pulling (applied) force is called the tension. The direction
of a charged particle in an alternating electric field of tension is so as to pull the body.
force is time dependent. Spring force: F  Kx
(ii) Position dependent force: Gravitational force Applied force
between two bodies System: Two or more bodies/ blocks may be taken as
Gm 1m 2 or Force between two charged particles
2
system in mechanics problem if they have same
r
acceleration (both in magnitude and direction). Now you

q1q 2 .
4  0 r 2 can ignore internal forces as these will cancel out in
(iii) Velocity dependent force : Viscous force (6rv) or equal and opposite pairs.
Fm  qvBsin Frame of Reference: A frame in which an observer is
Central force: If a position dependent force is directed situated and makes his observations.
towards or away from a fixed point it is said to be central (i) Inertial frame of reference (unaccelerated frame,
otherwise non-central. Newton’s second law of motion is followed)
Conservative force: If under the action of a force the (ii) Non-inertial frame of reference (Accelerated frame,
work done in a round trip is zero or the work is path Newton’s laws of motion are not applicable, apply
independent, the force is said to be conservative pseudo force to apply Newton’s IInd law)
(gravitational, electrostatic, spring force) otherwise non Law of Conservation of Linear Momentum If external
    
conservative (friction, viscous force, normal reaction). force F  0 then p  constant i.e. m1 v1  m2 v2  m3 v3  .... 
Common forces: constant
Field Forces: forces that act from a distance t t

(i) Gravitational force = mg = Gm 12m 2 Impulse I   t12 F dt  Fav  t12 dt  Fav t ; I  p 2  p 1  p
r
Gravitational, spring & electromagnetic forces are never
(ii) Electromagnetic forces Fe  q1q 2 , Fm  qvBsin
4  0 r 2 impulsive.
29
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
Normal reaction, friction forces may be impulsive or not. The rocket propulsion is an example of conservation of
Tension in rod is always impulsive. momentum. In a rocket, as the fuel starts burning, the
When a string is jerked out, equal and opposite tension gases emerge out forcefully through the nozzle. The large
acts on the bodies attached with the string in the direction backward momentum of the emerging gases imparts an
of the string. equal amount of forward momentum to the rocket. As the
If one end of the string is fixed: mass of rocket goes on decreasing, so its acceleration
(1) momentum of the body attached with string will goes on increasing.
change along string Suppose m0 is the initial mass of the rocket, u = velocity
(2) momentum will remain unchanged perpendicular to of exhaust gas. let the gases be ejected at a constant rate
string as tension in string cannot exert impulse in that dm
r . At any time t, the mass of the rocket will be
direction. dt
When both ends of the string are attached to movable   dm  
object: In this case equal and opposite impulses act on m   m0   t.
the two objects, producing equal and opposite change in   dt  
v (v + v)
momentum. The total momentum of the system remains
constant, although the momentum of the each individual

(m-m)
object changes in the direction of the string. However, m

perpendicular to the string, no impulsive force acts and

u
hence no change in momentum of either body in this System
boundary m
System boundary
Gases
direction. (a) t = t (b) t = t + dt
Important points regarding Impulse Thrust force:
1. Impulse of a force, which is the product of average It is the force generated when certain mass leaves or enters
force during impact and the time for which the into the system. Its magnitude can be calculated as:
impact lasts, is measured by the total change in linear
 dm 
momentum produced during the impact. Fthrust  vr  ,
The impulse of a force is equal to the change in  dt 
momentum. This statement is known as Impulse where vr the velocity of the leaving or entering mass
momentum theorem. relative to the body considered.
2. Impulse of a force can have positive, negative or zero Net force on the rocket:
value according to the increase, decrease or The net force on rocket = thrust force – gravitational
invariance of momentum of body under the effect of force
force.  dm 
3. Impulse is a vector quantity. Its direction is the same or Fnet  vr    mg
 dt 
as that of the force.
4. The dimensional formula of impulse is the same as v  dm 
Thus anet  r  g …(iv)
that of linear momentum i.e., [M1L1T–1]. m  dt 
5. The SI units of impulse are (N – s) and kg ms–1 and where g is the acceleration due to gravity (which is not
the c.g.s. units of impulse are dyne-s and g cm s–1. constant).
6. Graphically, the impulse is the area between the Velocity of rocket :
force curve and the F = 0 axis, as shown in figure. m
v  v0  v r ln 0 …(v)
The SI unit of impulse is Ns. m
F
Where v0 is the initial velocity.
Newton’s second law for system of variable mass:
Force

r r r
dv
Fexternal  Fthrust  m
dt
O Time (t)
r r
v  dm  dv
or Fexternal  vr    m .
 dt  dt
VARIABLE MASS SYSTEM where vr is the velocity of the separated (gained) mass
Rocket propulsion: relative to the body considered.
30
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
How to start mechanics problems? (Translational 3. Leaving contact/ No contact: Normal reaction is
Motion….Newton’s laws only) zero.
DECIDE SYSTEM 4. Maximum or minimum word is used. As per
1. Draw FBD (Only consider external forces) question.
a. Mark all Forces: Gravitational forces, 5. If number of objects (blocks) move together with
Electromagnetic forces, Normal reaction, Friction, same acceleration (both in magnitude and
String force (tension), Spring Force (Restoring direction) consider them as a single object and
force), applied force. ignore normal reaction & friction forces acting
b. Apply normal reaction and friction force in equal within blocks, as these forces will represent
and opposite pairs (Action-Reaction concept) internal forces and will cancel out in equal and
c. Check whether object lies in inertial or non- opposite pairs.
inertial frame. If frame is non-inertial, mark Common pitfalls
pseudo force (Fp = - mass of object  acc. Of  Applying Newton’s laws without caring about
non-inertial frame) on FBD. inertial/non-inertial frames.
d. Always apply normal reaction and friction in  In non-inertial frame of reference first apply
equal and opposite pairs (Action – Reaction pseudo vectors to make inertial frame of
concept) in case two or more blocks are placed reference and then apply Newton’s laws.
over one another.  Considering that force of friction is always opposite
2. Take components of various forces in three to the motion.
perpendicular directions (but most of the problems  If force of friction or frictional torque causes the
are in 2D, so two ar components are sufficient) motion then it is in the same direction of motion.
If object is constrained to move in one direction only,  Considering friction is always mg or N.
then take one axis along possible d’n of motion and  If body does not move on application of force
other one perpendicular to d’n of motion. then friction is equal to force applied. If body
3. Apply equation of motion i.e. second law of motion. comes in motion limiting force is sN and
Fx = max; FY = m aY; FZ = m aZ ensuring proper motion it is kN.
4. Count Number of equations and unknowns.  Considering in equilibrium body essentially is at rest.
If unknowns are more than equations, look for  In only static equilibrium body is at rest but in
constraints in problem. Generally, following dynamic equilibrium body is in uniform motion
constraints are used: in a straight line.
1. String Constraint: Length of string remains  Considering rough surfaces have more coefficient of
constant. Use WT= 0 i.e. work done by tension friction.
is zero.  Coefficient of friction between glass and glass is
2. Normal Constraint: velocity/ acceleration of two 1.0 and between copper and copper is 1.6.
bodies perpendicular to the plane of contact is
same.

31
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
MOTION OF TWO BODIES CONNECTED BY A STRING

Fnet We consider the following cases.

Note: In these cases a  CASE (A):
Total mass r r
Here, F is the net pulling force and total mass is If the lift is uncelebrated ( v  0 or constant):
MOTION IN A LIFT In this case there is reaction R =
Weight: mg
The pull of earth on any body under its gravitational Hence apparent weight = actual
influence is called the weight of the body. This force is weight
directed towards the centre of the earth. This force W = Actual weight = mg
produces an acceleration on the body called the CASE (B):
acceleration due to gravity. If the lift is accelerated upward
uur ur r
If W is the weight of body of mass m, thenW  mg Newton (when a = constant):
The net forces acting on the man
Note: The weight of mass m of a body is also taken as m
kilogram weight or m kilogram force m kg weight = are
mg Newton Q R – mg = ma
If a body is on an accelerated platform, the weight of the  Apparent weight
body appears changed and this new weight is called W   R  mg  ma
apparent weight. Let a man of weight W = mg be Note: Apparent weight (W') > Actual weight (mg)
standing in a lift.
32
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
CASE (C): Case (D):
If the lift is accelerated downward: If the lift is accelerated downwards such that a > g:
Here the weight 'mg' acts downwards, In this case ma is greater than the weight (mg)
while the reaction, R acts upward  Apparent weight W = m(g – a) = negative
Apparent weight W = R There is no meaning of negative apparent weight,
Q mg – R = ma therefore will be zero.
 R = mg – ma So the man will be accelerated upward and will stay
at the ceiling of the lift.
Note:
(i) Apparent weight W < Actual weight W
(ii) If g = a  W = 0
Thus in a freely falling lift, the man will experience a
state of weightlessness

MOTION OF BLOCKS IN CONTACT

Condition Free body diagram Equation Force and acceleration
m1a
F
B F f F  f  ma a
A
m1 1
m1  m2
F m2 m2a
m1
m2 F
f f  m2a f 
m2 m1  m2
m1a
F
B f f  ma a
A
m1 1
m1  m2
m2 F
m1 m2a
m1F
F F  f  m2a f 
f m2 m1  m2
m1a
F
F f1 F  f1  ma a
m1 1
m1  m2  m3
m2a
B
C
(m2  m3 )F
f1 f2 f1  f2  m2a f1 
F m1 m2
m3 m2 m1  m2  m3
m3a
m3 F
f2 f2  ma f2 
m3 3
m1  m2  m3
m1a
F
f1 f1  ma a
m1 1
m1  m2  m3
C m2a
A B m1F
m3 F f1 f2 f2  f1  m2a f1 
m1 m2 m2 m1  m2  m3
m3a
(m1  m2 )F
f2 F  f2  ma f2 
m3 F 3
m1  m2  m3

33
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
MOTION OF MASSIVE STRING
Condition Free body diagram Equation Force and acceleration
a
F
a
M T1 F  (M  m )a M m
T1  Ma T1  M
F
T1  force applied by
M
m (M  m)
F the string on the block
m/2
M T2
 m T2  T2 
(2M  m)
T2   M   a F
Tension at mid point of  2 2(M  m)
the rope
L m
T F
a
F
F  ma aF /m
x
m = Mass of string
m [(L – x)/L]
T = Tension in string at a  Lx  L x
distance x from the end
T T  m a T  F
a
 L   L 
where the force is applied
A (M/L)x B
L T F1 Mxa F1  F2
F2 F1
a
F1  T  a
L M
A x B
F2 M F1
M = Mass of uniform rod  x x
L = Length of rod F1  F2  Ma T  F1  1    F2  
L
a  L

L
B T A
x  L x  L x
T  F T  F
C B  L   L 
F
T
Mass of segment BC
M 
 x
 L 
smooth by polishing and cleaning the bonding force
FRICTION AND FRICTIONAL FORCE
of adhesion will increase and so the friction will
(a) If we slide or try to slide a body over a surface the
increase resulting in 'Cold welding'
motion is resisted by a bonding between the body
(f) Friction is a non conservative force, i.e. work done
and the surface. This resistance is represented by a
against friction is path dependent.
single force and is called friction.
(g) In its presence mechanical energy is not conserved.
(b) The force of friction is parallel to the surface and
Thus friction reduces efficiency of a machine.
opposite to the direction of intended motion.
(h) It is a general misconception that friction always
(c) Force of friction is partially independent of
opposes the motion. No doubt friction opposes the
microscopic area of surface in contact and relative
motion of a moving body but in many cases it is also
velocity between them. (if it is not high)
the cause of motion.
(d) However, it depends on the nature of material of the
(i) Coefficient of friction has no unit and is
surface in contact (force of adhesion) and their
dimensionless.
roughness and smoothness.
(e) Normally with increase in smoothness friction
decreases. But if the surface area are made too
34
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
TYPES OF FRICTIONAL FORCE AND THEIR (b) In rolling the surfaces at contact do not rub each
DEFINITION other.
There are three types of frictional force (c) The velocity of point of contact with respect to the
1. Static friction surface remains zero all the time although the centre
2. Dynamic friction & Sliding friction of the wheel moves forward
3. Rolling friction
(d) R  K  S
1. Static friction:
(a) The frictional force which is effective before motion Graphical representation of friction
starts between two planes in contact with each other,
is known as static friction.
(b) If a body is at rest and no pulling force is acting on it,
force of friction on it is zero (and not R)
(c) Now if a force is applied to pull the body and it does
not move, the friction acts which is equal in ANGLE OF FRICTION ()
magnitude and opposite in direction to the applied The angle of friction () may be defined as the angle
force [again not R], i.e. friction is self acting force. between the normal reaction N and the resultant of
(d) If the applied force is increased the force of static friction force f and the normal reaction.
friction also increases. f
Thus tan  
(e) If the applied force exceeds a certain (Minimum) N
value, the body starts moving. Since f = N.
(f) The maximum force of static friction upto which Therefore, tan   
body does not move is called limiting friction (fL)
Angle of Repose:
(g) Static friction is a self adjusting force with an upper
The angle of repose () is that minimum angle of
limit, called limiting friction.
inclination of the inclined plane at which a body placed
(h) fL  R  fL  s R at rest on the inclined plane is about to slide down in
where fL= limiting friction, R = normal reaction, s = equilibrium condition.
coefficient of static friction tan   
(i) s depends on the nature of surface in contact and  
(a) When    or tan 1  the body is in equilibrium
force of adhesion between them.
(b) When the angle of inclination is more than the angle
Dynamic friction (K)
(a) If the applied force is increased further and sets the of friction    the block starts sliding down.
body in motion, the friction opposing the motion is Conditions for equilibrium of block
called dynamic or kinetic friction. (Depending upon the direction of applied force)
(b) Kinetic friction is lesser than limiting friction. (a) Force parallel to the incline
(c) fK  K R where K is called coefficient of kinetic (b) Force normal to the incline
(c) External Horizontal force
friction.
(a) Force parallel to the incline
(d) fL  fK  s  K
i.e. we require more force to start a motion than to
maintain it against friction.
(e) The frictional force, which is effective on sliding of
two surfaces in contact with each other is known as    F  F 
The block remains stationary if Fp
min p p max
the sliding friction.
Rolling friction (R): mg  sin   cos   Fp  mg  sin   cos 
(a) When a body (say wheel) rolls on a surface the
resistance offered by the surface is called rolling
friction.

35
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 Fsin
(b) Force Normal to the incline (FN) y

Fcos
x
N
mg

  mg 
The block remains stationary if F   ...(ii)
 cos    sin  
mg
FN   FN min  FN   sin   cos  Minimum value of pull force:
 dF
(c) External Horizontal Force
The pull force to be minimum,  0  tan   
d
It serves two purposes: tan  mg
(i) It supports the frictional force or Fmin 
cos   tan  sin 
(ii) It increases the normal reaction and thus increases
the magnitude of the limiting force of friction or Fmin  mg sin
Minimum Horizontal force (FH)min: ACCELERATION OF A BODY DOWN A ROUGH
INCLINED PLANE
When a plane is inclined to the horizontal at an angle ,
which is greater than the angle of repose, the body placed
on the inclined plane slides down with an acceleration, a
a  g  sin   cos  …(3)
Clearly, a < g
i.e., acceleration of a body down a rough inclined plane is
The box remains stationary if  FH  min  FH   FH  max always less than acceleration due to gravity (g).
Note that when a plane is inclined to the horizontal at an
 sin    cos    sin    cos  
mg    FH  mg   angle q, which is less than the angle of repose then the
 cos    sin    cos    sin   minimum force required to move the body up the
MINIMUM FORCE REQUIRED TO MOVE A inclined plane is
BLOCK ON HORIZONTAL PLANE
f1   mg sin  F   mg  sin   cos 
Further, the minimum force required to push the body
down the inclined plane is
f2   F  mg sin   mg   cos  sin 
For minimum value of F,  = tan–1 . MOTION OF TWO BODIES ONE RESTING ON
μmg THE OTHER
Fmin  When a body A of mass m is resting on a body B of mass
1 μ2 M then two conditions are possible
PULL IS EASIER THAN PUSH (1) A force F is applied to the upper body,
Push: Consider a block of mass m placed on a rough (2) A force F is applied to the lower body
horizontal surface. The coefficient of static friction We will discuss above two cases one by one in the
between the block and surface is . Let a push force F is following manner:
(1) A force F is applied to
applied at an angle  with the horizontal.
the upper body, then
y Fsin following four situations
 are possible
Fcos
x (i) When there is no
N
friction
(a) The body A will move on body B with
acceleration (F/m).
aA  F /m
36
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
(b) The body B will remain at rest a B  0
Note: As both the bodies are moving in the same
(c) If L is the length of B as shown in figure A will
direction.
fall from B after time t
Acceleration of body A relative to B will be
2L 2 mL MF   k mg (m  M )
t 
a F a  a A  aB 
mM
 1 2 
 As s  2 a t and a  F/m  2L
  So, A will fall from B after time t
(ii) If friction is present between A and B only and a
applied force is less than limiting friction (F < Fl) 2 m ML
(F = Applied force on the upper body, Fl = 
MF   k mg ( m  M )
limiting friction between A and B, Fk = Kinetic
friction between A and B)
(a) The body A will not slide on body B till F  Fl
i.e. F   s mg
(iv) If there is friction between B and floor
(b) Combined system (m + M) will move together
(where Fl    ( M  m ) g = limiting friction
F
with common acceleration a A  a B  between B and floor, Fk = kinetic friction between
M m
A and B)
(iii) If friction is present between A and B only and
B will move only if
applied force is greater than limiting friction
Fk  Fl and then
(F > Fl)
In this condition the two bodies will move in the Fk  Fl  M a B
same direction (i.e. of applied force) but with However, if B does not move then static friction
different acceleration. Here force of kinetic will work (not limiting friction) between body B
friction  k mg will oppose the motion of A while and the floor i.e. friction force = applied force (=
will cause the motion of B. Fk) not Fl .
F– Fk = maA Free body diagram of A (2) A force F is applied to the lower body, then
Fk = MaB Free body diagram of B following four situations are possible
F  Fk (i) When there is no friction
i.e. aA  (a) B will move with acceleration (F/M) while A
m
will remain at rest (relative to ground) as there is
no pulling force on A.
Fk  F  and
i.e. a B  aB   
M M 
( F   k mg ) aA  0
aA 
m
 mg (b) As relative to B, A
aB  k will move backwards with acceleration (F/M) and
M
so will fall from it in time t.
2L 2 ML
 t 
a F
(ii) If friction is present between A and B only
and F < Fl
(where F = Pseudo force on body A and Fl =
limiting friction between body A and B)
(a) Both the body will move together with common
F
acceleration a 
M m

37
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 mF (iv) If there is friction between B and floor: The
(b) Pseudo force on the body A, F   ma 
mM system will move only if F  Fl' then replacing
and Fl   s mg
F by F  F l . The entire case (iii) will be valid.
mF
(c) F   Fl    s mg  However if F  Fl the system will not move
mM
and friction between B and floor will be F while
F   s (m  M ) g
between A and B is zero.
So both bodies will move together with REACTION OF ROAD ON CAR.
F (1) When car moves on a concave bridge then
acceleration a A  aB  if F   s [m  M ] g
mM
mv2
(iii) If friction is present between A and B only Centripetal force = R  mg cos 
and F > Fl r
(where Fl = s (m + M)g = limiting friction
between body B and surface)
Both the body will move with different
acceleration. Here force of kinetic friction  k mg
will oppose the motion of B while will cause the
motion of A.
maA  k mg Free body diagram of A

F  Fk  MaB

Free body diagram of B

mv2
i.e. aA  k g and reaction R  mg cos 
r
i.e. aB  F   k mg 
 k
(2) When car moves on a convex bridge
M mv2
Centripetal force = mg cos  R 
r
mv2
and reaction R  mg cos 
r
Note: As both the bodies are moving in the same direction
Acceleration of body A relative to B will be
 F  k g(m  M)
a  a A  aB   
 M 
Negative sign implies that relative to B, A will
move backwards and will fall it after time
2L 2 ML
t 
a F   k g(m  M )

38
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 HOME ASSIGNMENT
1. A beaker containing some water is lying on the pan
of a spring balance. If one dips one’s finger in the
water without touching its bottom, then the reading of
the balance will:
(A) increase (A) mu/T (B) 2mu/T
(B) decrease (C) mu/2T (D) none of these
(C) remain constant 7. 10,000 small balls each weighing 1g, strike one
(D) depend upon the material of beaker. square cm of area per second with a velocity of 100
2. A cork and a metal bob are connected by a string as m/s in normal direction and rebound with the same
shown in the figure. If the beaker is given an velocity. The pressure on the surface (in N/m2) is :
acceleration towards left then the cork will be thrown (A) 2 x 103 (B) 2 x 105
towards: (C) 107 (D) 2 x 107
8. Two 10kg bodies are attached to a spring balance as
shown in figure. The reading of the balance will be :

(A) right (B) left

(C) upwards (D) downwards
3. 80 railways wagons all of same mass 5 x 103 kg are (A) 20 kg –wt (B) 10 kg –wt
pulled by an engine with a force of 4 x 105 N. The (C) zero (D) 5 kg –wt
tension in the coupling between 30th and 31st wagon 9. A father (60kg) and his son (20kg) are both at rest on a
from the engine is : frictionless ice pond. The father lifts a 1kg ball and
4 4
(A) 40 x 10 N (B) 32 x 10 N throws to his son with horizontal speed of 5 m/s, the son
(C) 20 x 104 N (D) 25 x 104 catches it. The speeds of father and the son are (in m/s)
4. A body of mass M is being pulled by a string of mass (A) , (B) ,
m with a force P applied at one end. The force
exerted by the string on the body will be : (A) (C) , (D) ,
Pm(M+m) (B) Pm/(M+m) 10. A frictionless cart A of mass 100 kg carries other two
(C) P/(M–m) (D) PM/(M+m) frictionless carts B and C having masses 8 kg and 4kg
5. The two pulleys arrangements shown in the figure are respectively connected by a string passing over a
identical. The mass of the rope is negligible. In (a) pulley as shown in the figure. What horizontal force
the mass m is lifted up by attaching a mass 2m to the F must be applied on the cart so that smaller carts do
other end of the rope. In (b), m is lifted up by pulling not move relative to it?
the other end of the rope with a constant downward
force of 2mg. The ratio of accelerations in the two
cases will be :

(A) 150 N (B) 340 N

(C) 560 N (D) 630 N
11. A block of mass m is placed on a smooth wedge of
inclination θ. The whole system is accelerated
(A) 1:1 (B) 1:2 horizontally so that the block does not slip down. The
(C) 1:3 (D) 1:4 force exerted by the wedge on the block is :
6. A particle of mass m moving with velocity makes an (A) mg (B) mg/cosθ
elastic one dimensional collision with a stationary (C) mg cosθ (D) mg sinθ
particle of mass m. They are in the contact for a very 12. In the above problem, the acceleration required to be
brief time T. The force of interaction increases from given to the system will be :
0→ F0 linearly in time T/2 and decreases linearly to (A) g cot θ (B) g tanθ
zero in further time T/2. The magnitude of F0 is (C) g sinθ (D) g cos θ
39
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
13. In the following figure, the length of the rod AB is L. (A) 60 N (B) 90 N
A weight of 1000 kg is suspended from its two ends (C) 120 N (D) 150 N
with the help of two strings of length L. The tension 18. A light string fixed at one end to a clamp on ground
in the rod will be : passes over a fixed pulley and hang on the other side.
It makes an angle of 300 with the ground. A monkey
of mass 5 kg climbs up the rope. The clamp can
withstand a vertical force of 40N only. The maximum
acceleration in upward direction with which the
monkey can climb safely is ( g = 10m/s2)
(A) 𝑁 (B) 5 x 103 N (A) 2m/s2 (B) 4 m/s2
√
(C) 5 x 103 x √3 N (D) zero (C) 6 m/s2 (D) 8 m/s2
14. The following figure represents a painter in a swing 19. A 5000 kg rocket is set for vertical flight. The
by the side of a building. When the painter pulls the exhaust speed is 800 m/s. To give an initial upward
string then the force applied on the surface is 450 N, acceleration of 20m/s2 the mass of gases ejected per
whereas the weight of painter is 1000N. If the weight second to supply the needed thrust will be (in kg/s)
of the swing is 250 N then the acceleration produced (A) 127.5 (B) 187.5
in the swing will be : (C) 185.5 (D) 137.5
20. A force F is applied to the initially stationary cart.
The variation of force with time is shown. The speed
of cart at t = 5s is
(A) 4 m/s2 (B) 2 m/s2
(C) 5 m/s2 (D) 6 m/s
15. In the given diagram, with what force must the man
pull the rope to hold the massless plank in position if (A) 10m/s (B) 8.33 m/s
wt. of man is 60 kgf (C) 2m/s (D) 0 m/s
21. A uniform chain of length L lies on a table. If the
coefficient of friction is μ, then the maximum length
of the chain which can hang from the edge of the
(A) 15kgf (B) 30 kg f table without the chain sliding down is
(C) 60 kg f (D) 120 kg f
(A) (B)
16. Two weights W1 and W2 are suspended by string
passing over a pulley as shown in the figure. If the (C) (D)
pulley moves up with an acceleration g then the 22. A block of mass m, lying on a rough horizontal plane
tension in the string will be : is acted on by a horizontal force P and another force
Q inclined at an angle θ to the vertical. The block will
remain in equilibrium if μ = ?

(A) (B)
(A) (B)
(C) (D) zero
(C) (D)
17. Two blocks of mass 8kg and 5kg are connected by a
heavy rope of mass 3kg. An upward force of 180 N is 23. Pushing force F that makes an angle θ to the
applied as shown in the figure. The tension in the horizontal is applied on a block of wt W placed on a
string at point P will be : horizontal table. If the angle of friction be Φ, the
magnitude of force required to move the body is :
(A) ( )
(B) ( )

(C) ( )
(D) ( )
40
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
24. A log of wood of weight W is pulled at a constant a force of 100N is applied on the block, then the net
velocity with a force F by means of a rope of length acceleration of the slab will be :
L. The distance between the free end of rope and the
ground is h. Neglecting the thickness of the log the
coefficient of friction between the log and the ground
is: (A) 15.2 m/s2 (B) 152 m/s2
(A)
√
(B) (
√ (C) 0.98 m/s2 (D) 1.52 m/s2
)
( )
30. The system is pushed by a force F as shown. All
(C) (D) surfaces are smooth except between B and C. Friction
√ √
25. A board of mass m is placed on the floor and a man coefficient between B and C is μ. Minimum value of
of mass M is standing on the board as shown. The F to prevent block B from downward slipping is
coefficient of friction between the board and the floor
is μ. The maximum force that the man can exert on
the rope so that the board doesn’t slip on the floor is :
(A) (B)

(C) (D)
31. A car is going at a speed of 6m/s when it encounters a
15m slope of angle 300. The friction coefficient
(A) F = μ(M+m)g (B) μ mg
( ) between the road and tyre is 0.5. The driver applies
(C) F = (D) F = hard the brakes. The minimum speed of car with
26. A block of mass 0.1kg is pressed against a wall with which it can reach the bottom is (g = 10m/s2):
a horizontal force of 5N as shown in the figure. If the (A) 4 m/s (B) 3 m/s
coefficient of friction between the wall and the block (C) 7.49 m/s (D) 8.45 m/s
is 0.5 then the frictional force acting on the block in 32. Fine particles of a substance are to be stored in a heap
Newton will be : on a horizontal circular plate of radius a. If the
coefficient of static friction between the particles is μ,
the maximum possible height of cone is
(A) μa (B) μa/2
(C) a/μ (D) μ2a
(A) 9.8 (B) 4.9 33. Two blocks B1 and B2 of masses m1 and m2 with
(C) 0.98 (D) 0.49 m1 = 7.5 m2 respectively are placed as shown. The
27. A block slips with constant velocity on a plane value of μ for no motion of B1 on horizontal surface is
inclined at an angle θ. The same block is pushed up
the plane with an initial velocity v0. The distance
covered by the block before coming to rest is :
(A) (B) (A) 0.4 (B) 0.5
(C) (D) (C) 0.6 (D) 0.7
34. A particle is moving along a circular path of radius 5m
28. A particle is projected up a 450 rough incline with with uniform speed 5m/s. The average acceleration
velocity v. The coefficient of friction is 0.5. The when particle completes half revolution is:
speed with which it returns back to the starting point (A) 0 (B) 10m/s2
is v’. Then v’/v (C) 10π m/s2 (D) 10/π m/s2
(A) 1/√2 (B) ½ 35. A particle is moving along a circular path with uniform
(C) 1/√3 (D) 1/3 speed. Through what angle does it angular velocity
29. A slab of 40kg is lying on a frictionless floor and a change when it completes half of the circular path:
block of 10kg rests on the slab as shown in the figure. (A) 0 (B) 450
The coefficients of static and kinetic friction between (C) 1800 (D) 3600
the slab and the block are 0.6 and 0.4 respectively. If
41
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
36. A small block slides down from the top of a 42. A sphere of mass 100g is attached to a string of
hemisphere of radius R. For no friction, the height length 1.3 m whose upper end is fixed to a ceiling.
where the block loses the contact with the surface is The sphere is made to describe a horizontal circle of
(A) 2R/3 (B) R/2 radius 50cm. The time period of revolution is :
(C) R/3 (D) R/4 (A) 5.05 sec (B) 4.55 sec
37. A particle describes horizontal circle on the smooth (C) 3.25 sec (D) 2.15 sec
surface of inverted cone at a height 9.8 cm above he 43. A stone of mass 1kg is tied to the end of a string 1m
vertex of the cone. The speed of particle is : long. It is rotated in a vertical circle. If the velocity of
(A) 0.76 m/s (B) 0.87 m/s the stone at the top be 4m/s and g = 10m/s2, then the
(C) 0.98 m/s (D) 1.09 m/s tension in the string is :
38. A smooth wire is bent in to a vertical circle of radius ‘a’. (A) 16 N (B) 10N
A bead of mass ‘m’ can slide smoothly on this circle. (C) 6 N (D) 5 N
The loop is rotated about the vertical diameter with a 44. A mass m is attached to the end of a rod of length l.
constant angular velocity ω rad/s. The bead is at rest The mass goes along a vertical circular path with its
w.r.t. the circular ring at P as shown. The position is such second end hinged at centre. What should be the
that the radius of horizontal circle passing through P is -- minimum velocity of the mass at the bottom so that
---- radius of the loop. The value of ω is : the mass completes the circle?
(A) 5𝑔𝑙 (B) 4𝑔𝑙
(C) 3𝑔𝑙 (D) 2𝑔𝑙
45. The angle through which a cyclist bends when he
covers a circular path 34.3 m in circumference in √22
second is :
(A) (B)
√ √ (A) 300 (B) 450
√ (C) 150 (D) 00
(C) (D)
46. An unloaded car moving with velocity u on a road
39. A hollow vertical cylinder of radius r and height h can be stopped in a distance‘s’. If passenger add
has smooth internal surface. A small particle is placed 40% to its weight and braking force remains the
in contact with the inner side of upper rim at point P. same the stopping distance at velocity u is now
It is given a horizontal speed u, tangential to the rim. (A) 1.4 s (B) √1.4 s
If leaves the lower rim at point Q, vertically below P. (C) (1.4)2 s (D) s/1.4
The no. of revolutions made by particle is : 47. A rope ladder with a length l carrying a man
with a mass m at its end is attached to the basket
(A) (B)
of a balloon with a mass M. The entire system is
in equilibrium. If the man begins to climb up the
(C) (D)
rope ladder with a uniform velocity v relative to
40. In a gravity free space, a particle is in contact with the the ladder then the velocity of the balloon is
inner surface of a hollow vertical cylinder and moves (A) V (B) mV/M
with velocity v in a horizontal circular path along the (C) mV/(M +m) (D) mV/(M –m)
surface. There is some friction between the particle 48. A 40 N block is supported by two ropes. One
and the surface. The retardation of the particle is rope is horizontal and the other makes an angle
proportional to :
of 300 with the ceiling. The tension in the rope
attached to the ceiling is approximately.
(A) √v (B) v0
(A) 80N (B) 40 N
(C) v1 (D) v2
(C) 34.6 N (D) 46.2 N
41. In a simple pendulum, the breaking strength of the
49. A parachutist of weight W strikes the ground
string is double the weight of the bob. The body is with his legs fixed and comes to rest with an
released from rest when the string is horizontal. The upward acceleration of magnitude 3 g. Force
string breaks when it makes an angle θ with the exerted on him by the ground during landing is:
vertical. Then (A) 2W (B) 3W
(A) θ = 300 (B) θ = 600 (C) 4W (D) zero
(C) θ= cos-1(1/3) (D) θ = cos-1(2/3)
42
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
50. Three blocks placed one after the other are 54. A truck carrying sand is moving on a smooth
pushed by a force F as shown in figure. horizontal road with a uniform speed u. If a
Determine the normal reaction exerted by m2 on mass Δm of sand leaks in a time Δt form the
m3 . :
bottom of the truck, the force needed to keep the
truck moving at its uniform speed u is given by :
(A) (B)

(C) (D) zero.

m2 F
(A) (B) F 55. A solid sphere weighing 5 kg is suspended from
m1  m2  m3 a horizontal beam by two supporting wires as
m3 F m3 F shown in fig. Tension in each wire is
(C) (D)
m1  m2  m3 m1  m2 approximately:
51. A cricket ball of mass 150g has an initial
velocity 𝑢⃗ = (3𝚤̂ + 4𝚥̂) m/s and a final velocity
𝑣⃗ = −(3𝚤̂ + 4𝚥̂) m/s after being hit. The change
in momentum (final momentum –initial
momentum) is (in kg m/s) :
(A) zero (B) – (0.45𝚤̂ + 0.6𝚥̂)
(A) 75 N (B) 50 N
(C) – (0.9𝚤̂ + 1.2𝚥̂) (D) – 5(𝚤̂ + 𝚥̂)
(C) 25 N (D) 0 N
52. A car of mass 1200 kg is moving at 90 km/hr 56. Two loads of masses m1 and m2 having a total mass
30 kg are suspended from a spring balance attached
when the driver observes the need to apply the
to ceiling of a lift moving upwards with an
brakes. The braking force is increasing linearly
acceleration of 0.1 g. Determine the reading on the
with time at the rate of 3600 N/s. Find the time
spring balance. Take g= 10m/s2.
in which car comes to halt?

(A) s (B) s

(C) s (D) 10 s
(A) 33 kg wt (B) 66 kg wt
53. The position – time graph of a particle moving
(C) 99 kg wt (D) none of these
along a straight line is shown in figure. The sign
57. Steady rain, giving 5 mm an hour, turns suddenly
of net force experienced by particle for various into a downpour 20 mm an hour and the speed of
portions are mentioned in options. Mark out the rain drops falling vertically on to a flat roof
correct option : simultaneously doubles. The pressure exerted by the
falling rain on the roof rises by a factor of
(A) 2 (B) 22
(C) 42 (D) 8
58. A ‘NO VACANCY’ board of mass 5 kg is
suspended from a horizontal beam by two
supporting wires, each at an angle of 450 to the
OA AB BC CD vertical. The tension of each wire is (g=10m/s2)
(A) +ve –ve +ve +ve
(B) +ve +ve +ve –ve
(C) +ve –ve zero +ve
(D) +ve –ve zero –ve
(A) 50 N (B) 35 N
(C) 12.5 N (D) 20 N

43
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
59. A machine gun fires a bullet of mass 40 gm with 67. A light string passing over a smooth light pulley
velocity 1200 m/s. The man holding it can exert a connects two blocks of masses m1 and m2
maximum force of 144 N on the gun. How many (vertically). If the acceleration of the system is (g/8),
bullets can he fire per second at the most then the ratio of masses is
(A) only one (B) 3 (A) 8:1 (B) 9:7
(C) any number (D) 144 x 48 (C) 4:3 (D) 5:3
60. Which of the following has maximum momentum 68. A plane is inclined at an angle  with the floor of the
(A) a 100 kg vehicle moving at 0.02 m/s lift. A body slides down the frictionless incline when
(B) a 4 g weight moving at 1000 cm/s the lift moves upwards with an acceleration a then
(C) a 200 gm weight moving with kinetic energy of the acceleration of the body relative to the inclined
10-6 J surface is
(D) a 200 g weight after falling one kilometer (A) g sin (B) (g+a) sin
61. A bomb of 12 kg explodes into two pieces of masses (C) (g – a) sin  (D) zero
4 kg and 8 kg. The velocity of 8 kg mass is 6 m/s. 69. A uniform rope of mass M, length L is fixed at its
The K.E. of the other mass is upper end vertically from a rigid support. Then the
(A) 48 J (B) 32 J tension in the rope at the distance x from the rigid
(C) 24 J (D) 288 J support is
62. If a person says that he measured some acceleration (A) Mg (B) (M/L) (L-x) g
of a particle, while no force was acting on it, then (C) (x/L) (Mg) (D) (M/x) (Lg)
(A) he might have used non – inertial frame 70. A ball of mass 50 gm hits a wall with a speed of 4
(B) his clock might run slow m/s. It rebounds with the same speed after staying in
(C) he has done some mistake contact with the wall for 0.01 second, the force
(D) hismetre scale might have been longer exerted on the wall is
63. A block at rest explodes into 3 parts of the same (A) 10 N (B) 20 N
mass. The momentum of the 2 parts are – 2 p i and p (C) 30 N (D) 40 N
j. The momentum of the third part will have a 71. A man is standing at a spring platform. Reading of
magnitude spring balance is 60 kg wt. If man jumps outside
(A) p (B) p3 platform, then reading of the spring balance
(C) p5 (D) zero (A) first increase and then decrease to zero
64. A monkey is descending from the branch of a tree (B) decreases
with constant acceleration. If the breaking strength is (C) increases
75% of the weight of the monkey, the minimum (D) remains same
acceleration with which monkey can slide down 72. A man is standing on the platform of a balance and
without breaking the branch is takes a quick step, then his weight
(A) g (B) 3g/4 (A) will decrease
(C) g/4 (D) g/2 (B) will increase
65. A ball of mass 0.1 kg coming with speed 30m/s (C) remains the same
strikes with a bat and returns in opp. direction with (D) first increases and then decreases
speed 40 m/s, then impulse is 73. Three particles each of mass m are located at the
(A) – 0.1 x (40) – 0.1 x 30 vertices of an equilateral triangle ABC. They start
(B) 0.1 x (40) – 0.1 x (– 30) moving with equal speeds each along the medians of
(C) 0.1 x (40) + 0.1 x (–30) the triangle and collide at its centroid G. If after
(D) 0.1 x (40) – 0.1 x 20 collision A comes to rest and B returns along its path
66. 25 N force is required to raise 75 N mass from a GB then C.
pulley. If rope is pulled 12m, then the load is lifted (A) also comes to rest
to 3m, the efficiency of pulley system will be – (B) moves with unchanged speed along CG
(A) 25% (B)33.3% (C) moves with unchanged speed along BG
(C) 75% (D) 90% (D) moves with unchanged speed along AG

44
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
74. A block of mass 20 kg is suspended from two light (C) v/2 (D) zero
spring balances as shown in the figure. 79. If in the above case the second body is at rest then
velocity of combination is
(A) v (B) 2v
(C) v/2 (D) zero
80. Two boys are left in the middle of a frictionless
floor. One boy of mass 20 kg gives a blow lasting
two millisecond and of 100 N to other. He himself
(A) both the scale will read 10 kg will move with a velocity of :
(B) both the scales will read 20 kg (A) 1m/s (B) 0.01 m/s
(C) the sum of readings of two balances will be 20 kg (C) 0.1 m/s (D) 0.001 m/s
(D) none of the above 81. A constant force acts on a body of mass m at rest for
75. Two masses m1 and m2 are attached to a spring t sec and then ceases to act. In next ‘t’ sec the body
balance S as shown in the figure. If m1>m2, the travels a distance ‘x’. Magnitude of force is
reading of spring balance in Kg wt will be (A) mx/t2 (B) 2mx/t2
(C) mxt (D) 3mx/t2
82. A rocket of initial mass m0 moving with a velocity
of v, discharges a jet of gases of mean density  and
(A) (m1+m2) (B) (m1 - m2)
effective area A. The minimum value of v of fuel
(C) m1m2/ (m1+m2) (D) 2m1m2/ (m1+m2)
gas which enables the rocket to rise vertically above
76. A 20 gm bullet is fired in a horizontal direction
is nearly :
through block A and becomes embedded in block B.
(A) (g/m0A)1/2 (B) (gA/m0)1/2
The bullet causes A and B to start moving with
velocities 5m/s and 4m/s respectively. The initial (C) (m0g/A)1/2 (D) (2m0Ag /)1/2
velocity of bullet v0 and the velocity of bullet as it 83. When 3 kg 4
rifle is fired, the 10 g bullet receives of
2
travels from block A to block B are 3.5 x 10 m/s while it is in the barrel. The force
acting on the rifle;
(A) zero (B) 150 x 103 N
(C) 350 N (D) 350 x 103 N
84. A 1000 kg lift is supported by a cable that can
support 2000 kg. The shortest distance in which the
(A) 2102 m/s and 794 m/s
lift can be stopped when it is descending with a
(B) 1704 m/s and 1204 m/s
speed of 2.5 m/s is (g=10m/s2)
(C) 1400 m/s and 937 m/s
(A) 2 m (B) 1 m
(D) 1109m/s and 374 m/s
(C) 5/32 m (D) 5/16
77. A block of mass ‘m’ is placed on a smooth wedge of
85. The weight of a man in a lift moving up is 708 N
inclination  to the horizontal. The whole system is while the weight of the same man in the lift moving
accelerated horizontally so that the block does not down with same acceleration is 468 N. His normal
just slip on the wedge. Find the force exerted by the weight is
wedge on the block. (A) 608 N (B) 478 N
(C) 588 N (D) 508 N
86. A constant force (F) is applied on a stationary
particle of mass m. The velocity attained by the
(A) mg/cos (B) mg/sin particle in a certain displacement will be
(C) mg sin (D) mg cos proportional to –
78. A body of mass ‘m’ moving with constant velocity v (A) m (B) 1/m
hits another body of same mass moving with same (C) m (D) 1/m
velocity v but in opposite direction and sticks to it.
The velocity of combination is :
(A) v (B) 2v

45
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
87. In the above problem, the velocity attained by the 93. In a game of tug of wars, two opposing teams are
particle in a certain interval of time will be pulling the rope with equal but opposite forces of
proportional to – 1000 kg wt at each end of the rope so that a
(A) m (B) 1/m condition of equilibrium exists. What is the tension
(C) m (D) 1/m in the rope?
88. A beaker is half filled with water. It is allowed to (A) 2000 kg wt (B) 1000 kg wt
slip down an inclined plane with angle of inclination (C) zero (D) 6400 dyne
 to the horizontal. The level of water in the beaker 94. A painter sits in a chair supported by an iron rope
will be passing over a pulley. He pulls on the free end of the
rope to lift himself with a constant velocity. If the
painter and chair together weigh 90 kg, the painter
must apply a force of
(A) (B)

(C) (D) (A) 45 kg wt (B) 90 kg wt

(C) 2 x 90 kg wt (D) 4 x 90 kg wt
89. A very light particle of mass m is joined to a very 95. A weight of 40 gm and another of 30 gm are
heavy body string passing over a smooth pulley. attached to the ends of a string on either side of
Both the bodies are free to move. The total frictionless pulley. Now
downward force on the pulley is
(A) 4 mg (B) 2mg
(C) 3mg (D) mg
90. In the case of a fan suspended from ceiling,
(A) a fan applies action force
(B) fan applies reaction force
(C) ceiling applies action force (A) weight of 40 gm moves downwards with
(D) there is no way of finding about the agency acceleration 9.8m/s2
applying action force (B) weight of 30 gm moves upwards with
91. How will you get off if you are marooned on a acceleration – 9.8 m/s2
perfectly horizontal and perfectly frictionless ice (C) weight of 40 gm moves downwards with an
surface? acceleration 1.4 m/s2 and other weight moves
(A) by throwing your shirt upward with 1.4m/s2
(B) by jumping in small steps (D) none of the statements is correct.
(C) by stopping your breath for one or two micro – 96. A man of weight W is standing on a lift which is
second moving upward with an acceleration a. The apparent
(D) by any of these weight of the man is
92. A stretching force of 1N is applied at one end of a (A) W(1+a/g) (B) W
spring balance and an equal stretching force is (C) W(1 – a/g) (D) W (1 – a2/g2)
applied at the other end at the same time. The 97. Six blocks, each of mass, are pushed along a
reading on the balance will be : frictionless surface with a force P as shown in fig.
(A) 0 N (B) 1 N The force exerted by block 1 on block 2 is
(C) 2 N (D) 0.5 N

(A) 5P/6 (B) 3P/4

(C) P (D) P/9

46
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
98. Two balls A and B of masses 100 gm and 250 gm (C) both will impart equal amount of impulse
respectively are connected by a compressed spring (D) neither will impart any impulse to the wall
of negligible mass and placed on a smooth table. 104. Two bodies A and B weighing 40 kg and 10 kg
When the balls are released simultaneously, the respectively are connected to each other by a
2
initial acceleration of ball B is 10cm/s westwards. massless spring. At a particular time, the bodies A
The initial acceleration of ball A is and B are possessing acceleration of 10m/s2 and
2 2
(A) 10m/s east wards (B) 10 cm/s westward 40m/s2 respectively. The value of applied force F at
(C) 25 m/s2 westwards (D) 25cm/s2 eastward that instant is
99. A 10 kg stone is suspended with a rope of breaking
strength 30 kg wt. The minimum time in which the
stone can be raised through a height of 10 m starting
from rest is …… Given : g = 10m/s2
(A) 0.5 s (B) 1.0 s (A) 100 N (B) 127.5 N
(C) 2/3 s (D) 2 s (C) 400 N (D) 800 N
100. The velocity time graph of a particle is shown in fig. 105. A beaker containing some water is lying on the pan
It is clear from the graph that : of a spring balance. If one dips his finger in the
water without touching its bottom, then the reading
of the balance will
(A) increase
(B) decrease
(C) remain constant
(A) the graph gives the variation of velocity with (D)depend upon the material of beaker
time in the case of a lift falling freely. 106. Two blocks of mass 2.9 kg and 1.9 kg are suspended
(B) the force of friction is non – zero at A and C with the help of two inextensible wires each of
(C) at B, there is a force which retards motion length 1m from a rigid support. The mass of the
(D) at B, there is a force which helps motion upper wire is negligible and that of the lower wire is
101. The force – time graph of a particle moving along a 0.2 kg/m. This system of blocks, wires and rigid
straight line is shown in fig. The different segments support is moving upwards with an acceleration of
0.2 m/s2. The tension at the mid points of the lower
in the graph are circular. What is the gain of and the upper wires will be respectively
momentum in the interval from t = 0 to t=8 second?

(A) 0 Ns (B) – 2 Ns (A) 20 N, 40 N (B) 20 N, 50 N

(C) 50 N, 20 N (D) 20 N, 10 N
(C) + 4 Ns (D) + 6 Ns
107. When a bicycle is paddled, the force of friction
102. A molecule of mass m moving with a velocity v exerted by the ground on the two wheels is such that
strikes the wall of a vessel at an angle of 600 to the it acts :
normal and rebounds from it elastically at the same (A) in the backward direction on the front wheel
angle without reduction in its velocity. The impulse andin the forward direction on the rear wheel.
received by the wall is : (B) in the forward direction on the front wheel and
(A) 2 mv (B) 2 mv sin 60 0 inthe backward direction on the rear wheel
(C) zero (D) 2 mv cos 600 (C) in the backward direction on both wheels
103. Compare the impulses exerted on a wall by two (D) in the forward direction on both wheels
objects : a golf ball and a blob of mud both having
the same mass and velocity
(A)the golf ball will impart greater amount of
impulse
(B) the mud blob will impart more impulse
47
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
108. A particle of mass m is suspended from a fixed point motion, the angle θ between the direction of this
O by a string of length l. At t = 0, it is displaced force and the horizontal varies as θ = ks, where k is a
from equilibrium position and released. The graph constant. The velocity of bar as a function of θ is :
which shows the variation of tension T in string with
time t is 2g 2g
(A) v  sin (B) v  cos
3 3k
2g 2g
(C) v  sin (D) v  cos
3k 3
(A) (B) 112. Two unequal masses are connected by a light
inextensible string which passes over a frictionless
light pulley. After the system has moved from rest
for 3s, the string is cut. If the lighter mass ascends
49/90m before it begins to descend and the heavier
(C) (D) mass is 5 kg then the lighter mass is :
109. A man tries to remain in steady state by pushing his (A) 4 kg (B) 3 kg
feet and hands against two parallel walls. Then for (C) 10 kg (D) 12 kg
equilibrium :
113. In the given figure

(A) force of friction should be equal on the two

walls (A) both masses always remain in level
(B) force exerted by him on both walls should be (B) after some time A is lower than B
equal and the walls should not be frictionless (C) after some time, B is lower than A
(C) he should press his feet with greater force (D) information is not sufficient
(D) coefficient of friction should be equal for both 114. A body of mass m starting from rest slides down a
walls. smooth inclined plane of gradient θ, fixed in a lift
110. An aeroplane is flying with a velocity Up. The plane moving upwards with an acceleration a0 as shown.
takes in volume V of air of mass μ per second to The time taken by the body to slide from top to
burn mass m of fuel every second. The exhaust bottom of the inclined plane will be :
relative to plane has a speed of UE. Metric h.p. of
engine of the aeroplane is :

(A) ( )
(B) ( )

(C) (D) none of these

U E2 (  m)  U P2 (  m) ( )
(A) 115. A uniform chain has a mass M and length L. it is
776
placed on a frictionless table with length l0 hanging
U E (  m)  U P (  m)
(B) over the edge. The chain begins to slide down. Then
746 the speed v with velocity the other end slides away
U EU P (  m)  U P2  from the edge is given by :
(C)
746 (A) 𝑔( ) (B) 𝑔( )
U P (  m)  U PU E (  m)
2

(D) (C) 𝑔( ) (D) 𝑔( )

746
111. A bar of mass m resting on a smooth horizontal
plane starts moving due to a friction F = mg/3 of
constant magnitude. In the process of its rectilinear

48
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
116. A large card board box of mass 0.75 kg is 121. A horizontal force F is applied on a rod
pushed across a horizontal floor by a force of inserted between the two identical blocks A and
4.5 N. The motion of the box is opposed by (i) B placed over a rough surface as shown in the
frictional force of 1.5N between the box and the figure. Force F is gradually increased, then
2
floor and (ii) air resistance kv , where k = 0.06 which of the blocks will move first?
kg/m and v is speed of the box in m/s. What is
the maximum acceleration of the block?
(A) 3 m/s2 (B) 6 m/s2
(C) 8 m/s2 (D) 4 m/s2
117. A body of mass m slides down a rough plane
(A) Block A
of inclination α. If μ is the coefficient of friction, (B) Block B
then acceleration of the body will be –
(C) both will move simultaneously
(A) g sinα (B) μ cosα
(D) it will depend on the friction coefficient
(C) g (sinα –μcosα) (D) g(cosα –μsinα)
between the blocks and the ground
118. Two blocks A and B each of mass m are placed 122. A block of mass m is placed on a surface with a
one over another on an incline as shown in
x3
figure. When the system is released from rest the vertical cross section given by y  . If the
block A slides down with constant velocity while 6
block B rests on top of A. If the coefficient of coefficient of friction is 0.5, the maximum height
friction between A and B and between A and above the ground at which the block can be placed
incline are same, then value of coefficient of without slipping is
friction would be: 1 2
(A) m (B) m
6 3
1 1
(C) m (D) m
3 2
123. A mass m rests on horizontal surface. The
coefficient of friction between the mass and the
(A) (B) (C) surface is . If the mass is pulled by a force F as
shown in fig. the limiting friction between mass
(D) information insufficient.
and surface will be :-
119. Two similar wooden blocks are tied one behind
the other and pulled across at a level surface.
Friction is not negligible. The force required to
pull them at constant speed is F. If one block is
placed over the other, then the new force
required to pull them at constant speed will be : (A) mg (B)  [mg – (3/2 )F]
(A) (B) (C)  [mg – (F/2)] (D)  [mg +(F/2)]
√
124. A body of mass 12 kg and surface area 10cm2
(C) √2 F (D) F
begins to slide down an inclined plane when the
120. Pulling force making an angle θ to the
angle of inclination is /6, If the surface area of
horizontal is applied on a block of weight W
the same body is made 20cm2, keeping mass
placed on a horizontal table. If the angle of
same, it will begin to slide down when the angle
friction is φ, the magnitude of force required to
of inclination is
move the body is equal to:
(A)/3 (B) /2
(A)Wcosφ/cos(θ–φ) (B)Wsinφ/cos(θ –φ)
(C) Wtanφ/sin(θ –φ) (D) Wsinφ/tan(θ –φ) (C) /12 (D) /6

49
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
125. A block of mass m, lying on a rough horizontal
plane, is acted upon by a horizontal force P and
another force Q, inclined at an angle  to
vertical. The block will remain in equilibrium, if
coefficient of friction between it and surface is (A) OA (B) OB
(C) OC (D) OD
130. What is the acceleration of the block in the
above problem
(A) (P + Q sin )/ (mg + Q cos ) (A) 3 m/s2 up the plane
(B) (P cos + Q)/ (mg – Q sin ) (B) 3 m/s2 down the plane
(C) (P + Q cos )/ (mg + Qsin) (C) 6 m/s2 up the plane
(D) zero
(D) (P sin– Q )/(mg – Q cos )
131. Three blocks A, B and C of equal mass m are
126. A car starts from rest to cover a distance s. The
placed one over the other on a smooth horizontal
coefficient of friction between the road and tyres
ground as shown in figure. Coefficient of friction
is . The minimum time in which the car can
between any two blocks of A, B and C is ½. The
cover the distance is proportional to
maximum value of mass of block D so that the
(A)  (B) 
blocks A, B and C move without slipping over
(C) 1/ (D) 1/
127. A person walks over a rough surface. The each other is
angle between the force of friction and the
instantaneous velocity of the person is
(A) zero (B) /2
(C) /4 (D) 
(A) 6 m (B) 5 m
128. In the figure, the block A and B are of masses (C) 3 m (D) 4 m
3 kg and 2 kg. The coefficient of friction 132. A block weighing 20 N is at rest on a rough
between the two blocks A and B is 0.3. The surface. A force of 8N is required before the
surface of the table is smooth. Then block just starts sliding but to continue the
uniform motion of block, the force is decreased
by one newton. What are the coefficients of static
and kinetic frictions?
(A) 1/8; 7/8 (B) 2/8; 8/7
(A) the acceleration of masses is 5.75 m/s2 (C) 0.4; 0.35 (D) 0.2; 0.7
(B) Tensions T1 and T2 in the string are 90.36 N 133. Starting from rest, a body slides down a 450
and 17.55 N
inclined plane in twice the time, it takes to slide
(C) acceleration of masses is 8.15 m/s2
down the same distance in the absence of
(D) Tensions T1 and T2 in the strings are 17.38 N
friction. The coefficient of friction between the
and 40.50 N
body and the inclined plane is
129. A block of mass 10kg lies on a rough inclined
(A) .33 (B) .25
plane of inclination  = sin-1(3/5) with the
(C) .75 (D) .80
horizontal when a force of 30 N is applied on the
block parallel to and upward the plane, the total
force exerted by the plane on the block is nearly
along (coefficient of friction is  = ¾)
(g=10m/s2)

50
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
134. Three blocks are connected as shown in figure 140. A uniform chain of length L lies on a table. If
m1 = 6kg, m2= 4kg and m3 = 8 kg, if coefficient the coefficient of friction is μ, then the maximum
of friction between the table and blocks be 0.4, length of the chain which can hang from the edge
the acceleration with which system moves is of the table without the chain sliding down is
2
(g=10m/s ) (A) (B)

(C) (D)
141. Consider a 14 –tyre truck, whose only rear 8
wheels are power driven (means only these 8
(A) 4/3 m/s2 (B) 1 m/s2
wheels can produce acceleration). These 8
(C) 2/3 m/s2 (D) 1/3 m/s2
wheels are supporting approximately half of the
135. In the above problem tension T between m2 entire load. If coefficient of friction between road
and m3 is and each of the rear tyres is 0.6, then what could
(A) 56/3 N (B) 46/3 N be the maximum attainable acceleration by this
(C) 112/3 N (D) 15 N truck? [Take g = 10m/s2] :
136. If a rough surface is polished beyond a certain (A) 6 m/s2 (B) 24 m/s2
limit then the magnitude of frictional force will (C) 3m/s2 (D) 10 m/s2
(A) increase 142. A block of mass 4 kg is pressed against the
(B) decrease wall by a force of 80 N as shown in the figure.
(C) sometimes increase and sometimes decrease Determine the value of friction force and block’s
(D) nothing can be said acceleration. [Take g = 10m/s2 and μs = 0.2, μk=
137. A body of mass 2 kg moving on a horizontal =0.15] :
surface with an initial velocity of 4 m/s comes to
rest after 2 second. If one wants to keep this
body moving on the same surface with a velocity
of 4m/s, the force required is :
(A) 8N, 0 m/s2 (B) 32N, 6 m/s2
(A) 8 N (B) 4 N
(C) 8N, 6 m/s2 (D) 32N, 2m/s2
(C) zero N (D) 2 N
143. Statement I: Frictional heat generated by the
138. Pushing force F that makes an angle θ to the
moving ski is the chief factor which promotes
horizontal is applied on a block of wt W placed
sliding in skiing while waxing the ski makes
on a horizontal table. If the angle of friction be
skiing more easy.
Φ, the magnitude of force required to move the
Statement II: Due to friction energy dissipates in
body is :
the form of heat as a result it melts the snow
(A) ( (B)
) ( ) below it. Wax is water repellent.
(C) ( (D) ( (A) Statement-I is true, Statement-II is true;
) )
Statement-II is a correct explanation for
139. A particle is projected up a 450 rough incline
Statement-I
with velocity v. The coefficient of friction is 0.5.
(B) Statement-I is true, Statement-II is true;
The speed with which it returns back to the
starting point is v’. Then v’/v Statement-II is a not a correct explanation for
(A) 1/√2 (B) ½ Statement-I
(C) 1/√3 (D) 1/3 (C) Statement-I is true; statement–II is false
(D) Statement-I is false; statement–II is true.

51
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 144. A cube weighing 10 N is lying on a rough 3m/s2 then the coefficient of static friction
inclined plane of slope 3 in 5. The coefficient of between the man’s shoes and the belt would be :
friction between the plane and the cube is 0.6.
The force necessary to move the cube up the
plane will be
(A) 10.8 N (B) 21.6 N (A) 70N, 0.2 (B) 70N, 0.3
(C) 6.4 N (D) 108 N (C) 700N, 0.1 (D) 700N, 0.3
145. A body slides down an inclined plane which 151. A block of mass 10kg is placed at a distance of
makes an angle of 450 with the horizontal. The 5m from the rear end of a long trolley as shown
coefficient of friction μ changes with the distance in figure. The coefficient of friction between the
X traveled in the downward direction as μ = 0.5 block and the surface below is 0.2. Starting from
X. Then the velocity is maximum when X is rest, the trolley is given a uniform acceleration of
(A) 0.2 m (B) 2.0 m 3m/s2. At what distance from the starting point
(C) 20 m (D) 1.0 m will the block fall off the trolley? Take g =
146. What happens to the coefficient of friction when 10m/s2
normal reaction for the same body is halved? (A) 15m (B) 20 m
(A) halved (B) doubled (C) 25 m (D) 30 m
(C) no change (D) none of these 152. A particle P is moving in a circle of radius ‘a’
147. When two surfaces are coated with a lubricant, with a uniform speed v. C is the centre of the
then they circle and AB is a diameter. The angular velocity
(A) stick to each other of P about A and C are in the ratio
(B)slide upon each other (A) 1:1 (B) 1:2
(C) roll upon each other (C) 2:1 (D) 4:1
(D) none of these 153. A long horizontal rod has a bead, which can slide
148. A 20 kg block is initially at rest. A 75N force is along its length and initially placed at a distance
required to set the block in motion. After the L from one end A of the rod. The rod is set in
motion a force of 60 N is applied to keep the block angular acceleration . If the coefficient of
moving with constant speed. The coefficient of friction between the rod and the bead is  and
static friction is: gravity is neglected then the time after which the
(A) 0.6 (B) 0.52 bead starts slipping is
(C) 0.44 (D) 0.375 (A) (/) (B) /
149. A block ‘A’ of mass 2kg rests on a rough
(C) 1/() (D) infinitesimal
horizontal plank, the coefficient of friction
154. A car of mass m is moving on a horizontal
between the plank and the block = 0.2. If the
circular path of radius r. At an instant its speed is
plank is pulled horizontally with a constant
v and is increasing at the rate  :
acceleration of 3.96 m/s2, the distance moved in
(A) the acceleration of the car is towards the
metre by the block on the plank in 5 second after
centre of the path
starting from rest, is
(B) the magnitude of frictional force on the car is
(A) 25 (B) 25 x 0.98
greater than (mv2/r)
(C) 25 x 1.98 (D) 0
(C) the coefficient of friction between the ground
150. The figure below shows a man standing
and car is not less than a/g.
stationary wrt a horizontal conveyor belt which
(D) the coefficient of friction between the ground
is accelerating at 1m/s2. What is the net force on
and the car is  = tan-1 (v2/rg)
the man in this situation? Take mass of person as
70kg. If the maximum acceleration of the belt for
which the man remains stationary wrt belt is
52
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
155. Two particles A and B are moving as shown in coefficient of friction for the lower half is given
fig. At this moment of time, the angular speed of by
A w.r.t B is (A) 2 tan  (B) tan 
(C)2 sin  (D) 2 cos 
159. A smooth block is released at rest on a 45o
incline and then slides a distance d. The time
(A) (va +vb)/r taken to slide is n times as much to slide on
(B) (va –vb)/r rough incline than on a smooth incline. The
(C) (vb sinb – va sin a)/r in anticlockwise coefficient of friction is:
direction 1 1
(A)  k  1  2 (B) k  1  2
(D) (vb sinb + va sin a)/r in anticlockwise n n
direction
1 1
156. A small sphere is attached to a cord and rotates (C)  s  1  2 (D) s  1  2
n n
in a vertical circle about a pt. O. If the average –1
160. The minimum velocity (in ms ) with which a car
speed of the sphere is increased, the cord is most
driver must traverse a flat curve of radius 150m
likely to break at the orientation when the mass
and coefficient of friction 0.6 to avoid skidding
is at:
is:
(A)60 (B) 30
(C)15 (D)25
161. A heavy uniform chain lies on a horizontal table
top. If the coefficient of friction between the
(A) bottom point B (B) top point A chain and the table surface is 0.25, then the
(C) the point D (D) the point C maximum fraction of the length of the chain that
157. A hemi–spherical bowl of radius 9.8 m is set into can hang over one edge of the table is
rotation about its axis of symmetry (figure). A (A)20% (B) 25%
small bead of mass 4g kept in the ball rotates (C)35% (D) 15%
with the bowl without slipping on its surface. If 162. If a ladder is not in equilibrium against a smooth
the radius through the bead makes an angle 600 vertical wall, then it can be made in equilibrium by
with the axis, then calculate the angular velocity (A)increasing the angle of inclination
of the bowl. Given: the inside surface of the bowl (B) decreasing the angle of inclination
is frictionless. (C)increasing the length of the ladder
(D) decreasing the length of the ladder
163. A stone is tied to a string of length l and is whirled
in a vertical circle with the other end of the string
as the centre. At a certain instant of time, the stone
–1 –1
(A) 2 rad s (B) 2 rad s is at its lowest position and has a speed u. The
magnitude of the change in velocity, as it reaches
(C) 4 rad s–1 (D) 3 rad s–1
position, where the string is horizontal (g being
158. The upper half of an inclined plane with
acceleration due to gravity) is
inclination  is perfectly smooth, while the lower
half is rough. A body starting from rest at the top (A) 2gl (B) u 2  gl
will again come to rest at the bottom, if the
(C) u  u  2gl
2
  
(D) 2 u  gl
2

53
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
164. If the normal force is doubled, then coefficient of
friction is
(A)halved (B) tripled (D)
(C)doubled (D) not changed 170. The driver of a car suddenly sees a broad wall in
165. A particle revolves around a circular path. The front of him. He should
acceleration of the particle is inversely (A)brake sharply
proportional to (B) turn sharply
(A)radius (B) velocity (C)(A) and (B) both
(C)mass of particle (D) both (B) and (C) (D) None of the above
166. A body is allowed to slide down a frictionless 171. A fireman of mass 60kg is holding a vertical
track freely under gravity. The track ends in a pole. The coefficient of static friction between
semicircular shaped part of diameter D. What his hands and the pole is 0.5. If he is able to
should be the height (minimum) from which the climb up the pole, what is the minimum force
body must fall, so that it completes the circle. with which he should press the pole with his
(A) 4D/5 (B) 5D/4 hands? Take g 10 ms–1
(C)D (D) 2D (A)1200 N (B) 600 N
167. A block of mass 2 kg rests on a rough inclined (C)300 N (D) 150 N
172. A vehicle is in motion with velocity v along a
plane making an angle 30o with the horizontal.
straight horizontal road. If the coefficient of
The coefficient of static friction between the friction between the tyres and road is , what
block and the plane is 0.7. The frictional force on would be the shortest distance in which the
the block is vehicle can stop?
(A)9.8 N (B) 0.79.8 3N
v v2
(A) (B)
2 g 2 g
(C) 98 3 (D) 0.7  9.8 N 1/2 2
 v2   v2 
168. A weight W rests on a rough horizontal plane. If (C)   (D)  
the angle of friction be , the least force that will  2 g   2 g 
move the body along the plane will be
(A)W cos  (B)W tan  173. Find vC (in m/s)
(C)W cot  (D) W sin 
169. A small block is shot into each of the four tracks
as shown below. Each of the tracks rises to the
same height. The speed with which the block
enters the track is the same in all cases. At the
highest point of the track, the normal reaction is
(A) 1 (B) 2
maximum in:
(C)3 (D) 4

174. Find vBA (in m/s)

(A)

(B)

1
(A) (B) 1
(C) 2
3
(C) (D) 2
2
54
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 ANSWER KEY
1 A 45 B 89 A 133 C
2 B 46 A 90 B 134 C
3 D 47 C 91 A 135 C
4 D 48 A 92 B 136 A
5 C 49 C 93 B 137 B
6 B 50 C 94 A 138 B
7 D 51 C 95 C 139 C
8 B 52 B 96 A 140 B
9 A 53 C 97 A 141 C
10 C 54 D 98 D 142 A
11 B 55 B 99 B 143 A
12 B 56 A 100 C 144 A
13 A 57 D 101 A 145 B
14 B 58 B 102 D 146 C
15 A 59 D 103 A 147 B
16 B 60 D 104 D 148 D
17 B 61 D 105 A 149 A
18 C 62 A 106 B 150 B
19 B 63 C 107 A 151 A
20 B 64 C 108 B 152 B
21 B 65 B 109 B 153 A
22 A 66 C 110 C 154 BC
23 B 67 B 111 C 155 C
24 A 68 B 112 A 156 A
25 D 69 B 113 C 157 B
26 C 70 D 114 B 158 A
27 B 71 A 115 C 159 A
28 C 72 D 116 D 160 B
29 C 73 C 117 C 161 A
30 B 74 B 118 A 162 A
31 C 75 D 119 D 163 C
32 A 76 B 120 B 164 D
33 B 77 A 121 B 165 A
34 D 78 D 122 A 166 B
35 A 79 C 123 C 167 A
36 A 80 B 124 D 168 B
37 C 81 A 125 A 169 A
38 B 82 C 126 C 170 A
39 D 83 C 127 A 171 A
40 D 84 D 128 AD 172 B
41 D 85 C 129 B 173 A
42 D 86 D 130 D 174 A
43 C 87 B 131 C
44 B 88 D 132 C

55
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 WORK, POWER AND ENERGY
Work Done by a Constant Force  There is a loss in K.E. of the body.
 The work done by the non-conservative force in a
closed path is not zero. i.e. Work done depends upon
the path followed.
 Examples: frictional forces, viscous forces etc.
Remember: Work depends upon reference frame.
Energy Capacity of doing work is the energy.
- Work & Energy have same units.
W  (F cos  ) s  Fs cos  or W  F.s
Mechanical Energy:
W  (F 1  F 2  F 3  .... F n ).( r 2  r 1 ) Kinetic Energy & Potential energy are called Mechanical
Positive work done: 0 o    90 o energies.
The positive work signifies that external force favors the Kinetic Energy: It is the energy possessed by the body
motion of the body. by virtue of its motion. If a mass M is moving with
Negative work: 90 o    180 o velocity v, then its kinetic energy is given by K.E. =
The negative work signifies that external force opposes ½ Mv2
motion of the body. - K.E. of the body is equal to the work done by the
Zero Work:   90 o or displacement = zero in the d’n of body before coming to rest.
applied force. - If work is done on a system, its kinetic energy may
The zero work done signifies that the external force don’t increase and if the work is done by the system, then
effect motion. its kinetic energy may decrease.
Work Done by a Variable Force - The K.E. changes only when we have a component
dW  F. d s or B
W   F. d s
of the force parallel or anti parallel to the velocity.
A
- Work–Energy theorem states that work done is equal
x y z
or W  x B Fx dx  y B Fy dy  z B Fz dz to the Kinetic Energy of the body. i.e. W = K
A A A

Area under force-displacement curve with proper - Kinetic energy can never be negative.
algebraic sign represents work done by the force. Potential Energy The energy of a system due to its
Work done by internal sources: Self-propelled objects position or configuration or any condition of stress or
like a car, helicopter, human beings etc., that have their strain is called potential energy.
own internal energy sources can be accelerated by a net e.g. Compressed spring, deformed elastic body, stretched
external force arising from its interaction with bow, charged capacitor, charge in electric field etc.
r
 
surroundings. - Change in PE, U 2  U1  r12 F. dr  W
As a rule, such a force does no net work on active body dU   U ˆ U ˆ U 
-  F  F   i j kˆ 
& work done is not equal to change in KE. dx  x y z 
No energy is transferred to body from the environment via - A single particle never possess PE. PE is defined
reaction force, even though that force accelerates the body. only for system.
Conservative Forces The conservative forces are the - PE depends upon frame of reference.
forces under the action of which a body performs no - In general, PE between two particles at infinite
work done in a closed path. distance is taken as zero.
 Under the action of conservative forces, a body - Gravitational potential energy = mgh (iff h<<Radius
return to its starting point with the same Kinetic of earth)
Energy with which it is projected. mgh
- Gravitational PE for any value of h U
 work done is independent of the path followed by the 1
h
R
body.
- PE depends upon reference chosen but change in PE
 All central forces are conservative.
does not depend upon reference of PE.
 Examples: Electrostatic forces, gravitational forces
- Potential energy can be +ve or –ve or zero.
etc.
- The potential energy is +ve when forces involved are
Non – conservative Forces They are the forces under the
repulsive. e.g., the P.E. between two similar charges.
action of which the work done depends on the path
followed.
56
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
- The potential energy is –ve when the forces involved  Work Energy theorem can be applied in case of non-
are attractive. e.g. gravitational potential energy. inertial frame but in that case we will also consider
PE of a spring: F   k x & U
1 2 1
kx  Fx 
F2 work done by pseudo force.
2 2 2k Power: is defined as the rate at which the body can do
1
Increment in elastic potential energy  k ( x 22  x 12 ) the work.
2
W W
Also k  1/L Where L = length of spring Average power (Pav. )  
t t
 If spring are in parallel then k = k1+ k2  
dW F. ds  
Instantaneous power (Pinst. )   [As dW  F. d s ]
 & in case of series 1  1  1 dt dt
k k1 k2  

Pinst  F. v [As v  d s ]
 If a spring is cut into two parts l1 and l2 , then dt

k1 
1 1
, k2  , k 
1  To obtain n times work from same pipe in same time
l1 l2 l1  l 2
the force is increased F’ = n2F
Mass Energy Equivalence: Mass and energy are inter and power, P’ = n3 P
convertible. E = Mc2  A car of mass ‘m’ is driven with constant power P
Work Done in Pulling the Chain Against Gravity then the velocity reached by car after traveling a
MgL
W  distance x is v = (3Px/m)1/3
2n 2 1/2 1/2
L/n  2 Pt 
& s  
8P 
 v   t3/2
 m   9m 
If chain is released,
Two moving bodies of mass M1 & M2 are stopped with
Velocity of chain is given by,  1 
v gL 1  2  same retarding force. If they have same K.E.  same
 n 
stopping distance and If they have same momentum 
Work-Energy Theorem: Work done by ALL forces is
equal to change in KE. same stopping time
 Work done by conservative forces = - PE

57
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 COLLISIONS

58
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 59
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 HOME ASSIGNMENT
1. A rock weighing 20N falls from a height of 16m and 9. A pump delivers water at the rate V m/s. By what
sinks 0.6m into ground. From energy consideration, factor should its power be raised so that it delivers
the average force between the rock and ground as water at the rate of n Vm3s-1.
rock sinks is : (A) √n (B) n
2
(A) 442 N (B) 553 N (C) n (D) n3
(C) 664 N (D) 775 N 10. If speed of particle increases by 2m/s, K.E. is
2. The block starting from A stops at C and BC has doubled. The original speed in m/s was
friction μ. The value of μ is : (A) √2 +1 (B) √2(√2+1)
(C) 2(√2 +1) (D) √2
11. Power supplied to a particle of mass 2kg varies with
time as W, t is in seconds. If velocity of particle is
v = 0 at t = 0, the velocity at t = 2 second is :
(A) 1m/s (B) 4m/s
(A) 0.22 (B) 0.33 (C) 2m/s (D) 2√2 m/s
(C) 0.44 (D) 0.55 12. A particle moves on a rough horizontal ground with
3. A woman is drawing water from a well with a bucket, velocity u. If ¾ th of its K.E. is lost in friction in time
which leaks uniformly. The bucket when full weighs t, the μ is :
20kg and when arrives at top only half the water (A) (B)
remains. The depth of water in well is 20m. (g =
10m/s2) The work done is (C) (D)
(A) 1000 J (B) 2000 J 13. The P.E. of a particle of mass m is given by U = ½
(C) 3000 J (D) 4000 J Kx2 for x < 0 and U =0 for x ≥0. If total mechanical
4. A object of mass 10kg falls from rest through a
energy of particle is E, then its speed at x = is
vertical distance of 20m and acquires a velocity of
10m/s. The work done by air is : (g = 10m/s2) (A) 0 (B)
(A) –1000 J (B) –1500 J
(C) –2000 J (D) –3000 J (C) (D)
5. Under the action of a force, a 2kg mass moves such
14. A chain of length l and mass M is held on a
that its position x is given by x = t3/3 → x(m) → t(s).
frictionless table with 1/nth part hanging over the
The work done in first two seconds is :
edge. The work done in pulling the chain is directly
(A) 16 J (B) 1.6 J
proportional to :
(C) 160 J (D) 1600 J
(A) √n (B) n
6. A body of weight mg is hanging on a string which -2
(C) n (D) n-3
extends its length by l. The work done in extending
15. A constant force F is applied on a body. The power
the string is :
(P) generated is related to time (t) elapsed is
(A) mgl (B) mgl/2
(A) P α t2 (B) P α t
(C) 2mgl (D) none
(C) P α√t (D) P α t3/2
7. A body of mass 500g is taken up an inclined plane of
16. A car is drived by constant power P. IF the car
length 10m and height 5m, then released to slide down moves over a distance x, then velocity v attained by
to bottom. μ = 0.1. The amount of work over round is the car will be related to x as :
(A) 5 J (B) 15J (A) v α x1/3 (B) v α x1/2
-1/2
(C) 5√3 J (D) 5/√3 J (C) v α x (D) v α x-1/3
8. Two springs A and B with spring constants Kn = 2KB 17. A uniform chain of length 2m is held on a smooth
are stretched by applying equal forces. If energy horizontal table so that half of it hangs over the edge.
If is released from rest. The velocity with which it
stored in A is E, then in B is
leaves the table is nearest to :
(A) E/n (B) E/2 (A) 2m/s (B) 4m/s
(C) E (D) 2E (C) 6m/s (D) 8 m/s
60
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
18. Two identical 5kg blocks are moving with same floor. The coefficient of restitution between the
speed of 2m/s towards each other along a frictionless particle and the floor is e.
horizontal surface. The two blocks collide and stick (A) the impulse delivered by the floor to the body is
together and come to rest. The work done by external mu (1+e) sinθ
forces is : (B) tan  = e tanθ
(A) 0 J (B) 2.5 J
(C) v  u 1  (1  e 2 ) sin 2 
(C) 10.0 J (D) 20.0 J
19. A particle of mass M is moving along a circular path (D) the ratio of the kinetic energy to the initial kinetic
of constant radius R. The centripetal acceleration energy is cos2θ + e2 sin2θ
varies as a = k2Rt2, where k is a constant and t is time. 25. A body of mass 20 kg is at rest. A force of 5 newton
The instantaneous power delivered to particle by the is applied on it. The work done in first second will be
force acting on it is : (A) 5/8 J (B) 8/5 J
(C) 5/4 J (D) 4/5 J
(A) K2R2t (B) K2R2t
26. The potential energy of a system is
(C) MK2R2t (D) 2M K2R2t (A) always positive (B) always negative
20. A nucleus of mass M emits a γ –ray photon of (C) an absolute quantity (D) a relative quantity
frequency v. The loss of internal energy is : 27. A particle is moving in a potential region given by U
(A) hv (B) h2v2/2mc2 = K(x2 + y2 + z2). The force acting on the particle is
(C) hv(1+ ) (D) hv(1– ) given by
21. The P.E. of two atoms in a molecule is given by U(x) (A) – 2K (xi +yj + kz ) (B) K (xi +yj + kz )
= − where a and b are +ve constants and x is (C) (K/2) (xi +yj + kz ) (D) K (x2i +y2j + k2z )
28. Two springs P and Q are identical, but Q is stiffer
the distance between the atoms. For the atoms to be
than P. When both of them are stretched by the same
in stable equilibrium, x equals
force then more work is done in –
(A) (B) 0 (A) P (B) Q
(C) both (D) nothing can be said
(C) (D) 29. A body of mass m is accelerated to velocity v in time t’.
The work done by the force as a function of time t will
22. A neutron travelling with a velocity v and K.E. E
be –
collides perfectly elastically head on with nucleus of
(A) mv2t2/2t’2 (B)( ½) (mv/t’)2t2
an atom of mass number A at rest. The fraction of
(C) mvt2/2t’ (D) mvt3/2t’
total energy retained by the neutron is :
30. A balls fall from a height of 5 m and strikes the roof
(A) (B) of a lift. If at the time of elastic collision, lift is
moving in the upward direction with a velocity of 1
(C) (D)
m/s, then the velocity with which the ball rebounds
23. A ball is bouncing down a flight of stairs. The after collision will be –
coefficient of restitution is e. The height of each step (A) 11 m/s downwards (B) 12 m/s upwards
is d and the ball bounces one step at each bounce. (C) 13 m/s upwards (D) 12 m/s downwards
After each bounce the ball rebounds to a height h 31. A body is dropped from a height h. When loss in its
above the next lower step. Neglect width of each step potential energy is U then its velocity is v. The mass of
in comparison to h and assume the impacts to be the body is
effectively head on. : (A) U2/2v (B) 2v/U
h h (C) 2v/U 2
(D) 2U/v2
(A)  1 e 2
(B)  1 e
d d 32. A particle moves in a potential region given by U =
h 1 h 1 8x2 – 4x + 400 J. Its state of equilibrium will be –
(C)  (D) 
d 1 e2 d 1 e (A) x = 25 m (B) x = 0.25 m
24. A particle strikes a horizontal smooth floor with a (C) x = 0.025 m (D) x = 2.5 m
velocity u making an angle θ with the floor and
rebounds with velocity v making an angle  with the

61
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
33. Two bodies have same kinetic energy. They are (A) f = A (A+1)2 (B) f= A /(A+1)2
stopped by applying same retarding force. Which (C) f = uA /(A+1)2 (D) f = 4A/(A+1)2
body will stop first? 40. In the above question f will be maximum when –
(A) lighter one (B) heavier one (A) A = 0 (B) A = 1
(C) both equal (D) can bot be predicted (C) A = 0.5 (D) A =0.25
34. In the above question which body will cover more 41. Two masses m1 = 2kg and m2 = 5kg are moving on a
distance before coming to rest? frictionless surface with velocities 10m/s and 3 m/s
(A) lighter one (B) heavier one respectively. m2 is ahead of m1. An ideal spring of
(C) both equal (D) not definite spring constant k = 1120 N/m is attached on the back
35. For the path PQR in a conservative force field (fig.), side of m2. The maximum compression of the spring
the amounts of work done in carrying a body from P will be, if on collision the two bodies stick together –
to Q and from Q to R are 5 J and 2 J respectively. The
work done in carrying the body from P to R will be –

(A) 0.51 m (B) 0.062 m

(C) 0.25 m (D) 0.72 m
(A) 7 J (B) 3 J 42. The mass of a pendulum bob is m. It is left from its
(C) 21 J (D) zero horizontal position. It collides elastically with another
36. Two particles each of mass m and travelling with body of mass 2m situated at its mean position. The
velocities u1 and u2 collide perfectly inelastically. The angle made by the pendulum with the vertical after
loss of energy will be – rebound will be –
(A) ( ½ )m(u1 – u2 )2 (B) (1/4) m(u1 – u2 )2 (A) 300 (B) cos –1(8/9)
–1
(C) m(u1 – u2 )2 (D) 2 m(u1 – u2 )2 (C) cos (1/18) (D) cos-1(17/18)
37. The u(x) – x curve for system is shown in the figure. 43. A solid sphere is moving and it makes an elastic
Its force curve will be – collision with another stationary sphere of half of its
own radius. After collision it comes to rest. The ratio
of the densities of materials of second sphere and first
sphere is –
(A) 2 (B) 4
(C) 8 (D) 16
(A) (B) 44. A cubical vessel of height 1m is full of water. The
work done in taking water out of the vessel will be –
(A) 5000 J (B) 10000 J
(C) 5 J (D) 10 J
45. A block falls down from a table 0.6m high. It falls on
an ideal vertical spring of constant 4 x 102 N/m.
(C) (D)
Initially the spring is 25 cm long and its length
becomes 10 cm after compression. The mass of the
38. A ball moving with velocity of 9m/s collide with block is (g= 10m/s2)
another similar stationary ball. After the collision (A) 0.5 kg (B) 2 kg
both the balls move in directions making an angle of (C) 1.2 kg (D) 0.9 kg
300 with the initial direction. After the collision their 46. The mass of a bucket full of water is 15 kg. It is being
speed will be pulled up from a 15 m deep well. Due to a hole in the
(A) 2.6 m/s (B) 5.2 m/s bucket 6 kg water flows out of the bucket. The work
(C) 0.52 m/s (D) 52 m/s done in drawing the bucket out of the well will be –
39. A body of mass M and moving with velocity u makes (A) 900 J (B) 1500 J
a head – on elastic collision with another stationary (C) 1800 J (D) 2100 J
body of m. If A =m/M, then the ratio (f) of the loss of
energy of M to its initial energy will be –
62
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
47. A ball after falling from a height of 10m strikes the (C) EK z2/3 (D) EK z2
roof of a lift which is descending down with a 55. A liquid in a U tube is changed from position (a) to
velocity of 1 m/s. The recoil velocity of the ball will position (b) with the help of a pump. The density of
be – liquid is d and area of cross – section of the tube is a.
(A) 8 m/s (B) 11 m/s The work done in pumping the liquid will be –
(C) 12 m/s (D) 15 m/s
48. A frictionless steel ball of radius 2 cm, moving on a
horizontal plane with a velocity of 5 cm/s, collides
head – on with another stationary steel ball of radius
3 cm. The velocities of two bodies after collision will
(A) dgha (B) dgh2a
respectively be (in cm/s)
(C) 2gdh2a (D) 4dgh2a
(A) 2.7, 2.3 (B) – 2.7, 2.3
56. A block of mass 1 kg is pulled up on an incline of
(C) 2.7, –2.3 (D) – 2.7, – 2.3
angle 300 with the horizontal. The block moves with
49. A particle of mass m, moving with velocity kv,
an acceleration of 1m/s2. The power delivered by the
collides with another particle of mass mn moving
pulling force at t = 4s will be –
with velocity v in the same line. The first particle
(A) 12 W (B) 36 W
comes to rest after collision. The velocity of second
(C) 24 W (D) 48 W
particle after collision will be –
57. In the above problem, the average power delivered
(A) (1+k/n)v (B) (1 – k/n)v
during 4 seconds after the motion starts, will be –
(C) (1+n/k)v (D) (1 – n/k)v
(A) 12 W (B) 36 W
50. A 10 kg block is pulled in the vertical plane along a
(C) 24 W (D) 48 W
frictionless surface in the form of an arc of a circle of
58. A particle of mass m is moving in a circular path of
radius 10m. The applied force is of 200 N as shown
constant radius r. The centripetal acceleration of the
in the figure. If the block started from, rest at A, the
particle (ac) is varying with time t according to
velocity at B would be –
following relation
ac = k2rt2
where K is a constant. The power delivered to the
particle by the forces acting on it will be –
(A) 1.732 m/s (B) 17.32 m/s (A) mk2r2t2 (B) m2k2r2t2
(C) 173.2 m/s (D) none of these (C) m2k2rt (D) mk2r2t
51. A smooth sphere of mass m, moving with velocity u 59. A particle of mass 1 gm executes an oscillatory
on a smooth surface, collides with another smooth motion on a concave surface of radius of curvature
sphere of same size but of mass 2m. The velocity 2m. If the particle starts its motion from a point at a
range of second sphere after collision will be – height of 1 cm from the horizontal and the coefficient
(A) v > 2u/3 (B) v< u/3 of friction is 0.01, then the total distance covered by
(C) v=u (D) u/3  v  2u/3 the particle before it comes to rest, will be
52. In the above problem, if the first sphere comes to rest
after collision, then loss in kinetic energy will be
(A) mu2 (B) (½ )mu2
(C) ( ¼) mu2 (D) ( 1/8) mu2
53. In [Link].44, if the collision is perfectly inelastic, then (A) 5.001 m (B) 0.015 m
loss in kinetic energy will be : (C) 1.005 m (D) none of these
(A) (½) mu2 (B) ( ¼) mu2 60. A man pulls a bucket full of water from h metre deep
(C) (1/9) mu2 (D) (1/3) mu2 well. If the mass of the rope is m and mass of bucket
54. A particle is moving linearly along z – axis. The full of water is M, then the work done by the man is
particle is imparted a constant power by a force. The (A) [(M/2)+m]gh (B) [M+m]gh/2
kinetic energy of the particle is related to its (C) [(M+m/2)]gh (D) (M+m)gh
displacement as follows :
(A) EK z (B) EK z3/2
63
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
61. A small block of mass m is kept on a rough inclined 68. The potential energy ( in joule) of a body of mass 2
plane of angle  fixed in an elevator. The elevator kg moving in the x –y plane is given by U = 6x +8y
goes up with a uniform velocity v and the block does where the position coordinates x and y are measured
not slide down. The work done by the frictional force in metre. If the body is at rest at point (6m, 4m) at
on the block in time t will be – time t =0, it will cross the y –axis at time t equal to
(A) mgvt sin 2 (B) mgvt cos 2 (A) 1 s (B) 2 s
(C) mgvt sin 
2
(D) 0 (C) 3 s (D) 4 s
A block of mass 2 kg is dropped from a height of 40 69. A body of mass m moving with a velocity v in the x–
cm on a vertical spring having force constant 1960 direction collides with a body of mass M moving
62. N/m. What will be the maximum distance x of the with a velocity V in the Y –direction. They stick
compression of the spring? together during collision. Then
(A) 10 cm (B) 15 cm (A) the magnitude of the momentum of the composite
(C) 20 cm (D) 0 body is ( mv ) 2  ( MV ) 2
63. A ball of mass m is shot vertically upwards with a
(B) the composite body moves in a direction making
velocity v. After the time t = v/19.6 seconds the
MV
kinetic energy is reduced to (g= 9.8 m/s2) a angle θ = tan-1 with the x –axis
(A) ½ (B) 1/3 mv
(C) ¼ (D) 1/5 (C) the loss of kinetic energy as a result of collision is
64. Under the action of a force a 5 kg body moves such 1 Mm(V 2  v 2 )
that the displacement ‘x’ as a function of time ‘t’ is 2 M m
given by x = t3/3, where x is in metres and t is in (D) all the above choices are correct
seconds. Work done by the force in 2 sec is : 70. A 15 g ball is shot from a spring gun whose spring has
(A) 20 J (B) zero a force constant of 600 N/m. The spring is compressed
(C) 40 J (D) 30 J by 5cm. The greatest possible horizontal range of the
65. A 0.01Kg block collides with a horizontal massless ball for this compression is (g = 10 m/s2)
spring of force constant k= 2N/m. The spring get (A) 6.0 m (B) 10.0 m
compressed by 0.4 m. If the coefficient of kinetic (C) 12.0 m (D) 8.0 m
friction between the block and the surface is 0.5. The 71. A moving neutron collides with a stationary α –
speed of the block at the time of the collision is : (g= particle. The fraction of the kinetic energy lost by the
10m/s2) neutron is :
(A) 16/25 (B) 9/25
(C) 3/5 (D) 2/5
(A) 3m/s (B) 1.5 m/s 72. The bob A of a simple pendulum is
(C) 6 m/s (D) 4.5 m/s released when the string makes an angle
66. A particle of mass m is projected with velocity u at an of 450 with the vertical. It hits another bob
angle α with horizontal. During the period, when the B of the same material and same mass
particle descends from highest point to the position, kept at rest on the table. If the collision is
where its velocity vector makes an angle α/2 with elastic
horizontal, work done by gravity is : (A) both A and B rise to the same height
(A) ½ mu2tan2 α (B) ½ mu2tan2 α/2 (B) both A and B come to rest at B
(C) both A and B move with the velocity of A
1 2  1 
(C) mu cos sin  (D) mu 2 cos 2  tan 2
2 2
(D) A comes to rest and B moves with the velocity of A
2 2 2 2
73. The power of a water pump is 2 kW. If g = 10 m/s2,
67. A small sphere of mass m is suspended by a thread of
then the amount of water it can raise in one minute to
length l. It is raised upto the height of suspension
a height of 10 m is :
with thread fully stretched and released. Then the
(A) 2000 litre (B) 1000 litre
maximum tension in thread will be –
(C) 100 litre (D) 1200 litre
(A) mg (B) 2mg
(C) 3mg (D) 6mg

64
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
74. A block of mass 10 kg accelerates uniformly from 81. The minimum speed of the particle is :
rest to a speed of 2 m/s in 30 seconds. What is the (A) 1m/s (B) √40 m/s
work done on the block at the end of first 10 seconds? (C) √58 m/s (D) zero
Neglect friction 82. The maximum value of potential energy is :
(A) 20 J (B) 20/3 J (A) zero (B) 20J
(C) 20/6 J (D) 20/9 J (C) 29J (D) 49J
75. A ball of mass m is dropped from a height h on a 83. The least value of x (position of particle is) will be :
platform fixed at the top of a vertical spring. The (A) zero (B) –2
platform is displaced by a distance x. The spring (C) –√29 +2 (D) √29 +2
constant is
84. The largest value of x will be :
(A) zero (B) –2
(C) –√29 +2 (D) √29 +2
85. The position of equilibrium and its nature is
(A) x =2, unstable
(B) x=2, stable
2mg 2mgh (C) x=2, neutral
(A) (B)
x x 2 (D) no equilibrium position exists.
2mg (h  x) 2mg (h  x) 86. A 2000 kg elevator rises from rest in the basement to
(C) (D) the fourth floor, a distance of 25m. As it passes the
x2 h2
fourth floor, its speed is 3.0 m/s. There is a constant
76. A ball is dropped from a height h. If the coefficient of
frictional force of 500 N. Calculate the work done by
restitution is e, then to what height will it rise after
the lifting mechanism :
jumping twice from the ground?
(A) 511.5 kJ (B) 51.15 kJ
(A) eh/2 (B) 2eh
(C) 421.5 kJ (D) 486.7 kJ
(C) eh (D) e4h
87. A body of mass 10 kg is moved with uniform speed
77. A block of mass m is pulled by a constant power P
on a rough horizontal surface for a distance of 2m.
placed on a rough horizontal plane. The friction
The work done is 150 J. The same surface is inclined
coefficient between the block and surface is μ. The
to the horizontal at 30o and same body is moved over
maximum velocity of the block is :
inclined plane for a distance of 2m. The work done
(A) (B) against friction is : (g= 10m/s2)
(C) (D) (A) 250 J (B) 50 J
(C) 150 J (D) none of the above
Passage (78 - 85): A single conservative f(x) acts on a 88. A small block of mass m is released from rest from
m = 1 kg particle moving along the x –axis. The point D and slides down DGF and reaches the point F
potential energy U(x) is given by: with speed vF. The coefficient of kinetic friction
U(x) = 20+(x–2) 2 between block and both the surfaces DG and GF is ,
Where x is in metres. At x = 5m, a particle has the velocity of vF is
kinetic energy of 20J.
78. The total mechanical energy of the system is
(A) zero (B) 20J
(C) 29J (D) 49 J
79. The minimum potential energy of the particle is :
(A) zero (B) 20J
(C) 29J (D) 49J
80. The maximum speed of the particle is : (A) 2g  y  x  (B) 2 g  y   x 
(A) 1m/s (B) 29m/s
(C) √29 m/s (D) √58 m/s (C) 2gy 
(D) 2g y  x
2 2


65
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
89. An electric motor of 20 kW power drives a water 92. Which of the following statement is not correct
pump. If 100 litres of water is lifted per second to a always?
height of 10m, then the efficiency of the motor is … (A) work done by all forces is equal to change in
Given : g = 10m/s2 kinetic energy
(A) 10% (B) 20% (B) work done by all forces is equal to the sum of the
(C) 50% (D) 80% work done by each force individually
90. A body of mass 5kg rests on a rough horizontal (C) work done by all forces is equal to the work done
surface of coefficient of friction 0.2. The body is by the resultant force during same displacement
pulled through a distance of 10 m by a horizontal of the particle
force of 25N. The kinetic energy acquired by it is (D) work done by internal forces is equal to loss in
2
(take g = 10m/s ) : potential energy.
(A) 200 J (B) 150 J
(C) 100 J (D) 50 J
91. In the shown diagram mass of A is m and that of B is
2m. All the surfaces are smooth. System is released
from rest with spring unstretched. Then, the
maximum extension (xm) in spring will be :

(A) (B)
(C) (D)

ANSWER KEY
1 B 24 ABCD 47 C 70 B
2 B 25 A 48 B 71 A
3 C 26 D 49 A 72 D
4 B 27 A 50 B 73 D
5 A 28 A 51 D 74 D
6 B 29 A 52 C 75 C
7 C 30 B 53 D 76 D
8 D 31 D 54 C 77 C
9 D 32 B 55 B 78 D
10 C 33 A 56 C 79 B
11 C 34 C 57 A 80 D
12 A 35 A 58 D 81 D
13 B 36 B 59 C 82 D
14 C 37 B 60 C 83 CD
15 B 38 B 61 C 84 D
16 A 39 D 62 A 85 B
17 B 40 B 63 C 86 A
18 A 41 C 64 C 87 D
19 C 42 B 65 C 88 B
20 C 43 C 66 D 89 C
21 C 44 A 67 C 90 B
22 A 45 D 68 B 91 D
23 C 46 C 69 D 92 D

66
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 SYSTEM OF PARTICLE AND ROTATIONAL MOTION
1. The center of mass of a body is a point where the is called as binary system. Some of the examples of
whole mass of the body is supposed to be binary systems in nature are :
concentrated. If all the forces acting on the body (1) Binary star system
were applied on the center of mass, nature of motion (2) Earth-moon system
of the body shall remain unaffected. (3) diatomic molecules.
n
 17. Centre of mass of few bodies :
 m r i i
r  i 1 ----------------------------------------------------------------
M Shape of the body Position of centre of mass
2. Sum of moments of masses of all the particles of the ----------------------------------------------------------------
body, about the center of mass is zero. 1. Uniform rod Middle point of the rod.
3. The center of mass of a system of two particles lies 2. Cubical box Point of intersection of
in between them on the line joining the particles. diagonals

4. For system of two particles, use m1 r1  m 2 r2  0 3. Circular ring Centre of the ring
  4. Circular disc Centre of the disc
r r
5. In case, two mass are equal, rcm  1 2
2 5. Triangular plane Point of intersection of the
6. The location of the center of mass depends on the lamina medians of the triangle
shape and nature of distribution of mass of the body. 6. Sphere Centre
7. The location of center of mass does not depend upon 7. Cylinder Middle point of the axis.
choice of Co–ordinate system or reference frame. 8. Cone On the line joining the
8. The location of center of mass remains unchanged in apex to the centre of the
rotatory motion. base at a distance 1/4 of
9. When no external force acts on a body, its center of the length of this line
mass will remain either at rest or move with constant from the base.
velocity. 18. To find CM of an object with continuous mass
10. Centre of mass of a system is not a physical point. distribution,   r dm
rcm 
M
There may or may not be any mass present
physically at the CM. or  x dm
;  y dm  z dm
X cm 
M
Ycm 
M
; Zcm 
M
11. Velocity of center of mass of particles of masses, m 1
  19. If some area is removed from a rigid body, then the
and m 2 , moving with speeds v 1 and v 2 is given by position of CM of the remaining portion is obtained
 
 m v  m2 v2 from the following formulae:
v1  1 1    
m1  m2  m r  m2 r2  A r  A2 r2
rCM  1 1 or rCM  1 1
12. Acceleration of center of mass of particles of masses m1  m2 A1  A2
  m1 x1  m2 x2 A1 x1  A2 x2
m 1 and m 2 , moving with acceleration a1 and a 2 is xCM  or xCM 
  m1  m2 A1  A2
given by a1  m1 a1  m2 a 2 Similarly for yCM and zCM
m1  m2
20. If an object moves over another object and there is no
13. Internal forces can change the momentum of external force along horizontal direction, then CM
individual particles but not that of the center of mass. will remain at rest and distance covered by lower
14. For all symmetrical bodies with uniform distribution m x
object is given by x Lower  m
upper relative
of mass, center of mass coincides with the
upper  m Lower
geometrical center of the body.
21. If two bodies moves, then change in position of CM
15. Conservation of Linear Momentum: when the  
 m1r1  m2r2
vector sum of the external forces acting on a system r
will be given by CM 
m1  m2
of particles is zero (no resultant force of the system), 2R
the total linear momentum of the system remains 22. CM of semicircular wire is at yCM 

constant. 23. CM of semicircular disc is at yCM 
4R
16. BINARY SYSTEMS IN NATURE 3
24. CM of hemispherical shell is at R
A system of two bodies that are bound to each other y CM 
2
by gravity and orbit about a common centre of mass

67
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
25. CM of solid hemisphere is at yCM 
3R In such questions generally (1) Maximum extension
8
(2) Maximum/ minimum velocities of blocks is asked
26. Laboratory frame of reference: We know that the and initial velocity/ies is/are given.
position of a point in the space is located by the three Even if external force is acting on spring/ block
coordinates which are taken with respect to the origin system, try your question in CM reference frame. In
of a reference system. When the origin of the such cases, two blocks will experience equal and
reference system is a point rigidly fixed to the opposite force. Then try WORK ENRGY theorem.
laboratory, it is known as laboratory frame of You may also try concept of reduced mass if
reference. maximum extension is asked in question.
27. Centre of mass frame of reference: When the Remember: At the instant of maximum extension or
origin of the reference system is rigidly fixed at the maximum compression of spring, blocks are
center of mass of an isolated system, it is known as stationary in CM reference frame.
center of mass of reference of C-frame. In this frame, 31. Law of conservation is applicable in all inertial
obviously, the position vector of center of mass is reference frames.
zero. So the velocity of center of mass is zero. 32. Law of conservation of linear momentum is a
Consequently, the linear momentum of the system is fundamental law of nature and is not a consequence
also zero. Due to this reason, this frame of reference of Newton’s IInd law of motion.
is also called as zero momentum frame. Further when Rigid Body: A body is said to be rigid, if distance
no external force acts, the center of mass moves with between constituting particles do not change on applying
constant velocity. This is a parallel case of laboratory external force. No body in this world is perfectly rigid
frame (known as inertial frame). So in the absence of body.
any external force, the center of mass frame is an Concept: All points in a rigid body rotates with the same
inertial frame of reference. angular velocity & same angular acceleration, since each
28. The reference frame in which CM is at rest is particle in the body moves through the same angle in the
referred as CM frame. Total momentum of system is same time interval.
zero in CM frame. Torque & Angular momentum
29. Momentum of particles in CM frame is given by:
     1. Torque is measured as the product of the force and 
p1 / CM  m 1 ( v1  v CM )   ( v1  v 2 )   v rel
    
distance of the line of the action of the force from the
p 2 / CM  m 2 ( v 2  v CM )   ( v 2  v 1 )   v rel axis of rotation.
30. Important points for CM frame of reference 2. Torque measures the turning effect of the force about
(i) KE of system in CM reference frame is given by the axis of rotation.
1 m1m2 iˆ ˆj k̂
KEsystem/ CM   v2rel where     
2 m1  m2  rF  x y z
(ii) vrel is independent of reference frame. Fx Fy Fz
(iii) For a two particle system, momentum of both
 = r F sin  Where  is angle between r and F
particles has same magnitude.
 = xFy – y Fx
(iv) CM is zero momentum frame.
Units: – Nm Dimensional Formula: [ML2T–2]
(v) KE Total  KE of CM  KE wrt CM  Torque is an axial vector.
(vi) Consider a wheel rolling on a surface. An 3. Radial component of force makes no contribution to
observer in CM reference frame will see that the torque only the transverse component of force
contributes to the torque.
each particle of wheel in pure rotational motion
4. Work done by torque in turning the body through d
is dw = (d)
about CM. But for an observer in ground frame
Power of the torque P = dw/ dt = (d/ dt) = w
both translational and rotational motions are
5.
involved. 6. Torque in rotational motion is analogue of force in
(vii) It is always good idea to solve spring related transnational motion
problems in CM reference frame, especially   
7. L  r  p ; L  r p sin
when maximum/ minimum constraints are used
Lz = xpy – ypx
in question.  
 is angle between r and p .
8. Rate of change of angular momentum is torque

68
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
  dL  d of the moments of inertia of the plane lamina about two
 = = I   Where I = M.I. of the body
dt dt mutually  axes passes through the lamina.
9. Like torque, angular momentum depends only Iz = Ix + Iy
transverse component of linear momentum and not  MI is always defined w.r.t the axis of rotation
on the radial component.  MI is neither a scalar nor a vector in fact it is a
 
10. L  2m A  Where  A is called areal velocity. tensor.
 
 t  t
 MI of a body depends upon (i) axis of rotation (ii)
11. of conservation of angular momentum. If orientation of axis (iii) size, shape of body (iv) mass
  
  0 then L  constant . distribution with in body.
In the absence of any external torque the total  MI plays the same role in rotatory motion as mass
angular momentum of the system of particles or a does in translatory motion.
rigid body remains conserved  The moment of Inertia of a cube about its body
12. Kepler’s IInd law is based on law of conservation of diagonal is minimum.
angular momentum.  The ratio of MI of two discs of same mass and same
13. If there had been a single propeller in a helicopter thickness but of different densities is given as
then due to non–conservation of angular momentum I1 R
2

the helicopter would turn in reverse direction.  12  2
I2 R2 1
14. When angular momentum is conserved
Iw = constant or K2n = constant Concept
Here, I = MI, w = angular Velocity, I0   dm , the zeroth moment (the total system mass)
K = radius of gyration & n = frequency
I 0   r dm , the first moment (used to calculate the
Couple A couple is defined as combination of two equal
but oppositely directed force not acting along the same centre of mass)
line. The effect of couple is known by its moment of I0  r 2 dm , the second moment (rotational inertia)
  

couple or torque by a couple τ  r  F .
How to find MI of a composite body (Problem solving
 Moment of couple does not depend upon choice of
tactics)
axis of rotation.
1. Breakup the body into components.
Moment of Inertia: The moment of inertia of a rigid
2. Determine the MI of each component about the given
body is sum of the product of the masses of different
axis of rotation.
particles and the square of their radial distance from the
3. If the rigid body can be segmented into several
axis of rotation.
symmetrically shaped components, the MI of the
n
I= m r
i 1
i i
2 object as a whole is the sum of the MI of the all
components provided the MIs are about the same axis.
Units: kg m 2 How to find MI of a body if some part of the body is
Radius of gyration: It may be defined as the distance of removed
a point from the axis at which the whole of the mass of MI of the remaining portion = MI of the complete body –
the body is supposed to be fixed so that its MI about the MI of the removal part about the same axis of rotation
axis is the same as that of body about the same axis, with Caution:
actual mass distribution. It is denoted by symbol K. (1) Most of the time students calculate MI of the
How to find k? Just replace I = Mk2 in any expression. removal axis about axis of rotation –which is wrong.
Here, I = moment of inertia M= Mass of the body (2) Always check mass of the given body. Is it after
M.I. of different bodies: Additional sheet is attached. removing some part or is it before removing part and
Theorem of || axes: MI of a body about any axis is equal then do your calculations accordingly.
to its MI about a || axis passing through its center of mass Problem solving strategy for rotation about a fixed
plus the product of the mass of body and square of the  axis through CoM  Fx  0 ,  Fy  0 ,    I 
distance between the two axes Problem solving strategy for rotation about a non-
I = Icm + Mh2 centroidal axis  Fn  mr  2 ,  Ft  mr  ,    I 
Theorem of  axes: It state that MI of a plane lamina Rolling: Bodies such as ring disc sphere etc. can move
about two mutually  axes to its plane is equal to the sum on a surface such that its center of mass has linear
69
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
velocity || to the surface and the body as a whole rotates  Acceleration of a mass tied to a string wound
about on axis passing through its center and || to the over a cylinder and mounted on a horizontal axis
surface such a motion is called rolling g
is a
* A body can roll on a horizontal as well as inclined plane K2
* Rolling is not possible in the absence of friction. 1 2
R
Sliding to rolling: When a round symmetrical body is I mg
made to slide on a horizontal surfaced with a certain  Tension in the string T 
mR 2  I
velocity (V0) starts pure rolling after its velocity reduces
 When a body rolls without slipping no work is
to (v) certain value which is different for a sphere a disc
done against friction.
or a ring
Kinetic energy of a rolling body
5 2
For Sphere: V = V0 For Disc: V = V0 E = Kt + Kr = ½ mV2 + ½ Iw2
7 3 E = Total KE Kt = Transnational KE
1 Kr = Rotational KE
For Ring: V = V0
2
Kr k 2 Kr k2 Kt R2
Rotating to rolling: When a purely rotating body  ,  ;  2
rotating with initial angular velocity (W0) is placed on Kt R2 E R2  k 2 E R  k2
rough horizontal surface without a push Rotational For ring: Kr = Kt For disc: Kr = ½ Kt
energy decreases K.E. of transnational motion increases For shell: Kr = 2/3 Kt For sphere: Kr = 2/5 Kt
and pure rolling begins Time for a purely rotating body  If a particle is moving on a circular path with angular
to start rolling is given by speed w about the center, then its angular speed about
2 r 0 1 r 0 a point on the opposite side of the diameter passing
For a sphere: t = For a disc: t = through it is w/2 consider a particle shown in figure.
7g 3g
1 r 0
For a ring: t =
2g
Rolling down an inclined plane: of length l, height h,
inclination  so that h = l sin  is such that
(i) mgh = ½ mv2 + ½ Iw2  = 2 (d/dt) = 2 (d/dt)
wc = 2wA
(ii) Vbottom = 2 gh
1 k 2 / R2 wA 1/ 2wc
(iii) a  g sin 2 Linear speed of different particles
k
1 2
Let v = linear speed and
R  = angular speed of the body rolling without slipping.
k2 Then v is the speed of the centre of mass of the body.
2l (1  )
(iv) Time taken in reaching the bottom is t = R2 The linear speeds of the bottom (B) and top (T) points of
g sin the body are: zero and 2v respectively.
 When bodies of different shapes are allowed to
roll down an incline, then the body for which
k2
is minimum has maximum acceleration and
R2
hence it reaches the bottom first. Those bodies for
which K2/R2 is same will reach the bottom
together. (i) The linear speed of different particles is different
 Bodies rolls down the incline plane only if although the angular speed is same for all the particles.
 K2  (ii) The linear speed of any particle P depends on its
   2  tan
2 
K R  height (h) above the surface. Here the velocity of the
 Condition for rolling of cylinder without slipping particle P is given by u = (PB). It is perpendicular
is that coefficient of rolling friction must be to the line joining P and B.
 = 1/3 tan  Remember:

70
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
1. If ice on poles of earth melts both moment of inertia (iii) Since torque about center of mass causes an increase
(I) and length of day (T) increase in angular velocity rotational K.E. about center of
2. If a real of thread is allowed to unroll vertically under mass is not conserved
its own weight then its acc is a = 2/3 g. (iv) Friction force does not produce torque about the point
3. If a metallic disc is melted and it moulded in the of contact with the ground so angular momentum
form of a sphere then MI will decrease about the point of contact is conserved.
4. When radius of earth reduces to half its mass Important Points
remaining constant then length of the day become 1. An unconstrained object, i.e., not pivoted or hinged,
1/4th present value i.e. 6h. rotates about its CoM.
5. The reaction at the inner wheel is less then outer 2. The word spin is used to describe rotational motion
wheel of a system abput an axis through its CoM.
2
R1 = Reaction at inner wheel = ½(mg – 2mv h/rb) 3. To avoid toppling Normal reaction acting on a body
2
R2 = Reaction at outer wheel = ½ (mg + 2mv h/rb) may shift.
Time period of oscillation of bodies acting as 4. Rolling may be taken as case of continuous toppling
compound pendulum. as Normal reaction has no space for shifting in
The time period of compound pendulum is given by rollable bodies.
T = 2 L 5. If you are applying pseudo force on an extendable
g body (body of finite size), then apply it at CoM of
the body.
Where L = l  K , here l = distance of the center of
2 2

l General Approach
mass from the center of suspension and K – radius of 1. Draw FBD.
gyration about the parallel axis through center of mass. 2. Take Rectangular components of forces in two/ three
In case when solid sphere is moving on a rough perpendicular directions.
horizontal surface partly sliding and partly rolling 3. Check, apply CLM & CAM.
(i) Work is done against friction so total K.E. is not 4. Check, apply Conservation of energy/ Work energy
conserved theorem for translational and rotational motion.
(ii) Friction force produces torque about center of mass 5. Check for constraints in question.
6. Apply  x
therefore angular momentum about center of mass is F  ma x ;  Fy  ma y ;  Fz  ma z
also not conserved   x  I x ;   y  I y ;   z  I z
7. Solve equations to get desired unknown.

Translatory and Rotatory Equilibrium

Forces are equal and act F 0 and Body will remain

F F
along the same line.   0 stationary if initially it
was at rest.
Forces are equal and F F 0 and Rotation i.e. spinning.
does not act along the   0
F
same line.
Forces are unequal and F 0 and Translation i.e. slipping
F2
act along the same line. F1
  0 or skidding.

Forces are unequal and F1 F 0 and Rotation and translation

does not act along the   0 both i.e. rolling.
F2
same line.
MOMENT OF INERTIA OF SOME STANDARD BODIES ABOUT DIFFERENT
AXES

71
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 Axis of Moment of
Body Figure K K2/R2
Rotation inertia

About an axis passing

through C.G. and
Ring R 1
perpendicular to its MR2
plane

1 R 1
Ring About its diameter MR 2
2 2 2

About a tangential axis

3 3 3
Ring in its own plane MR 2 R
2 2 2

About a tangential axis

Ring perpendicular to its 2MR2 2R 2
own plane

About an axis passing

through C.G. and 1 R 1
Disc MR 2
perpendicular to its 2 2 2
plane

About its Diameter

1 R 1
Disc MR 2
4 2 4

About a tangential axis 5 5 5

Disc MR 2 R
in its own plane 4 2 4

About a tangential axis

3 3 3
Disc perpendicular to its MR 2 R
2 2 2
own plane

72
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 Axis of Moment of
Body Figure K K2/R2
Rotation inertia
Annular
Passing through the
disc inner
centre and R2
M
radius = R1 R1
[ R12  R 22 ] – –
perpendicular to the 2
and outer
plane
radius = R2

Annular M
Diameter [ R12  R 22 ] – –
disc 4

Annular Tangential and Parallel M

[5 R12  R 22 ] – –
disc to the diameter 4

Tangential and
Annular M
perpendicular to the [3 R12  R 22 ] – –
disc 2
plane

Solid 1 R 1
About its own axis L MR 2
cylinder 2 2 2

Solid Tangential 3 3 3
MR 2 R
cylinder (Generator) 2 2 2

About an axis passing

 L2 R 2  L2 R 2
Solid through its C.G. and 
M   12 4
cylinder perpendicular to its own  12 4 
axis

73
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 Axis of Moment of
Body Figure K K2/R2
Rotation inertia

About the diameter of L2 R 2

Solid  L2 R 2  
one of faces of the M 
4 
3 4
cylinder 3
cylinder

Cylindrical
MR2 R 1
shell About its own axis

Cylindrical Tangential
2MR2 2R 2
shell (Generator)

About an axis passing

 L2 R 2  L2 R 2
Cylindrical through its C.G. and 
M   12 2
shell perpendicular to its own  12 2 
axis

About the diameter of L2 R 2

Cylindrical  L2 R 2  
one of faces of the M 
2 
3 2
shell 3
cylinder

Hollow R2 R1
cylinder
with inner M
Axis of cylinder ( R12  R22 )
radius = R1 2
and outer
radius = R2

74
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 Axis of Moment of
Body Figure K K2/R2
Rotation inertia

Hollow
cylinder
with inner M
Tangential ( R12  3 R22 )
radius = R1 2
and outer
radius = R2

Solid 2 2 2
About its diametric axis MR 2 R
Sphere 5 5 5

Solid 7 7 7
About a tangential axis MR 2 R
sphere 5 5 5

Spherical 2 2 2
About its diametric axis MR 2 R
shell 3 3 3

Spherical About a tangential 5 5 5

MR2 R
shell axis 3 3 3

Hollow
sphere of
inner radius About its diametric axis 2  R2 5  R15 
M  3 3 
R1 and 5  R2  R1 
outer radius
R2

Hollow 2M [ R25  R15 ] 2

Tangential  MR2
sphere 5( R2  R1 )
3 3

About on axis passing

Long thin through its centre of ML2 L
L
rod mass and perpendicular 12 12
to the rod.

75
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 Axis of Moment of
Body Figure K K2/R2
Rotation inertia

About an axis passing

Long thin ML2 L
through its edge and L
rod 3 3
perpendicular to the rod

Rectangular Passing through the

lamina of centre of mass and b M 2
[l  b 2 ]
length l and perpendicular to the 12
breadth b plane l

Tangential perpendicular
Rectangular M
to the plane and at the [4 l 2  b 2 ]
lamina 12
mid-point of breadth

Tangential perpendicular
Rectangular M 2
to the plane and at the [l  4 b 2 ]
lamina 12
mid-point of length

(i) M [b  t ]
2 2
iii
Rectangular Passing through centre ii
b 12
parallelopip of mass and parallel to
(ii) M [l  t ]
i 2 2
ed length l, (i) Length (x) t 12
breadth b, (ii) breadth (z)
(iii) M [b  l ]
l 2 2

thickness t (iii) thickness (y)

12
Rectangular Tangential and parallel (i) M [3l 2  b2  t 2 ]
parallelepip to i 12
ed length l, (i) length (x) ii (ii) M 2
[ l  3b 2  t 2 ]
12
breath b, (ii) breadth (y)
thickness t (iii) thickness(z) iii (iii) M [l 2  b2  3t 2 ]
12
Elliptical
disc of
Passing through CM and
semimajor M 2
perpendicular to the [a  b 2 ]
axis = a and 4
plane
semiminor
axis = b

Solid cone
of radius R Axis joining the vertex 3
MR2
and height and centre of the base 10
h

76
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 Axis of Moment of
Body Figure K K2/R2
Rotation inertia
Equilateral
Passing through CM and
triangular Ma2
perpendicular to the
lamina with 6
plane
side a
2
Right (1) Mb
6
angled 2
triangular Along the edges (2) Ma
6
lamina of
(3) M  a 2b 2 
sides a, b, c  
6  a 2  b2 

Energy distribution table for different rolling bodies :

Body K2 Translatory Rotatory (KR) Total (KN) KT KR

(%) (%)
R2 (KT) 1 2K 2
1  K  2
KN KN
1 2 mv 2 mv 2  1  2 
mv 2 R 2  R 
2
Ring
1 2 1 2 1 1
Cylindrical 1 mv mv mv 2 (50%) (50%)
2 2 2 2
shell
2
Disc 1 1 2 1 2 3 2 1
(33.3%)
mv mv mv 3
solid cylinder 2 2 4 4 3
(66.6%)
2 1 2 1 2 7 5 2
Solid sphere mv mv mv 2 71.5%) (28.5%)
5 2 5 10 7 7
2 1 2 1 2 5 2 3 2
Hollow sphere mv mv mv (60%) (40%)
3 2 3 6 5 5

77
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
Rolling Sliding and Falling of a Body

Figure Velocity Acceleration Time

K2 2 gh g sin 1 2h  K 2 
Rolling 0 h
1 K 2 R2 1 
R2 
1 K 2 R2 sin g  R2 

K2 g sin 
1 2h
Sliding 0 2gh
R2  sin  g

K2
0 2h
Falling R2 2gh g
g

 = 90o

Velocity, Acceleration and Time for Different Bodies

Body K2 Velocity Acceleration Time of descent

R2 2 gh g sin  1 2h  K 2 
v a t
K2 K2 1  
1 2 1 2 sin  g  R2 
R R
Ring or 1 gh 1 1 4h
g sin 
Hollow 2 sin  g
cylinder
Disc or solid 1 4 gh 2 1 3h
or 0.5 g sin 
cylinder 2
3
3 sin  g
Solid sphere 2 10 5 1 14 h
or 0.4 gh g sin 
5 7 sin  5 g
7
Hollow sphere 2 6 3 1 10 h
or 0.66 gh g sin 
3 5 sin  3 g
5

78
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
TIME PERIOD OF COMPOUND PENDULUM

L l K 2 2

Time period of compound pendulum is given by, T  2 where L 

g l
Here l = distance of centre of mass from point of suspension
k = radius of gyration about the parallel axis passing through centre of mass.

Body Axis of rotation Figure l2  K 2 L

L T  2
l K2 l g

Tangent passing 2R
through the rim R R2 2R T  2
g
and perpendicular
Ring to the plane
Tangent parallel R2 3 3R
R T  2
to the plane R 2 2g
2
Tangent, R2 3 3R
R T  2
Perpendicular to R 2 2g
2
plane

Disc
Tangent parallel R2 5 5R
R T  2
to the plane R 4 4g
4

Spherica Tangent 2 2 5 5R
R R T  2
l shell R 3 3 3g

Solid Tangent 2 2 7 7R
R R T  2
sphere R 5 5 5g

79
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 HOME ASSIGNMENT
1. Two skaters of mass 40 kg and 60 kg respectively 7. Four particles each of mass m are lying
stand facing each other at S1 and S2 with S1S2 = 5m. symmetrically on the rim of a disc of mass M and
They pull on a massless rope stretched between radius R. The M.I. of the system about an axis
them. Then they meet at
passing through one of the particles and
(A) 2.5 m from S1 and S2
(B) 3m from S1 and 2m from S2 perpendicular to the plane of the disc is :
(C) 2m from S1 and 3m from S2 (A) 16 mR2 (B) (3M+16m) R2/2
(D) 3m from S1 and 2m from S2 (C) (3m+16M)R2/2 (D) 0
2. In the figure, the small prism of mass M slides down 8. A thin wire of length l and mass m is bent in the form
on a bigger prism of mass 5M from position shown of a semicircle. Its moment of inertia about an axis
at the top of the bigger prism to the position at the joining the free ends is :
bottom of bigger prism. If there is no friction, by
(A) 0 (B) ml2
what distance does the combination move to the left
(C) (D)
9. A thin rod of length L and mass M is bent at the mid
point O by an angle 600. The M.I. of the rod about an
axis through O and perpendicular to the plane of rods
is :
(A) L/5 (B) 4L/5 (A) (B)
(C) 5L/6 (D) 2L/3
3. Seven homogeneous bricks each of length L are (C) (D) none
arranged as shown. Each brick is displaced w.r.t. one 10. A circular plane of mass M and radius ½ R is cut
in contact by L/9. The x- coordinate of C.M. w.r.t. O from one edge of a thin circular plate of radius R.
is? The moment of inertia of the remaining portion about
an axis through O perpendicular to plane of the plate
(i.e. about the Z axis) is

(A) L/2 (B) 9L/14

(C) 11L/17 (D) 7L/18
4. A hemisphere and a solid cone have a common base.
The centre of mass of the common structure
coincides with the centre of the common base. If R is
the radius of hemisphere and h is height of the cone, (A) 11MR2/24 (B) 7 MR2/32
then : (C) 13 MR2/32 (D) 5 MR2/7
(A) h/R = √3 (B) h/R = 1/√3 11. In the following figure r1 and r2 are 5cm and 30cm
(C) h/R =3 (D) h/R = 1/3 respectively. If the moment of inertia of the wheel is
5. Masses of 1g, 2g, 3g, …. 100g are suspended from 5100 kg –m2, then its angular acceleration will be
the 1cm, 2cm, 3cm …..100cm marks of a light metre
scale. The system will be supported in equilibrium at:
(A) 60 cm (B) 67 cm
(C) 55 cm (D) 72 cm
6. The mass per unit length of a non –uniform rod of (A) 10-4 rads-2 (B) 10-3 rads-2
length L varies as m = m0x2/L, where m0 is a constant -2
(C) 10 rads -2
(D) 10-1 rads-2
and x is the distance of any point on the rod 12. A uniform solid cylinder of mass M and radius R is
measured from one end. The centre of mass of the free to rotate on a frictionless horizontal axle. Two
rod is at : masses m hang from the two cords wrapped around
(A) L/2 (B) L/3 the cylinder. If the system is released from rest then
(C) 3L/2 (D) 3L/4 the tension in each cord will be :

80
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 18. A cockroach of mass m is moving on the rim of a
disc with velocity V in the anticlockwise direction.
The moment of inertia of the disc about its own axis
is I and it is rotating in clockwise direction with
(A) (B) angular velocity ω. If the cockroach stops moving
(C) (D) then the angular speed of disc is :
13. A cylinder of mass M and radius R is falling under (A) (B)
gravity as shown in the figure. The acceleration of (C) (D)
cylinder is : 19. A small ball is tied to one end of a string. The string
passes through a hollow tube as shown. The ball is
revolved with velocity v1 in a circular path of radius
r1. Now the string is pulled down so that the radius of
path of the ball is reduced to r2. The ratio of the final
speed v2 to the initial speed v1 will be :
(A) g (B) g/3
(C) 2g/3 (D) 3g/4
14. The instantaneous power produced by gravitational
force in the last Question is
(A) 5Mg2t (B) ½ Mg2t2
(C) Mg2t (D) Mg2t
(A) (B)
15. A uniform metre scale of mass m is suspended by
two vertical strings attached to its two ends. A body (C) (D)
of m kg is placed on 80 cm mark. The tensions in the 20. A stone tied to one end of a string, is revolved in the
two strings will be in the ratio : horizontal plane. The tension in the string is T. If the
length of the string is reduced to one third of its
initial value, then the tension will increase by:
(A) 7T (B) 26 T
(C) 37 T (D) 48 T
(A) 1:2 (B) 7 : 13 21. A body of mass 1kg moving at 2m/s hits a rod of
(C) 3:5 (D) 5:1 mass 2kg at P and sticks to it. The angular velocity
16. The work done per rotation for the diagram shown is afterwards is

(A) 0.05 J (B) 0.015 J (A) 6/11 (B) 3/5

(C) 0.0314 J (D) 0.062 J (C) 4/11 (D) 1/5
17. A known force R is replaced by two force P and Q 22. A thin rod is hinged at one end O as shown. If is in
parallel to it and at distance a & b from R as shown. unstable equilibrium if falls down due to gravity by
Then P is : small disturbances. In the positions 2 and 3. If the
angular velocity of rod in these positions are ω2 and
ω3 respectively then

(A) R/2 (B) R

(C) (D)

(A) ω3 = ω2 (B) ω3 = 2ω2

(C) ω3 = 1.5ω2 (D) ω3 = √2 ω2

81
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
23. The graph between logeL and logeEkr is:
(C) V/√2 (D) V
28. A ring, a solid sphere and a thin disc of different
masses rotate with same K.E. Equal torques are
applied to stop them. Which will make the least
number of rotations before coming to rest?
(A) (B) (A) disc
(B) ring
(C) solid sphere
(D) all will make same no. of rotations
29. A body rolls down an inclined plane. If its K.E. of
(C) (D) rotational motion is 40% of its K.E. of translational
24. A disc of mass M and radius R is rolling with angular motion, then the body is :
speed ω on a horizontal plane as shown in figure. (A) ring (B) cylinder
The magnitude of angular momentum of the disc (C) spherical shell (D) solid sphere
about the origin O is 30. The least coefficient of friction for an inclined plane
at an angle α with the horizontal, in order that a solid
cylinder will roll down it without slipping is :
(A) 𝑡𝑎𝑛𝛼 (B) 𝑡𝑎𝑛𝛼
(C) 𝑡𝑎𝑛𝛼 (D) 𝑡𝑎𝑛𝛼

(A) ½ MR2ω (B) MR2ω 31. A disc of radius r is projected on the horizontal plane
(C) (3/2) MR2ω (D) 2 MR2ω with a backward spin such that the speed of its C.M.
25. A solid ball of mass m and radius R rolls without is V0 and the angular speed ω0. If coefficient of
slipping along the track as shown. The radius of the friction is μ, what should be minimum value of ω0
circular part of track is R. The ball starts rolling such that the disc eventually returns :
down the track from rest from a height of 8R from (A) V0/r (B) V0/2r
the ground. The velocity of ball at P is (C) 2V0/r (D) 3V0/2r
32. A solid sphere rests on a horizontal surface. A
horizontal impulse is applied at height h from the centre
(fig.). The sphere starts rotating just after the
application of impulse. The ratio h/R will be

(A) 𝑔𝑅 (B) 5𝑔𝑅

(A) ½ (B) 2/5
(C) 10𝑔𝑅 (D) 3𝑔𝑅 (C) ¼ (D) 1/5
26. A solid cylinder of radius R and mass M, rolls down 33. A solid cube of side is a made to oscillate about a
an inclined plane without slipping and reaches the horizontal axis passing through on of its edges. Its time
bottom with speed v. The speed would be less then v period will be
if we use (A) 2(22 l/3g) (B) 2(2 l/3g)
(A) a cylinder of same mass but of smaller radius (C) 2(3 l/2g) (D) 2(2 l/3g)
(B) a cylinder of same mass but of larger radius 34. The diameter of a solid disc is 0.5m and its mass is 16
(C) a cylinder of same radius but of smaller mass Kg. What torque will increase its angular velocity from
(D) a hollow cylinder of same mass and same radius zero to 120 rotations/minute in 8 seconds?
27. A body of mass M slips down a smooth inclined (A) /4 N –m (B) /2 N –m
plane and reaches its bottom with velocity V. Had (C) /3 N –m (D)  N –m
this body been in the form of a ring then its velocity 35. In the above problem at what rate is work done by the
at the bottom could have been torque at the end of 8 seconds?
(A) V (B) √2 V (A)  watt (B) 2 watt
(C)  watt
3 (D) 4 watt

82
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
36. A ring of mass m and radius r is rolling on a horizontal (A) 42/3 (B) 41/3
(C) 43/2 (D) 43/4
plane. The ring suddenly starts rotating about its
diameter. Its angular velocity in this state will be – 44. Half part of a thin rod is made of copper and its mass is
(A) v/r (B) 2v/r mc and remaining half is made of silver and its mass is
(C) v/2r (D) v2/r ms. The moment of inertia of this rod about an axis
37. Three balls, each of mass m, are lying at the three vertices passing through its mid–point and perpendicular to the
of an equilateral triangle. The moment of inertia of the rod will be –
system about an axis passing through the mid point of one (A) 2(mc+ms)L2/3 (B) (mc+ms)L2/24
of its sides and perpendicular to the plane of the ring will (C) (mc+ms)L2/48 (D) (mc+ms)L2/12
be 45. A disc of mass M and radius R is free to rotate about a
(A) ma2/4 (B) 3ma2/4 horizontal axis passing through its centre. A body of
(C) 5ma /42 (D) 7ma2/4 mass M is fixed at the highest point of the disc. Now
38. In the above problem, if the triangle is a frame of mass the system is released. When the body comes to the
M then the moment of inertia of the system about the lowest position, then its angular speed will be –
same axis will be –
(A) (M +m) a2/4 (B) (M+ 3m) a2/4
(C) (M+ 5m) a /42 (D) (M+ 7m) a2/4
(A) (2g/3R)1/2 (B) (3g/2R)1/2
39. Five point masses are joined to a rod of negligible mass 1/2
(C) (3g/8R) (D) (8g/3R)1/2
as shown in the figure. The radius of gyration of the
46. A smooth rod AB of mass M is placed on two smooth
system about QQ’ axis will be –
supports P and Q. A ball of mass m is suspended with
the help of a string from the point R of this rod. The
ball is released from rest from the position when the
string makes angle  from the vertical. The
(A) a (3/5) (B) a(5/3)
displacement of the rod, when the ball reaches another
(C) a(3/13) (D) a (13/3)
extremity, will be –
40. A thin rod of mass 6m and length 6a is bent into an
equilateral hexagon. The moment of inertia of the
hexagon about an axis passing through one of its
vertices and perpendicular to its plane will be :-
(A) ma2 (B) 3 ma2 (A) 2ml sin/M (B) 2(m +M) /lsin
(C) 5 ma 2 (D) 11 ma2 (C) 2ml sin/(M+m) (D) ml /(M +m)
41. A rod of mass M and length L is placed in a horizontal 47. O is the centre of an equilateral triangle ABC. F1, F2
plane with one end hinged about the vertical axis. A and F3 are three forces acting along the sides AB, BC
horizontal force of F= Mg/2 is applied at a distance 5L/6 and AC as shown here. What should be the magnitude
from the hinged end. The angular acceleration of the rod of F3, so that the total torque about O is zero?
will be –

(A) (F1 +F2)/2 (B) 2(F1 +F2)

(A) 4g/5L (B) 5g/4L (C) (F1 +F2) (D) (F1– F2)
(C) 3g/4L (D) 4g/3L 48. Two wheels A and C are connected by a belt B as
42. A ring, a solid sphere and a thin disc of different masses shown in the figure. The radius of C is three times that
rotate with the same kinetic energy. Equal torque’s are of A. If the angular momentum of both the wheels are
applied to stop them. Which will make the least number same, then the ratio of their rotational inertia will be –
of rotations before coming to rest?
(A) disc (B) ring
(C) solid sphere
(D) all will make same number of rotations (A) 1:1 (B) 1:2
43. Two circular loops P and Q are made from a given (C) 1:3 (D) 1:9
sample of uniform wire. The radius of P is r and that of 49. A person with his hands in his pocket is skating on ice
Q is nr. If the moment of inertial of Q is four times that at the rate of 10m/s and describes a circle of radius
of P, the value of n is – 50m. What is his inclination to the vertical?

83
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 (A) tan-1 (1/2) (B) tan-1 (1/5) (A) d1/d2 (B) d2/d1
-1
(C) tan (3/5) (D) tan-1 (1/10) (C) d12 : d22 (D) d22 : d12
50. A particle P is moving in a circle of radius ‘a’ with a 56. N elastic balls are places at rest on smooth horizontal
uniform speed v. C is the centre of the circle and AB is plane surface which assumes circular shape at the end as
a diameter. The angular velocity of P about A and C are shown. The masses of the balls are m, m/2, m/22, m/23 ---
in the ratio --- m/2n-1 respectively. The minimum velocity which
(A) 1:1 (B) 1:2 should be imparted to the first ball of mass m such that
(C) 2:1 (D) 4:1 the nth ball will be just able to complete the vertical
51. A circular turn table of radius 0.5 m has a smooth circle is
groove as shown in fig. A ball of mass 90 g is placed
inside the groove along with a spring of spring constant
104 N/m. The ball is at a distance of 0.1m from the
centre when the turn table is at rest. On rotating the turn
(A) (3/4)n(gr) (B) (3/4)n-1(2gr)
table with a constant angular velocity of 100 rad/sec,
(C) (3/4) (5gr)
n (D) (3/4)n-1(5gr)
the ball moves away from the centre by a distance
57. The line of action of the resultant of two like parallel
nearly equal to :
forces shifts by one –fourth of the distance between the
forces when the two forces are interchanged. The ratio
of the two forces is
(A) 2:3 (B) 3:4
(C) 3:5 (D) 4:5
58. Two objects are moving as shown in the figure what is
(A) 10-1 m (B) 10-2 their total angular momentum about O.
(C) 10 -3 (D) 5 x 10-3
52. A long horizontal rod has a bead, which can slide along
its length and initially placed at a distance L from one
end A of the rod. The rod is set in angular acceleration (A) 14 kg m2s-1 (B) 7.29 kgm2/s
. If the coefficient of friction between the rod and the (C) 6.71 kgm2/s (D) 9.8 kgm2/s
bead is  and gravity is neglected then the time after 59. A particle is moving in circular path with constant
which the bead starts slipping is tangential acceleration time t after the beginning of
(A) (/) (B) / motion the direction of net acceleration is at 300 to the
(C) 1/() (D) infinitesimal radius vector at that instant. The angular acceleration of
53. A car of mass m is moving on a horizontal circular path the particle at that time t is
of radius r. At an instant its speed is v and is increasing (A) 3/t2 (B) 1/t2
at the rate a : (C) 3/t (D) 3/t2
(A) the acceleration of the car is towards the centre of the 60. A cylinder of radius R and weight W stands in front of an
path obstacle of height h as shown. The least horizontal force
(B) the magnitude of frictional force on the car is greater F which must be applied to make it rise the obstacle is
than (mv2/r)
(C) the coefficient of friction between the ground and car is
not less than a/g.
(D) the coefficient of friction between the ground and the
(A) W(2h/R) (B) W[h(2R–h )](R–h )
car is  = tan-1 (v2/rg)
(C) W[h (R –h )/(R +h )] (D) W(h(2R –h)/R)
54. A weightless ladder 20 ft. long rests against a
frictionless wall at an angle of 600 from the horizontal.
A 150 pound man is 4 ft from the top of ladder. A
horizontal force is needed to avoid it from slipping. The
correct magnitude of force is :
61. A hemispherical bowl of radius R is set rotating about
(A) 17.5 Ib (B) 10.0 Ib
its axis of symmetry. A small body kept in the bowl
(C) 69.3 Ib (D) 15.0 Ib
rotates with the bowl without slipping on its surface. If
55. Two discs A and B are made of same radius and same
radius through the body makes with the axis an angle 
thickness but of different materials of densities d1 and
and assuming that the surface of the bowl is smooth, the
d2 respectively. The ratio of their moments of inertia
angular velocity with which bowl is rotating is given by
about central axis perpendicular to plane of disc will be
84
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 (A) R/g cos (B)  (R/g cos) (C) MR2/2 (D) 3MR2/2
(C) ( g/ R cos) (D) g/Rcos 70. An object is tied to a string and rotated in a vertical
62. A hoop rolls on a horizontal ground without slipping circle of radius r. Constant speed is maintained along
with linear speed v. Speed of a particle P on the the trajectory. If Tmax/ Tmin = 2, then v2/rg is
circumference of the hoop at angle is (A) 1 (B) 2
(C) 3 (D) 4
71. Two particles A and B are moving as shown in fig. At
this moment of time, the angular speed of A w.r.t B is

(A) 2v sin (/2) (B) v sin 

(C) 2vcos (/2) (D) v cos
63. A disc is rotating with an angular velocity 0. A
(A) (va +vb)/r
constant retarding torque is applied on it to stop the
(B) (va –vb)/r
disc. The angular velocity becomes 0/2 after n
(C) (vb sinb – va sin a)/r in anticlockwise direction
rotations. How many more rotations will it make before
(D) (vb sinb + va sin a)/r in anticlockwise direction
coming to rest
72. A cylinder of radius 20 cm rolls down an inclined plane
(A) n (B) 2n
of height 60 cm without slipping. The linear velocity of
(C) n/2 (D) n/3
cylinder at the bottom is : (g = 980 cm/s2)
64. A constant power is supplied to a rotating disc. Angular
(A) 280 cm/s (B) 28 cm/s
velocity () of disc varies with number of rotations (n) (C) 2.8 cm/s (D) none of these
made by the disc as 73. If earth were to contract suddenly to 1/nth of its present
(A)  n1/3 (B)  n3/2 size without any change in its mass, the duration of day
(C)  n2/3 (D)  n2 will be nearly :
65. A disc of radius 0.1 m rolls without sliding on a (A) 24/n hrs (B) 24 n hrs
horizontal surface with a velocity of 6m/s. It then 2
(C) 24/n hrs (D) 24 n2 hrs
ascends a smooth continuous track as shown in figure. 74. Generally the mass of a fly wheel is concentrated in its
The height upto which it will ascent is (g= 10ms/2) rim. Why?
(A) to decrease the moment of inertia
(B) to increase the moment of inertia
(C) to obtain stable equilibrium
(A) 2.4 m (B) 0.9 m (D) to obtain a strong wheel
(C) 2.7 m (D) 1.8 m 75. A meter rule weighing 100 gm rests on a table with a
66. A rectangle ABCD is such that BC = 2AB fig. The part projecting over the edge. The length of the part
moment of inertia will be minimum about the axis projecting out of the edge for a 5 gm body hung at the
end to just tilt the rule is
(A) 37.5 cm (B) 26.8 cm
(C) 40.2 cm (D) 47.6 cm
76. If a car topples over while taking a turn
(A) BC (B) BD
(A) inner wheels leave the road first
(C) EG (D) HF
(B) outer wheels leave the road first
67. A thin rod of length L and mass M is bent at the middle
(C) both inner and outer wheels leave the road
point O at an angle of 600. The moment of inertia of the
simultaneously
rod about an axis passing through O and perpendicular (D) either inner or outer wheels may leave the road first
to the plane of the rod will be depending upon the direction in which the car takes a
(A) ML2/6 (B) ML2/12 turn.
2
(C) ML /24 (D) ML2/3 77. Two bodies with M.I. I1 and I2 (I1> I2) have equal
68. A raw egg and a hard boiled egg are made to spin on a angular momentum. If their K.E. are E1 and E2 then:
table with the same angular speed about the same axis. (A) E1 = E2 (B) E1> E2
The ratio of the time taken by the two to stop is (C) E2> E1 (D) E1 ≥ E2
(A) = 1 (B) < 1
78. When a steady torque acts on the body, it
(C) > 1 (D) none of these
(A) continues in its state of rest or uniform motion
69. A cylindrical solid of mass M has radius R and length
along a straight line
L. Its moment of inertia about a generator is
(B) gets linear acceleration
(A) M(L2/12 + R2/4) (B) M(L2/3 + R2/4)
(C) rotates at constant speed
85
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 (D) gets angular acceleration (B) Both statement I and statement II are true but
79. What is the maximum speed at which a car can turn statement II is not correct explanation of statement I
round a curve of 30 m radius on a level road if the (C) Statement I is true but statement II is false
coefficient of friction between the tyres and the road is (D) Statement I is false, Statement II is true.
0.4 and g = 10 m/s2? 86. A uniform rectangular block has length twice as large
(A) 5 m/s (B) 11 m/s as breadth. It is lying on the horizontal plane, which is
(C) 17 m/s (D) 21 m/s gradually being raised so as to be inclined to the
80. A hoop rolls without slipping down an incline of slope horizontal at an angle θ. For what value θ, the block be
300. Linear acceleration of its centre of mass is at the point of topping?
(A) g/2 (B) g/3 (A) 600.8 (B) 450.5
0
(C) 70 .6 (D) 260.6
(C) g/4 (D) g/6
81. A car takes a circular turn with a uniform speed v. If the 87. The M.I of a body about a given axis is 1.2 kg m2 and it
reaction at inner and outer wheels be denoted by R1 and is at rest. In order to produce a kinetic energy of
R2, then rotation of 1500 J, an angular acceleration of 25 rad/s2
(A) R1 = R2 (B) R1< R2 is applied. The time for which it acts is
(C) R1>R2 (D) R1<>R2 (A) 4 s (B) 2 s
82. Two particles of masses m1 and m2 (m1>m2) attract (C) 8 s (D) 10 s
each other with a force inversely proportional to the 88. The driving side of a belt has a tension 1600 N and the
square of distance between them. The particle are stock side has 400 N tension. The belt turning a pulley
initially held and then released, then which of the 40 cm in radius at the rate of 300 r.p.m. delivers power
statement is correct? to a dynamo. The power delivered is :
(A) The C.M. moves towards m1 (A) 4800 π watts (B) 6400 π watts
(B) The C.M. moves towards m2 (C) 1600 π watts (D) 8000 π watts
(C) The C.M. remains at rest 89. A square plate of side l has mass M.
(D) The C.M. moves at right angles to the line joining What is its moment of inertial about one of the
their centres. diagonals?
83. Which of the following statements is true for the (A) Ml2/3 (B) Ml2/4
planets orbiting around the sun? (C) Ml2/6 (D) Ml2/12
(A) their velocity increases when they are nearest to the 90. The speed of revolution of a particle going around a
sun in accordance with the conservation of angular circle is doubled and its angular speed is halved. What
momentum happens to the centripetal acceleration?
(B) their velocity decreases when they are nearest to the (A) becomes four times (B) doubled
sun in accordance with the conservation of angular (C) halved (D) remains unchanged
momentum 91. Two masses M and m are attached to a vertical axis by
(C) Areal velocity of the planet varies with time to weightless threads of combined length l. They are set in
conserve the energy rotational motion in a horizontal plane about this axis
(D) Areal velocity of the planet is directly proportional with constant angular velocity ω. If the tensions in the
to the direction of planet from the sun. threads are the same during motion, the distance of M
84. Mass is non–uniformly distributed on the circumference from the axis is
of a ring of radius a and centre at origin. Let b be the (A) Ml/(M+m) (B) ml/(M+m)
distance of centre of mass of the ring from origin. Then (C) [(M+m)/M] l (D) [(M+m)/m] l
(A) b = a (B) 0 ≤b≤a 92. Two balls of centres at A and B and having masses M =
(C) b<a (D) b>a 9g and m = 3 g are attached by threads to a point ‘O’
85. Statement 1: A block is kept on a rough horizontal such that (OA +OB) length is 1m. The system is set into
surface, under the action of a force F as shown in the rotational motion in a horizontal plane about a vertical
figure. The torque of normal contact force about centre axis passing through ‘O’ with constant angular velocity
of mass is having zero value. ω. What is the ratio of AO : OB for which the tension in
the two strings is maximum?
(A) 1:3 (B) 3:1
(C) 3:4 (D) 4:3
Statement2: The point of application of normal contact 93. The moment of inertia of a uniform rod of length 2l and
force may not pass through centre of mass. mass m about an axis xx passing through its centre and
(A) Both statement I and statement II are true and inclined at an angle α is
statement II is correct explanation of statement I
86
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 (D) magnitude of centripetal acceleration is halved.
100. What should be the ratio between the length and radius
of the uniform solid cylinder so that its moment of
inertia about central axis is the same as that about
equatorial axis :
(A) 1:√3 (B) √3 :1
(A) ml2 sin2α/3 (B) ml2 sin2α/12 (C) 1/√3 : 1/√2 (D) √3 : √2
2 2
(C) ml cos α/6 (D) ml2 cos2α/2 101. A uniform stick of length l and mass m lies on a
94. It is common experience that the plants direct the smooth table. It rotates with angular velocity ω about an
growth of their stems in opposition to gravity. axis perpendicular to the table and through one end of
However, the British botanist, Knight, while the stick. The angular momentum of the stick about the
germinating seeds on the rim of a rapidly spinning end is
wheel noticed the growth of (A) ml2ω (B) ml2ω/3
(A) stem towards the axle and roots sent outwards (C) ml2ω/12 (D) ml2ω/6
(B) roots towards the axle and stem sent outwards 102. A hollow cylinder and a solid cylinder of same mass
(C) both stem and roots outwards and radius are made to slide down an inclined plane,
(D) both stem and roots towards the axle
which one reaches the bottom first?
95. Two blocks of masses 5 kg and 2 kg are placed on a
(A) the solid cylinder
frictionless surface and connected by a spring. An (B) the hollow cylinder
external kick gives a velocity of 14 m/s to the heavier (C) both together
block in the directions of lighter one. Calculate the (D) the one with higher density of material
velocity gained by the centre of mass. 103. Three boys are sitting on a sea –saw in such a way that
(A) 14 m/s (B) 7 m/s it is held horizontally in equilibrium. Two of them, one
(C) 10 m/s (D) zero of 20 kg and other of 30 kg are on opposite sides and at
96. A body of mass 1 kg is moving with constant velocity a distance of 2 m from the pivot. If the third jumps off,
in XY plane. The x –component of velocity is 3 m/s and thereby disturbing the balance, initial acceleration given
y –component is ( -4) m/s. Its coordinates at any instant to sea –saw is:
are (0, 4, 0), the angular momentum about the origin is : (A) 0.4 rad/s2 (B) 0.98 rad/s2
(A) 12 kg m2/s along positive Z –axis (C) 4.9 rad/s 2 (D) 9.5 rad/s2
(B) 12 kg m2/s along negative Z –axis 104. Two bodies A and B are attracted towards each other
(C) 16 kg m2/s along positive Z –axis due to gravitation. Given that A is much heavier than B,
(D) 16 kg m2/s along negative Z –axis
which of the following correctly describes the relative
97. Before jumping in water from above, a swimmer bends
motion of the centre of mass of the bodies?
his body to :
(A) increase M.I (A) it moves towards A
(B) decrease M.I. (B) it remains at rest w.r.t. A as well as B
(C) decrease M.I. angular momentum (C) it moves towards B
(D) reduce the angular velocity (D) it moves perpendicular to the line joining the
98. A particle moves in a circle with a uniform speed. particles
When it goes from a point A to a diametrically opposite 105. A symmetrical body of mass M and radius R is rolling
point B, the momentum of the particle changes by 𝑃𝐴⃗ – without slipping on a horizontal surface with linear
𝑃𝐵⃗ = 2 kg m/s(𝚥̂) and the centripetal force acting on it speed v. Then its angular speed is
(A) v/R
changes by 𝐹⃗ − 𝐹⃗ = 8𝑁(𝚤̂) where 𝚤̂, 𝚥̂ are unit vectors
(B) continuously increasing
along X and Y axes respectively. The angular velocity
(C) dependent on mass (M)
of the particle is
(D) independent of radius (R)
(A) dependent on its mass (B) 4 rad/sec
106. Two identical cylinders are simultaneously released
(C) 2/π rad /sec (D) 16 π rad/sec
from the top of an inclined plane side by side. One rolls
99. A body is moving along a circular path with constant
without slipping while other slides without rolling.
speed. If the direction of rotation is reversed and the
Which one reaches the bottom first?
speed is doubled, then
(A) both reach simultaneously
(A) direction of centripetal acceleration remains
(B) one which rolls and slips
unchanged
(C) one which slides and slips
(B) direction of centripetal acceleration is reversed
(D) cannot be decided with accuracy
(C) magnitude of centripetal acceleration is doubled
87
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
107. A motor runs at 20 r.p.s and supplies a torque of 75 113. Two circular loops P and Q are made from a given
Nm. The horse power delivered is: sample of uniform wire. The radius of P is r and that
(A) 6.3 (B) 12.6 of Q is nr. If M.I. of Q is four times that of P, the
(C) 3.6 (D) 16.2 value of n is :
108. A planet takes three years to complete the orbit around (A) 42/3 (B) 41/3
the sun. Its orbit is coplanner with that of the earth. (C) 4 3/2
(D) 43/4
What is the time taken by the planet to complete the 114. A constant torque acting on a uniform circular
orbit around the sun as seen from the earth? wheel changes its angular momentum from A0 →
(A) 1.0 years (B) 1.5 years
4A0 in 4 seconds. The value of torque is :
(C) 2.0 years (D) 2.5 years
(A) 4A0 (B) 12 A0
109. A solid sphere rolls down two different inclined planes
(C) A0 (D) (3A0)/4
of same height but of different inclinations. In both
115. A rigid body is rotating about a vertical axis at n
cases
(A) the speed and time of descend will be same
rotations per minute. If the axis slowly becomes
(B) the speed will be same but time of descend will be horizontal in t seconds and the body keeps on
different rotating at n rotations per minute then the torque
(C) the speed will be different but time of descend will be acting on the body is (If M.I. is I)
same (A) 0 (B)
(D) speed and time of descend both are different √
110. Statement 1: Total torque on a system is independent (C) (D)
of the origin if the total external force is zero 116. A false balance has equal arms. An object weighs
Statement 2: Torque due to couples is independent of W1 when placed in one pan and W2 when placed in
the origin. the other pan. Then the true weight W of object is :
(A) Both statement I and statement II are true and
(A) √𝑤 𝑤 (B)
statement II is correct explanation of statement I
(B) Both statement I and statement II are true but statement (C) 𝑤 𝑤 (D)
II is not correct explanation of statement I 117. A false balance is such that the beam remains
(C) Statement I is true but statement II is false horizontal, when the pans are empty. An object weighs
(D) Statement I is false, Statement II is true. W1 when placed in one pan, and W2 when placed in the
111. A circular disc of radius r has uniform thickness A other pan. Then the weight W of object is:
circular hole of diameter equal to the radius of the
(A) √𝑤 𝑤 (B)
disc has been cut out as shown. The C.G. of the
remaining disc lies on the diameter of the disc at a (C) 𝑤 𝑤 (D)
distance x to the left of the centre of the original disc. 118. A constant power is supplied to a rotating disc.
The value of x is : Angular velocity ω of disc varies with no. of
rotations n as:
(A) α n1/3 (B) α n3/2
(C) α n2/3 (D) α n2
119. The arm of a nut cracker is 15cm long. The force
needed to crack a nut without the help of the nut
(A) r (B) r/2 cracker is 22.5 kgwt. Where should the nut be placed
(C) r/4 (D) r/6 in the nut cracker so as to crack it with a force of
112. Three spheres, each of mass M and radius R are 2.25 kg wt.
arranged as shown. Figure The M.I. of the system is: (A) 2cm from fulcrum (B)0.5 cm from fulcrum
(C) 1.5 cm from fulcrum (D) 1cm from fulcrum
120. A uniform disc of mass M and radius R is rotating
about a horizontal axis passing through its centre
with angular velocity ω. A small piece of mass m
breaks from the edge of disc and flies off vertically
upwards. The angular speed of disc will be :
( ) ( )
(A) 𝑀𝑅 (B) 𝑀𝑅 (A) (B)
(C) 𝑀𝑅 (D) 𝑀𝑅
88
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 ( ) ( )
(C) (D)
121. The distance of point of suspension from the centre
of gravity of a compound pendulum is l and its time
period about this point is T. If g = π2, the relation
between T and l and the no. of roots of l will be :
(A) 𝑙 + 𝑙 − 𝑘 = 0, 2
(B) 𝑙 − 𝑙 − 𝑘 = 0, 3
(C) 𝑙 − 𝑙 + 𝑘 = 0, 2
(D) 𝑙 − 𝑙 − 2𝑘 = 0, 3
ANSWER KEY

1 B 26 D 51 B 76 A 101 B
2 D 27 C 52 A 77 C 102 A
3 B 28 D 53 BC 78 D 103 B
4 A 29 D 54 C 79 B 104 C
5 B 30 C 55 A 80 C 105 A
6 D 31 C 56 D 81 B 106 C
7 B 32 B 57 C 82 C 107 B
8 D 33 A 58 C 83 A 108 B
9 C 34 A 59 D 84 C 109 B
10 C 35 B 60 B 85 D 110 A
11 B 36 B 61 C 86 AD 111 D
12 A 37 C 62 A 87 B 112 B
13 C 38 C 63 D 88 A 113 B
14 D 39 B 64 A 89 D 114 D
15 B 40 D 65 D 90 D 115 C
16 C 41 B 66 C 91 B 116 B
17 C 42 D 67 B 92 A 117 A
18 C 43 B 68 C 93 A 118 A
19 D 44 D 69 D 94 A 119 C
20 B 45 D 70 C 95 C 120 A
21 D 46 C 71 C 96 B 121 C
22 D 47 C 72 A 97 B
23 C 48 C 73 C 98 B
24 C 49 B 74 B 99 A
25 C 50 B 75 D 100 B

89
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 GRAVITATION
Newton’s universal law of gravitation: Every two P
objects in the universe attract each other. The force of
attraction is directly proportional to the product of h
r
masses and inversely proportional to the square of
distance between the two masses.
 
m1 F12 F 21 m2 O
A B Re
r
GM e
G m1 m2 At height ‘h’ g' 
(R  h ) 2
F
r2
If ‘h’ is quite small as compared to R, then g'  1 2h
G = universal gravitational constant = 6.67 x 10–11 Nm2 kg –2 g R
Remember: Effect of depth on acceleration due to gravity
(1) Newton’s law of gravitation is applicable for point
objects. At a depth ‘d’ g'  (R  d)  1 d 
g R  R
(2) If objects are not point size, then gravitational force
The variation of gd is linear. And h=2d then g’ is same.
should be calculated by integration method. g
(3) You can apply Newton’s law of gravitation as such, At earth's Above earth's
if a point object lies outside the sphere (hollow or surface surface
1
g
solid) by considering whole mass of the sphere is  h 
2

r=0 1  
present at its center.  R e 

— Gravitational force acts along the line joining the r=R Distance from
Earth the centre of earth
center of two masses. i.e. it is a central force.
Inside the earth
— Gravitational force is a conservative force.
 h 
— The Gravitational forces follow inverse square law. g  1  

(F 1/r2)  Re 
— The Gravitational force between two masses is Variation in ‘g’ on the surface of earth
independent of the presence of other objects and 1. Due to shape of earth: The earth is elliptical in
medium between the two masses. shape. It is flatter at the poles and bulged out at the
— Gravitational force is independent of the nature and equator.
polar axis
size of the bodies, till their masses remain same & N
distance between their centers is fixed.
Rp
— Gravitation is the weakest force in nature. It is about
W E
1038 times smaller than the nuclear force and 1036 O Re equatorial
times smaller than the electric force. axis
Fg : Fw : Fe : Fn = 1 : 1025 : 1036 : 1038
— Acceleration due to gravity is 1/6th of that on the 21km S 21km
2.
earth and that on sun is about 27 times that on the Value of ‘g’ at the poles is max 9.83 ms-2
earth & ‘g’ is zero at the center of earth. Value of ‘g’ at the equator is min 9.78 m/s2.
— Force on a particle due to number of particles is the Decrease in g in going from to the equator is about
resultant of forces due to individual particles i.e. 0.35%.
   
F  F 1  F 2  F 3  ........ 3. Due to Rotation of earth (Variation of ‘g’ with latitude)
Acceleration due to gravity(g) Acceleration produced in N
 mr2cos
N
a body due to the force of gravity is known as
acceleration due to gravity. M r  mr2
 P
g r  F  G M earth mg
m r2 O 
W E
r is the distance from the center of the earth.  = Latitude angle

Effect of height (Altitude) on acceleration due to

gravity
S

90
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
The acceleration due to gravity at latitude  on the amount of work done in bringing the body from infinity
surface of the earth is given by g' = g – R 2 cos2 to that point against the gravitational force.
GMm
 If the rate of rotation of earth increases, then the value UP  
r
of g will decrease at all places except at the poles.
If a body is moved from a distance r1 to r2,
 Maximum effect of rotation takes place at the
1 1 
equator, if the earth stops rotating the value of g will U  GMm  
 r1 r2 
increase by a factor R2 at equator.
GM e m
 If the earth starts rotating with an angular speed 17 V= 0 PEf =–
(R e  h )
times the present speed of rotation, then the objects will
h
fly off the equator. (i.e. g will be zero at the equator)
 If the observed value of g becomes zero at equator, V
then the length of day will be 1.4 hr or 1 hr 24 min. Surface GM e m
PEi =–
GRAVITATIONAL FIELD: Re
The sphere of influence surrounding a mass in which its (Me)
gravitational effects are produced is called gravitational field. Re

Gravitational  In a system of N particles with masses m1, m2 ... mn

M field.
separated from each other by a distance r12, r13 where
Intensity of gravitational field strength It is defined as r12 is the separation between m1 and m2 and so on.
the force experienced by unit mass placed at any point in  The total interaction energy of system is,
1 N N Gmm
the gravitational field. U=-  i j
2 i1 j1 rij
F Gm
I  2
m r  Self-gravitational PE of a solid sphere is given by
 Gm
in vector form I  2 r 3 GM 2
r U 
Units N/ kg Dimensional Formula [LT–2] 5 R
Remember:  Gravitational potential energy of a body at height h
(1) Intensity of gravitational field follows superposition from the earth surface is given by
principle. GMm gR2m mgR
Uh    
R h R h h
Inet  I1  I2  I3  ........ 1
R
(2) Ig is uniform inside spherical cavity of a solid sphere  The –ve sign in the equation shows that the
and it acts along the line joining center of solid gravitational P.E. is due to attractive force.
sphere and center of cavity.  For displacing the test mass from infinity to its present
 4 
I g    G a location, the work is done by the gravitational force
3 field.
(3) Whenever you find problems related to cavity or  As distance from the source mass increases, the
partially removed portion of a symmetrical body, potential energy decreases. At infinite distance from
always apply principle of superposition. the source mass, the gravitational potential energy is
(4) Always try to exploit symmetry of the question. zero and is max.
 The gravitational field strength due to earth is  Gravitational potential energy at any point is
equal to the acceleration due to gravity. independent of the path along which the test mass is
 If point P lies inside the earth, then displaced. It merely depends upon the distance
GM ' 4 between the source and the test masses.
I  2   Gr 
r 3 Gravitational Potential It is defined as the work done
Mass ‘m’ is projected vertically upward with in moving a unit mass from infinity to that point
R against the field. (OR)
 velocity V then height ‘h’   2gR 
1  2 
The gravitational energy per unit mass is called
V  gravitational potential.
 

Gauss Theorem in gravitation: I g .ds   4 G m Vg  
GM
r
Gravitational potential energy: The gravitational
potential energy of a body at a point is defined as the Units joule/ kg (J/kg). It is a scalar quantity.

91
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
Potential due to large numbers of particle is given by  For a satellite very near to the surface of earth
scalar addition of all the potentials V  V1  V2  V3  .......... 3
T  84.6 min
 
GM

GM

GM
........ G
r1 r2 r3
 The angular velocity of the satellite near the surface
Remember: The intensity of gravitational field at a point
of earth is w = (g/R) = 0.001237 rad/ sec.
inside the hollow spherical shell is zero. While the
= 1.24 x 10–3 rad/ sec.
potential is constant 1
Relation b/w Ig and Vg: Altitude of Satellite: h  T gR   R
2 2 3

d  4 
2
I g   Vg
dr Angular Velocity of satellite:   GM gR 2
 
 V V ˆ V ˆ  (R  h )3 r3
I g   iˆ  j k
 x y z  If the radius of the earth becomes less by (1/n), the length
Orbit of a satellite: Only the equatorial orbits are stable of day shortened by (48/n) hours.
R 2T
for a satellite. For any satellite to orbit around in a stable R' R   T ' T 
n n
orbit, it must move in such an orbit so that the center of
Geostationary satellite or Parking Satellite: A satellite
earth lies at the center of the orbit.
whose time period is 24 hours and is revolving in an orbit
concentric and coplanar with the equatorial plane of earth
is called geo-stationary or parking satellite.
 The satellite is stationary w.r.t earth, that is it always
appears above a particular place on the earth. It
moves around the earth from WEST to EAST in
Unstable orbit Stable orbit anticlockwise direction.
Orbital velocity: Velocity with which the satellite  Its period of revolution around the earth is same as
moves in the orbit around earth is its orbital velocity. that of earth about its own axis i.e. exactly 24 hrs.
 Geo-stationary satellite revolves at a height of
m 36000 km above the surface of earth.
M r radiusof orbitof geo- stationarysatellite 7
 
radiusof earth 1
 Geo-stationary satellites are also known as
SYNCHRONOUS satellite. Such satellites are often
The orbital velocity at a height ‘h’ above the surface used for telecommunication.
gR 2 GM e 2(R  h )
 The orbital velocity for geo-stationary satellite is
Vo    3.08 km/s.
Rh Rh T
 The plane of Geo-stationary satellite must pass
 The work done by the satellite in a complete orbit is
through the centre of the planet.
zero.
Total energy of satellite
 Greater the height of the satellite, greater is the
orbital velocity. K.E. = ½ mVo2 =  G M e m  , P.E. =   G Me m 
 
 The orbital velocity for a satellite near the surface of  2r   r 
the earth is 7.92 km s–1.  G Me m 
Total energy = Potential energy + Kinetic energy =   
 Orbital velocity does not depend on the mass of the  2r 
satellite but it depends on the mass & radius of the Me — mass of the earth, M —mass of the satellite, r —
planet around which rotation is taking place. orbital radius
 When a satellite moves around heavy body then v
 1/r for the different points in the same orbit (fig I)
while v  1/r for different orbits (fig. II)

r2 r1 r1 r2

I
II
Time period of satellite The time taken by the satellite Kinetic energy (K) = – (Total energy)
to make one complete revolution around the earth is
Potential energy (U) = 2 (Total energy)
called time period. T  2 r  2r  2 r
3 3
Potential energy (K) = – 2 (Kinetic energy)
R g VO GMe
r— radius of the orbit of the satellite
92
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
Binding energy Binding energy is the energy given to a (i) Law of orbits All planets move around the sun in
satellite in order that the satellite escape away from the elliptical orbits with the sun at one focus.
gravitational field of the planet. (ii) Law of areas The area swept by the line joining the
 G Me m  sun and the planet per unit time is constant.
E    P
 2r  Q
t1
vmin
 When the satellite is orbiting in its orbit, then no A1
energy is required to keep it in orbit.
 When the energy of the satellite is negative then it F1 A2 F2
moves either in a circular path or an elliptical path.
 When energy of the satellite is zero then it escape vmax Q'
P' t2
away from its orbit and its path is parabolic.
(iii) Law of periods The square of the time taken to
 When the energy of the satellite is +ve then it escape
complete the orbit (Time period, T) is proportional to
away from its orbit & its path is hyperbolic.
the cube of the semi major axis (R) of the elliptical
 When the velocity of the satellite is increased then its
energy increases and it starts moving in a circular path. i.e. T2  R3
E
path of greater radius.
 When the height of the satellite increased then its Perigee
Sun F r2
Apogee

potential energy increases and K.E. decreases. A C a B

r1
 The potential energy of a satellite orbiting in circular
path is always greater than its K.E. D
Escape Velocity is the min. velocity with which a
r1  r2
satellite should be projected upwards s.t. it may escape 2a  r1  r2  a 
from the gravitational pull of the earth. 2
If the mass of the planet is M and its radius is R, then the where a = semi-major axis
escape velocity from its surface is r1  Shortest distance of planet from sun (perigee).

Ve 
2 GM
 2 gR 
8
G R 2 r2  Largest distance of planet from sun (apogee).
R 3
vp ra a  c 1  e GM  1  e  GM  1  e 
 Ve does not depend on the angle, direction of    v    &vp   
va rp a  c 1  e a a 1  e  a 1e 
projection and mass of the projected body
 The value of escape velocity from the surface of Remember:
earth = 11.2 km/ s. (1) While solving questions related to elliptical orbits,
 If body is projected with V > Ve then after escaping always apply law of conservation of angular
from the gravitational field it will move with a momentum and law of conservation of energy.
1 2 GMm
velocity = V2 Ve2 mvr sin   const. & mv   const.
2 r
 If a body projected vertically upwards from the
surface of earth with velocity nVe where n<1 then the
V2 = Vmin
height gained from the center of earth is r  R 2 F1 F2
1 n A B
and from surface of earth h  Rn 2 r1 r2
2
1 n
 If the velocity of a satellite is increased by 41.4%, V1 = Vmax
then it will escape away from the gravitational field
[Link].  [Link].
of the earth.
 If a body falls freely from infinite height, then it will (2) At ends of major and minor axis, angle between
reach the surface of earth with a velocity of 11.2 velocity and radius vector is 900. So angular
km/sec. momentum is given by L mvr, but at any other
 The root mean square velocity of hydrogen is more location on elliptical orbit, don’t forget to consider
than that of the escape velocity on earth, therefore angle between velocity vector and radius vector. i.e.
hydrogen is not found in earth’s atmosphere. L  mvr sin 
 If the gravitational force varies inversely as the nth
power of the distance then the time period T of a
satellite revolving in a circular orbit round the earth
n1
at distance r is T  r 2
1
 And velocity v0 of the satellite is Vo 
r n1
Kepler’s laws

93
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
Relation between velocity of projection and shape of orbit

(3) Intensity due to uniform circular ring

Hyperbola V > Ve V = Ve Earth At a point on its axis At the centre of the ring
Parabola GMr I=0
I
V = V0 (a 2  r 2 )3 / 2

Circle Ellipse (4) Intensity due to uniform disc

V0 < V< Ve At a point on its axis At the centre of the disc
Velocity Effect 2GMr 1 1  I=0
I   
Ve Projectile does not orbit the earth. a2  r r 2  a2 
V
2 It falls back on the earth's
surface. Gravitational Potential for Different Bodies
Ve Projectile orbits in the earth a (1) Potential due to uniform ring
V= At a point on its axis At the centre
2 circular path.
GM GM
Ve Projectile orbits in an elliptical V  V 
 V  Ve a2  r2 a
2 path.
V = Ve Projectile does not orbit. (2) Potential due to spherical shell
It escapes the gravitational field Outside the On the Inside the
of earth in a parabolic path. surface surface surface
V > Ve Projectile does not orbit. r>R r=R r<R
It escapes the gravitational field GM GM GM
V V V
of earth in a hyperbolic path. r R R
Gravitational Field Intensity for Different Bodies 
R
(1) Intensity due to uniform solid sphere V r 
Outside the On the surface Inside the 1
surface r=R surface Vout  
r
r>R r<R
GM
GM GM GMr  
I 2 I 2 I 3 R
r R R
(3) Potential due to uniform solid sphere
Outside On the Inside the surface
the surface surface r<R
r>R r=R
GM GM  GM   r  
2
V Vsurface  V 3    
r R 2R   R  
 
(2) Intensity due to spherical shell at the center (r = 0)
Outside the On the Inside the 3 GM
Vcentre (max.)
surface surface surface 2 R
r>R r=R r<R 3
GM GM I=0 Vcentre = Vsurface
I 2 I 2 2
r R

 R
R Vg r 
I r
1
1 Vout  
Iin=0

Iout  2 Vsurface r
r 3 GM 
1.5Vsurface  
GM 2 R
 2
R

94
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 HOME ASSIGNMENT
1. Mass of the earth is 81 times the mass of moon and (C) (D)
the distance between the earth and moon is 60 times
7. The height h at which the acceleration due to gravity
the radius of the earth. If R is the radius of the earth,
becomes 1/n times the value at the surface (R =
then the distance between the moon and the point on
radius of earth) will be :
the line joining the moon and the earth where the ( )
gravitational force becomes zero is : (A) (B)
(A) 30R (B) 15R (C)
( )
(D) (√𝑛 − 1)𝑅
(C) 6R (D) 5R
8. A tunnel is dug along a diameter of the earth of mass
2. Two particles of equal mass move in a circle of
Me and radius Re. The force on a particle of mass m
radius r under the action of their mutual gravitational
placed in the tunnel at a distance r from the centre is :
attraction. If the mass of each particle is M, the speed
of each particle is : (A) 𝑟 (B)

(A) (B) (C) (D) 𝑟

9. The weight of railway train when at rest on equator is
(C) (D) 100 metric ton. When it moves due west with
3. A uniform ring of mass m and radius r is placed sufficient speed, its weight
directly above a uniform sphere of mass M and of (A) is more than 100 metric tons
equal radius. The centre of ring is directly above the (B) is less than100 metric tons
centre of the sphere at a distance r√3 as shown in the (C) is equal to 100 metric tons
figure. The gravitational force exerted by the sphere (D) becomes zero
on the ring will be: 10. Infinite number of masses each of 2kg are placed
along x –axis at distances 1m, 2m, 4m, 8m …. From
the origin O, what is the magnitude of gravitational
potential at ‘O’?
(G = gravitational constant) :
(A) G (B) 2G
(A) (B) (C) 3G (D) 4G
11. With what velocity should a body be thrown up so
(C) √3 (D)
√ that it rises to a height equal to the radius of the earth
4. If the period of revolution of an artificial satellite just (g = 10m/s2 at the surface)
above the earth’s surface is T and the density of earth (A) 8000 m/s (B) 6400 m/s
is ρ, then ρT2 (C) 1600 m/s (D) 1000 m/s
(A) is a universal constant whose value is 3π/G 12. The masses and radii of earth and moon are M1, M2,
(B) is a universal constant whose value is 3π/2G and R1, R2 respectively. Their centre are a distance d
(C) is proportional to radius of earth R apart. The minimum speed with which a particle of
(D) is proportional to square of radius of earth R2 mass m should be projected from the mid –point
Here G = universal gravitational constant. between the two centres so as to escape to an infinite
5. The period of satellite in a circular orbit of radius R0 distance is
is T, the period of another satellite is circular orbit of ( )
radius 4R0 is : (A) (B) ( )
(A) T/4 (B) T/8 ( )
(C) ( (D)
(C) 4T (D) 8T )

6. The mean radius of earth is R and ω is its angular

speed about its own axis. If g is the acceleration due
to gravity at its surface, the cube of the radius of orbit
of geostationary satellite orbit will be :
(A) (B)

95
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
13. Two masses m1 and m2 are initially at rest at infinite when it is at perpendicular to the major axis of the
distance. They approach each other due to orbit drawn from the sun is :
gravitational attraction. What is the speed of (A) (B)
approach at a distance r between them?
(C) (D)
( )
(A) ( )
(B) 22. If the attraction force between two bodies of mass M1
and M2 and situated at a distance R is F, then the
(C) ( )
(D) ( ) force F’ between them at distance (R+d) will be
14. Four equal masses (each of mass M) are placed at the (A) F’ = F (B) F’ = FR2/(R+d)2
corners of a square of side ‘a’. The escape velocity of (C) F’ = 1/F (D)F’= (R+d)2/ R2
a body of a mass m from the centre P of square is : 23. A person will get more quantity of matter in Kg –wt at
(A) poles (B) at latitude of 600
√
(A) (B) (C) equator (D) satellite
24. The relation between the potential energy of a body
√
(C) (D) 4 on the surface of a planet and the escape velocity on
15. The escape velocity of a projectile from the surface of the planet is
earth is 11.2 km/s. A body is projected with thrice this (A) U/ve = m (GM/R) (B) U/ve = m (GM/2R)
speed. What is the speed of the body far from earth? (C) U/ve = (GMm/R) (D)U/ve=(1/R) (GMm)
(A) 31.68 km/s (B) 3.168 km/s 25. A satellite is revolving round the earth. Its kinetic energy
(C) 316.8 km/s (D) none of these is Ek. How much should it be made so that the satellite
16. A man can jump vertically through a height 1.5m on may escape out of the gravitational field of earth
earth. The maximum radius of the planet of the same (A) 2Ek (B) 3Ek
density as that of earth from whose gravitational field (C) Ek/2 (D) infinity
he can escape by jumping is (Re = 6400 km) : 26. At what height from the surface of earth the
(A) 6km (B) 7km gravitational force will be reduced by 10% if the
(C) 3.1 km (D) 5km radius of earth is 6370 Km.
17. The angular momentum (L) of earth revolving round (A) 750 Km (B) 650 Km
the sun is proportional to rn, where r is the orbital (C) 450 Km (D) 344 Km
radius of the earth. The value of n is (assume the 27. Two artificial satellites P and Q are revolving round
orbit to be circular) : the earth in circular orbits. The ratio of their orbital
(A) ½ (B) 1 radii is 1:9. The ratio of their orbital velocities will be
(C) – ½ (D) 2 (A) 3:1 (B) 1:3
18. A satellite in an equatorial orbit has a time period of (C) 9:1 (D) 1:9
8 hr. at a certain instant it is directly overhead an 28. An artificial satellite is revolving round the earth in a
observer on the equator of earth. It is directly circular orbit. Its velocity is half the escape velocity.
overhead the observer again after a time T. The Its height from earth’s surface is –
possible value (s) of T is./are (A) 6400 Km (B) 12800 Km
(A) 12 hr (B) 8 hr (C) 3200 Km (D) 1600 Km
(C) 6 hr (D) 18 hr 29. The radius and density of two artificial satellites are
19. The ratio of energy required to raise a satellite upto a R1, R2 and D1, D2 respectively. The ratio of
height h above the earth from earth’s surface to that accelerations due to gravity on them will be –
required to put into orbit there from that height is: (A) R2D2/R1D1 (B) R1D2/R2D1
(A) h : R (B) R : h (C) R1D1/R2D2 (D) R2D1/R1
(C) 2h : R (D) R : 2h 30. A particle is suspended from a spring and it stretches
20. The eccentricity of the earth’s orbit is 0.0167. The the spring by 1 cm on the surface of earth. The same
ratio of its maximum speed in its orbit to its particle will stretch the same spring at a place 800
minimum speed is : Km above earth surface by
(A) 2.507 (B) 1.0339 (A) 0.79 cm (B) 0.1 cm
(C) 8.324 (D) 1.000 (C) 8 cm (D) 1 cm
21. The largest and the shortest distances of the earth 31. If the distance of earth from sun reduces to one
from the sun are r1 and r2. Its distance from the sun fourth of its present value then the length of the year
will become –
96
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 (A) 1/6 of present year (B) 1/8 of present year (B) the radiations from sun exert pressure on it so
(C) ¼ of present year (D) ½ of present year that the tail is formed farther from sun
32. A body of mass 5 Kg is hanging from a spring (C) as the comet revolves round the sun, then due to
balance inside a lift. If the lift is moving downwards centrifugal force some of its mass is thrown
with an acceleration 10m/s2 then the reading of the outwards
spring balance will be – (D) as the comet revolves then some of its mass is
(A) 5 Kg (B) zero drawn in the direction of tail due to the presence
(C) 10 Kg (D) 20 Kg of another star is that direction
33. If a body moves under the influence of inverse 41. A satellite has to revolve round the earth in a circular
square law then the relation between its period of orbit of radius 8 x 103 Km. The velocity of projection
revolution T and orbital radius r is – of the satellite in this orbit will be –
(A) T2 r3 (B) T  r3 (A) 16 Km/s (B) 8 Km/s
(C) T  r (D) T  r4 (C) 3 Km/s (D) 7.08 Km/s
34. The planet mercury is revolving round the sun in an 42. The weight of a body on earth surface is 700 gm. wt.
elliptical orbit as shown in the figure. Its maximum What will be its weight on a planet whose mass is 1/7
kinetic energy is at that of earth and radius half that of earth?
(A) 300 gmWt (B) 200 gmWt
(C) 400 gmWt (D) 57.1 gmWt
43. A light planet is revolving round a heavier planet in a
circular orbit or radius R with period T. If the
(A) D (B) C gravitational force between the two planets is
(C) B (D) A proportional to R5/2 then T2 will be proportional to
35. A planet of mass m is revolving round the sun of (A) R3 (B) R7/2
mass ms in an elliptical orbit. The maximum and (C) R 3/2
(D) R9/2
minimum distances of the planet from sun are r1 and 44. According to Kepler’s second law the line joining the
r2 respectively. The time period of the planet is planet to star sweeps equal areas in equal times. This
proportional to – law is equivalent to the following statement –
(A) (r1 + r2)3/2 (B) (r1 + r2)1/2 (A) the acceleration of the planet is zero
3/2
(C) (r1 – r2) (D) (r1 – r2)1/2 (B) the transverse acceleration of the planet is zero
36. The escape velocity from a spherical satellite is Ve. (C) the tangential acceleration of the planet is zero
The escape velocity from another satellite of double (D) the radial acceleration of the planet is zero
radius and half the mean density will be – 45. A satellite is revolving round the earth with velocity
(A) 2 Ve (B) Ve/2 v. The minimum percentage increase in its velocity
(C) 2 Ve (D) 4 Ve necessary for the escape of satellite will be –
37. The acceleration due to gravity increases by 0.4% (A) 100% (B) 50%
when we go from equator to poles. A pendulum (C) 82.3 % (D) 41.4%
which beats seconds at equator will have period at 46. The time period of a satellite in an orbit of radius R is
the poles T. Its time period in an orbit of radius 4R will be –
(A) 2.002 s (B) 1.982 s (A) 4T (B) 2T
(C) 1.996 s (D) 2.004 s (C) 22 T (D) 8T
38. A bottle full of water at 300C is carried on moon in a 47. To determine time an astronaut in a earth satellite
space ship. If the bottle is opened on the surface of should use –
moon, then the water will (A) a spring watch
(A) start boiling (B) freeze (B) a pendulum clock
(C) remain as such (D) split into H2 and O2 (C) either a spring watch or a pendulum clock
39. The eccentricity of earth orbit is 0.0167. The ratio of its (D) neither a spring watch nor a pendulum clock
maximum and minimum speeds in this orbit will be 48. An astronaut in a space ship is revolving round the
(A) 1 (B) 8.324 earth at a height of 120 Km from its surface. Slowly
(C) 1.033 (D) 2.507 he releases a pen from the space ship. The pen will
40. The tail of a comet is farther from sun because (A) move towards moon
(A) its tail always remains in one position (B) fall down on earth

97
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 (C) move together with the space ship (B) fall with acceleration less than g
(D) fall on earth in an irregular way. (C) fall with acceleration g
49. The ratio of radii of two planets is r. If the ratio of (D) rise with acceleration g
acceleration due to gravity on these planets is a then 57. An artificial satellite is revolving close to earth. Its
the ratio escape velocities on these planets will be – orbital velocity mainly depends upon –
(A) a/r (B) (ar) (A) the mass of earth (B) the radius of earth
(C) r/a (D) ar (C) the orbital radius (D) the mass of satellite
50. A satellite is revolving round the earth in an elliptical 58. The potential energy of a rocket of mass 100 kg at
orbit. Its speed height 107m from earth’s center is 4 x 109 joule. The
(A) will be same at all points of the orbit weight of the rocket at height 109 will be –
(B) will be different at different points of the orbit (A) 4 x 10-2 N (B) 4 x 10-3 N
-2
(C) will be maximum at the farthest point (C) 8 x 10 N (D) 8 x 10-3 N
(D) will be minimum at the nearest point 59. The Venus appears more shinning than other stars
51. If the change in the value of g at height h above earth because
surface is the same as that at depth x (x or h<< Re), (A) it is heavier than other stars
then (B) its density is more than that of other stars
(A) x =h2 (B) x = h (C) it is nearer the earth than other stars
(C) x = h/2 (D) x = 2h (D) there is no atmosphere on it
52. The escape velocity on a planet with radius double 60. A communication satellite is carried from one orbit
that of earth and mean density equal to that of earth to another orbit, with radius double that of the first.
will be (escape velocity on earth = 11.2 Km/s) Its time period in the new orbit will be –
(A) 11 Km/s (B) 22 Km/s (A) 242 Hours (B) 482 Hours
(C) 5.5 Km/s (D) 15.5 Km/s (C) 24 Hours (D) 48 Hours
53. The motion of a planet around sun in an elliptical 61. The value of G for two bodies in vacuum is 6.67 x
orbit is shown in the following figure. Sun is situated 10-11 N-m2/Kg2. Its value in a dense medium of
on one focus. The shaded areas are equal. If the density 1010 gm/cm3 will be –
planet takes time t1 and t2 in moving from A to B and (A) 6.67 x 10-11 N-m2/Kg (B) 6.67 x 10-31 N-m2/Kg
from C to D respectively then (C) 6.67 x 10-21 N-m2/Kg (D) 6.67 x 10-10 N-m2/Kg
62. Two satellites of same mass are launched in the same
orbit round the earth so as to revolve in mutually
opposite directions. They soon collide inelastically
and stick together. The total energy of the system
(A) t1> t2 before collision will be –
(B) t1< t2 (A) – GMm/2r (B) – GMm/r
(C) t1 = t2 (C) – 2GMm/r (D) – GMm/4r
(D) information incomplete 63. In the above question, the total energy of the system
54. The acceleration due to gravity at a place is g m/s2. A after collision will be –
lead sphere of density d Kg/m3 is dropped into a (A) GMm/2r (B) – GMm/r
liquid column of density  Kg/m3. If d> then the (C) – 2GMm/r (D) – GMm/4r
sphere will fall down with
(A) g acceleration 64. The moon revolves round the earth (radius R) in an
(B) without acceleration orbit of radius r with a uniform angular velocity .
(C) acceleration less than g The value of  will be –
(D) with an acceleration g (/d) (A) [gR2/r2]1/2 (B) [gR2/r3]1/2
55. A tunnel is dug along a diameter of earth. The force (C) [gR/r2]1/2 (D) [gR/r]1/2
on a particle of mass m distant x from the center in 65. If the distance of earth from sun were half its present
this tunnel will be value, then the number of days in one year will be –
(A) GMem/R3x (B) GMemR3/x (A) 182 days (B) 365 days
(C) GMemx/R2 (D) GMemx/R3 (C) 88 days (D) 129 days
56. A balloon filled with hydrogen gas is carried from 66. A small body is at a distance r from the center of
earth on moon. Then the balloon will Mercury, where r is greater than the radius of
(A) neither fall nor rise
98
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 Mercury. The energy required to shift the body from 75. A particle is kept at a distance R (earth’s radius)
r to 2r measured from the centre is E. The energy above the earth’s surface. The minimum speed with
required to shift it from 2r to 3r will be – which it should be projected so that it does not return
(A) E (B) E/2 will be –
(C) E/3 (D) E/4 (A) (Gm/2R) (B) (Gm/4R)
67. A space capsule is revolving around the earth in a (C) (2Gm/R) (D) (Gm/R)
circular orbit with constant angular velocity. It is then 76. A satellite going round the earth loses some energy.
put into an orbit around the moon and it is found that its Its speed is v and distance from earth is d.
period is the same as in the previous orbit. If the ratio of (A) both d and v will increase
radius of earth’s orbit to that of moon’s orbit is R, the (B) both d and v will decrease
ratio of mass of earth to mass of moon will be (C) d will increase and v will decrease
(A) R2/3 (B) R3 (D) d will decrease and v will increase
(C) R2 (D) R1/3 77. A satellite is orbiting the earth close to its surface. A
68. The escape velocity of a body on earth’s surface is particle is to be projected from the satellite so as to
11.2 km/s. The escape velocity at an altitude 3R from escape from the earth. The escape velocity from the
earth’s surface will be – (in km/s ) earth is ve. Its speed (v) with respect to the satellite
(A) 11.23 (B) 11.2/3 will be –
(C) 22.4 (D) 5.6 (A) v>ve (B) v = ve
69. The time period of a satellite very close to earth is T. (C) v <ve
The time period of geo –synchronous satellite will be (D) will depend on direction of projection
(A) 22 T (B) 66 T 78. The angular velocity of earth’s rotation about its axis
(C) 77 T (D) T/77 is . An object weighed by a spring balance gives the
70. The work done is bringing three particles each of same reading at the equator as at a height h above the
mass 10g from large distances to the vertices of an poles. The value of h will be –
equilateral triangle of side 10cm. (A) 2R2/g (B) 2R2/2g
(A) 1 x 10-13 J (B) 2 x 10-13 J 2 2
(C) 2 R /g (D) 22R2/3g
(C) 4 x 10-11 J (D) 1 x 10-11 J 79. Three particles of equal mass m situated at the
71. A particle of mass m is placed at the center of a vertices of an equilateral triangle of side l. What
uniform spherical shell of mass 2m and radius r. The should be the velocity of each particle so that they
gravitational potential at a point distant r/2 from the move on a circular path without changing l.
center will be – (A) (GM/2l) (B) (GM/l)
(A) – Gm/r (B) – 2Gm/r (C) (2GM/l) (D) (GM/3l)
(C) – 3Gm/r (D) – 4Gm/r 80. In the above problem, the time period of rotation of
72. A particle of mass m is placed inside a spherical shell the system is proportional to –
of mass M at a point other than the center (A) l1/2 (B) l-1/2
(A) the particle will move towards the wall of shell (C) l3/2 (D) l-3/2
(B) the particle will move towards the centre
(C) the particle will remain stationary 81. If the moon describes a circular path of radius r
(D) none of the above round the earth with uniform angular speed , the
73. Two particles, each of mass m, go round a circle of period of revolution of moon will be –
radius r under the action of their mutual gravitational (A) 2(r2/GR2) (B) 2(GR2/r3)
attraction. The speed of the particle will be –
(C) 2(GR3/r3) (D) 2(r3/GR2)
(A) (Gm/r) (B) (Gm/2r)
82. The unit of G/g is :
(C) (Gm/4r) (D) (Gm/8r) (A) Kg/m (B) Kg/m2
74. A body is suspended from a spring balance kept in a (C) m2/Kg (D) Kg –m2
satellite. When the satellite revolves in an orbit of 83. The earth is revolving round the sun in an elliptical
radius R1 then the reading of the balance is W1 and orbit. If OA/OB = x then the ratio of speeds of earth
when it revolves in orbit of radius R2, its reading is W2. at B and A will be –
(A) W1> W2 (B) W1 = W2
(C) W1< W2 (D) W1 = W2 0

99
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 89. What should be the angular velocity of rotation of
earth about its own axis so that the weight of a
person on equator reduces to 3/5 of its present value
(Re = 6400 Km) :
(A) x (B) √x (A) 7.8 x 10-4 Rad/s (B) 7.8 Rad/s
2
(C) x (D) x √x -4
(C) 0.8 x 10 Rad/s (D) 1 Rad/s
84. The escape velocity of a body thrown vertically 90. The correct graph between the intensity of
upwards from the surface of earth is 11.2 Km/s. If it gravitational field due to a solid sphere and distance
is thrown in a direction making an angle of 300 from from its centre will be –
the vertical, the new escape velocity will be –
(A) 5.6 Km/s (B) 11.2 Km/s
(C) 11.2 x √2 Km/s (D) 11.2 x √3/2 Km/s
85. The correct graph representing the variation of total
energy (Et), kinetic energy (Ek) and potential energy (U)
of a satellite with its distance from the centre of earth is:
(A) (B)

(A) (B)

(C) (D)
91. Newton’s law of gravitation is universal, because -
(A) it is valid for all masses at all distances and it is
not affected by medium
(C) (D) (B) it is always of attractive nature
86. The correct graph between the square of time period (C) it obeys the inverse square law
and cube of the distance of the planet from the sun is (D) it is valid for all members and particles of the
solar system.
92. If the earth stops rotating then at poles the value of g will:
(A) decrease (B) increase
(C) remain unchanged (D) become zero
93. A satellite of mass m is revolving in a circular orbit
of radius r. The relation between the angular
(A) (B) momentum of satellite and mass of earth will be –
(A) J = √(GMm2r) (B) J = √(GMm)
(C) J = √(GMmr) (D) J = √(mvr)
94. Two satellites P and Q of equal mass are revolving in
circular orbits at heights R and 3R from earth’s
surface (R = Radius of earth). The ratio of their
(C) (D) kinetic energies and their potential energies will be –
87. If the radius of earth is made three times, keeping its (A) 1:2 (B) 2:1
mass constant, then the weight of a body on earth’s (C) 4:1 (D) 1:4
surface will be as compared to its previous value – 95. If the weight of 5 Kg body on equator is zero then the
(A) one third (B) one ninth angular speed of earth will be – (radius of earth =
(C) three times (D) nine times 6400 Km and g = 10 m/s2)
88. The Mars –sun distance is 1.524 times the Earth –sun (A) 1/400 rad/s (B) 1/800 rad/s
distance. The period of revolution of Mars around the (C) 1/1600 rad/s (D) 1/80 rad/s
sun will be – 96. At what height from the surface of earth is the
(A) 0.88 Years (B) 1.88 Years acceleration due to gravity 1/100 of its value on earth
(C) 2.88 Years (D) 3.88 Years surface?
100
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 (A) 5.76 x 106 m (B) 5.76 m (A) (B)
(C) 0.576 m (D) 57.6 x 106 m ( )
97. Two spherical bodies of mass M and 5M and radii R (C) (D)
and 2R respectively are released in free space with ( )

initial separation between their centres equal to 12 R. 105. A body of mass m taken from earth surface to a
If they attract each other due to gravitational force height equal to the radius of earth, the change in its
only, then the distance covered by the smaller body potential energy is (letters have usual meaning) :
just before collision is (A) mgR (B) 2mgR
(A) 7.5 R (B) 1.5R (C) ½ mgR (D) ¼ mgR
(C) 2.5 R (D) 4.5 R 106. The gravitational field due to a mass distribution is
98. Two identical trains A and B move with equal speeds E= in the x –direction. (K is a constant). Taking
on parallel tracks along the equator. A moves from the gravitational potential to be zero at infinity, its
west to east and B moves from east to west. Which value at a distance x is :
train will exert greater force on the track? (A) (B)
(A) A
(B) B (C) (D)
(C) both will exert equal force 107. The gravitational potential difference between the
(D) the mass and the speed of earth train must be surface of planet and a point 10m above is 4.0 J/kg.
known to decide properly The gravitational field strength in this region,
99. Geostationary satellite orbits around the earth in a assumed to be uniform is :
circular orbit of radius 36000km. Then, the time (A) 0.025 N/kg (B) 0.40 N/kg
period of a spy satellite orbiting a few hundred (C) 40 N/kg (D) 4.0 N/kg
kilometers above the earth’s surface (Rearth = 6400 108. The mass of the earth is 9 times that of mars. The
km) will approximately) be radius of the earth is twice that of mars. If the escape
(A) ½ hr (B) 1 hr velocity on the earth is 12 km/sec. The escape
(C) 2 hr (D) 4 hr velocity on mars is :
100. A pendulum is clamped on the roof of a stationary (A) 4 km/sec (B) √2 km/sec
car and its time period is T. If the car starts to move (C) 4√2 km/sec (D) 2√2 km/sec
with an acceleration ‘a’ then its time period will be :
(A) more than T (B) less than T 109. If an artificial satellite is moving in a circular orbit
(C) equal to T (D) infinite around the earth with a speed equal to half the
101. The period of revolution of planet A around the sun magnitude of the escape velocity from the earth, the
is 8 times that of B. The distance of A from the sun is height of the satellite above the surface of the earth
how many times greater than that of B from the sun? is:
(A) 2 (B) 3 (A) 2`R (B) R/2
(C) 4 (D) 5 (C) R (D) R/4
102. Suppose the gravitational force varies inversely as 110. The energy spent in shifting a satellite of mass m
the nth power of the distance. Then, the time period from a circular orbit of radius 2R to a higher orbit of
of a planet in circular orbit of radius R around the radius 4R around the earth of radius R and mass M
sun will be proportional to : is:
(A) Rn (B) R(n+1)/2 (A) (B)
(n-1)/2
(C) R (D) R-n
103. An object weighs 10N at the north pole of the earth. (C) (D)
In a geostationary satellite distant 7R from the centre 111. The minimum energy required to launch a satellite
of the earth (of radius R), the true weight and the of mass m from the surface of earth of radius R in a
apparent weight are : circular orbit at an altitude 2R is (mass of earth is M)
(A) 0N, 0N (B) 0.2N, 0N (A) (B)
(C) 0.2 N, 9.8 N (D) 0.2N, 0.2N
104. The acceleration due to gravity on the moon is only (C) (D)
one sixth that of earth. If the earth and moon are
assumed to have the same density, the ratio of the
radii of moon and earth will be:
101
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 ANSWER KEY

1 C 29 C 57 B 85 C
2 A 30 A 58 A 86 C
3 C 31 B 59 C 87 B
4 A 32 B 60 B 88 B
5 D 33 A 61 A 89 A
6 D 34 D 62 B 90 C
7 D 35 A 63 C 91 A
8 A 36 A 64 B 92 C
9 A 37 C 65 D 93 A
10 D 38 A 66 C 94 B
11 A 39 C 67 B 95 B
12 A 40 B 68 D 96 D
13 B 41 D 69 C 97 A
14 C 42 C 70 B 98 B
15 A 43 B 71 B 99 C
16 C 44 B 72 C 100 B
17 A 45 D 73 C 101 C
18 AC 46 D 74 B 102 B
19 C 47 A 75 D 103 B
20 B 48 C 76 D 104 A
21 C 49 B 77 D 105 C
22 B 50 B 78 B 106 D
23 C 51 D 79 B 107 B
24 B 52 B 80 C 108 C
25 A 53 C 81 D 109 C
26 D 54 B 82 C 110 C
27 A 55 D 83 A 111 A
28 A 56 B 84 B

102
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 ELASTICITY
INTERATOMIC FORCES (7) Elastic fatigue: The temporary loss of elastic properties
These forces are electrical in nature and these are active if the because of the action of repeated alternating deforming
distance between the two atoms is of the order of atomic size force is called elastic fatigue.
i.e. 10–10 metre. (8) Elastic after effect: The time delay in which the
This attractive force increases continuously with decrease in r substance regains its original condition after the removal
and becomes maximum for one of deforming force is called elastic after effect. It is the
value of r called critical distance, time for which
represented by x (as shown in the STRESS
figure). Beyond this the attractive The internal restoring force acting per unit area of cross section
force starts decreasing rapidly of the deformed body is called stress.
with further decrease in the value Two types of stresses: Normal and Shear or tangential stress
of r. (1) Normal stress: It is again of two types: Longitudinal and
When the distance between the Bulk or volume stress
two atoms becomes r0, the (i) Longitudinal stress:
interatomic force will be zero.  Only in solids: One of the three dimensions viz.
This distance r0 is called normal length, breadth, height is much greater than other
or equilibrium distance. two.
(r0 = 0.74 Å for hydrogen).  Longitudinal stress produced due to increase in
 dU length of a body under a deforming force is called
F tensile stress.
dr
 Longitudinal stress produced due to decrease in
1 a
Note: Fatt  or Frep  for molecules length of a body under a deforming force is called
r7 r7 compressive stress.
ELASTIC PROPERTY OF MATTER (ii) Bulk or Volume stress
(1) Elasticity: The property of matter by virtue of which a  occurs in solids, liquids or gases.
body tends to regain its original shape and size after the  fluids only bulk stress can be found.
removal of deforming force is called elasticity.  change in volume and density, shape remaining
(2) Plasticity: The property of matter by virtue of which it same.
does not regain its original shape and size after the  deforming force is applied normal to surface at
removal of deforming force is called plasticity. all points.
(3) Perfectly elastic body: If on the removal of deforming (2) Shear or tangential stress: It comes into picture when
forces the body regain its original configuration successive layers of solid move on each other i.e. when
completely it is said to be perfectly elastic. there is a relative displacement between various layers of
(4) Perfectly plastic body: If the body does not have any solid.
tendency to recover its original configuration, on the (i) Area for calculation is the area of the face on which
removal of deforming force, it is said to be perfectly force is applied
plastic. (ii) It produces change in shape, volume remaining the
(5) Reason of elasticity: The spring connecting the two same.
molecules represents the inter-molecular force between
them.

Difference between Pressure and Stress

Pressure Stress
(6) Elastic limit: Elastic bodies show their property of Pressure is always normal Stress can be normal or
elasticity upto a certain value of deforming force. The to the area. tangential.
maximum deforming force upto which a body retains its Always compressive in May be compressive or
property of elasticity is called elastic limit of the material nature. tensile in nature.
of body.
Elastic limit is the property of a body whereas elasticity is
the property of material of the body.
STRAIN
103
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
The ratio of change in configuration to the original the stretching force is removed the wire does not come
configuration is called strain. back to its natural length.
(1) Linear strain: (4) If the stress is increased further, by a very small increase
Change in length  l  in it a very large increase in strain is produced (region AB)
Linear strain  and after reaching point B, the strain increases even if the
Original length  l 
wire is unloaded and ruptures at C. In the region BC the
wire literally flows. The maximum stress corresponding to
(2) Volumetric strain: B after which the wire begins to flow and breaks is called
Change in volume  V  breaking or ultimate tensile strength. The region EABC
Volumetric strain 
Original volume V  represents the plastic behaviour of the material of wire.
BRITTLE MATERIAL
The plastic region between E and C is small for brittle material
and it will break soon after the elastic limit is crossed.

(3) Shearing strain: produces change in the shape of the

body without changing its volume
x Example : Glass, cast iron
 DUCTILE MATERIAL
L
The material of the wire have a good plastic range and such
materials can be easily changed into different shapes and can
be drawn into thin wires

Note: When a beam is bent both compression strain as

well as an extension strain is produced.

Example. Mild steel

ELASTOMERS
Stress-strain curve is not a straight line within the elastic limit
STRESS-STRAIN CURVE for elastomers and strain produced is much larger than the
stress applied. Such materials have no plastic range and the
breaking point lies very close to elastic limit.

(1) When the strain is small (< 2%) (i.e., in region OP) stress Example: rubber
is proportional to strain. This is the region where the so HOOKE’S LAW AND MODULUS OF ELASTICITY
called Hooke’s law is obeyed. The point P is called limit stress
of proportionality and slope of line OP gives the Young’s stress  strain or  constant  E
strain
modulus Y of the material of the wire. If  is the angle of
OP from strain axis then Y = tan.
(2) If the strain is increased a little bit, i.e., in the region PE,
the stress is not proportional to strain. However, the wire
still regains its original length after the removal of
stretching force. This behaviour is shown up to point E
 depends upon the nature of material of the body
known as elastic limit or yield-point.
 depends upon the temperature of the body
(3) If the wire is stretched beyond the elastic limit E, i.e.,
 independent of the dimensions (length, volume etc.)
between EA, the strain increases much more rapidly and if

104
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 0161-2490101/1101 [Link]
 1 1
YOUNG’S MODULUS (Y)  stress  strain  volume  stress  strain
2 2
Normal stress F / A FL
Y   1 1
longitudinal strain l / L Al  Y  (strain) 2  volume  Y  (strain) 2
If force is applied on a wire of radius r by hanging a weight of 2 2
mass M, then 1 1
MgL  (stress) 2  volume  (stress) 2
Y 2 2Y 2Y
r l Note: If the force on the wire is increased from F1 to F2 and the
Important Results
elongation in wire is l then energy stored in the wire
(1) If same stretching force is applied to different wires of
1 ( F1  F2 )
L U l
same material, l 2 2
r2
BREAKING OF WIRE
L Breaking force = P × A
greater the ratio 2 ,greater will be the elongation in the wire.
r P is a constant of proportionality and known as breaking stress.
(2) Elongation in a wire by its own weight: (1) Breaking stress is a constant for a given material and it
FL Mg ( L / 2) MgL L2 dg does not depend upon the dimension (length or thickness)
Elongation l    
AY AY 2 AY 2Y of wire.
(2) If a wire of length L is cut into two or more parts, then
YA
(3) Force constant of wire: k  again it's each part can hold the same weight. Since
L breaking force is independent of the length of wire.
(4) Actual length of the wire: If the actual length of the wire is
P
L, then under the tension T1, its length becomes L1 and Ldg  P  L 
under the tension T2, its length becomes L2. dg
L1T2  L2T1 Length of wire if it breaks by its own weight
L BULK MODULUS
T2  T1
F/A  pV
(5) Thermal stress: K 
V / V V
where p = increase in pressure;
V = original volume;
V = change in volume
l The negative sign shows that with increase in pressure p,
thermal strain  
L the volume decreases by V.
thermal stress = Y  1 V
tensile or compressive force produced in the body = YA 
C = compressibility = 
K pV
In case of volume expansion Thermal stress = K
(1) Isothermal elasticity (E):
(6) Force between the two rods:
E  P
(2) Adiabatic elasticity (E):
E   P
A[ L11  L2 2 ]T E P
F     1  E  E
 L1 L2  E P
Y  Y 
 1 2 

WORK DONE IN STRETCHING A WIRE DENSITY OF COMPRESSED LIQUID

In stretching a wire work is done against internal restoring  P 
    1    [1  C P]
forces. This work is stored in the wire as elastic potential
 K 
energy of strain energy.
MODULUS OF RIGIDITY
Total energy stored in Energy stored in per unit
wire (U) volume of wire (UV) F
Shearing stress 
1 1 Fl
A
Fl shear stress F/A F
2 2 volume   
shear strain  A
105
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 0161-2490101/1101 [Link]
 INTERATOMIC FORCE CONSTANT
POISSON’S RATIO K  Y  r0
Lateral strain: The ratio of change in radius or diameter
to the original radius or diameter is called lateral strain. where Y = Young's modulus, r0 = Normal distance
between the atoms of wire
Longitudinal strain: The ratio of change in length to the
original length is called longitudinal strain. FACTORS AFFECTING ELASTICITY
 dr / r (1) Hammering and rolling: This results in increase in the
 elasticity of material.
dL / L (2) Annealing: Annealing results in decrease in the elasticity
RELATION BETWEEN VOLUMETRIC STRAIN, of material.
LATERAL STRAIN AND POISSON’S RATIO
(3) Temperature: Intermolecular forces decreases with rise in
(i)  = 0, then lateral strain is zero i.e. when a substance is temperature. Hence the elasticity decreases with rise in
stretched its length increases without any decrease in temperature but the elasticity of invar steel (alloy) does not
diameter e.g. cork. change with change of temperature.
(ii) Theoretical value of Poisson’s ratio 1    0.5 . (4) Impurities: Due to impurities in a material, elasticity can
(iii) Practical value of Poisson’s ratio 0    0.5 increase or decrease.
RELATION BETWEEN Y, K,  AND  Note: The moduli of elasticity Y and  exist only for solids
Y  3K (1  2 ) as liquids and gases cannot be deformed along one
dimension only and also cannot sustain shear strain.
Y  2 (1   ) However K exist for all states of matter viz. solid,
9 K liquid or gas.
Y
3K   Ksolid > Kliquid > Kgas
PRACTICAL APPLICATIONS OF ELASTICITY
3K  2
 (1) Maximum height of a mountain on earth can be estimated
6 K  2 from the elastic behaviour of earth.
TORSION OF CYLINDER
K K
(i) The angle of twist  is directly proportional to the K > P > hg  h  or hmax 
g g
distance from the fixed end of the cylinder.
  0o and at free end  = maximum. Wl 3
At fixed end (2) Depression in a rod 
(ii)  is directly proportional to the radius of the cylindrical
4Ybd 3
shell. where W = weight, l = length, b = breadth, d = thickness

r
(iii) AB = r = l  
l
(iv) Twisting couple per unit twist or torsional rigidity or
torque required to produce unit twist.
 r 4
C  C  r 4  A2 WL3
2l (3)  
(v) Work done in twisting the 12 r 4Y
cylinder through an angle  is (4) A hollow shaft is stronger than a solid shaft made of same
mass, length and material.
1  r 4 2
W  C 2 
2 4l

106
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 0161-2490101/1101 [Link]
 HOME ASSIGNMENT
1. A metal wire of length L, area of cross section A and (A) (B)
Young’s modulus Y behaves as a spring. The
(C) 5U (D) 25 U
equivalent spring constant is:
8. Two rods of different materials having the same area
(A) (B) of cross –section A, are placed between two massive
(C) (D) walls as shown in figure. The first rod has a length l1,
coefficient of linear α1 and Young’s modulus Y1. The
2. A uniform rod of length L has a mass per unit length
corresponding quantities for the second rod are l2, α2
λ and area of cross –section A. The elongation in the
and Y2. The temperature of both rods is now raised
rod is l due to its own weight if it is suspended from
by T degrees. The force with which the rods act on
the ceiling of a room. The Young’s modulus of the
each other at higher temp. is given by :
rod is :
( ) ( )
(A) F = (B)
(A) (B)
(C) (D) λgL2
(C) ( )
(D) ( )
3. A slightly conical wire of length L and end radii r1
and r2 is stretched by two forces F, F applied parallel 9. A bar is subjected to equal and opposite forces as
to length in opposite directions and normal to end shown. PQ is plane making angle θ with the cross
faces. If Y denotes the Young’s modulus, then section of the bar. If the area of cross –section be a,
extension produced is : what is the tensile stress on PQ?
(A) (B)

(C) (D)
4. A stone of 0.5 kg mass is attached to one end of a
0.8m long aluminium wire of 0.7 mm diameter and (A) (B)
suspended vertically. The stone is now rotated in a
horizontal plane at a rate such that the wire makes an (C) (D)
angle of 850 with the vertical. Find the increase in the 10. The volume of a solid rubber ball when carried from
length of the wire ( Y for aluminium = 7 x 1010 N/m2, the surface to bottom of a 200 m deep lake decreases
0 0
sin85 = 0.9962 and cos85 = 0.0872 ) : by 0.1%. The value for bulk modulus of elasticity for
(A) 0.7mm (B) 1.7mm rubber is
(C) 1.7cm (D) 17cm (A) 2 x 109 Pa (B) 2 x 106 Pa
5. Select the correct alternative(s) (C) 2 x 104 Pa (D) 2 x 1010 Pa
0
(A) elastic forces are always conservative 11. A cube at temperature 0 C is compressed equally
(B) elastic forces are not always conservative from all sides by an external pressure P. By what
(C) elastic forces are conservative when hooks law is amount should its temperature be raised to bring it
obeyed back to the size it had before the external pressure
(D) elastic forces may be conservative even when was applied? The bulk modulus of the material of the
Hooke’s law is not obeyed. cube is K and the coefficient of linear expansion is α:
6. If a wire is stretched by hanging a weight from its (A) (B)
end, the elastic potential energy per unit volume in
(C) (D)
terms of the longitudinal strain σ and modulus of
elasticity Y is: 12. The two rods of the same material, whose radii are in
the ratio r1 : r2 = 1:3, are twisted by applying equal
(A) (B)
torque on them. The ratio of twists produced in the
(C) 2Yσ2 (D) rods will be :
7. A long wire is stretched by 2μm and the potential (A) 3:1 (B) 9:1
energy is U. If the wire is stretched by 10μm, its (C) 27:1 (D) 81:1
potential energy will be :
107
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 0161-2490101/1101 [Link]
13. The twisting couple per unit twist for a solid cylinder 20. Two bars A and B of circular cross –section and of same
of radius 4.9 cm is 0.1 Nm. The twisting couple per volume made of same material are subjected under same
unit twist for a hollow cylinder of same material and tension. If the diameter of A is half that of B, the ratio of
length with outer and inner radii of 5cm and 4cm extension of A to that of B will be:
respectively will be : (A) 4 (B) ¼
(A) 0.64 Nm (B) 0.064 Nm (C) 2 (D) 16
(C) 0.0064 Nm (D) 0.00064 Nm 21. One end of a uniform rope of length L and of weight W
14. Two cylinders A and B of the same material have is attached rigidly to a point in the roof and a weight W1
is suspended from its lower end. If s is the area of cross
same length, their radii being in the ratio of 1:2
–section of the wire, the stress in the wire at a height
respectively. The two are joined end to end as shown
3L/4 from its lower end is:
in the adjoining figure. The upper end of A is rigidly
(A) W1/s (B) (W1+W/4)/s
fixed. The lower end of B is twisted through an angle
(C) (W1+3W/4)/s (D) (W1+W)/s
θ, the angle of twist of the cylinder A is : 22. A rod of length l and radius r is joined to a rod of radius
r/2 and length l/2 of same material. The free end of
smaller rod is fixed to a rigid base and the free end of
larger rod is given a twist of θ, then angle of twist at the
junction will be –
(A) (B) (A) θ/4 (B) θ/2
(C) 5θ/6 (D) 8θ/9
(C) (D) 23. The bulk modulus of a metal is 1010 N/m2 and Poisson’s
15. Four wires of same material are stretched by the same ratio 0.20. If average distance between the molecules is
load. The dimensions are given below. Which of them 3Å, then the interatomic force constant is :
will elongate the most? (A) 36 N/m (B) 3.6 N/m
(A) length 1.0m, diameter 1 mm (C) 7.5 N/m (D) 5.4 N/m
(B) length 2.0m, diameter 2 mm 24. A fixed volume of iron is drawn into a wire of length l.
(C) length 3.0m, diameter 3 mm The extension x produced in this wire by a constant
(D) length 4.0m, diameter 0.5 mm force F is proportional to:
11
16. If Young’s modulus of iron is 2 x 10 N/m and the 2 (A) 1/l2 (B) 1/l
- (C) l 2 (D) l
inter atomic spacing between two molecules is 3 x10
10m, the interatomic force constant is : 25. There is no change in the volume of a wire due to the
(A) 60N/m (B) 120 N/m change in its length on stretching. The Poisson’s ratio of
(C) 3 N/m (D) 180 N/m the material of the wire is:
17. Two rods of different materials having coefficients of (A) + ½ (B) – ½
linear expansions 1, 2, and Young’s moduli Y1, Y2 (C) + ¼ (D) –¼
respectively are fixed between two rigid massive walls. 26. The length of a wire increased by 1% by a load of 10 Kg
The rods are heated such that they undergo the same suspended from it. If the same load is suspended from the
increase in temperature. There is no bending of the rods. wire of same material but of double length and double
If 1: 2 = 2:3, the thermal stresses developed in the radius, by what percentage the length is increased?
two rods are equal provided Y1:Y2 is equal to : (A) 0.25% (B) 0.5%
(A) 2:3 (B) 1:1 (C) 2% (D) 4%
(C) 3:2 (D) 4:9 27. A material has normal density ρ and bulk modulus K.
18. For the same cross –sectional area and for a given load, The increase in the density of the material, when it is
the ratio of depressions for the beam of a square cross – subjected to an external pressure P from all sides is
section and circular cross –section is: (A) P/ρK (B) K/ρP
(A) 3:π (B) π :3 (C) ρP/K (D) ρK/P
(C) 1:1 (D) 1: π 28. Two cylinders A and B are made of the same material.
19. For a given material the Young’s modulus is 2.4 times The length and radii of the two cylinders are in the ratio
that of rigidity modulus, its Poisson’s ratio is: of 1:2. Both are twisted by applying same torque. The
(A) 2.4 (B) 1.2 ratio of the angle of the twist of A and B is
(C) 0.4 (D) 0.2 (A) 1:2 (B) 1:4
(C) 1:8 (D) 8:1
108
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 0161-2490101/1101 [Link]
29. A long steel wire of length L is suspended from the 32. Two wires of equal length and cross –section are
ceiling of a room. A sphere of mass M and radius r suspended as shown. Their Young’s modulii are Y1 and
  L  is attached to the lower end of the wire. The Y2 respectively. The equivalent Young’s modulus will
be –
height of the ceiling is (L+2r+l). When the sphere is
made to oscillate as a pendulum, its lowest point just
touches the floor. The velocity of the sphere at the
lowest point will be – (A) Y1+Y2 (B) (Y1+Y2)/2
(A) √[(πr2Yl)/m – Lg] (B) √[(πr2Y)/ml – Lg] (C) (Y1Y2)/( Y1+Y2) (D) √ Y1Y2
2
(C) √(πr Yl)/m (D) none of these 33. The mean density of sea water is ρ, and bulk modulus is
30. If a metal wire is stretched a little beyond its elastic B. The change in density of sea water in going from the
limit and then released, it will surface of water to a depth of h is
(A) not contract (A) Bρ2/gh (B) Bρgh
(B) contract, but its final length will be greater than its (C) ρ2gh/B (D) ρgh/B
initial length 34. A uniform rod of length L has a mass per unit length λ
(C) contract only upto its elastic limit and area of cross section A. The elongation in the rod is
(D) loose its elastic limit l due to its own weight if it is suspended from the
31. A heavy uniform rod is hanging vertically from a fixed ceiling of a room. The Young’s modulus of the rod is
support. It is stretched by its own weight. The diameter (A) 2λgL2/Al (B) λgL2/2Al
of the rod is (C) 2λgL/Al (D) λgl2/AL
(A) uniform every where
(B) largest at the top and gradually decreases down the
rod
(C) smallest at the top and gradually increases down the
rod
(D) none of the above
ANSWER KEY

1 B 18 A
2 B 19 D
3 C 20 D
4 B 21 C
5 BCD 22 D
6 A 23 D
7 D 24 C
8 B 25 A
9 C 26 A
10 A 27 C
11 B 28 D
12 D 29 A
13 B 30 B
14 C 31 C
15 D 32 B
16 A 33 C
17 C 34 B

109
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 0161-2490101/1101 [Link]
 FLUIDS
practical units of pressure are atmosphere, bar
FLUID and torr (mm of Hg)
Fluid is the name given to a substance which begins 1atm  1.01105 Pa  1.01bar  760 torr
to flow when external force is applied on it. Liquids The atmospheric pressure is maximum at the
and gases are fluids. Fluids do not have their own surface of earth and goes on decreasing as we
shape but take the shape of the containing vessel. move up into the earth's atmosphere.
other part is perpendicular to the surface of contact. (3) If P0 is the atmospheric pressure then for a point
There is no friction between the layers.
at depth h below the surface of a liquid of density
DENSITY  , hydrostatic pressure P is given by
(1) Relative density or specific gravity which is P  P0  h g
defined as:
Density of body
RD 
Density of water
(2) If m1 mass of liquid of density 1 and m2 mass
of liquid of density  2 are mixed, then as
(4) Hydrostatic pressure depends on the depth of the
2 1  2
If m1  m2 ,    Harmonic mean point below the surface (h), nature of liquid (  )
1   2
and acceleration due to gravity (g) while it is
(3) If V1 volume of liquid of density 1 and V2 independent of the amount of liquid, shape of the
volume of liquid of density  2 are mixed, then as: container or cross-sectional area considered. So if a
given liquid is filled in vessels of different shapes to
If V1  V2  V ,   ( 1   2 ) / 2 =Arithmetic Mean
same height, the pressure at the base in each vessel
(4) With rise in temperature due to thermal will be the same, though the volume or weight of
expansion of a given body, volume will increase the liquid in different vessels will be different.
while mass will remain unchanged, so density
will decrease, i.e.,
(5) With increase in pressure due to decrease in
volume, density will increase, i.e.,

PRESSURE PA  PB  PC but WA  WB  WC
If F be the normal force acting on a surface of area A (5) In a liquid, at same level, the pressure will be
in contact with liquid, then pressure exerted by liquid same at all points. If it is not so then due to
F pressure difference the liquid cannot be at rest.
on this surface is P  . It is measured in N/m2 or This is why the height of liquid is the same in
A
vessels of different shapes containing different
Pascal (S.I.) and dyne/cm2 (C.G.S.). It has dimension
amounts of the same liquid at rest when they are
of [ML–1T–2]
in communication with each other.
(1) Pressure due to a liquid of density  at a depth h
below the surface of liquid is given as P  h  g .
It is a tensor quantity.
(2) Atmospheric pressure: The gaseous envelope
surrounding the earth is called the earth's
(6) Gauge pressure: The pressure difference
atmosphere and the pressure exerted by the
between hydrostatic pressure P and atmospheric
atmosphere is called atmospheric pressure. Its
pressure P0 is called gauge pressure.
value on the surface of the earth at sea level is
P  P0  h g
nearly 1.013  105 N/m 2 or Pascal in S.I. Other
110
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 Pascal's Law (5) Relative density of a body (R.D.) =
density of body Weight of body
It states that if gravity effect is neglected, the pressure 
density of water Weight of equal volume of water
at every point of liquid in equilibrium of rest is same.
Weight of body
=
ARCHIMEDES PRINCIPLE Water thrust
Weight of body Weight of body in air
Archimedes discovered that when a body is immersed  
Loss of weight in water Weight in air–weight in water
partly or wholly in a fluid, at rest it is buoyed up with
W1
a force equal to the weight of the fluid displaced by
W1  W2
the body. This principle is called Archimedes
principle and is a necessary consequence of the laws (6) If the loss of weight of a body in water is 'a '
of fluid statics. while in liquid is 'b'
When a body is partly or wholly dipped in a fluid, the L Upthrust on body in liquid Loss of weight in liquid
  
fluid exerts force on the body due to hydrostatic W Upthrust on body in water Loss of weight in water
pressure. At any small portion of the surface of the a W  Wliquid
body, the force exerted by the fluid is perpendicular   air
b Wair  Wwater
to the surface and is equal to the pressure at that point
multiplied by the area. The resultant of all these FLOATATION
constant forces is called upthrust or buoyancy. If density of body is  and that of liquid is .
i.e., U = Weight of fluid displaced by the body. If density of If density of If density of
This force is called upthrust or buoyancy and acts body is greater body is equal to body is lesser
vertically upwards (opposite to the weight of the than that of that of liquid than that of
body) through the centre of gravity of displaced fluid liquid      liquid   
(called centre of buoyancy).
(1) Upthrust is independent of all factors of the body
such as its mass, size, density etc. except the
volume of the body inside the fluid. Weight will be Weight will be Weight will be
(2) Upthrust depends upon the nature of displaced more than equal to less than
fluid. This is why upthrust on a fully submerged upthrust so the upthrust so the upthrust so the
body is more in sea water than in fresh water body will sink body will float body will move
because its density is more than fresh water. fully upwards and in
(3) Apparent weight of the body of density (  ) submerged in equilibrium
when immersed in a liquid of density ( ) . neutral will float
Apparent weight = Actual weight – Upthrust equilibrium partially
anywhere in the immersed in
 W  U up  V  g V g  V (   )g
liquid. the liquid Such
  that,
 V  g 1  
  W  Vin g 
  V  g  Vin g
 WAPP  W 1  
  V   Vin
(4) If a body of volume V is immersed in a liquid of
Where Vin is
density  then its weight reduces.
the volume of
W1 = Weight of the body in air, W2 = Weight of
body in the
the body in water liquid
Then apparent (loss of weight) W1  W2  V  g
IMPORTANT POINTS
W  W2
 V  1 (i) A body will float in liquid only and only if
g
 
111
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
(ii) In case of floating as weight of body = upthrust. (v) If a platform of mass M and cross-section A is
So W App = Actual weight – upthrust = 0 floating in a liquid of density  with its height h
inside the liquid, then
(iii) In case of floating V  g  Vin g
Mg  hA g …(i)
So the equilibrium of floating bodies is unaffected by
Now if a body of mass m is placed on it and the
variations in g though both thrust and weight depend
platform sinks by y then
on g.
( M  m) g  ( y  h) A g …(ii)
Rotatory Equilibrium: When a floating body is
slightly tilted from equilibrium position, the centre of  mg  A y g , i.e., W  y …(iii)
buoyancy B shifts. The vertical line passing through So we can determine the weight of a body by
the new centre of buoyancy B and initial vertical line placing it on a floating platform and noting the
meet at a point M called meta-centre. If the meta- depression of the platform in the liquid by it.
centre M is above the centre of gravity the couple due
VISCOSITY AND NEWTON'S LAW OF
to forces at G (weight of body W) and at B 
(upthrust) tends to bring the body back to its original VISCOUS FORCE
position. So for rotational equilibrium of floating According to Newton's hypothesis, the tangential
body the meta-centre must always be higher than the force F acting on a plane parallel layer is proportional
centre of gravity of the body. to the area of the plane A and the velocity gradient
dv
in a direction normal to the layer,
dx
dv
i.e., F  A and F 
dx
However, if meta-centre goes below CG, the couple dv dv
due to forces at G and B  tends to topple the floating  FA or F   A
dx dx
body.
where  is a constant called the coefficient of
That is why a wooden log cannot be made to float
viscosity. Negative sign is employed because viscous
vertical in water or a boat is likely to capsize if the
force acts in a direction opposite to the flow of liquid.
sitting passengers stand on it. In these situations CG
(1) Units: dyne-s-cm–2 or Poise (C.G.S. system);
becomes higher than MC and so the body will topple
Newton-s-m–2 or Poiseuille or decapoise (S.I.
if slightly tilted.
system)
IMPORTANT POINTS 1 Poiseuille = 1 decapoise = 10 Poise
(i) When a body floats then the weight of body = (2) Dimension: [ML–1 T–1]
Upthrust, so (3) Viscosity of liquid is much greater (about 100
Fraction of volume outside the liquid times more) than that of gases i.e.  L  G
Vout    Example : Viscosity of water = 0.01 Poise while
f out   1
V    of air = 200  Poise
Vin (4) With increase in pressure, the viscosity of liquids
(ii) For floatation V   Vin      fin (except water) increases while that of gases is
V
practically independent of pressure. The viscosity
(iii) If two different bodies A and B are floating in the
of water decreases with increase in pressure.
 A ( f in ) A (5) The viscosity of thick liquids like honey,
same liquid then 
 B ( f in ) B glycerin, coaltar etc. is more than that of thin
(iv) If the same body is made to float in different liquids like water.
liquids of densities  A and  B respectively, (6) The cause of viscosity in liquids is cohesive forces
 A (Vin ) B among molecules where as in gases it is due to
then  . diffusion.
 B (Vin ) A

112
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 Then P = P1+P2, V1 = V2 = V and Reff = R1 + R2
Note: …(i)
(1) The viscosity of gases increases with increase
of temperature, because on increasing
temperature the rate of diffusion increases.
(2) The viscosity of liquid decreases with where P1 and P2 are the pressure difference
increase of temperature, because the cohesive across the first and second tube respectively, V1
force between the liquid molecules decreases and V2 are rate of flow and R1 and R2 are liquid
with increase of temperature resistances.
(3) Relation between coefficient of viscosity and P  8l 8l 
C  /T
(ii) V   P  V  41  42 
temperature; Andrade formula  =
Ae R1  R2   r1  r2 
 1/3 (2) Parallel combination of tubes
where T = Absolute temperature of liquid, 
= density of liquid, A and C are constants.

POISEUILLE’S FORMULA
1 1 1
(i) P = P1 = P2,   or
Poiseuille studied the stream-line flow of liquid in Reff R1 R2
capillary tubes. He found that if a pressure difference R1 R2
(P) is maintained across the two ends of a capillary Reff 
R1  R2
tube of length 'l ' and radius r, then the volume of
V = V1+V2
liquid coming out of the tube per second is
P r14 P r24   r14  r24 
   P  
8l1 8l2  8l1 8l2 
STOKE'S LAW AND TERMINAL
(i) Directly proportional to the pressure difference VELOCITY
(P).
If a sphere of radius r moves with velocity v through
(ii) Directly proportional to the fourth power of radius
(r) of the capillary tube a fluid of viscosity , the viscous force opposing the
(iii) Inversely proportional to the coefficient of motion of the sphere is
viscosity () of the liquid. F = 6rv
This law is called Stokes law.
(iv) Inversely proportional to the length (l) of the
If a spherical body of radius r is
capillary tube.
dropped in a viscous fluid, it is first
P r4 KP r 4 accelerated and then its acceleration
i.e. V or V 
l l becomes zero and it attains a constant
Pr 4
 velocity called terminal velocity.
 V [where K 
8 l 8  W–U–F = 0 or F = W – U
is the constant of proportionality] 4 4
 6 rv   r 3  g   r 3 g
This is known as Poiseulle's equation. 3 3
P 4
  r (   ) g
3
This equation also can be written as, V  where 3
R
Terminal velocity v  2 r (    ) g
2
8 l 
R 9 
 r4 (a) Terminal velocity depend on the radius of the
R is called as liquid resistance. sphere so if radius is made n - fold, terminal
(1) Series combination of tubes velocity will become n2 times.
(i) When two tubes of length l1, l2 and radii r1, r2 are (b) Greater the density of solid greater will be the
connected in series across a pressure difference P, terminal velocity

113
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 (c) Greater the density and viscosity of the fluid layers of different velocities which do not mix with each
lesser will be the terminal velocity. other, then the flow of liquid is called laminar flow.
(d) Terminal velocity graph is shown. In this flow the velocity of liquid flow is always less
than the critical velocity of the liquid. The laminar
flow is generally used synonymously with
streamlined flow.
(3) Turbulent flow: When a liquid moves with a
velocity greater than its critical velocity, the motion
of the particles of liquid becomes disordered or
TYPES OF FLOW irregular. Such a flow is called a turbulent flow.
Unsteady/turbulent flow: If the speed of flow is
(1) Stream line flow or Steady flow: Stream line flow
dv
of a liquid is that flow in which larger,  0 at a particular point and the flow
each element of the liquid passing dt
through a point travels along the becomes turbulent.
same path and with the same In a turbulent flow, the path and the velocity of the
velocity as the preceeding element particles of the liquid change continuously and
passes through that point. haphazardly with time from point to point. In a
In steady flow the velocity of fluid particles reaching turbulent flow, most of the external energy
a particular point is the same at all time. That is a maintaining the flow is spent in producing eddies in
flow is said to be steady if the velocity, pressure and the liquid and only a small fraction of energy is
density at any point in the flow do not change with available for
dv dp d forward flow.
time so that  0,  0 and 0 For example,
dt dt dt
eddies are seen
(a) Line of flow (stream line): A streamline may be
by the sides of
defined as the path, straight or curved, the tangent
the pillars of a
to which at any point gives the direction of the
river bridge.
flow of liquid at that point.
(4) Irrotational Flow: Irrotational flow means that there
The two streamlines cannot cross each other and
is no net angular velocity of the fluid particles.
the greater is the crowding of streamlines at a
If we take a stick and rotate inside a beaker
place, the greater is the velocity of liquid particles
containing water then water particles start rotating.
at that place.
Similar vortex are formed in flowing river, which
Path ABC is streamline as shown in the figure
makes the motion very complicated.
and v1 , v2 and v3 are the velocities of the liquid
Critical Velocity and Reynold's
particles at A, B and C point respectively.
Number
The critical velocity is that velocity of liquid flow
upto which its flow is streamlined and above which
its flow becomes turbulent.
Reynold's number is a pure number which determines
(b) Tube of flow: Consider an area S in a fluid in the nature of flow of liquid through a pipe.
steady flow and draw streamlines from all the It is defined as the ratio of the inertial force per unit
points of the periphery of S. A tube such made is area to the viscous force per unit area for a flowing
known as tube of flow. fluid.
Inertial force per unit area
NR 
Viscous force per unit area
By the definition of Reynolds number
(2) Laminar flow: If a liquid is flowing over a horizontal
surface with a steady flow and moves in the form of Inertial force per unit area v 
2
v r
NR   
Viscous force per unit area v / r 
114
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 If the value of Reynold's number BERNOULLI'S THEOREM
(i) Lies between 0 to 2000, the flow of liquid is
streamline or laminar. According to this theorem the total energy (pressure
(ii) Lies between 2000 to 3000, the flow of liquid is energy, potential energy and kinetic energy) per unit
unstable changing from streamline to turbulent volume or mass of an incompressible and non-viscous
flow. fluid in steady flow through a pipe remains constant
(iii) Above 3000, the flow of liquid is definitely throughout the flow, provided there is no source or sink
turbulent. of the fluid along the length of the pipe.

EQUATION OF CONTINUITY
The equation of continuity is derived from the
principle of conservation of mass.

Mathematically for unit volume of liquid flowing

through a pipe.
1
P   gh   v2  constant
2
Mass of the liquid entering per second at A = Mass of (i) Bernoulli's theorem for unit mass of liquid
the liquid leaving per second at B flowing through a pipe can also be written as:
a1v1 1  a2v2 2 P 1
 gh  v 2  constant
 2
a1v1  a2v2
(ii) Dividing above equation by g we get
[If the liquid is 2
P v
incompressible ( 1   2 ) ] h = constant
g 2g
or av  constant
P
1 Here is called pressure head, h is called
or a  g
v
2
(1) The velocity of flow is independent of the liquid v
gravitational head and is called velocity head.
(assuming the liquid to be non-viscous) 2g
(2) The velocity of flow will increase if cross-section
decreases and vice-versa. That is why: Applications of Bernoulli's Theorem.
(a) In hilly region, where the river is narrow and (i) Venturimeter: It is a device based on Bernoulli's
shallow (i.e., small cross-section) the water theorem used for measuring the rate of flow of liquid
current will be faster, while in plains where through pipes.
the river is wide and deep (i.e., large cross-
section) the current will be slower, and so
deep water will appear to be still.
(b) When water falls from a
tap, the velocity of falling
water under the action of
gravity will increase with
distance from the tap (i.e,
2hg 2  P1  P2 
v2  v1 ). So in accordance V  a1a2 2  a1a2
2
a1  a2   a12  a22 
with continuity equation
the cross section of the water stream will
decrease (i.e., A2  A1 ), i.e., the falling stream
of water becomes narrower.
115
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
VELOCITY OF EFFLUX The intermolecular forces of attraction may be
classified into two types.
Cohesive force Adhesive force
The force of attraction The force of attraction
between molecules of between the molecules
same substance is called of the different
the force of cohesion. This substances is called the
1 2 force is lesser in liquids force of adhesion.
 ( P0  h g )  0  P0   v or v  2 gh
2 and least in gases.
Liquid is moving horizontally with constant velocity Ex. (i) Two drops of a Ex. (i) Adhesive force
v, so it will hit the base level at a horizontal distance x liquid coalesce into one enables us to write on
(called range) as shown in fig. when brought in mutual the blackboard with a
contact. chalk.
(ii) It is difficult to separate (ii) A piece of paper
two sticky plates of glass sticks to another due to
welded with water. large force of adhesion
(iii) It is difficult to break a between the paper and
drop of mercury into small gum molecules.
Such that x  2 h ( H  h)
droplets because of large (iii) Water wets the
dx H cohesive force between the glass surface due to
For maximum range 0  h
dh 2 mercury molecules. force of adhesion.
 Maximum range xmax  H
Note: Cohesive or adhesive forces are inversely
proportional to the eighth power of distance
between the molecules.

SURFACE TENSION
The property of a liquid
The range will be same if the orifice is at a depth h or
due to which its free
( H  h) below the free surface. surface tries to have
Time taken for the level to fall from H to H  minimum surface area and
A 2 behaves as if it were under
t [ H  H ] tension some what like a stretched elastic membrane is
A0 g
called surface tension. Surface tension of a liquid is
If the hole is at the bottom of the tank, time t taken to measured by the force acting per unit length on either
make the tank empty: side of an imaginary line drawn on the free surface of
A 2H liquid, the direction of this force being perpendicular to
t [As here H   0 ]
A0 g the line and tangential to the free surface of liquid. So if
F is the force acting on one side of imaginary line of
length L, then T = (F/L)
(1) It depends only on the nature of liquid and is
independent of the area of surface or length of line
considered.
(2) It is a scalar as it has a unique direction which is
not to be specified.
INTERMOLECULAR FORCE (3) Dimension: [MT – 2]. (Similar to force constant)
The force of attraction or repulsion acting between (4) Units: N/m (S.I.) and dyne/cm [C.G.S.]
the molecules is known as intermolecular force. The (5) It is a molecular phenomenon and its root cause is
nature of intermolecular force is electromagnetic. the electromagnetic forces.

116
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
Examples of Surface Tension but dances about on the surface. This is because,
irregular shaped camphor dissolves unequally and
(1) When mercury is split on a clean glass plate, it forms
decreases the surface tension of the water locally.
globules. Tiny globules are spherical on the account
The unbalanced forces make it move haphazardly in
of surface tension because force of gravity is
different directions.
negligible for them. The bigger globules get
flattened from the middle due to gravity but have (7) Rain drops are spherical in shape because each drop
round shape near the edges. tends to acquire minimum surface area due to
surface tension, and for a given volume, the surface
area of sphere is minimum.
(2) When a greased iron needle is placed gently on the
(8) Oil drop spreads on cold water. Whereas it may
surface of water at rest, so that it does not prick the
remain as a drop on hot water. This is due to the fact
water surface, the needle floats on the surface of water
that the surface tension of oil is less than that of cold
despite it being heavier because the weight of needle is
water and is more than that of hot water.
balanced by the vertical
components of the forces of surface (9) Formation of bigger soap bubbles in comparison to
tension. If the water surface is water.
pricked by one end of the needle, (10) Dirty clothes become clear in hot detergent solution
the needle sinks down. in comparison to water.
(3) When a molten metal is poured into water from a (11) Spraying results in coldness.
suitable height, the falling stream of metal breaks up (12) It is difficult of separate two glass plates between
and the detached portion of the liquid in small which a water film is enclosed.
quantity acquire the spherical shape. (13) Hot tomato soup is more tasteful than then cold
soup.
(14) The ends of glass tube becomes rounded on heating.
(15) To remove oil spot from a cloth, petrol is applied only
on the boundary of spot and not on the whole spot.
(16) Mosquitoes are killed when kerosene is sprayed on
(4) Take a frame of wire and dip it in soap solution and water surface in tanks or ponds.
take it out, a soap film will be formed in the frame. (17) Filling of ink in fountain pen through nib.
Place a loop of wet thread gently on the film. It will (18) Ploughing of field to hold moisture.
remain in the form, we place it on the film according (19) Spreading and sucking process of ink on the
to figure. Now, on piercing the film with a pin at any newspaper.
point inside the loop, it immediately takes the Applications of Surface Tension
circular form as shown in figure. (1) The oil and grease spots on clothes cannot be
removed by pure water. On the other hand, when
detergents (like soap) are added in water, the surface
tension of water decreases. As a result of this, wetting
power of soap solution increases. Also the force of
adhesion between soap solution and oil or grease on
(5) Hair of shaving brush/painting brush when dipped in the clothes increases. Thus, oil, grease and dirt
water spread out, but as soon as it is taken out, its particles get mixed with soap solution easily. Hence
hair stick together. clothes are washed easily.
(2) The antiseptics have very low value of surface
tension. The low value of surface tension prevents the
formation of drops that may otherwise block the
entrance to skin or a wound. Due to low surface
tension, the antiseptics spreads properly over wound.
(6) If a small irregular piece of camphor is floated on
the surface of pure water, it does not remain steady
117
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
(3) Surface tension of all lubricating oils and paints is F for different bodies can be calculated by the
kept low so that they spread over a large area. following table.
(4) Oil spreads over the surface of water because the surface Body Figure Force
tension of oil is less than the surface tension of cold water.
(5) A rough sea can be calmed by pouring oil on its surface. Needle
F = 2l T + W
(Length = l)
(6) In soldering, addition of ‘flux’ reduces the surface
tension of molten tin, hence, it spreads.

Factors Affecting Surface Tension Hollow disc

F = 2 (r1 + r2)T +
(Inner radius = r1
W
(1) Temperature: The surface tension of liquid Outer radius = r2)
decreases with rise of temperature. The surface
tension of liquid is zero at its boiling point and it
vanishes at critical temperature. At critical
Thin ring F = 2 (r + r)T + W
temperature, intermolecular forces for liquid and (Radius = r) F = 4rT + W
gases becomes equal and liquid can expand without
any restriction. For small temperature differences, the
variation in surface tension with temperature is linear
and is given by the relation Circular plate or
disc F = 2rT + W
Tt  T0 (1   t ) (Radius = r)
where Tt , T0 are the surface tensions at t o C and
0o C respectively and  is the temperature Square frame
coefficient of surface tension. F = 8l T + W
(Side = l )
(2) Impurities: If the impurity is completely soluble then
on mixing it in the liquid, its surface tension
increases.
e.g. On dissolving ionic salts in small quantities in a Square plate
F = 4l T + W
liquid, its surface tension increase on dissolving salt
in water, its surface tension increases.
If the impurity is partially soluble in a liquid then its
surface tension decreases, because adhesive force
SURFACE ENERGY
between insoluble impurity molecules & liquid The potential energy of surface molecules is called
molecules decreases cohesive force effectively surface energy. Change in surface energy is given by
e.g. (i) On mixing detergent in water its surface T A .
tension decreases. Unit: Joule (S.I.) erg (C.G.S.)
(ii) Surface tension of water is more than (alcohol +
water) mixture. Work Done in Blowing a Liquid Drop
(3) Surface tension depends on the medium present on or Soap Bubble
the other side of liquid surface. (1) If the initial radius of liquid drop is r1 and final
(4) The dust particles or lubricating materials on the radius of liquid drop is r2 then
liquid surface decreases its surface tension. W = T  Increment in surface area
(5) On electrification: The surface tension of a liquid 2 2
W = T  4 [r2  r1 ]
decreases due to electrification because a force starts
acting due to it in the outward direction normal to [drop has only one free surface]
free surface of liquid. (2) In case of soap bubble
2 2
W = T  8 [r2  r1 ]
Force to pull a body from Surface
[Bubble has two free surfaces]
If a body of weight W is placed on the liquid surface,
whose surface tension is T. If F is the minimum force
required to pull it away from the water then value of

118
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 Splitting of Bigger Drop 6T  1 1 
 v   
When a drop of radius R splits into n smaller drops, d r R
(each of radius r) then surface area of liquid
increases. Hence the work is to be done against EXCESS PRESSURE
surface tension.
Due to the property of surface tension a drop or bubble
Since the volume of liquid remains constant therefore
tries to contract and so compresses the matter enclosed.
4 3 4 3
 R  n  r  R  nr 3 3 This in turn increases the internal pressure which prevents
3 3 further contraction and equilibrium is achieved.
Work done = T  A = T [Total final surface area of n Excess pressure in different cases is given in the
drops – surface area of big drop] = T[n4 r 2  4 R2 ] following table:
Various formulae of work done Plane surface Concave surface
4 T [nr  R ] 4 R2T [n1/3  1] 4 Tr 2 n 2/3 [ n1/3  1]
2 2
1 1 
4 TR   
3
2T
r R P 
If the work is not done by an external source then R
P = 0
internal energy of liquid
decreases, subsequently
temperature decreases. This Convex surface Drop
is the reason why spraying
causes cooling.
By conservation of energy, Loss in thermal energy P
= work done against surface tension
JQ = W 2T 2T
P  P 
3T 1 1  R R
 Decrease in temperature    r  R 
JSd Bubble in air Bubble in liquid
where J = mechanical equivalent of heat, S = specific
heat of liquid, d = density of liquid.
P
Formation of Bigger Drop
4T
If n small drops of radius r coalesce to form a big drop P 
R 2T
of radius R then surface area of the liquid decreases. P 
Amount of surface energy released = Initial surface R
energy – final surface energy Bubble at depth h below the Cylindrical liquid surface
free surface of liquid of density
E  n4 r T  4 R T
2 2
d
Various formulae of released energy
4T[nr  R ] 4 R 2T (n1/3  1)
2 2
3 1 1
4 Tr 2 n2/3 (n1/3  1) 4 TR    h
r R
P
(i) If this released energy is absorbed by a big drop,
its temperature increases and rise in temperature T
can be given by 2T P 
P   hdg R
3T  1 1  R
  
JSd  r R  Liquid surface of unequal Liquid film of unequal
radii radii
(ii) If this released
energy is converted into kinetic energy of a big
P P
drop without dissipation then by the law of
conservation of energy.
1 1 1 1
1 2 1 1  P  T    P  2T   
mv  4 R 3T   
2 r R  R1 R2   R1 R2 
119
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
  Surface tension of the liquid
Note: Excess pressure is inversely proportional to the P0 (c3  a 3  b3 )
radius of bubble (or drop), i.e., pressure inside a T
smaller bubble (or drop) is higher than inside a 4(a 2  b 2  c 2 )
larger bubble (or drop). This is why when two (ii) If two bubble coalesce in vacuum then by
bubbles of different sizes are put in substituting P0  0 in the above expression we get
communication with each other, the air will rush
from smaller to larger bubble, so that the smaller a 2  b 2  c 2  0  c2  a 2  b2
will shrink while the larger will expand till the Radius of new bubble  c  a  b
2 2
or can
smaller bubble reduces to droplet.
be expressed as r  r1  r2 .
2 2

(4) A large force (F) is required to draw apart normally

two glass plate enclosing a thin water film because
the thin water film formed between the two glass
plates will have concave surface all around. Since on
the concave side of a liquid surface, pressure is more,
Useful Facts and Formulae work will have to be done in drawing the plates apart.
2AT
(1) Formation of double bubble : If r1 and r2 are the radii F where T= surface tension of water film, t=
t
of smaller and larger bubble and P0 is the
atmospheric pressure, then the pressure inside them thickness of film, A = area of film.
4T 4T Shape of Liquid Meniscus
will be P1  P0  and P2  P0  .
r1 r2 The curved surface of the liquid is called meniscus of the
As excess pressure acts from concave to convex side, liquid.
the interface will be concave towards the smaller If liquid molecule A is in contact with solid (i.e. wall of
bubble and convex towards larger bubble and if r is capillary tube) then forces acting on molecule A are
the radius of interface. (i) Force of adhesion Fa (acts outwards at right angle to
4T the wall of the tube).
P  …(ii) (ii) Force of cohesion Fc (acts at an angle 45o to the
r
From (i) and (ii) vertical).Resultant force FN depends upon the value
1 1 1 of Fa and Fc.
 
r r1 r2 If Fc  2 Fa Fc  2Fa Fc  2Fa
r1r2 tan =  tan  = positive Tan  = negative
 Radius of the interface r 
r2  r1   = 90o  is acute angle  is obtuse
(2) Formation of a single bubble i.e. the resultant i.e. the resultant angle
(i) Under isothermal condition two soap bubble of force acts force directed i.e. the resultant
radii ‘a’ and ‘b’ coalesce to form a single bubble vertically outside the force directed
of radius ‘c’. downwards. liquid. Hence the inside the liquid.
If the external pressure Hence the liquid liquid meniscus Hence the liquid
is P0 then pressure meniscus must must be concave meniscus must be
inside bubbles be horizontal. upward. convex upward.
Fa
 4T  A Fa A Fa A
Pa   P0  ,   
 a  Fc 45° Fc 45° Fc
FN
 4T   4T  FN
Pb   P0   and Pc   P0  
 b   c  FN

and volume of the bubbles

Example: Pure Example: Water Example:
4 4 4
Va   a 3 , Vb   b3 , Vc   c3 water in silver in glass capillary Mercury in glass
3 3 3 coated capillary tube. capillary tube.
tube.
120
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
ANGLE OF CONTACT tube (water and capillary tube of glass), the shape of the
liquid meniscus in the tube becomes concave upwards.
Angle of contact between a liquid and a solid is defined
as the angle enclosed between the tangents to the liquid
surface and the solid surface inside the liquid, both the
tangents being drawn at the point of contact of the liquid
with the solid.
 < 90o  = 90o  > 90o
F F F R = radius of curvature of liquid meniscus.
Fa  c Fa  c  Fa  c 
2  2 2 T = surface tension of liquid
concave plane convex P = atmospheric pressure
meniscus. meniscus. meniscus. 2T 2T cos 
Liquid wets the Liquid does not wet Liquid does not wet  h 
solid surface. the solid surface.
R g r g
the solid surface.
 r 
IMPORTANT POINTS  As R  cos  
(i) Its value lies between 0o and 180o (i) The capillary rise depends on the nature of liquid and
  0 for pure water and glass,   8 for tap
o o
solid both i.e. on T, ,  and R.
water and glass,   90 for water and silver (ii) Capillary action for various liquid-solid pair.
o

  138o for mercury and glass,   160o for Meniscus Angle of Level
contact
water and chromium
(ii) It is particular for a given pair of liquid and solid.
Thus the angle of contact changes with the pair of Rises
Concave  < 90o
solid and liquid.
(iii) It does not depends upon the inclination of the
solid in the liquid.
(iv) On increasing the temperature, angle of contact No rise no
Plane  = 90o
decreases for convex meniscus and increases for fall
concave meniscus.
(v) Soluble impurities increase the angle of contact.
(vi) Partially soluble impurities decrease the angle of
contact. Convex  > 90o Fall
Solid-liquid pair Angle of contact
Pure water and clean 0o
glass (iii) For a given liquid and solid at a given place
o
Ordinary water and glass 8 1
Water and silver 90o h [As T, , d and g are constant]
r
Mercury and glass 135o i.e. lesser the radius of capillary greater will be the
Alcohol and glass 0o rise and vice-versa. This is called Jurin’s law.
CAPILLARITY Important points

If a tube of very narrow bore (called capillary) is dipped (1) In case of capillary of insufficient length, i.e., L <
in a liquid, it is found that the liquid in the capillary h, the liquid will neither overflow from the upper
either ascends or descends relative to the surrounding end like a fountain nor will it tickle along the
liquid. This phenomenon is called capillarity. vertical sides of the tube. The liquid after
reaching the upper end will increase the radius of
Ascent Formula its meniscus without changing nature such that:
When one end of capillary tube of radius r is immersed into
a liquid of density  which wets the sides of the capillary
121
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 TSA > TSL, cos is positive i.e. 0o    90o .
This condition is fulfilled when the molecules of liquid
are strongly attracted to that of solid.
Example: (i) Water on glass.
hr = Lr  L < h (ii) Kerosene oil on any surface.
 r'>r TSA < TSL, cos is negative i.e. 90o    180o .
(2) If a capillary tube is dipped into a liquid and This condition is fulfilled when the molecules of the
tilted at an angle  from liquid are strongly attracted to themselves and relatively
vertical, then the vertical weakly to that of solid.
height of liquid column Example: (i) Mercury on glass surface.
remains same whereas (ii) Water on lotus leaf (or a waxy or oily surface)
the length of liquid (TSL + TLA cos) > TSA
column (l) in the In this condition, the molecule of liquid will not be in
capillary tube increases. equilibrium and experience a net force at the interface.
h As a result, the liquid spreads.
h = l cos  or l  Example: (i) Water on a clean glass plate.
cos 
(3) It is important to note that in equilibrium the POINTS TO REMEMBER
height h is independent of the shape of capillary
if the radius of meniscus remains the same. That (1) Angle of contact may increase or decrease on
is why the vertical height h of a liquid column in increasing temperature.
capillaries of different shapes and sizes will be (2) Angle of contact decreases on adding soluble
same if the radius of meniscus remains the same. impurity to a liquid.
(3) Angle of contact does not depend upon the
inclination of the tube.
(4) When a large number of drops combine to form a
big drop then energy will be liberated because the
surface area decreases.
Shape of Drops (5) When a big drop is broken into large number of
small drops then energy is absorbed because the
Whether the liquid will be in equilibrium in the form
surface area increases.
of a drop or it will spread out; depends on the relative
(6) A water proofing agent increases the angle of
strength of the force due to surface tension at the
contact as well as the surface tension.
three interfaces.
(7) A molecule in the surface of liquid possess more
TLA = surface tension at
potential energy than a molecule in the interior of a
liquid-air interface, TSA =
liquid.
surface tension at solid-
(8) The inter molecular force of attraction is inversely
air interface.
proportional to the eighth power of the
TSL = surface tension at solid-liquid interface,  =
intermolecular distance.
angle of contact between
(9) Addition of detergent to a liquid decreases the
the liquid and solid.
angle of contact and hence the surface tension also
For the equilibrium of
decreases.
molecule
(10) Rise of liquid in a capillary tube does not violate
T  TSL
TSL + TLA cos = TSA or cos   SA …(i) law of conservation of energy.
TLA (11) Radius of a soap bubble increases whether a
SPECIAL CASES: positive or a negative charge is given to the bubble.
(12) It a bubble is formed inside a liquid, the pressure
inside the bubble is more than the pressure outside
the bubble.

122
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
(13) Surface tension of a liquid is independent of area of (29) Charging of a bubble:
+
the surface. + +

(14) Surface tension is a molecular phenomenon and its + +

root cause are the electromagnetic forces. + +

+
-
(15) The explanation of surface tension was first given
by Laplace. Outward electromagnetic forces of repulsion act on
(16) If the amount of heat present in the liquid surface the charged bubble due to which surface area of
per unit area is H, then the total surface energy is bubble increases.
S = T + H, where T is surface energy. (30) A soap film is formed in a circular frame. A loop of
(17) As the size of bubble on the mouth of capillary thread is lying on the film if the film inside the loop
increases, the difference of liquid levels in is broken then the tension in the thread will be
manometer tubes increases and consequently 2rT. (Only one free surface)
excess pressure increases.
(18) For a given length of perimeter, the area enclosed
by a circle is maximum.
(19) For a given volume the surface area of sphere is
minimum. (31) The tendency of surface tension is to maximize the
(20) Root cause of capillarity is the difference of ratio of volume to surface area.
pressure on two sides of curved surface of liquid.(32) Height of liquid risen in the capillary tube does not
(21) A liquid vaporises rapidly in vaccum. Hence use of depend on the thickness of the tube.
capillary tube is not possible in vaccurn. (33) Cohesive force is responsible for surface tension.
(22) When excess pressure is same then, (34) Direction of force due to surface tension is along
T1 T2 the free surface.

r1 r2 (35) In fig (a) height is h, if tube is bent then height will
remain same but length of liquid changes. It always
(23) Relation between excess pressure, radius and
increases depending upon the direction of bent and
volume is
its magnitude w.r.t. vertical axis. If capillary tube in
PV
= constant fig (a) is inserted more inside or pulled outside
r2 height remains unchanged because height depends
(24) The difference of levels of liquid columns in two on balancing of two forces
limbs of a U tube of unequal radii r1 and r2 is (a) Surface tension &
2T 1 1  (b) Weight of liquid column.
h1  h2  cos    
g  r1 r2 
(25) Curve between h and r

(26) The surface tension of alcohol is less than of water.

Hence when a drop of alcohol is dropped on one
side of a floating match stick, then it starts moving
towards another side.
(27) It is difficult to fill mercury in the thermometer
because mercury depresses in it.
(36) Cause of rise of oil in a lamp wick is capillary
(28) Small drops of fog act as a rigid body because the action, not surface tension because in the wick
 1 infinite number of small capillaries are formed to
excess pressure inside it is large  P  
 r suck oil, due to pressure difference.

123
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 124
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 HOME ASSIGNMENT
1. A tube of length h filled with air and closed at one 8. A metallic wire of density d floats horizontal in
end, is lowered into a mercury tank upto length h. water. The maximum radius of the wire so that the
The mercury rises in the tube through distance x from wire may not sink (surface tension =T)
open end. If mercury barometer reads a height h also,
(A) (B)
then the true relation is :
(A) (2h–x)(h–x) = h2 (B) h(h–x) = h2
(C) (D) 2𝜋𝑇𝑑𝑔
(C) (2h–x) (h+x) = h2 (D) 2h(h–x) = h2
2. A sealed tank containing a liquid of density ρ moves 9. A soap film is formed in a circular frame. A loop of
with a horizontal acceleration a, as shown. The thread is lying on the film. If the film inside the loop is
difference in pressure between the points A and B is : broken then the tension in the thread will be (radius r)
(A) 2πrT (B) πrT
(C) 2rT (D) πr2T
10. Drops of liquid of density d are floating half
immersed in a liquid of density ρ. If the surface
tension of liquid is T, then the radius of the drop will
be :
(A) hρg+ lρa (B) hρg– lρa
(C) hρg (D) lρa (A) ( (B) (
) )
rd
3. A body floats with 1/3 of it volume outside water
and 1/4th outside another liquid. The density of other (C) ( (D) (
) )
liquid is :
11. The radii of two soap bubbles are R1 and R2. The
(A) 9/4 gcm-3 (B) 8/9 gcm-3
ratio of masses of air in them will be :
(C) 4/9 gcm-3 (D) 3/8 gcm-3
4. A vessel contains oil (0.8 gcm-3) over mercury (13.6 (A) (B)
gcm-3). A homogenous sphere floats with half of its
volume immersed in Hg and other half in oil. The (C) (D)
density of material of sphere will be
(A) 3.3 gcm-3 (B) 6.4 gcm-3 12. A ring is cut from a platinum tube 8.5 cm internal and
(C) 7.2 gcm-3 (D) 12.8 gcm-3 8.7 cm external diameter. It is supported horizontally
5. A sphere of relative density σ and diameter D has from the pan of a balance so that it comes in contact
concentric cavity of diameter d. It will just float in with the water in a glass vessel if an extra 3.97 gram
weight is required to pull it away from water, the
water in a tank if the ratio of D/d is :
surface tension of water is :
(A) (B)
(A) 72.07 dynes per cm (B) 70.80 dynes per cm
(C) ( ) (D) ( ) (C) 65.35 dynes per cm (D) 60.00 dynes per cm
13. Two soap bubbles of radii 2 x 10-3 m and 4 x10-3m
6. A solid shell loses its weight in water. Relative
coalesce. If the surface tension of liquid is 3 x 10-3
density of shell is 5.0. What fraction of its volume is
then the radius of curvature of common surface :
hollow?
(A) 4m (B) 4 x 10-3 m
(A) 3/5 (B) 2/5
(C) 2 x 10-3 m (D) 6 x10-3 m
(C) 1/5 (D) 4/5
14. The surface tension of soap solution is T. The work
7. A wooden block with a coin placed on its top, floats
done in increasing the diameter of soap bubble from
in water as shown. If coin falls in to water
D to 2D will be :
(A) 8πD2T (B) 6 πD2T
2
(C) 4 πD T (D) 2 πD2T

(A) l ↓ h ↑ (B) l ↑ h ↓
(C) both l & h ↑ (D) both l and h ↓
125
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
15. A drop of water of volume 0.05cm3 is pressed 2r respectively. Then the pressure difference across
between two glass plates, as a consequence of which the first and second tubes are in the ratio
it spreads and occupies an area of 40cm2. If the (A) 8 (B) 2
surface tension of water is 70 dynes/cm, then the (C) 4 (D) 1/8
normal force required to separate out the two glass 21. In a plant a sucrose solution of coefficient of
plates will be (in newton) viscosity 0.0015 Ns m-2 is driven at a velocity of 10-3
(A) 90N (B) 45 N m/s through xylem vessel of radius 2μm and length
(C) 22.5 N (D) 450 N 5μm. The hydrostatic pressure difference across the
16. There is an air bubble of radius 1mm in a liquid of length of xylem vessels, in N/m2 is
3 3
surface tension 0.075 N/m and density 10 kg/m . The (A) 5 (B) 8
bubble is at a depth of 0.1m below the free surface. (C) 10 (D) 15
The excess pressure inside the bubble above the 22. A spherical steel ball released at the top of a long
atmospheric pressure will be : column of glycerine of length L, falls through a
2 2
(A) 1150 N/m (B) 1000 N/m distance L/2 with acceleration and the remaining
(C) 1270 N/m2 (D) 1340 N/m2 distance L/2 with uniform velocity. If t1 and t2 denote
3
17. An ice block of volume 4π/3 cm is placed in an the times taken to cover the first and second half and
artificial satellite. When ice melts into water then its W1 and W2 the work done against gravity in the two
surface area will be, if the densities of ice and water halves, then
are presumed to be same (A) t1<t2, W1>W2 (B) t1>t2, W1<W2
(A) cm 2
(B) 4π cm 2 (C) t 1=t 2, W 1=W2 (D) t1>t2, W1=W2
23. Water from a top (at the end of a horizontal pipe)
(C) ( ) (D) (36π)1/3 cm2 emerges vertically downwards with an initial speed of
18. A vertical glass capillary tube open at both ends 1.0 m/s. The cross –sectional area of the top is 10-4
contains same water. The most probable shapes of m2. Assume that the pressure is constant throughout
water surfaces inside the tube will be : the stream of water and the flow is steady. The cross
–sectional area of the stream 0.15m below the top is:
(A) 5.0 x 10-4 m2 (B) 1.0 x 10-5 m2
(C) 5.0 x 10-5 m2 (D) 2.0 x 10-5 m2
24. A denotes the area of free surface of a liquid in
motion and h the depth of an orifice of area of cross
(A) (B) section a, below the liquid surface. The velocity of
liquid through the orifice is :

(A) 2𝑔ℎ (B) 2𝑔ℎ

(C) 2𝑔ℎ (D) 2𝑔ℎ

25. An aeroplane of mass 3 x 104 kg and total wing area
(C) (D)
of 120 m2 is in a level flight at some height. The
19. Water flows through a capillary tube of radius r and
difference in pressures between the upper and lower
length l at a rate of 40ml/sec, when connected to a
surfaces of its wings in kilo pascals is (g = 10m/s2)
pressure difference of hcm of water. Another tube of
(A) 2.5 (B) 5.0
same length but radius r/2 is connected in series with
(C) 10.0 (D) 12.5
this tube and the combination is connected to the
26. A cylindrical tank of height H is completely filled with
same pressure head. Calculate the rate of flow
water. On its vertical side there are two tiny holes, one
through the combination
above the middle at a height h1 and the other below the
(A) m/s (B) m/s middle at a depth h2. If the jets of water from the holes
(C) m/s (D) m/s meet at the same point on the horizontal plane through
the bottom of the tank, then the ratio h1/h2 is
20. A liquid flows through two capillary tubes connected
(A) 1 (B) 2
in series. Their lengths are L and 2L and radius r and
(C) 3 (D) 4

126
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
27. A large open tank has two holes in the wall. One is a 35. The density of atmospheric air varies with height above
square hole of side L at a depth y from the top and the ground according to the relation
other is a circular hole of radius R at a depth 4Y from ρ = ρ0e-λh
the top when the tank is completely filled with water, Where λ is a constant. The pressure at a height h is
the quantities of water flowing out per second from given by
both the holes are the same. The R is equal to : (A) (ρ0ge+λh)/λ (B) (ρ0ge-λh)/λ
(C) ρ0gλe +λh (D) ρ0ge-λh/λ
(A) (B) 2πL
√ 36. A piece of ice floats in a liquid contained in a beaker. What
(C) L (D) happens to the level of the liquid when the ice melts?
28. A cylinder containing water upto a height of 25cm (A) Remains unchanged irrespective of the density of
the liquid
has a hole of cross section ¼ cm2 in its bottom. It is
(B) rises if the liquid is also water
counterpoired in a balance. What is the initial change
(C) falls if the liquid is also water
in the balancing weight to maintain equilibrium when
(D) rises if the liquid is denser than water
water begins to flow out
37. A glass beaker of mass 400 g floats in water with the
(A) increase of 12.5 gm wt
open end just touching the surface of water and half of
(B) increase of 6.25 gm wt the beaker filled with water. The inner volume of the
(C) decrease of 12.5 gm wt beaker is 500 cm3. What is the density of the material of
(D) decrease of 6.25 gm – wt the beaker?
29. An air bubble of radius r rises from the bottom of a tube (A) 1.52 g/cm3 (B) 2.67 g/cm3
of depth H. When it reaches the surface, its radius (C) 3.01 g/cm3 (D) 3.87 g/cm3
becomes 3r. What is the atmospheric pressure in terms 38. A metallic block weighs 15 N in air. It weighs 12 N
of the height of water column? when immersed in water and 13 N when immersed in
(A) H/2 (B) H/4 another liquid. What is the relative density of the liquid?
(C) H/8 (D) H/16 (A) 1/3 (B) 2/3
30. A wooden ball of density ρ is immersed in a liquid of (C) 12/13 (D) 13/15
density σ to a depth H and then released. The height h 39. A U- tube is filled with water. Another liquid which
above the surface to which the ball rises will be – does not mix with water is poured into one side. The
(A) h =H (B) h = σH/ρ level of water in the other side rises by 5 cm, but the
(C) h = (σ –ρ) H/ρ (D) h = Hρ/σ level of a liquids in the two sides is same. What is the
31. A sphere of solid material of relative density 9 has a relative density of the liquid?
concentric spherical cavity and just sinks in water. If the (A) 2 (B) 1
radius of the sphere be R, then the radius of the cavity (C) 0.50 (D) 0.25
(r) will be related to R as: 40. A U-tube has a control valve at the bottom. It is filled
(A) r3 = 8R3/9 (B) r3 = 2R3/3 with a liquid to height h1 on one side and height h2 on
(C) r3 = √8R3/3 (D) r3 = R3√(2/3) the other side. Let h1>h2. If the valve is opened and
32. Water rises to 13.6 cm in a capillary tube and mercury liquid in the two sides is allowed to mix, then how much
depresses by 5 cm in the same tube. If the angle of work will be done by gravity. Area of cross –section of
contact for mercury be 1350, what is the ratio of surface the tube is A and density of the liquid is ρ.
tension of mercury to that of water? Density of mercury (A) (h1 –h2)2 Aρg (B) ½ (h1 –h2)2 Aρg
is 13.6 g/cm3 2
(C) ¼ (h1 –h2) Aρg (D) (1/8)(h1 –h2)2 Aρg
(A) 2 (B) 4 41. A U tube is partially filled with water, oil which does
(C) 5 (D) 7 not mix with water is next poured into one side until
33. Work done to blow a bubble of volume V is W. The water rises by 25 cm. On the other side if the density of
work done in blowing a bubble of volume 2V will be : oil be 0.8, the oil level will stand higher than the water
(A) (2)1/3 W (B) 2W level by
(C) (4) 1/3W (D) 4W (A) 6.25 cm (B) 12.50 cm
34. Water stands upto a height h behind the vertical wall of (C) 31.75 cm (D) 62.50 cm
dam. What is the net horizontal force pushing the dam
down stream if width of the dam be b?
(A) h2bρg (B) (h2bρg)/2
(C) (h2bρg)/4 (D) (h2bρg)/6

127
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
42. The spring balance A reads 2 kg with a block m suspended (A) 3 (B) 6.4
from it. A balance B reads 5 kg when a beaker with liquid (C) 7.2 (D) 12.8
is put on the pan of the balance. The two balances are now 50. A square wire frame of size L is dipped in a liquid. On
so arranged that the hanging mass is inside the liquid in the taking out, a membrane is formed. If the surface tension
beaker as shown in Fig. In this situation of liquid is T, force acting on the frame will be
(A) 2 TL (B) 4 TL
(C) 8 TL (D) 10 TL
51. Consider a liquid contained in a vessel. The liquid solid
adhesive force is very weak as compared to the cohesive
(A) the balance A will read more than 2 kg force in liquid. The shape of the liquid surface near the
(B) the balance B will read less than 5 kg solid shall be
(C) the balance A will read less than 2 kg and balance B (A) horizontal (B) almost vertical
will read more than 5 Kg (C) concave (D) convex
(D) the balances A and B will read 2 kg and 5 kg 52. The excess of pressure inside the soap bubble is twice
respectively. the excess pressure inside a second soap bubble. The
43. Which one the following would a hydrogen balloon find volume of the first bubble is n times the volume of the
easiest to lift? second, where n is
(A) 1 kg of steel (B) 1 kg of water (A) 0.125 (B) 1
(C) 1 kg of lightly packed feathers (D) all the same (C) 2 (D) 4
44. At critical temperature, the surface tension of a liquid is 53. The work done in increasing the size of a soap film from
(A) zero 10 cmx 6cm to 10 cm x 11 cm is 3 x 10-4 J. The surface
(B) infinity tension of the film is
(C) the same as that at any other temperature (A) 1.5 x 10-2N/m (B) 3.0 x 10-2 N/m
(D) cannot be determined -2
(C) 6.0 x 10 N/m (D) 11.0 x 10-2 N/m
45. A capillary tube of radius R is immersed in water and 54. When an elastic material with Young’s modulus Y is
water rises in it to a height H. Mass of water in capillary subjected to stretching stress S, the elastic energy stored
tube is M. If the radius of the tube is doubled, mass of per unit volume of the material is
water that will rise in capillary will be (A) YS/2 (B) YS2/2
(A) 2M (B) M (C) S2/2Y (D) S/2Y
(C) M/2 (D) 4M 55. A body floats in a liquid containing in a beaker. The
46. An ice cube having a large air bubble is floating in whole system shown in figure is falling under gravity,
water in a tough. The whole of the ice melts, the level of the upthrust on the body due to liquid is
water in the trough
(A) rises (B) falls
(C) remains unchanged (D) changes erratically
47. A boat floating in a tank is carrying passengers. If the (A) zero
passengers drink water, the water level of the tank (B) equal to weight of the body in air
(A) rises (C) equal to weight of liquid displaced
(B) falls (D) equal to weight of immersed part of the body
(C) remains unchanged 56. A closed compartment containing gas is moving with
(D) depends upon the atmospheric pressure some acceleration in horizontal direction. Neglect effect
48. A body is just floating on the surface of liquid. The density of gravity. Then the pressure in the compartment is
of the body is same as that of the liquid. The body is (A) same everywhere
slightly pushed down. What will happen to the body? (B) lower in the front side
(A) it will sink (C) lower in the rear side
(B) it will come out immediately (D) lower in the upper side
(C) it will remain suspended, where it is left 57. A block of wood floats in a liquid with four –fifths of its
(D) it will slowly come back to its earlier position volume submerged. If the relative density of wood is
49. A vessel contains oil (density 0.8 g/cm3) over mercury 0.8, what is the density of the liquid in units of Kg/m3?
3
(density 13.6 gm/cm ). A homogenous sphere floats with (A) 750 (B) 1000
half its volume immersed in mercury and other half in oil. (C) 1250 (D) 1500
The density of the material of the sphere in g/cm3 is

128
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 Q. 58 to 63 more than one choices are correct (B) its density ρ is lesser than that of liquid σ
58. Chose the correct statement (s) from the following (C) its loss in weight is Vσg
(A) a body will sink in a liquid if its weight is equal of or (D)its true weight is Vρg
greater than the weight of the liquid displayed by it. Write A if both assertion and reason are true and
(B) a body will floats in a liquid if its weight is equal to reason is a correct explanation of the assertion, B if
or less than the weight of the liquid displayed by it. both assertion and reason are true but reason is not
(C) when a body floats in a liquid, the portion of the the correct explanation, C if assertion is true but
body above the surface of the liquid is reason is false, D if both assertion and reason are
independence of the density of the body relative to false
that of the liquid 64. Assertion: A hydrogen filled balloon stops rising after it
(D) in still air, a hydrogen –filled balloon rises up to a has attained a certain height in the sky
certain height and then stops rising Reason: The atmospheric pressure decreases with height
59. A body is floating in a liquid in a beaker. If the whole and becomes zero when maximum height is attained
system falls freely under the gravity, the upthrust on the (A) A (B) B (C) C (D) D
body due to the liquid is 65. Assertion : Tiny drops of liquid resist deforming forces
(A) zero better than bigger drops
(B) equal to the weight of the liquid displaced Reason: Excess pressure inside a drop is directly
(C) equal to the weight of the body in air proportional to the surface tension
(D) equal to the weight of the immersed portion of the (A) A (B) B (C) C (D) D
body 66. Assertion: A block of wood is floating in the tank
60. Figure shows the stress –strain graphs for materials A containing water. The apparent weight of the floating
and B. From the graph it follows that block is equal to zero
Reason: Because the entire weight of the block is
supported by the buoyant force (the upward thrust) due
to water
(A) A (B) B (C) C (D) D
67. Air is blowing across the horizontal wings of an
(A) material A has a higher Young’s modulus aeroplane in such a way that its speeds below and
(B) material B is more ductile above the wings are 90 m/s and 120 m/s respectively.
(C) material A is more brittle If the density of air is 1.3 kg/m3 then the pressure
(D) material A can withstand a greater stress
difference between the lower and the upper sides of
61. Choose the correct statement (s) from the following
the wings will be –
(A) steel is more elastic than rubber
(A) 4819 N/m2 (B) 481.90 N/m2
(B) the stretching of a coil spring is determined by the
(C) 409.5 N/m2 (D) 4095 N/m2
Young’s modulus of the wire of the spring
68. The specific volume of oxygen is –
(C) the frequency of a tuning fork is determined by the
shear modulus of the material of the fork 32
(A) c c/g (B) 0.7 m3/kg
(D) when a material is subjected to a tensile (stretching) 22400
stress, the restoring forces are caused by interatomic 22.4
attraction (C) 0.7 kg/m3 (D) c c/g
32
62. Which of the following statement (S) is /are correct 69. Water coming out of the mouth of a tap and falling
about a soap bubble?
vertically in streamline flow forms a tapering column,
(A) work done in forming the bubble of radius R and
i.e., the area of cross–section of the liquid column
surface tension T is 8πR2T
decreases as it moves down. Which of the following
(B) work done in doubling the radius of a bubble of
is the most accurate explanation for this?
radius R and surface tension T is 2πR2T
(C) pressure difference inside the bubble is double than
inside the drop of the same radius and liquid
(D) pressure inside the bubble is lesser than outside it
63. When a body of density ρ and volume V is floating in a (A) as the water moves down, its speed increases and
liquid of density σ hence its pressure decreases. It is then
(A) its apparent weight is zero compressed by the atmosphere
129
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 (B) falling water tries to reach a terminal velocity and height 2 km, with a velocity v. The terminal velocity
hence reduced the area of cross –section to of the rain drop will be nearly (use g = 10m/s2)
balance upward and downward forces (A) 200m/s (B) 80 m/s
(C) the mass of water flowing past any cross –section (C) 7 m/s (D) 3 m/s
must remain constant. Also, water is almost 75. Water flows through a frictionless duct with a cross –
incompressible. Hence, the rate of volume flow section varying as shown in figure. Pressure P at
must remain constant. As this is equal to velocity points along the axis is represented by:
x area, the area decreases as velocity increases
(D) the surface tension causes the exposed surface
area of the liquid to decreases continuously
70. In the previous question, at the mouth of the tap the
area of cross –section is 2.5 cm2 and the speed of
water is 3 m/s. The area of cross –section of the water
column 80 cm below the tap is (g = 10m/s2)
(A) 2 cm2 (B) 1.5cm2 76. To get the maximum flight a ball must be thrown as:
2 2
(C) 1 cm (D) 0.5 cm
71. There are two identical small holes on the opposite sides
of a tank containing a liquid. The tank is open at the top.
The difference in height between the two holes is h. As (D) any of (A), (B) and (C)
the liquid comes out of the two holes, the tank will 77. A cylinder containing water stands on a table of
experience a net horizontal force proportional to height H. A small hole is punched in the side of
cylinder at its base. The stream of water strikes the
ground at a horizontal distance R from the hole. Then
the depth of water in the cylinder is
(A) H (B) R
(A) h (B) h (C) (RH) (D) R2/4H
3/2 2
(C) h (D) h 78. 16 cm3 of water flows per second through a capillary tube
72. A spherical ball is dropped in a long column of of radius a cm and length l cm, when connected to a
viscous liquid. Which of the following graphs pressure head of h cm of water. If a tube of the same length
represent the variation of (i) gravitational force with and radius a/2 cm is connected in series with the first tube.
time (ii) viscous force with time (iii) net force acting If the pressure head remains the same, the quantity of water
on the ball with time flowing out per second through these tubes will be –
(A) 16 cm3 (B) 1 cm3
3
(C) 17 cm (D) 16/17 cm3
79. In the above question, if the second tube is connected in
parallel instead and keeping the same pressure head, the
(A) Q, R, P (B) R, Q, P volume of water flowing out per second through these tubes
(C) P, Q, R (D) R, P, Q (A) 16 cm3 (B) 1 cm3
3
73. A denotes the area of free surface of a liquid and h (C) 17 cm (D) 16/17 cm3
the depth of an orifice of area of cross –section a, 80. Three capillaries of length L, L/2 and L/3 are
below the liquid surface. The velocity of the liquid connected in series. Their radii are r, r/2 and r/3
flowing through the orifice is respectively. Then if stream line flow is to be
maintained and the pressure across the first capillary
(A) 2 gh (B) 2 gh
is P, then
A 2 (A) the pressure difference across the ends of the
A2  a 2 second capillary is 8 p
(B) the pressure difference across the third capillary
A A2  a 2 is 43 p
(C) 2 gh (D) 2 gh
A a A 2 (C) the pressure difference across the ends of the
74. A rain drop of radius 1.5mm, experience a drag force second capillary is 16 p
-5
F = (2x10 v)N, while falling through air from a (D) the pressure difference across the third capillary
is 59 p
130
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 (C) 7.14 cm (D) 0.714 cm
81. Water flows steadily through a horizontal pipe of a 87. Two glass plates are separated by water. If surface
variable cross –section. If the pressure of water is p at tension of water is 75 dynes per cm and the area of
a point where the velocity of flow is v, what is the each plate wetted by water is 8 cm2 and the distance
pressure at another point where the velocity of flow is between the plates is 0.12 mm, then the force applied
2v;  being the density of water? to separate the two plates is
3v 2 (A) 102 dynes (B) 104 dynes
(B) p  3v
2
(A) p 
2 2 (C) 105 dynes (D) 106 dynes
88. Two drops of equal radius are falling through air with
(C) p  2 v
2
(D) p + 2v2
a steady velocity of 5 cm/s. If the two drops
82. The cylindrical tube of a spray pump has a radius R, coalesced, then its terminal velocity will be –
one end of which has n fine holes, each of radius r. If
(A) 41/3 x 5 cm/s (B) 41/3 cm/s
the speed of flow of liquid in the tube is V, the speed
(C) 51/3 x 4 cm/s (D) 42/3 x 5 cm/s
of ejection of the liquid through the holes is
1
89. The Magnus effect is equivalent to –
V R V R (A) electric field
(A) ( )2 (B) ( )
n r n r (B) magnetic field
3
V R 2 V R (C) Bernouli’s theorem
(C) ( ) (D) ( )2
n r n r (D) magnetic effect of current
83. Two capillary tubes A and B of radii ra and rb and 90. The height of water level in a tank is H. The range of
lengths la and lb respectively are held horizontally. The water stream coming out of a hole at depth H/4 from
volume of water flowing per second through tube A is upper water level will be –
Qa when the pressure difference across its ends is (A) √3 H/2 (B) 2H/√3
maintained at P. When the same pressure difference is (C) H/√3 (D) √3 H
maintained across tube B, the volume of water flowing 91. In a laminar flow, the velocity of flow at any point in
per second through it is Qb. The ratio Qa is the liquid:
Qb (A) does not vary with time
(A) lb (B) lb (B) may vary in magnitude but not in direction
r r (C) may vary in direction but not in magnitude
la ( a ) la ( a ) 2
rb rb (D) may vary both in magnitude and direction
4 92. Viscous Liquid is flowing steadily through a
 
(C) lb (D) la  rb  cylindrical tube. Velocity of the liquid in the stream
r
la ( a ) 3  ra  line along the axis of the cylinder is 4 cm/s. The
rb velocity of the liquid layer in contact with the tube is:
84. When the temperature increases the angle of contact (A) 4 cm/s (B) 2 cm/s
of the liquid
(C) 1 cm/s (D) zero
(A) increases (B) decreases
(C) remains unchanged 93. In the houses far away from the municipal water tanks
often water does not rise to the top floor. This happens
(D) depends on the nature of meniscus
because:
85. Two soap bubbles, each with a radius r coalesce in a (A) viscosity of water is very high
vacuum under isothermal conditions to form a bigger (B) water wets the pipes
bubble of radius R. Then R is equal to (C) of changes in the cross–sectional area of the pipe
(A) 2-1/2 r (B) 21/3 r (D) of loss of pressure during the flow of water
1/2
(C) 2 r (D) 2 r 94. Two capillary tubes of same radius r but of length l1,
86. A cylindrical vessel with a circular hole of radius 0.2 l2 are fitted in parallel to the bottom of a vessel. The
mm in its bottom, is filled with water. If surface tension pressure head is p. What should be the length of a
of water is equal to 70 dynes per cm, density of water is single tube of same radius r that can replace the two
1 gm pr cm3 and g is equal to 980 cm per sec2, then the tubes so that the rate of flow is same as before?
maximum height to which the vessel can be filled (A) l1 +l2 (B) 1/l1 + 1/l2
without water flowing out of the hole is nearly (C) l1l2/( l1 +l2) (D) 1/ (l1 +l2)
(A) 0 cm (B) 14.28 cm

131
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
95. A metallic sphere of mass M falls through glycerine 99. A flat plate of area 10 cm2 is separated from a large
with a terminal velocity v. If we drop a ball of 8M of plate by a layer of glycerin 1mm thick. If the
same metal into a column of glycerine, the terminal coefficient of viscosity of glycerin is 20 poise, the
velocity of the ball will be : force required to keep the plate moving with a
(A) 2v (B) 4v velocity of 1 cm per sec is :
(C) 6v (D) 8v (A) 80 dyne (B) 200 dyne
96. The lower end of the capillary tube is at a depth of (C) 800 dyne (D) 2000 dyne
12cm in water and the water rises 3 cm in it. The 100. For flow of a fluid to be turbulent :
mouth pressure required to blow an air bubble at the (A) fluid should have high density
lower end will be X cm of water column, where X is: (B) critical velocity should be large
(A) 3 (B) 9 (C) Reynold number should be less than 2000
(C) 12 (D) 15 (D) all the above
97. A drop of oil is placed on the surface of water. Which 101. The level of water in a tank is 5 m high. A hole of
of the following statement is correct? area 1cm2 is made in the bottom of the tank. The rate
(A) it will remain on its as a sphere of leakage of water from the hole (g = 10 m/s2)
(B) it will spread as a thin layer (A) 10-2 m3/s (B) 10-3 m3/s
(C) it will partly be a spherical droplet and partly a thin film (C) 10-4 m3/s (D) 103 m3/s
(D) it will float as a distorted drop on the water surface
98. Soap solution bubble having radius 1/√π cm is expanded
to a bubble of radius 2/√π cm. If the surface tension of
soap solution is 30 dyne/cm, the work done is:
(A) 180 erg (B) 360 erg
(C) 720 erg (D) 960 erg
ANSWER KEY
1 A 27 A 53 B 79 C
2 A 28 C 54 C 80 A
3 B 29 C 55 A 81 A
4 C 30 C 56 D 82 D
5 C 31 A 57 B 83 D
6 D 32 D 58 BD 84 A
7 D 33 C 59 ABCD 85 C
8 A 34 B 60 AD 86 C
9 C 35 B 61 AD 87 C
10 C 36 D 62 AC 88 A
11 C 37 B 63 ACD 89 C
12 A 38 B 64 C 90 A
13 B 39 B 65 B 91 A
14 B 40 C 66 A 92 D
15 B 41 A 67 D 93 D
16 A 42 C 68 C 94 C
17 B 43 C 69 C 95 B
18 D 44 A 70 B 96 D
19 A 45 A 71 B 97 B
20 A 46 C 72 C 98 C
21 D 47 C 73 B 99 D
22 D 48 A 74 C 100 A
23 C 49 C 75 A 101 B
24 B 50 C 76 B
25 A 51 D 77 D
26 A 52 A 78 D

132
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 CALORIMETRY
Specific Heat Specific Heat of Gases
Gram specific heat : The amount of heat energy required to Specific heat of a gas, which is the amount of heat energy
raise the temperature of unit mass of a body through 1°C (or K) required to raise the temperature of one gram of gas through a
is called specific heat of the material of the body. unit degree shall not have a single or unique value.
(1) For sudden compression: Q = 0
If Q heat changes the temperature of mass m by  then
Q 0
Q  c  0
specific heat c  m ( ) m 
m 
(2) If the gas is heated and allowed to expand at such a rate
cal Joule
Specific heat of ice: cice  0 . 5 that rise in temperature due to heat supplied is exactly
gm  C  2100 kg  C
equal to fall in temperature due to expansion of the gas.
1 cal cal J i.e.  = 0
Specific heat of water:  1000  4200
gm  C kg  C kg  C  c
Q

Q

m ( ) 0
(This value is obtained between the temperature 14.5°C to
15.5°C) (3) If rate of expansion of the gas were slow
Q
Specific heat of steam : c steam  0.47 cal / gm  C c  Positive
m ( )
Molar specific heat : (4) If the gas were to expand very fast
Molar specific heat (C)  M  Gram specific heat (c) Q
c  Negative
m (  )
(M = Molecular mass of substance)
Phase Change and Latent Heat
Q 1 Q  m 
CM   where, Number of moles    Latent heat
m     M
(i) Latent heat of fusion : The latent heat of fusion is the heat
Specific Heat of Solids (Dulong and Petit law)
energy required to change 1 kg of the material in its solid state
Y 3R
at its melting point to 1 kg of the material in its liquid state. It
CV is also the amount of heat energy released when at melting
point 1 kg of liquid changes to 1 kg of solid. For water at its
normal freezing temperature or melting point (0°C), the latent
Debye temp.
X heat of fusion (or latent heat of ice) is
T
LF  Lice  80 cal / gm  60 kJ / mol  336 kilo joule / kg
With rise in temperature, CV increases and at a particular
temperature (called Debey's temperature) it becomes constant (ii) Latent heat of vaporisation : The latent heat of
= 3R = 6 cal/mole  kelvin = 25 J/mole  kelvin vaporisation is the heat energy required to change 1 kg of the
material in its liquid state at its boiling point to 1 kg of the
For most of the solids, Debye temperature is close to room
material in its gaseous state. It is also the amount of heat
temperature.
energy released when 1 kg of vapour changes into 1 kg of
Debey's law : It is observed that at very low temperature molar liquid. For water at its normal boiling point or condensation
specific heat  T 3 (exception are Sn, Pb and Pt) temperature (100°C), the latent heat of vaporisation (latent
Specific Heat of Liquid (Water) heat of steam) is
LV  Lsteam  540 cal / gm  40 .8 kJ / mol  2260 kilo joule / kg
Sp. heat cal/g C°

1.0089

1.004 Thermal Capacity and Water Equivalent

1.000 (1) Thermal capacity: It is defined as the amount of heat
required to raise the temperature of the whole body (mass m)
0.996
20 40 60 80 100 through 0°C or 1K.
Temp. in °C
Q
As specific heat of water is very large; by absorbing or releasing large Thermal capacity  mc  C 
amount of heat its temperature changes by small amount. This is 
why, it is used in hot water bottles or as coolant in radiators. (2) Water Equivalent : Water equivalent of a body is defined
as the mass of water which would absorb or evolve the same
amount of heat as is done by the body in rising or falling
through the same range of temperature. It is represented by W.

132
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
If m = Mass of the body, c = Specific heat of body,  = Rise (i) Sublimation curve which connects points at which vapour
in temperature. (V) and solid (S) exist in equilibrium.
(ii) Vapourization curve which shows vapour and liquid (L)
Then heat given to body  Q  mc   ….. (i) existing in equilibrium.
If same amount of heat is given to W gm of water and its (iii) Fusion curve which shows liquid and solid existing in
temperature also rises by . Then equilibrium.
heat given to water Q  W  1    … (ii) [As c water  1 ] The three curves meet at a single point which is called the
triple point. It is that unique temperature-pressure point for a
From equation (i) and (ii)  Q  mc    W  1    substance at which all the three phases exist in equilibrium.
 Water equivalent (W) = mc gm Joule's Law (Heat and Mechanical Work)
Variation of melting point with pressure : Whenever heat is converted into mechanical work or mechanical
For those substances with contract on melting (e.g. water and work is converted into heat, then the ratio of work done to heat
rubber), the melting point decreases with pressure. The reason W
produced always remains constant. i.e. W  Q or  J
is the pressure helps shrinking and hence melting. Most Q
substances expand on melting. (e.g. Sulphur)
This is Joule’s law and J is called mechanical equivalent of
An increase of pressure opposes the melting of such substances heat.
and their melting point is raised.
J is neither a constant, nor a physical quantity rather it is a
Variation of latent heat with temperature and pressure :
conversion factor.
The latent heat of vapourization of a substance varies with
Joule erg
temperature and hence pressure because the boiling point J  4 .2  4 .2  10 7
cal cal
depends on pressure. It increases as the temperature is
Principle of Calorimetry
decreased. For example, water at 1 atm boils at 100°C and
has latent heat 2259 Jg–1 but at 0.5 atm it boils at 82°C and Heat lost = Heat gained
has latent heat 2310 Jg–1 Mixing of two substances when temperature changes only
P P Critical point m 1 c1 (1   mix )  m 2 c 2 ( mix   2 )
Fusion

Critical point L
L m 1 c1 1  m 2 c 2 2
Vaporization S
Vaporization   mix 
m 1 c1  m 2 c 2
S Triple point
Triple point
V Heating Curve
V
E
T T
C Boiling
T2
Boiling D point
The latent heat of fusion shows similar but less pronounced
Temp.

pressure dependence. B
T1 Melting
The figures show the P-T graphs for (a) a substance (e.g., A Melting point
water) which contracts on melting an (b) a substance (e.g. wax)
which expands on melting. The P-T graph consists of three O
Time
curves. t1 t2 t3 t4

133
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 THERMAL EXPANSION
Scales of Temperature T2ºC, the length remains same but a compressive strain
is induced in the rod.
Boiling 212°F 100°C 373 K
water
Stress = Y (T2 – T1)
Force = YA  (T2 – T1)
Freezing 32°F 0°C 273 K Effect of temperature on the time period of a simple
water pendulum:
Fractional change in time period  T  1   
T 2
(i) Time lost by the clock in a day (t = 86400 sec)
Fahrenheit Celsius Kelvin
1 1
t     t     (86400 )  43200    sec
2 2
C 0 F  32 K  273.15 R0 (ii) The clock will lose time i.e. will become slow
  
100 212  32 373.15  273.15 80  0     (in summer) and will gain time i.e. will
C F  32 K  273 R
or    become fast if     (in winter).
5 9 5 4 (iv) The gain or loss in time is independent of time
C F K R period T and depends on the time interval t.
  
5 9 5 4 (v) Since coefficient of linear expansion () is very
The Celsius and Kelvin scales have different zero points but the small for invar, hence pendulums are made of
same size degrees. Therefore any temperature difference is the invar to show the correct time in all seasons.
same on the Celsius and Kelvin scales (T2 – T1)°C = (T2 – T1) K. Note:
Thermal Expansion If a pendulum clock is giving correct time when
Thermal expansion time period is T then
of solid If T increases, clock becomes slow.
If T decreases, clock becomes fast.
Error in Measurement of scale
Linear Superficial Cubical If a scale gives correct reading at temperature t1, then at
expansion expansion expansion
some higher temperature t2 due to linear expansion, the
Linear expansion of solid
 = 0 [1 + ( T – T0)] scale will expand and the same reading will be less than
true value. In this case distance between the marking
Coefficient of linear expansion
changes. Remember the length of the quantity
   measuring does not change, only its reading on the scale
 
=
   = d changes. On increasing the temperature from t1ºC to t2ºC
T .dT if the length changes from 1 to 2 then
Thermal stress 1 = 2 [1 +  (t2 – t1)
(1) When a rod is heated or cooled, it expands or
1 – 2 = 2  (t2 – t1)
contracts. It is turned as free expansion of the rod
1 T1ºC
at t1 ºC
2 T2ºC strain = 0
1
Actually no strain is being developed because on
increasing the temperature, the length of the rod at t2 ºC
increases so at T2ºC natural length of rod is 2.
(2) Now if the ends of the rods are rigidly fixed so as to 2
prevent it from expansion or contraction then stress is Superficial expansion of solids
produced in the rod. By virtue of this thermal stress the If the area of solid at temperature t1ºC is A1 and on
rod exerts a large force on the supports. heating the rod, the area becomes A2 at t2ºC then
T1ºC A2 = A1 [1 +  (t2 – t1)]
1
T2ºC Where  is coefficient of superficial expansion at t1ºC.
2
T2ºC Coefficient of superficial expansion is defined as fractional
1 increase in area per ºC rise in temperature.
The first figure indicates the rod kept between two rigid A A dA
supports at a temperature T1ºC having length 1. If the = =
T [Link]
supports were not there then on increasing the Expansion of cavity : Thermal expansion of an isotropic object
temperature the free expansion occurs by which length may be imagined as a photographic enlargement. So if there is
becomes 2 at higher temperature T2ºC. The third a hole A in a plate C (or cavity A inside a body C), the area of
figure indicates that on increasing the temperature to hole (or volume of cavity) will increase when body expands on
134
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
heating, just as if the hole (or cavity) were solid B of the same V2= V1 [1 + r (t2 – t1)]
material. Also the expansion of area (or volume) of the body C Where r is coefficient of real expansion at t1ºC.
will be independent of shape and size of hole (or cavity), i.e.,
Note :
will be equal to that of D.
(i) In the expansion of liquid r = a + g,
(ii) When the temperature is greater than 4ºC, water
a r r a expands. But in the range of 0ºC to 4ºC, it contracts
A B D
on heating and expands on cooling. This is called
C anomalous expansion which is present because of
b b the fact that water has three types of molecule. H2O,
Expansion of A = Expansion of B Expansion of C = Expansion of D
(H2O)2 and (H2O)3. The density is maximum at 4ºC.
Volume expansion of solids (iii) While considering expansion of liquid, variation of
If V1 is the volume of solid at t1ºC and on increasing the density is taken into account because density is
temperature to t2ºC the volume becomes V2 then, inversely proportional to the volume and on heating
the vessel, the vessel and the liquid expands. So by
V2 = V1 [1 +  (t2 – t1)] measuring the variation of density we can find out
Where  is coefficient of volume expansion at t1ºC. the real expansion of liquid on increasing the
Coefficient of volume expansion is defined as the fractional temperature.
increase in volume per ºC rise in temperature. Anomalous expansion of water:
V V dV At 4°C, density of water is maximum while its specific
 = = volume is minimum.
T [Link]
max
Relation between ,  & 
    :  : 1: 2 : 3 min

Anomalous
  

behaviour

Anomalous
behaviour
2 3 vol/mass

Density
For anisotropic solids    x   y   z where x, y, and z
represent the mean coefficients of linear expansion along 0°C 4°C Temperature 0°C 4°C Temperature
three mutually perpendicular directions.
(A) (B)
Change in density of solid with temperature Effect of temperature on upthrust : The thrust on V volume of
d0
dt = ~ d0 (1 – T)
– a body in a liquid of density  is given by Th  Vg
(1   t )
Now with rise in temperature by  °C, due to expansion,
Here  is coefficient of cubical expansion at 0ºC. volume of the body will increase while density of liquid will
Expansion of liquids decrease according to the relations V   V(1   S  ) and
R
P     /(1   L  )
Q PQ  represents expansion of vessel
So the thrust
QR  represents the real expansion of T h V  g (1   S  )
Th  V g   
liquid Th Vg (1   L  )
and apparent weight of the body Wapp = Actual weight –
PR  Represent the apparent expansion of Thrust
liquid As  S   L  Th  Th with rise in temperature thrust also
decreases and apparent weight of body increases.
(a) Apparent expansion of liquid :–
Expansion of Gases
On increasing the temperature of the liquid, it
Coefficient of volume expansion : At constant pressure, the
expands. This is referred as apparent expansion of
unit volume of a given mass of a gas, increases with 1°C rise of
liquid. In this we do not consider the expansion of
temperature, is called coefficient of volume expansion.
vessel.
V 1
V2 = V1[1 + a (t2 – t1)]    Final volume V   V(1   )
V0 
Where a is coefficient of apparent expansion at Coefficient of pressure expansion :
t1ºC. P 1
  
(b) Real expansion of liquid :– P 

On increasing the temperature of the liquid,  Final pressure P   P(1    )

expansion occurs. When the expansion of liquid with For an ideal gas, coefficient of volume expansion is equal to
container occurs, then this is referred as real the coefficient of pressure expansion i.e.     1  C 1
expansion of liquid. 273

HEAT TRANSFER

135
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
Conduction –  °C Air
y Ice
The process of transmission of heat energy in which the heat
dy
is transferred from one particle to other particle without 0°C
Water
dislocation of the particle from their equilibrium position is 4°C
called conduction. KA [0  ( )] dt
dQ 1  ; dQ 2  mL  (dy A) L
1 2 3 4 5 y
L y L 2
As dQ 1  dQ 2 t 
K  0
y dy 
2 K
y

Metallic rod The time intervals to change the thickness from 0 to y, from y
Hot Cold
to 2y and so on will be in the ratio
Q KA ( 1   2 ) t1 : t 2 : t 3 :: (1 2  0 2 ) : (2 2  1 2 ) : (3 2 : 2 2 )  t1 : t2 : t3 ::1 : 3 : 5
Rate of flow of heat i.e. heat current H 
t l Convection
In case of non-steady state or variable cross-section Natural convection takes place from bottom to top while
dQ d forced convection in any direction. convection currents move
  KA
dt dx warm air upwards and cool air downwards. That is why
Human body is a bad conductor of heat (but it is a good heating is done from base, while cooling from the top.
conductor of electricity). Natural convection plays an important role in ventilation, in
Thermal resistance (R): The thermal resistance of a body is a changing climate and weather and in forming land and sea
measure of its opposition to the flow of heat through it. breezes and trade winds.
  1   2 Natural convection is not possible in a gravity free region such
R 1 2 
H KA(1   2 ) / l as a free falling lift or an orbiting satellite.
Equivalent thermal conductivity for series combination: Mercury though a liquid is heated by conduction and not by
convection.
l1  l2  ...ln l l l l1  l2  ......ln
 1  2  ....  n  Ks  Radiation
Ks K1 A K2 A Kn A l1 l2 l
  ........ n
K1 K2 Kn The process of the transfer of heat from one place to another
n
place without heating the intervening medium is called
(a) For n slabs of equal length Ks  radiation.
1 1 1 1
   .....
K1 K2 K3 Kn The wavelength of thermal radiations ranges from
2 K1 K 2 7 . 8  10 7 m to 4  10 4 m . They belong to infra-red region of
(b) For two slabs of equal length, K s 
K1  K 2 the electromagnetic spectrum. That is why thermal radiations
Temperature of interface of composite bar: are also called infra-red radiations.
1  2 Interaction of Radiation with Matter
K1 K2
(1) Q  Qa  Qr  Qt
Q Qr
l1 l2 Q a Qr Q t
(2)    art 1
Q K1 A(1   ) K 2 A(   2 ) Q Q Q Qa
  Q
t l1 l2 (3) a  a = Absorptance or absorbing power Qt
Q
K ( A1  A 2  .....  An ) ( 1   2 )
Parallel Combination: Qr
l r = Reflectance or reflecting power
Q
K 1 A1 ( 1   2 ) K 2 A 2 ( 1   2 ) K A (   2 )
=   ...  n n 1 Qt
l l l t = Transmittance or transmitting power
Q
 K  K1 A1  K 2 A 2  K 3 A3  ..... K n An (i) If a = t = 0 and r = 1  body is perfect reflector
A1  A 2  A3  ..... An
(ii) If r = t = 0 and a = 1  body is perfectly black body
(a) For n slabs of equal area K  K1  K 2  K 3  ..... K n
n (iii) If, a = r = 0 and t = 1  body is perfect transmitter
K1  K 2
(b) For two slabs of equal area K  .
2
Emissive Power, Absorptive Power & Emissivity
Growth of Ice on Lake (1) Monochromatic Emittance or Spectral emissive power
(e) : For a given surface it is defined as the radiant energy

136
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
emitted per sec per unit area of the surface with in a unit Prevost Theory of Heat Exchange
 1  1 Every body emits heat radiations at all finite temperature
wavelength around  i.e. lying between     to     .
 2  2
(Except 0 K) as well as it absorbs radiations from the
(2) Total emittance or total emissive power (e) : It is defined surroundings.
as the total amount of thermal energy emitted per unit time,
Kirchoff's Law
per unit area of the body for all possible wavelengths.

According to this law the ratio of emissive power to
e  0
e d absorptive power is same for all surfaces at the same
(3) Monochromatic absorptance or spectral absorptive temperature and is equal to the emissive power of a perfectly
power (a) : It is defined as the ratio of the amount of the black body at that temperature. Hence
energy absorbed in a certain time to the total heat energy e1 e 2 E
  ...  
incident upon it in the same time, both in the unit wavelength a1 a 2  A  Perfectly black bod y
interval. It is dimensionless and unit less quantity. It is This in turn implies that a good absorber is a good emitter (or
represented by a. radiator)
(4) Total absorptance or total absorpting power (a): It is Stefan's Law
defined as the total amount of thermal energy absorbed per
According to it the radiant energy emitted by a perfectly black
unit time, per unit area of the body for all possible
body per unit area per sec (i.e. emissive power of black body)
wavelengths.
is directly proportional to the fourth power of its absolute

a  0
a d
temperature, i.e. E  T 4  E = T
4

(5) Emissivity () : Emissivity of a body at a given temperature where  is a constant called Stefan’s constant having
is defined as the ratio of the total emissive power of the body dimension [MT 3 4 ] and value 5. 67  10 8 W / m 2 K 4 .
(e) to the total emissive power of a perfect black body (E) at
Radiant power (P) : It is defined as energy radiated per unit
e
that temperature i.e.   Q
E area i.e. P   A  T 4 . If an ordinary body at temperature T
t
(i) For perfectly black body  = 1 is surrounded by a body at temperature T0, then Stefan's law
(ii) For highly polished body  = 0 may be put as e    (T 4  T04 )
(iii) But for practical bodies emissivity () lies between zero
Newton's Law of Cooling
and one (0 <  < 1).
If the temperature of body is not very different from
Perfectly Black Body surrounding, rate of cooling is proportional to temperature
A perfectly black body is that which absorbs completely the difference between the body and its surrounding. This law is
radiations of all wavelengths incident on it. called Newton’s law of cooling.
t = 0 and r = 0  a = 1.
If a body cools by radiation from  1o C to  2o C in time t, then
When perfectly black body is heated to a suitable high
d 1  2 1   2
temperature, it emits radiation of all possible wavelengths.  and    av  . The Newton’s law of
dt t 2
For example, temperature of the sun is very high (6000 K
 1   2   1   2 
approx.) it emits all possible radiation so it is an example of cooling becomes    K  2  0  .
 t   
black body.
Cooling Curves
(1) Curve between log( – 0) and time
P
O d d
As  (   0 )    Kdt
loge ( – 0)

dt (   0 )

Ferry’s black body : It is a doubled walled evacuated spherical Integrating log e (   0 )   Kt  C

cavity whose inner wall is blackened. The space between the loge (   0 )   Kt  loge A O t
wall is evacuated to prevent the loss of heat by conduction This is a straight line with negative slope
and radiation. There is a fine hole in it. All the radiations
incident upon this hole are absorbed by this black body. If this
black body is heated to high temperature then it emits
radiations of all wavelengths. It is the hole which is to be (2) Curve between temperature of body and time
regarded as a black body and not the total enclosure As loge (   0 )   Kt  loge A

 137
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
0
0 Time t
   0 According to Wien's law the product of wavelength
 log e   Kt     0  Ae  kt
A corresponding to maximum intensity of radiation and
which indicates temperature temperature of body (in Kelvin) is constant, i.e.
decreases exponentially with increasing time. m T  b  constant

E
(3) Curve between the rate of cooling R T3 > T2 > T1
T3
(R) and body temperature (). K 0  T2 m 3 < m 2 < m 1
R  K(   0 )  K  K 0 T1

passing through origin. m 3m 2m 1 

Distribution of Energy in the Spectrum of Black where b is Wien's constant and has value 2 .89  10 3 m - K .
Body
Temperature of the Sun and Solar Constant
(1) At a given temperature energy is not uniformly distributed
If R is the radius of the sun and T its temperature, then the
among different wavelengths.
energy emitted by the sun per sec through radiation in
(2) At a given temperature intensity of heat radiation
accordance with Stefan’s law will be given by
increases with wavelength, reaches a maximum at a particular
wavelength and with further increase in wavelength it P  AT 4  4R 2T 4
decreases. In reaching earth this energy will spread over a sphere of
radius r (= average distance between sun and earth); so the
E
intensity of solar radiation at the surface of earth (called solar
r
constant S) will be given by
P 4 R 2  T 4 R Earth
S   Sun
m 4 r 2 4 r 2
1/4
 r  2 S 
i.e. T    
(3) For all wavelengths an increase in temperature causes an  R   
increase in intensity. 1/4
 
2 
1 .5  10 8 1 .4  10 3
(4) The area under the curve will represent the total intensity    

 ~ 5800 K
 7  10 5  5 .67  10 8 
of radiation at a particular temperature i.e. Area = E   E  d   

From Stefan's law E = T4  Area under E -  curve (A)  T4

(5) The energy (Emax) emitted corresponding to the
wavelength of maximum emission (m) increases with fifth
power of the absolute temperature of the black body i.e.,
E max  T 5

Wien's Displacement Law

138
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 KINETIC THEORY OF GASES
Kinetic Theory of Gases Vt

(1) Every gas consists of extremely small particles known as

V0
molecules. The molecules of a given gas are all identical but
are different than those of another gas. t(°C)
– O
(2) The molecules of a gas are identical, spherical, rigid and
V V V
perfectly elastic point masses. i.e., V  T   constant  1  2
T T1 T2
(3) Their size is negligible in comparison to intermolecular (3) Gay-Lussac’s law or pressure law: The volume remaining
distance (10–9 m) constant, the pressure of a given mass of a gas is directly
(4) The volume of molecules is negligible in comparison to the proportional to its absolute temperature.
volume of gas. (The volume of molecules is only 0.014% of the
volume of the gas).
(5) Molecules of a gas keep on moving randomly in all possible
direction with all possible velocities.
(6) The speed of gas molecules lie between zero and infinity P P1 P
P  T or  constant   2
T T1 T2
(7) The gas molecules keep on colliding among themselves as
well as with the walls of containing vessel. These collisions are Grahm’s law of diffusion : When two gases at the same
pressure and temperature are allowed to diffuse into each
perfectly elastic.
other, the rate of diffusion of each gas is inversely
(8) The time spent in a collision between two molecules is negligible in proportional to the square root of the density of the gas i.e.
comparison to time between two successive collisions. 1 1
r  (M is the molecular weight of the gas) 
(9) The number of collisions per unit volume in a gas remains  M
constant. r1 2 M2
 
(10) No attractive or repulsive force acts between gas molecules. r2 1 M1
(11) Gravitational attraction among the molecules is If V is the volume of gas diffused in t sec then
ineffective due to extremely small masses and very high speed V r V t
r  1  1 2
of molecules. t r2 V2 t1
(12) Molecules constantly collide with the walls of container Dalton’s law of partial pressure : The total pressure exerted
due to which their momentum changes. The change in by a mixture of non-reacting gases occupying a vessel is equal
momentum is transferred to the walls of the container. to the sum of the individual pressures which each gases exert
Consequently pressure is exerted by gas molecules on the if it alone occupied the same volume at a given temperature.
walls of container.
For n gases P  P1  P2  P3  ..... Pn
(13) The density of gas is constant at all points of the container.
Equation of State or Ideal Gas Equation
Gas Laws
The equation which relates the pressure (P) volume (V) and
(1) Boyle’s law: For a given mass of an ideal gas at constant
temperature (T) of the given state of an ideal gas is known as
temperature, the volume of a gas is inversely proportional to
ideal gas equation or equation of state.
its pressure.
PV
For 1 mole of gas  R (constant)  PV = RT
P PV PV T
Boltzman's constant (k) : It is represented by per mole gas
R 8 . 31
constant i.e., k    1.38  10 23 J / K
N 6 . 023  10 23
V P V It's dimension : [ML2 T 2 1 ]
(A) (B) (C) Specific gas constant (r) : It is represented by per gram gas
R Joule
constant i.e., r  . It's unit is and dimension
(2) Charle's law: If the pressure remaining constant, the M gm  kelvin
volume of the given mass of a gas is directly proportional to its [L2 T 2 1 ]
absolute temperature. Since the value of M is different for different gases. Hence the
value of r is different for different gases. e.g. It is maximum for
R
hydrogen rH 2 
2

139
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
Vander Waal's gas equations 8a
, Pc 
a
, Vc  3b ,
Tc 
 a  27 Rb 27 b 2
For 1 mole of gas  P   (V  b )  RT
 V2  27 R 2 Tc2 RT  PV 3
a , b   c  and c c  R

 a 2  64 Pc 8  Pc  T 8
For  moles of gas  P  2  (V  b)   RT c

V 
  Pressure of an Ideal Gas
Here a and b are constant called Vander Waal’s constant.
1 mN 2 1 m N 2
Andrews curves : The pressure (P) versus volume (V) curves P v  v rms (where vrms  v 2 )
3 V 3 V
for actual gases are called Andrews curves.
Relation between pressure and kinetic energy : As we know
D G 1 mN 2 1 M 2 1
P Gas P v rms  v rms  P   v rms
2
... (i)
380°C 3 V 3 V 3
H Liquid vapour region M
[As M = mN = Total mass of the gas and   ]
374.1°C
V
Liquid 370°C 1 M 2 1
 K.E. per unit volume E    v rms   vrms
2
...(ii)
F 360°C E 2 V  2
Vapour 2
C 350°C B
A
From (i) and (ii), we get P  E
V 3
Andrews curve for water
i.e. the pressure exerted by an ideal gas is numerically equal
(i) At 350°C, part AB represents vapour phase of water, in this to the two third of the mean kinetic energy of translation per
 1 unit volume of the gas.
part Boyle’s law is obeyed  P   . Part BC represents the
 V
co-existence of vapour and liquid phases. At point C, vapours
Various Speeds of Gas Molecules
completely change to liquid phase. Part CD is parallel to (1) Root mean square speed : It is defined as the square root
pressure axis which shows that compressibility of the water is of mean of squares of the speed of different molecules
negligible.
(ii) At 360°C portion representing the co-existence of liquid v12  v 22  v 32  v 42  ....
i.e. vrms   v2
vapour phase is shorter. N

(iii) At 370°C this portion is further decreased. 1

(i) From the expression of pressure P   v rms
2
3
(iv) At 374.1°C, it reduces to point (H) called critical point and the
temperature 374.1°C is called critical temperature (Tc) of water. 3P 3 PV 3 RT 3kT
 vrms    
 Mass of gas M m
(v) The phase of water (at 380°C) above the critical
temperature is called gaseous phase. 3
Important: rms speed of gas molecules is times that of
(9) Critical temperature, pressure and volume : The point on 
the P-V curve at which the matter gets converted from 3 RT RT
speed of sound in gas, as v rms  and v s 
gaseous state to liquid state is known as critical point. At this M M
point the difference between the liquid and vapour vanishes
3
i.e. the densities of liquid and vapour become equal.  v rms  vs

(i) Critical temperature (Tc) : The maximum temperature below
which a gas can be liquefied by pressure alone is called critical 2P 2 RT 2kT
(2) Most probable speed : vmp   
 M m
temperature and is characteristic of the gas. A gas cannot be
liquefied if its temperature is more than critical temperature. v 1  v 2  v 3  v 4  .....
(3) Average speed: v av 
N
CO2 (31.1°C), O2 (–118°C), N2 (–147.1°C) and H2O (374.1°C)
(ii) Critical pressure (Pc) : The minimum pressure necessary to 8P 8 RT 8 kT
vav   
  M  m
liquify a gas at critical temperature is defined as critical
pressure CO2 (73.87 bar) and O2 (49.7atm)
At a particular
(iii) Critical volume (Vc) : The volume of 1 mole of gas at temperature
critical pressure and critical temperature is defined as critical (Number of
molecules at a
volume CO2 (95 10–6 m3) particular speed)
(iv) Relation between Vander Waal’s constants and Tc, Pc, v(m/s)
vmp vav vrms
Vc
This graph also represent that vrms  v av  vmp

140
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
Jugad: Order remember trick RAM)

THERMODYNAMICS
Thermodynamic variables and equation of state: A
thermodynamic system can be described by specifying its PV Diagrams
pressure, volume, temperature, internal energy and the number
of moles. These parameters are called thermodynamic variables.
For  moles of an ideal gas, equation of state is
PV = RT
Thermodynamic equilibrium: In steady state thermodynamic
variables are independent of time and the system is said to be
in the state of thermodynamic equilibrium.
(i) Mechanical equilibrium
(ii) Thermal equilibrium
(iii) Chemical equilibrium
Thermodynamic process: The process of change of state of a
system involves change of thermodynamic variables such as
pressure P, volume V and temperature T of the system.
(i) Isothermal process (ii) Adiabatic process
(iii) Isobaric process
(iv) Isochoric (v) Cyclic and non-cyclic process
(vi) Reversible and irreversible process
Indicator diagram: Whenever the state of a gas (P, V, T) is
changed, we say the gaseous system is undergone a
thermodynamic process. The graphical representation of the
change in state of a gas by a thermodynamic process is called
indicator diagram.
Zeroth Law of Thermodynamics
If systems A and B are each in thermal equilibrium with a third
system C, then A and B are in thermal equilibrium with each
other.
The zeroth law leads to the concept of temperature. All bodies
in thermal equilibrium must have a common property,
temperature.
Heat, Internal Energy and Work in Thermodynamics
For gases when heat is absorbed and temperature changes 
Q  C T
At constant pressure (Q) P  C P T
At constant volume (Q)V  C V T
Internal energy (U) :
f R  R(T f  Ti )
U   R T  C V T   T 
2 (  1)  1
RT f  RTi (Pf V f  Pi Vi ) First Law of Thermodynamics
 
 1  1 Q = U + W
Limitation: First law of thermodynamics does not indicate the
direction of heat transfer. It does not tell anything about the
conditions, under which heat can be transformed into work
and also it does not indicate as to why the whole of heat

141
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
energy cannot be converted into mechanical work If the process is performed in such a way that at any instant
continuously. during the process, the system is very nearly in
thermodynamic equilibrium, the process is called quasi-static.
This means, we can specify the parameters P, V, T uniquely at
Quantity Sign Condition any instant during such a process.
+ When heat is supplied to a system Actual processes are not quasi-static. To change the pressure
Q
– When heat is drawn from the system of a gas, we can move a piston inside the enclosure. The gas
+ When work done by the gas (expansion) near the piston is acted upon by piston. The pressure of the
W gas may not be uniform everywhere while the piston is
– When work done on the gas (compression)
moving. However, we can move the piston very slowly to
+ With temperature rise, internal energy make the process as close to quasi-static as we wish. Thus, a
increases
U quasi-static process is an idealized process in which all
– With temperature fall, internal energy changes take place infinitely slowly.
decreases
Reversible and Irreversible Process
Comparison between isothermal and adiabatic indicator
(1) Reversible process : A reversible process is one which can
diagrams: Always remember that adiabatic curves are more
be reversed in such a way that all changes occurring in the
steeper than isothermal curves
direct process are exactly repeated in the opposite order and
(i) Equal expansion : Graph 1 represent isothermal process inverse sense and no change is left in any of the bodies taking
and 2 represent adiabatic process part in the process or in the surroundings.
(i) There must be complete absence of dissipative forces
such as friction, viscosity, electric resistance etc.
(ii) The direct and reverse processes must take place
infinitely slowly.
(iii) The temperature of the system must not differ
(ii) Compression: Graph 1 represent adiabatic process and 2 appreciably from its surroundings.
represent isothermal process
Examples:
(a) All isothermal and adiabatic changes are reversible if
they are performed very slowly.
(b) When a certain amount of heat is absorbed by ice, it
melts. If the same amount of heat is removed from it, the
water formed in the direct process will be converted into
(10) Free expansion : Free expansion is adiabatic process in ice.
which no work is performed on or by the system. Consider (c) An extremely slow extension or contraction of a spring
two vessels placed in a system which is enclosed with thermal without setting up oscillations.
insulation (asbestos-covered). One vessel contains a gas and (d) When a perfectly elastic ball falls from some height on
the other is evacuated. When suddenly the stopcock is a perfectly elastic horizontal plane, the ball rises to the
opened, the gas rushes into the evacuated vessel and expands initial height.
freely.
(e) Very slow evaporation or condensation.
(2) Irreversible process : Any process which is not reversible
exactly is an irreversible process. All natural processes such as
conduction, radiation, radioactive decay etc. are irreversible.
Examples:
(i) The sudden and fast stretching of a spring may produce
W = 0 (Because walls are rigid) vibrations in it. Now a part of the energy is dissipated. This
is the case of irreversible process.
Q = 0 (Because walls are insulated)
(ii) Sudden expansion or contraction and rapid evaporation
U = Uf – Ui = 0 (Because Q and W are zero.
or condensation are examples of irreversible processes.
Thus the final and initial energies are equal in free expansion.
Quasi Static Process

142
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 one. In this process the molar heat capacity is,
R R R
C  CV   
1  x  1 1  x

Mixed Graphical Representation Heat Engine

Heat engine is a device which converts heat into work
continuously through a cyclic process.

Work done W
 
Heat input Q1
For cyclic process U = 0 hence from FLOT Q = W
Q1  Q 2 Q
So W  Q1  Q 2    1 2
Q1 Q1
A perfect heat engine is one which converts all heat into work
i.e. W  Q1 so that Q 2  0 and hence   1 .
But practically efficiency of an engine is always less than 1.
Refrigerator or Heat Pump

Comparison of various process

Isothermal Adiabatic Isobaric Isochoric
process process process process
T = constant or Q = 0 P = 0 V = 0
T = 0
PV = constant PV = constant V P
 constant  constant Heat extracted Q Q2
  2 
TV–1= constant T T Work done W Q1  Q 2
T/P–1 = T2
coefficient of performance  
constant T1  T2
Q = W Q = 0 Q  nC p TQ  nCV T where T1 = temperature of surrounding, T2 = temperature of
cold body. It is clear that  = 0 when T2 = 0 i.e. the coefficient
P1V1  P2 V2 W  P  Vf  VW of performance will be zero if the cold body is at the
V  =0
W  nRT ln  2  W 
i

 1 temperature equal to absolute zero.

V
 1
Relation between coefficient of performance and efficiency
   nR  T2  T1
P
 nRT ln  1  nR  T1  T2  of refrigerator
 P2   1 
 1  


U = 0 U  nCV T U  nCV TU  nCV T

Second Law of Thermodynamics
(1) Clausius statement : It is impossible for a self acting
machine to transfer heat from a colder body to a hotter one
Slope of P-V Slope ofP-V Slope of P- Slope of P-V
without the aid of an external agency.
P P V diagram diagram  
diagram   diagram   (2) Kelvin’s statement : It is impossible for a body or system to
V V =0 perform continuous work by cooling it to a temperature lower
 When P and V bear the relation PV x = constant, than the temperature of the coldest one of its surroundings. A
where x  1 or  the process is called a polytropic Carnot engine cannot work if the source and sink are at the

143
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
same temperature because work done by the engine will Heat absorbed by system dQ
dS  or dS 
result into cooling the source and heating the surroundings Absolute temperatu re T
more and more. The relation is called the mathematical form of Second Law of
(3) Kelvin-Planck’s statement : It is impossible to design an Thermodynamics.
engine that extracts heat and fully utilises into work without
producing any other effect.
(1) For solids and liquids
Carnot Engine (i) When heat given to a substance changes its state at
constant temperature, then change in entropy
dQ mL
dS  
T T
where positive sign refers to heat absorption and negative
sign to heat evolution.
(ii) When heat given to a substance raises its temperature
from T1 to T2, then change in entropy
dQ T2 dT T 
dS   T
  T1
mc
T
 mc log e  2
 T1



 T2 
 S  2 .303 mc log10  .

 T1 
(2) For a perfect gas : Perfect gas equation for n moles is PV =
nRT
dQ C V dT  P dV
S   T
  T
[As dQ = dU + dW]

RT
CV dT  dV
 S   T
V

T 2 dT V2 dV

Work done W T
 C V  T1 T
 R  V1 V
[As PV =  RT]
   1 2 T  V 
Heat input Q1 T1  S  CV log e  2    R log e  2 
T 
Carnot theorem: The efficiency of Carnot’s heat engine  1  V1 
depends only on the temperature of source (T1) and  T2  P 
In terms of T and P, S  C P log e     R log e  2
 P


T2  T1   1 
temperature of sink (T2), i.e.,   1 
T1 P V    
and in terms of P and V S  CV loge  2   CP loge  2 
Petrol engine Diesel engine  P1   V1 
 Work done with spring : If mass less piston is attached to a
Working substance is a Working substance in this
spring of force constant K and a mass m is placed over the piston.
mixture of petrol vapour engine is a mixture of diesel
If the external pressure is P0 and due to expansion of gas the
and air. vapour and air.
piston moves up through a distance x then
Efficiency is smaller Efficiency is larger (~55%).
(~47%).
It works with a spark plug. It works with an oil plug.
It is associated with the risk No risk of explosion,
of explosion, because petrol because only air is
vapour and air is compressed. Hence
compressed. So, low compression ratio is kept
compression ratio is kept. large. Total work done by the gas W  W1  W2  W3
Petrol vapour and air is Spray of diesel is obtained where W1 = Work done against external pressure (P 0 )
created with spark plug. through the jet. W2 = Work done against spring force (Kx )

Entropy W3 = Work done against gravitational force (mg)

1
Entropy is a measure of disorder of molecular motion of a  W  P0 V  Kx 2  mgx
2
system. Greater is the disorder, greater is the entropy.

144
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 The efficiency of an actual engine is much lesser than that The efficiency of a diesel engine is maximum and is about (50-
of an ideal engine. Actually the practical efficiency of a steam 55)%.
engine is about (8-15)% while that of a petrol engine is 40%.

145
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 HOME ASSIGNMENT
1. A linear accelerator consist of hundred brass discs (A) (B)
√ √
tightly fitted into a steel tube. At 400C the diameter
of each disc is 10.02 cm. The system is assembled by (C) (D)
√ (√ ) √
cooling the discs in dry ice at –600C to enable them 7. Two identical rods of copper and iron are coated with
to slide into the close fitting tube. If the coefficient of wax uniformly. When one end of each is kept at a
linear expansion of brass is 2 x 10-5 per 0C, the temperature of boiling water, the lengths upto which
diameter of each disc in dry ice will be – wax melts are 8.4 cm and 4.2 cm respectively. If
(A) 9.94 cm (B) 9.96 cm thermal conductivity of copper is 0.92, then thermal
(C) 9.98 cm (D) 10.00 cm conductivity of iron is :
2. A steel scale measures the length of a copper rod as (A) 0.23 (B) 0.46
L cm when both are at 200C, the calibration (C) 0.115 (D) 0.69
temperature for the scale. If the coefficients of linear 8. Two identical square sheets of metal are welded end
expansion for steel and copper are αs and αc to end as shown. 20 cal of heat will flow through it in
respectively, what would be the scale reading (in cm) 4 min. If the sheets are welded as shown, then same
when both are at 210C? of heat will flow in
(A) 𝐿 (B) 𝐿
(C) 𝐿 (D) L
3. A one litre flask contains some mercury. If is found
that at different temperatures the volume of air inside (A) 1 min (B) 2 min
the flask remains the same. What is the volume of (C) 3 min (D) 4 min
mercury in the flask? Given the coefficient of linear 9. Ice starts forming in a lake with water at 00C, when
expansion of glass = 9 x 10-6 0C-1, the coefficient of the atmospheric temperature is –100C. If the time
volume expansion of mercury is 1.8 x 10-4 0C-1 taken for 1cm of ice to be formed in 7 hour, the time
(A) 50cm3 (B) 100 cm3 taken for the thickness of ice to change from 1cm to
(C) 150 cm 3
(D) 200 cm3 2cm is
4. A block of ice of mass 50 kg is pushed out on a (A) 7 hours
horizontal plane with a velocity of 5m/s. Due to (B) less than 7 hours
friction it comes to rest after covering a distance of (C) more than 7 hours but less than 14 hours
25 metre. How much ice will melt? (D) more than 14 hours
(A) 0.86 gm (B) 1.86 gm 10. The temperature of a furnace is 23240C and the
(C) 100 gm (D) 1000 gm intensity is maximum in its radiation spectrum nearly
5. A wall has two layers A and B, each made of a at 12000 Å. IF the intensity in the spectrum of a star
different material, both the layers have the same is maximum nearly at 4800 Å, then calculate the
thickness. The thermal conductivity of the material of surface temperature of the star.
A is twice that of B. Under thermal equilibrium, the (A) 5219.5 0C (B) 6219.5 0C
temperature difference across the wall is 360C. The (C) 7219.5 0C (D) 8219.50C
temperature difference across the layer A : 11. Two spheres of different materials one with double
(A) 80C (B) 120C the radius and one –fourth wall thick of other, are
(C) 180C (D) 240C filled with ice. If the time taken for complete melting
6. Three rods of identical cross –sectional area and of ice in big sphere is 25 minutes and for smaller one
made from the same metal form the sides of an 16 minutes, the ratio of thermal conductivity of the
isosceles triangles ABC, right angled at B. The materials of bigger to smaller sphere is :
points A and B are maintained at the temperatures T (A) 4:5 (B) 5:4
and (√2)T respectively. In the steady state, the (C) 25:8 (D) 8:25
temperature of point C is TC. Assuming that only
heat conduction takes place is

145
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
12. Solid copper cube of edge 1cm is suspended in an (C) (D) +
( )
evacuated enclosure. Its temperature is found to fall from
19. A gas is filled in the cylinder shown in the figure.
1000C to 990C in 100 seconds. Another solid copper
The two pistons are joined by a string. If the gas is
cube of edge 2cm with similar surface nature, is
heated, the pistons will
suspended in a similar manner. The time required for this
(A) move towards left (B) move towards right
cube to cool from 1000C to 990C will be approximately:
(C) remain stationary (D) none of the above
(A) 25 seconds (B) 50 seconds
20. A mixture of n1 moles of monoatomic gas and n2
(C) 200 seconds (D) 400 seconds
moles of diatomic gas has γ = 1.5, then
13. Liquid is filled in a vessel which is kept in a room
(A) n1 = 2n2 (B) 2n1 = n2
where the room temperature is 200C. When the
(C) n1 = n2 (D) 2n1 = 3n2
temperature of the liquid is 800C, is loses heat at the
21. The rms velocity of a diatomic gas at room
rate of 60 cal per second. What will be the rate of the
temperature is found to be 1930 m/s. The gas is
less of heat when the temperature of the liquid is 400C?
(A) H2 (B) O2
(A) 180 cal/s (B) 40 cal/s
(C) F2 (D) Cl2
(C) 30 cal/s (D) 20 cal/s
22. One mole of a monoatomic gas is mixed with one
14. Three rods made of same material and having the same
mole of a diatomic gas. The molar specific heat of
cross –section have been joined as shown. Each rod is
mixture at constant volume will be :
of same length. The left and right ends are kept at as
(A) R (B) R/2
shown. The temperature at the junction of rods is:
(C) 3R (D) 2R
23. The mean kinetic energy per gram of triatomic
(linear arrangement) CO2 gas will be –
(A) 𝑅𝑇 (B) 𝑅𝑇
(A) θ = 700C (B) θ = 650C (C) 𝑅𝑇 (D) 𝑅𝑇
(C) θ = 900C (D) θ = 1100C 24. Equal number of molecules of hydrogen and oxygen
15. The average translational K.E. of O2 molecule at a are contained in a vessel at one atmospheric pressure.
particular temperature is 0.48 eV. The translational The ratio of the collision frequency of hydrogen
K.E. of N2 molecule in eV at the same temperature is molecules to that of oxygen molecules on the
(A) 0.0015 (B) 0.003 container walls will be –
(C) 0.048 (D) 0.768 (A) 4:1 (B) 1:4
16. When an ideal diatomic gas is heated at constant (C) 1:16 (D) 16:1
pressure then the fraction of heat energy which is 25. One gram mole of H2 at 270C is mixed with three
used to increase the internal energy of gas system, is gram moles of oxygen at 1270C at constant pressure.
(A) 3/7 (B) 3/5 If there is no exchange of heat with the atmosphere
(C) 5/7 (D) 2/5 then the final temperature will be :
17. Two identical glass bulbs are interconnected by a (A) 375 K (B) 175 K
thin glass tube. A gas is filled in these bulbs at N.T.P. (C) 475 K (D) 575 K
If one bulb is placed in ice and another bulb is placed 26. A container contains 1 mole of nitrogen gas at
in hot bath, then the pressure of gas becomes 1.5 temperature 170C and pressure 2 atmosphere. If the
times the original pressure. The temperature of hot radius of nitrogen molecule is 1Å, then the mean free
bath will be – path of nitrogen molecule will be –
(A) 100 0C (B) 182 0C (A) 1.1 x 10-7 m (B) 2.2 x 10-7 m
0
(C) 256 C (D) 546 0C (C) 3.3 x 10-7 m (D) 4.4 x 10-7 m
18. Two containers of equal volume contain the same gas 27. Two cylinders A and B, fitted with pistons, contain equal
at pressures P1 and P2 and absolute temperatures T1 amounts of an ideal diatomic gas at 300 K. The piston of
and T2 respectively. On joining the vessels, the gas A is free to move while that of B is fixed. Equal amount
reaches a common pressure P and common of heat is given to each cylinder. If the rise in temperature
temperature T. The ratio P/T is equal to : of gas A is 40K, the rise in temperature of gas B will be –
(A) + (B) (A) 40 K (B) 56 K
( )
(C) 18 K (D) 48 K
146
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
28. In the following indicator diagram, the net amount of (C) 90 J (D) 110 J
work done will be – 35. An ideal gas at pressure P is adiabatically
compressed so that its density becomes n times the
initial value. The final pressure of the gas will be
(γ = CP/CV),
(A) nγP (B) n-γP
(C) n(γ-1)P (D) n(1-γ)P
(A) positive (B) negative 36. Heat energy released by a system in going through a
(C) zero (D) infinite cyclic process shown in the figure is
29. In the following figure two indicator diagrams are
shown. If the amounts of work done in them are W1
and W2 respectively, then

(A) 107 π Joule (B) 104 π Joule

(C) 102 π Joule (D) 10-3 π Joule
37. Two moles of Helium (γ= 5/3) expand adiabatically
(A) W1>W2 (B) W1<W2 so that its temperature falls from 1000C to 500C.
(C) W1=W2 (D) W1=W2/4 Then the change in internal energy of gas is :
30. The ratio of adiabatic bulk modulus and isothermal (A) + 50 R (B) –150 R
bulk modulus of a gas is (γ = CP/CV) (C) –60 R (D) +100 R
(A) 1 (B) γ 38. Which one of the following gases possesses largest
(C) ( )
(D) internal energy :
31. At NTP one mole of diatomic gas is compressed (A) 2 moles of helium occupying 1m3 at 300 K
adiabatically to half of its volume (γ= 1.40). The (B) 56 kg of nitrogen at 107 Nm-2 and 300 K
work done on the gas will be (2)0.4 = 1.40 : (C) 8g of oxygen at 8 atm and 300 K
(D) 6 x 1026 molecules of argon occupying 40m3 at
(A) 1280 J (B) –1610 J
900 K
(C) –2240 J (D) –2025 J
39. An engine having an efficiency of 0.6 has an exhaust
32. Q cal of heat is required to raise the temperature of 1
which is used to drive another engine with an
mole of a monoatomic gas from 200C to 300C at
efficiency of 0.4. The efficiency of the system of two
constant pressure. The amount of heat required to engines as a whole is :
raise the temperature of 1 mole of diatomic gas from (A) 0.5 (B) 0.2
200C to 250C at constant pressure is : (C) 1.0 (D) 0.76
(A) Q (B) 𝑄 40. An ideal gas engine operates in a carnot cycle
between 2270C and 1270C. It absorbs 104J of heat at
(C) 𝑄 (D) 𝑄
a higher temperature. The amount of heat converted
33. Two cylinders A and B fitted with pistons contain into work is :
equal amounts of an ideal diatomic gas at 300 K. The (A) 2000 J (B) 4000 J
piston of A is free to move, while that of B is held (C) 8000 J (D) 5600 J
fixed. The same amount of heat is given to gas in 41. A monoatomic ideal gas at temperature T1, is
each cylinder. If the rise in temperature of the gas in enclosed in a cylinder fitted with a frictionless piston.
A is 30K, then the rise in temperature of the gas in B The gas is allowed to expand adiabatically to a
is : temperature T2 by releasing the piston suddenly. If L1
(A) 30 K (B) 18 K and L2 are the lengths of the gas column before and
(C) 50 K (D) 42 K after expansion respectively, then T1/T2 is given by
/
34. When 20 J of work was done on a gas, 40 J of heat (A) (B)
energy was released. If the initial internal energy of /
the gas was 70 J, what is the final internal energy? (C) (D)
(A) 50 J (B) 60 J

147
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
42. 100 gm of ice at 00C is mixed with 100 gm of water 50. If 2 moles of an ideal monoatomic gas at temperature
at 800C. Latent heat of fusion 540 cal/gm and T0 is mixed with 4 moles of another ideal
specific heat of water is 1 cal/gm 0C. The final monoatomic gas at temperature 2T0, then the
temperature of the mixture is – temperature of the mixture is
(A) 00C (B) 400C (A) 5T0/3 (B) 3T0/2
0
(C) 20 C (D) 100C (C) 4T0/3 (D) 5T0/4
43. In the above problem mass of ice and water in the 51. In the process PV= constant, pressure (P) versus
mixture when thermal equilibrium is attained is density () graph of an ideal gas is
(A) 42.6 gm ice, 157.4 gm water (A) a straight line parallel to P –axis
(B) 64.2 gm ice, 135.8 gm water (B) a straight line parallel to  -axis
(C) 85.2 gm ice, 114.8 gm water (C) a straight line passing through origin
(D) 80 gm ice, 120 gm water (D) a parabola
44. A uniform solid brass sphere is rotating with angular 52. P-V diagram of an ideal gas is as shown in figure.
speed 0 about a diameter. If its temperature is now Work done by the gas in the process ABCD is
increased by 1000C. What will be its new angular
speed. (Given B = 2.0 x 10-5 per 0C)
(A) 1.1 0 (B) 1.010
(C) 0.9960 (D) 0.8240
45. When a copper sphere is heated percentage change (A) 4P0V0 (B) 2 P0V0
(A) is maximum in radius (C) 3 P0V0 (D) P0V0
(B) is maximum in volume
53. Three samples of the same gas A,B and C (=3/2)
(C) is maximum in density
have initially equal volume. Now the volume of each
(D) is equal in radius, volume and density
sample is doubled. The process is adiabatic for A
46. A gas is expanded from volume V0 to 2V0 under
isobaric for B and isothermal for C. If the final
three different processes. Process 1 is isobaric,
pressure are equal for all three samples, the ratio of
process 2 is isothermal and process 3 is adiabatic. Let
their initial pressures are
U1, U2 and U3 be the change in internal energy
(A) 22 :2:1 (B) 2[Link]
of the gas in these processes. Then
(C) 2 :1:2 (D) [Link] 2
54. For an ideal monoatomic gas, the universal gas
constant R is n times the molar heat capacity at
constant pressure CP. Here n is
(A) U1>U2>U3 (B) U1<U2<U3 (A) 0.67 (B) 1.4
(C) U2<U1<U3 (D) U2<U3<U1 (C) 0.4 (D) 1.67
47. If pressure and temperature of an ideal gas is doubled 55. Pressure versus temperature graphs of an ideal gas
and volume is halved, the number of molecules of the are as shown in figure. Choose the wrong statement
gas
(A) remains constant (B) become half
(C) become two times (D) become four times
48. An ideal gas ( = 1.5) is expanded adiabatically. How (A) density of gas is increasing in graph (i)
many times has the gas to be expanded to reduce the (B) density of gas is decreasing in graph (ii)
root mean square velocity of molecules 2.0 times (C) density of gas is constant in graph (iii)
(A) 4 times (B) 16 times (D) none of these
(C) 8 times (D) 2 times 56. Temperature of an ideal gas is 300 K. The change in
49. A sample of ideal gas (=1.4) is heated at constant temperature of the gas when its volume changes from
pressure. If an amount of 100J heat is supplied to the V to 2V in the process P =aV (here a is positive
gas, the work done by the gas is constant) is
(A) 42.12J (B) 56.28 J (A) 900 K (B) 1200 K
(C) 28.57 J (D) 36.23 J (C) 600 K (D) 300 K

148
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
57. If gas molecules undergo inelastic collision with the (C) 2.0 (D) 2.5
walls of the container 63. In [Link].21, the mixture is compressed adiabatically
(A) the temperature of the gas will decrease to 1/5 of its initial volume V then the change in its
(B) the pressure of the gas will increase adiabatic compressibility in terms of (V/T) will be –
(C) neither the temperature nor the pressure will change (A) (1/R) (V/T) (B) (1/R5) (V/T)
(D) the temperature of the gas will increase (C) (1/R) (1/5 – 1) (V/T) (D) zero change
58. Volume versus temperature graph of two moles of 64. Select the correct statement :
helium gas is as shown in figure. The ratio of heat (A) the internal energy of a compressed ideal gas is
absorbed and the work done by the gas in process less than that of a rarefied ideal gas at the same
102 is temperature
(B) the internal energy of a compressed real gas is
less than that of a rarefied ideal gas at the same
temperature
(A) 3 (B) 5/2
(C) the internal energy of a compressed ideal gas is
(C) 5/3 (D) 7/2
more than that of a rarefied ideal gas at the same
59. Pressure versus temperature graph of an ideal gas is
temperature
as shown in figure corresponding density () versus
(D) the internal energy of a compressed real gas is
volume (V) graph will be
more than that of a rarefied ideal gas at the same
temperature
65. One mole of an ideal monoatomic gas is caused to go
through the cycle shown in figure. Then the change
in the internal energy in expanding the gas from a to
c along the path abc is –

(A) (B)

(C) (D)
(A) 3 P0V0 (B) 6 RT0
60. An object is cooled from 750C to 650C in 2 minutes
in a room at 300C. The time taken to cool the same (C) 4.5 RT0 (D) 10.5 RT0
object from 550C to 450C in the same room is 66. If temperature of a hot body is increased by 50%,
then the amount of radiation emitted by it would
(A) 5 minutes (B) 3 minutes
become nearly:
(C) 4 minutes (D) 2 minutes
(A) 50% (B) 225%
61. The temperature of a room heated by a heater is 200C
when outside temperature is –200C and it is 100C (C) 250% (D) 500%
67. The maximum energy in the thermal radiation from a
when the outside temperature is –400C. The
temperature of the heater is hot body A occurs at a wavelength of 110m. For a
(A) 800C (B) 1000C second hot body B, the maximum energy in the
(C) 400C (D) 600C thermal radiation occurs at wavelength of 55m. If
62. A gaseous mixture enclosed in a vessel of volume V the temperature of A is n times that of B, then n is :
consists of one mole of a gas A with  = 5/3 and (A) 2.0 (B) 0.5
4
another gas B with  = 7/5 at a certain temperature T. (C) (1/2) (D) (2)4
68. If radiation passes through a perfectly diathermanous
The relative molar masses of the gases A and B are 4
and 32 respectively. The gases A and B do not react medium, then its temperature:
with each other and are assumed to be ideal. The (A) increases
(B) decreases
gaseous mixture follows the equation PV(19/13) =
(C) does not change
constant, in adiabatic process. Then the number of
(D) nothing can be predicted
moles of the gas B in the gaseous mixture is
(A) 1.0 (B) 1.5
149
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
69. Liquid is filled in a vessel which is kept in a room 76. A cyclic process is shown in the P-T diagram.
with temperature 200C. When the temperature of the
liquid is 800C, then it loses heat at the rate of 60
cal/sec. What will be the rate of loss of heat when the
temperature of the liquid is 400C?
Which of the curves show the same process on a V –
(A) 180 cal/sec (B) 40 cal/sec
T diagram.
(C) 30 cal/sec (D) 20 cal/sec
70. A solid sphere of copper of radius R and a hollow
sphere of copper of inner radius r and outer radius R are
heated to the same temperature and allowed to cool in
the same environment. Then the rate of cooling is: (A) (B)
(A) more for hollow sphere
(B) more for solid sphere
(C) same for both the spheres
(D) none of the above (C) (D)
71. A solid floats submerged in a liquid. When the liquid is 77. Two roads of length d1 and d2 and coefficients of
heated, which of the following is most likely to happen? thermal conductivities K1 and K2 are kept touching
(A) solid may sink each other. Both have the same area of cross –section
(B) solid may float with a part outside the surface the equivalent of thermal conductivity is
(C) solid may first sink and then rise upwards (A) K1 +K2
(D) solid may oscillate vertically (B) K1d1 +K2d2
72. Why the latent heat of vaporisation is more than (C) (K1d1 +K2d2)/(d1+d2)
latent heat of fusion for water? (D) (d1+d2) /(d1/K1 + d2/K2)
(A) on vaporisation much larger increase in volume 78. If  be the ratio of specific heats of a perfect gas, the
takes place number of degrees of freedom of a molecule of the
(B) increase in kinetic energy is much larger on gas is
boiling (A) (25/2) ( – 1) (B) (3 – 1)/(2 – 1)
(C) kinetic energy decreases on boiling (C) 2/ ( – 1) (D) 9( – 1)/2
(D) volume decreases when the ice melts 79. When a block of iron floats in mercury at 00C, a
73. Which of the following will extinguish the fire quickly? fraction k1 of its volume submerged, while at the
(A) water at 1000C (B) steam at 1000C temp. 600C, a fraction k2 is seen to be submerged the
0
(C) water at 0 C (D) ice at 00C coefficient of volume expansion of iron is Fe and
74. The power radiated by a black body is P, and it
that of mercury is Hg, then the ratio k1/k2 can be
radiates maximum energy around the wavelength 0. expressed as
If the temperature of the black body is now changed
(A) (1+60Fe)/ (1+60Hg) (B) (1 –60Fe)/ (1+60Hg)
so that it radiates maximum energy around a
(C) (1+60Fe)/ (1 –60Hg) (D) (1+60Hg)/ (1+60Fe)
wavelength 30/4, the power radiated by it will
80. P –V plots for two gases during adiabatic processes
increase by a factor of
are shown in Fig. Plots 1 and 2 should correspond
(A) 4/3 (B) 16/9
respectively to
(C) 64/27 (D) 256/81
75. In the cyclic process shown on the V –P diagram, the
magnitude of the work done is:

(A) He and O2 (B) O2 and He

(C) He and Ar (D) O2 and N2
81. A black body has maximum wavelength m at 2000
K. Its corresponding wavelength at 3000 K will be
(A) [(P2 –P1)/2]2 (B) [(V2 –V1)/2]2 (A) 3m/2 (B) 2m/3
(C) /4[(P2 –P1) (V2 –V1)] (D) (P2V2 - P1V1) (C) 16m/81 (D) 81m/16
150
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
82. In a given process on an ideal gas, dW=0 and dQ< 0.
Then, for the gas
(A) the temperature will decrease
(B) the volume will increase
(C) the pressure will remain constant (A) (B)
(D) the temperature will increase
83. The temperature of an isolated black body falls from
T1 and T2 in time t. Let c be a constant.
(A) t = c[ 1/T2 – 1/T1) (B) t = c[ 1/T22 – 1/T12)
3 3
(C) t = c[ 1/T2 – 1/T1 ) (D) t = c[ 1/T24 – 1/T14) (C) (D)
90. When water is heated from 00C to 40C, then
84. During an adiabatic process, the pressure of a gas is
(A) CP>CV (B) CP = CV
found to be proportional to the cube of its absolute
(C) CP< CV (D) CP - CV = R
temperature. The ratio CP/CV =  for the gas is
91. The freezer in a refrigerator is located in the top
(A) 2 (B) 3/2
section so that
(C) 5/3 (D) 4/3
(A) the entire chamber of the freeze is cooled quickly
85. In the above question, the gas may be –
(B) motor is not affected
(A) monoatomic
(C) heat gained from environment is less
(B) diatomic
(D) heat gained from environment is more
(C) a mixture of monoatomic and diatomic
[Link].51 to 55 more than one choices are correct
(D) a mixture of diatomic and triatomic gases 92. Two spheres A and B have same radius but the heat
86. The graph given below depicts a relation between capacity of A is greater than that of B. The surfaces
of both are painted black. They are heated to the
same temperature and allowed to cool. Then
(A) A cools faster than B
(A) volume and temperature of gas (B) both A and B cool at the same rate
(B) volume and temperature of water (C) at any temperature the ratio of their rates of
(C) volume and temperature of some metal cooling is a constant
(D) none of the above (D) B cools faster than A
87. A graph is plotted between the temperature of a 93. A gas undergoes the change in its state from position
copper cube in 0C versus 0F. The sine of the angle A to position B via three different paths as shown in
made by the graph with 0F axis is: figure. Select the correct alternatives (s)
(A) 5/106 (B) 9/106
(C) 5/9 (D) 0.32
88. A piece of platinum wire but not a piece of copper
wire, can be sealed successfully into soda glass
because (A) change in internal energy in all three paths is equal
(A) platinum and soda glass have same coefficient of (B) in all the three paths heat is absorbed by the gas
thermal expansion (C) heat absorbed/released by the gas is maximum in
(B) copper reacts with glass but platinum does not path 1
(C) copper is better conductor of heat than glass (D) temperature of the gas first increases and then
(D) platinum and glass have same specific heat decreases continuously in path 1
89. A sample of perfect gas in state A expands 94. One mole of an ideal monoatomic gas is taken from
adiabatically to state B. It is then changed at constant A to C along the path ABC. The temperature of the
volume to state C to reach the same temperature as at gas at A is T0. For the process ABC (R = universal
A. Finally it is compressed isothermally to reach gas constant)
state A. Which of the diagrams here show the cycle (A) work done by the gas is RT0
correctly? (B) change in internal energy of the gas is 11RT0/2
(C) heat absorbed the gas is 11RT0/2
(D) heat absorbed by the gas is 13RT0/2

151
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
95. n moles of a monoatomic gas undergoes a cyclic 99. In Ingen hauz experiment the thermal conductivity K
process ABCDA as shown in figure. Process AB is and the length (l) of rod upto which wax melts are
isobaric, BC is adiabatic, CD is isochoric and DA is related as :
isothermal. The maximum and minimum temperature (A) = constant (B) = constant
in the cycle are 4T0 and T0 respectively. Then
(C) = constant (D) Kl = constant
100. A hot body radiates heat by radiation. A spherical
vessel cools by radiating heat at the rate of 10
cal/min, when the excess of temperature of the same
body over the surrounding is 300C. Calculate the rate
(A) TB> TC> TD of loss of heat, when excess of its temperature over
(B) heat is released by the gas in the process CD the surrounding is 3000C.
(C) heat is supplied by the gas in the process AB (A) 200 cal/min (B) 150 cal/min
(D) total heat supplied to the gas is 2nRT0 ln(2) (C) 100 cal/min (D) 50 cal/min
96. According to second law of thermodynamics 101. If E is total energy emitted /sec/area by a body at a
(A) all heat can be converted into work temperature T K and Emax is the maximum energy
(B) when heat changes to other forms, energy is emitted by it at the same temperature then:
conserved (A) E ∝ T4, Emax ∝ T5 (B) E ∝ T4, Emax ∝ T-5
(C) the efficiency of a heat engine is always less than (C) E ∝ T-4, Emax ∝ T4 D) E ∝ T5, Emax ∝ T4
unity 102. If Cs is the velocity of sound in air and C is the r.m.s
(D) it is not possible to transfer heat from lower to velocity, then
higher temperature by itself without external (A) Cs>C (B) Cs=C
work
(C) Cs=𝐶 (D) none of these
97. The density of a liquid of cubical expansion γ is ρ at
00C. When the liquid is heated to a temperature T, 103. A bottle is inverted and dipped into a tank. At the
the change in density will be – bottom of the tank, 3/5th part of bottle is filled with
(A) − ( (B) ( water. The depth of tank is :
) )
(A) 5m (B) 10m
( ) ( )
(C) – (D) (C) 15m (D) 20m
98. A Cylinder of radius R made of a material of 104. If the ratio CP/CV = γ, the change in internal energy
thermal conductivity K1 is surrounded by cylindrical of given mass of a gas, when the volume changes
shell of inner radius R and outer radius 2R made of a from V to 2V at constant P is :
material of thermal conductivity K2. The two ends of (A) (B) PV
combined system are maintained at two different
(C) (D) 𝛾
temperature. There is no loss of heat across the
cylindrical surface and two system is in steady state. 105. A sample of gas expands from volume V1 to V2.
Calculate the thermal conductivity of the system : The amount of work done by the gas is greatest when
the expansion is :
(A) 𝐾 = (B) 𝐾 =
(A) isothermal (B) isobaric
(C) 𝐾 = (D) 𝐾 = (C) adiabatic (D) equal in all cases

152
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 ANSWER KEY

1 D 36 C 71 A
2 A 37 B 72 A
3 C 38 B 73 A
4 B 39 D 74 D
5 B 40 A 75 C
6 D 41 D 76 C
7 A 42 A 77 D
8 A 43 C 78 C
9 D 44 C 79 A
10 B 45 B 80 B
11 D 46 A 81 B
12 C 47 B 82 A
13 D 48 B 83 C
14 A 49 C 84 B
15 C 50 A 85 C
16 C 51 C 86 B
17 D 52 C 87 A
18 D 53 B 88 A
19 B 54 C 89 C
20 C 55 C 90 C
21 A 56 A 91 A
22 D 57 C 92 CD
23 B 58 B 93 ABC
24 A 59 B 94 AC
25 A 60 C 95 ABC
26 A 61 D 96 CD
27 B 62 C 97 A
28 B 63 C 98 D
29 A 64 B 99 C
30 B 65 D 100 C
31 C 66 D 101 A
32 D 67 B 102 C
33 C 68 C 103 C
34 A 69 D 104 C
35 A 70 A 105 B

153
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 OSCILLATIONS
Periodic and Oscillatory Motion
Harmonic oscillation is that oscillation which can be expressed in Displacement in S.H.M.
terms of single harmonic function (i.e. sine or cosine function).
(1) The displacement of a particle executing S.H.M. at an instant is defined as
Example: y  a sin  t or y  a cos  t
the distance of particle from the mean position at that instant.
Non-harmonic oscillation is that oscillation which can not be
(2) Simple harmonic motion is also defined as the projection of
expressed in terms of single harmonic function. It is a combination of
two or more than two harmonic oscillations. Example: uniform circular motion on any diameter of circle of reference.
y  a sin  t  b sin 2 t . (3) If the projection is taken on y-axis.
Simple Harmonic Motion Y
N P
Restoring force  Displacement of the particle from mean position.
y a
F  – x  F = – kx  = t
X X
If particle or center of mass of body is oscillating on a small arc of O M
circular path, then for angular S.H.M.
Restoring torque ()  – Angular displacement ()
Y
[Link]. Linear S.H.M. Angular S.H.M.
a. F–y –
F = – ky  = – C If the projection of P is taken on X-axis then equations of S.H.M. can
where k is restoring Where C is be given as
force constant restoring torque
 2 
constant. x  a cos ( t   )  a cos  t     a cos (2n t   )
k C  T 
b. a=– y =– 
m I Direction of displacement is always away from the equilibrium
d2y k d 2 C position, particle either is moving away from or is coming towards the
c. + y=0 + =0
dt 2 m dt 2 I equilibrium position.
d. a = –  2y  = – 2
Velocity in S.H.M.
k C
e.   2 =  = dy
m I v  a cos  t  a 1  sin  t   a 2  y 2
2
dt
k 2 2
= = =2n=
m T T v2 y2 v
   1
Phase (): Phase of a vibrating particle at any instant is a physical quantity, a 2 2 a2
which completely express the position and direction of motion, of the
This is the equation of ellipse. a
particle at that instant with respect to its mean position.
Hence the graph between v and y
y  a sin   a sin( t   0 )
is an ellipse. y
here,    t   0 = phase of vibrating particle.
For  = 1, graph between v and y is
0 = Initial phase or epoch. It is the phase of a vibrating particle at t = 0.
a circle. a
t
`
Acceleration in S.H.M.
t=0
t dv d
0 A   (a  cos  t )   2 a sin  t   2 y
dt dt

Acceleration is always directed towards the mean position and so is

always opposite to
A
displacement
Phase difference : If two particles performs S.H.M and their equation 2 a
are y 1  a sin( t  1 ) and y 2  a sin( t   2 ) then phase i.e., A  y
+a
difference   ( t   2 )  ( t  1 )   2  1 Graph between –a y
acceleration (A) and
– 2a
displacement (y) is a
straight line as shown
Slope of the line = – 2

154
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 1 1
(2) Kinetic energy : K  mv 2  m  2 (a 2  y 2 )
2 2
Comparative Study of Displacement Velocity and
Acceleration 1 1
(i) Also K  m  2 a 2 cos 2  t  m  2 a 2 (1  cos 2t)
2 4
(1) All the three quantities displacement, velocity and acceleration show
1 T1 1
harmonic variation with time having same period. (ii) K average    m  2 a 2 cos 2  t dt  m  2a2
T 0 2 4
(2) The velocity amplitude is  times the displacement amplitude
(3) Total mechanical energy : Total mechanical energy always
(3) The acceleration amplitude is  2 times the displacement amplitude remains constant and it is equal to sum of potential energy and
(4) In S.H.M. the velocity is ahead of displacement by a phase angle  / 2 kinetic energy i.e. E  U  K

(5) In S.H.M. the acceleration is ahead of velocity by a phase angle / 1 1 1

E m  2 (a 2  y 2 )  m  2 y 2  m  2 a 2
2 2 2 2
(6) The acceleration is ahead of displacement by a phase angle of  Energy
Total energy (E)
Graph Formula At mean At extreme
position position Potential energy (U)
Displacement

Kinetic energy (K)

+a
y  a sin  t y=0 y=a
T/2 T y =– a y=0 y =+ a
O

–a
(i) At y = 0; U = 0 and K = E

Velocity (ii) At y =  a; U = E and K =0

v  a cos  t
vmax =a vmin = 0 a E 3E
vmax  (iii) At y   ; U  and K 
 a sin( t  ) 2 4 4
T/2 T 2
O or a E
(iv) At y   ;UK
v  a y 2 2 2 2

Average Value of P.E. and K.E.

Acceleration Thus average values of kinetic energy and potential energy of
A   a 2 sin  t harmonic oscillator are equal and each equal to half of the total
Amax  a 2 sin( t   ) Amin = 0 |Amax| 1 1
energy Kaverage  Uaverage  E  m  2 a 2 .
T/2 T or = 2a 2 4
O
A   2y
Differential Equation of S.H.M.
d 2y k
m  ky  0 [As   ]
dt 2 m
Force F   m  2 a sin  t
d 2
or Fmax  For angular S.H.M.    c and   2  0
Fmax Fmin = 0 dt 2
F  m  2y m  2a
T/2 T c
O
here  
2
[As c = Restoring torque constant & I = Moment of
I
inertia]
Simple Pendulum S

Energy in S.H.M.

1
(1) Potential energy : U  m  2 y 2 T
2
l
1 1
(i) U  m  2 a 2 sin 2  t  m  2 a 2 (1  cos 2 t )
2 4 P
y
1 T 1 1
mg sin 
 m  2 a 2 sin 2 ( t   )  m  a
2 2
(ii) U average 
T 0 2 4 O mg mg cos 

155
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 0161-2490101/1101 [Link]
 Inertia factor m l 1
T  2  2  2 (1) Infinite length pendulum: T  2 
Spring factor mg / l g 1 1 
g 
l R 
Factor Affecting Time Period of Simple Pendulum
1 1 l
(1) Amplitude: If  is not small, sin    then motion will not remain (i) If l  R , then  so T  2 
l R g
simple harmonic but will become oscillatory. In this situation if 0 is
1 1
the amplitude of motion. Time period (ii) If l  R( ) then 
l R
l  1 20     2
T  2 1  2 sin    .......   T 0 1  0  R 6 . 4  10 6
g  2  2    16  so T  2  2  84 . 6 minutes
g 10

(2) Length of the pendulum : Time period T  l where l is the R

(iii) If l  R so T  2  1 hour
distance between point of suspension and center of mass of bob and 2g
is called effective length. (2) Second’s Pendulum : It is that simple pendulum whose time
period of vibrations is two seconds.
(3) Effect of temperature on time period:
l
T l 1 Putting T = 2 sec and g  9 .8 m / sec 2 in T  2 we get
  (1     ) 1/2
1   g
T0 l0 2
4  9 .8
l  0 .993 m = 99.3 cm
T 1 T 1 4 2
So  1    i.e.   
T0 2 T 2 (3) Compound pendulum:

Oscillation of Pendulum in Different Situations O I


G l
(1) Oscillation in liquid :
CM I0
Vg   Thrust
geff .  g  i.e. geff .  g 1   mg
V  

T' g  mg   mgl sin  …(i)

   1
T geff .   where l = distance between point of suspension and centre of
mass of the body.
(2) Oscillation under the influence of electric field:
If I be the M.I. of the body about O. Then   I …(ii)
l
T  2 
QE
From (i) and (ii), we get I
d  2
 mgl sin  as  and
d 2
are
qE dt 2 dt 2
g l 
E
m d 
2
mgl
oppositely directed  2
  since  is very small
mg dt I
d 2
Comparing with the equation   2 . we get
(ii) If electric field is vertically downward then dt 2
mgl I
l  T   T  2
T  2 I mgl
qE l 
g E
m Also I  Icm  ml 2 (Parallel axis theorem)
mg +
(3) Pendulum in a lift :  mk 2
 ml 2
(where k = radius of gyration)
(i) If the lift is moving up ward with constant acceleration a K2
l
l a mK 2  ml 2 l l
T  2  T  2  2  2 eff
ga mgl g g
leff = Effective length of pendulum = Distance between point of
(ii) If the lift is moving down ward with constant acceleration a
suspension and centre of mass.
l Spring Pendulum
T  2 a
ga
Inertia factor m l
and n 
1 ga T  2  2  2
Spring factor k g
2 l
Note: Time of a spring pendulum is independent of acceleration due
to gravity.

156
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
(1) Massive spring: If the spring has a mass M and mass m is Mh
M T  2
suspended from it, effective mass is given by m e ff  m  . PA
3
M = mass of the piston
m e ff
T  2
k (5) S.H.M. of a body in a tunnel dug along any chord of earth

mr
(2) Reduced mass: T  2
k R
T  2 = 84.6 minutes R
1 1 1 k g
 
mr m1 m 2 m1 m2

(6) Torsional pendulum: If a wire is twisted, due to elasticity it

When a spring of length l is cut in two pieces of length l1 and l2 exert a restoring toque  = C.
such that l1  nl 2 .
In this case time period is given by
If the constant of a spring is k then spring constant of first part Wire
k (n  1) I
k1  T  2 l
n C
Spring constant of second part k 2  (n  1)k where I = Moment of inertia a disc Disc

Oscillation of Spring Combination r 4
C = Torsional constant of wire =
1 1 1 k k 2l
(1) Series combination:    ks  1 2
k s k1 k 2 k1  k 2  = Modulus of elasticity of wire and r = Radius of wire
(7) Longitudinal oscillations of an elastic wire: Wire/string pulled
(2) Parallel combination: k P  k1  k 2
a distance l and left. It executes longitudinal oscillations.
(3) Suppose a body of mass m vibrate separately with two
different springs (of spring constants k1 and k2) with time period  l 
Restoring force F   AY  
 l 
m m
T1 and T2 respectively. T1  2 and T2  2
k1 k2 Y = Young’s modulus
Wire
If the same body vibrates with series combination of these two A = Area of cross-section
l
2 2
springs then for the system time period T  T1  T2
m ml
Hence T  2  2
If the same body vibrates with parallel combination of these two k AY l
T1T2
springs then time period of the system T  Free, Damped, Forced and Maintained Oscillations
T12  T22
(1) Free oscillation: The oscillation of a particle with fundamental
Various Formulae of S.H.M. frequency under the influence of restoring force are defined as
free oscillations. The amplitude, frequency and energy of
(1) S.H.M. of a liquid in U tube :
oscillation remains constant.
L h (2) Damped oscillation
T  2  2
2g g h
The oscillation of a body whose amplitude goes on decreasing
due to resistive forces with time are defined as damped
where L = Total length of liquid column,
oscillation
(2) S.H.M. of a floating cylinder: Damping force Fd   bv , b = damping constant
l l
Time period T  2 md 2 x dx
g F  FR  Fd   Kx  Kv  2
b  Kx  0
dt dt
 bt /2 m
 x  xme sin( t   ) where    angular frequency of
(3) S.H.M. of a small ball rolling down in hemi-spherical bowl
the damped oscillator =  02  (b /2m )2
R r R
T  2
g Amplitude, x  x m e (b/2 m )t

R = Radius of the bowl 1

Mechanical Energy, E  Kx m2 e  bt /m
r = Radius of the ball 2

(4) S.H.M. of a piston in a cylinder h

(3) Forced oscillation

M
Gas
157
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
P
Phone A
No : 0161-2490101/1101 [Link]
 The oscillation in which a body oscillates under the influence of x y a
  y 2 x a2
an external periodic force are known as forced oscillation a1 a 2 a1
Resonance: When the frequency of external force is equal to the
natural frequency of the oscillator. Then this state is known as This is a straight line passes through origin a1
the state of resonance. And this frequency is known as resonant a
frequency. and it's slope is 2 .
a1
In forced oscillation, frequency of damped oscillator is equal to
the frequency of external force. Phase Equation Figure
diff.()
F(t) = F0 cos d t
 x2 y2 2 xy 1 Oblique ellipse
ma   Kx  bv  F0 cos  d t 4
  
a12 a22 a1 a2 2
d 2x dx a2
 m2  Kx  b  F0 cos d t
dt 2 dt a1
The solution of this equation gives x  x 0 sin( d t   ) with
F0 /m ( 2   02 )
amplitude x 0  and tan  
( 2   02 )  (b  /m )2 b/ m  x
2
y
2
 1 a2 a1 = a2
2 2 2
(Circle)
a1 a2
K
where  0  = Natural frequency of oscillator.
m a1
a1  a2
(vii) Amplitude resonance: The amplitude of forced oscillator (Ellipse)
depends upon the frequency  d of external force.

When    d , the amplitude is maximum but not infinite 3 x2 y2 2 xy 1 Oblique ellipse

  
because of presence of damping force. The corresponds 4 a12 a22 a1 a2 2
a2
frequency is called resonant frequency ( 0 ) .
x0 a1

Negligible damping

Low damping
High damping  x y Straight line
F0/K
 0
a1 a2
 a2
0 a
 y 2 x
a1
a1
(viii) Energy resonance: At    0 , oscillator absorbs maximum
kinetic energy from the driving force system this state is called
energy resonance.
At resonance the velocity of a driven oscillator is in phase with For the frequency ratio 1 :  2  2 : 1 the two perpendicular S.H.M's
the driving term.
are
The sharpness of the resonance of a driven oscillator depends on
x  a1 sin(t   ) and y  a2 sin t
the damping.
Super Position of S.H.M’s (Lissajous Figures) Different Lissajou's figures as follows

If two S.H.M's act in perpendicular directions, then their resultant

motion is in the form of a straight line or a circle or a parabola
etc. depending on the frequency ratio of the two S.H.M. and
initial phase difference. These figures are called Lissajous figures.
 = 0, , 2  = /4, 3/4  = /2
x  a1 sin  t and y  a2 sin( t   ) Figure of eight Double parabola Parabola

then the general equation of Lissajou's figure can be obtained as

x 2 y 2 2 xy
  cos   sin 2 
a12 a22 a1a2

2  = 5/4, 7/4  = 3/2

x2 y2 2 xy  x y  Double parabola Parabola
For  = 0° :    0     0

a12 a 22 a1 a 2 a
 1 a 2 

158
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 HOME ASSIGNMENT
1. A block of 4kg produces an extension of 0.16 metre in a 8. A body of mass 0.1kg is attached to two springs of
spring. The block is replaced by a body of mass 0.50 force constants 6 N/m and 4 N/m and supported by two
kg. If the spring is stretched and then released the time rigid supports (figure). If the body is displaced along
period of motion will be – the length of the springs, the frequency of vibrations
(A) 0.283 sec (B) 0.0283 sec will be –
(C) 2.83 sec (D) 28.3 sec
2. A particle is executing simple harmonic motion along a
straight line 8 cm long. While passing through mean
position its velocity is 16cm/sec. Its time period will be (A) 5 vibrations /sec (B) 10 vibrations /sec
(A) 0.157 sec (B) 1.57 sec (C) 5/π vibrations /sec (D) π/5 vibrations/sec
(C) 15.7 sec (D) 0.0157 sec 9. A spring of constant K has masses m and M attached at
3. A simple pendulum is suspended from the ceiling of a its tow ends. The system is kept in a stretched position
lift. When the lift is at rest, its time period is T. With on a horizontal frictionless surface and released, then
what acceleration should lift be accelerated upwards in the time period of vibration is
order to reduce its time period to T/2?
(A) 2𝜋 (B) 2𝜋
(A) g (B) 2g ( )

(C) 3g (D) –3g

(C) 2𝜋 (D) 2𝜋
4. A body of mass M is situated in a potential field
U(x) = U0(1–cosαx), where U0 and α are constants. The 10. Two masses m1 and m2 are suspended together by a
time period of small oscillations will be : massless spring of constant k. When the masses are in
equilibrium, m1 is removed without disturbing the
(A) 2𝜋 (B) 2𝜋
system, the amplitude of vibration is :
(A) (B)
(C) 2𝜋 𝑀𝑈 𝛼 (D) 2𝜋
( ) ( )
5. The displacement y of a particle varies with time t as (C) (D)
y = 4 sin ωt cos ωt. Where Y is in cms and time t in 11. Two pendulum of lengths 121 cm and 100 cm start
seconds. The motion of the particle is : vibrating. At same instant the two are in the mean
(A) simple harmonic with amplitude 4 cms position in the same phase. After how many vibrations
(B) simple harmonic with time period π/ω of the shorter pendulum the two will be in phase in the
(C) simple harmonic with time period 2π/ω mean position :
(D) not simple harmonic (A) 10 (B) 11
6. Two particles execute S.H.M. of the same amplitude (C) 20 (D) 21
and time period along the same straight line. They cross 12. Time period of a simple pendulum of length L is T1 and
one another when going in opposite directions. The time period of a uniform rod of the same length L
phase difference between them when their pivoted about one end and oscillating in a vertical plane
displacements are half of the amplitude is: is T2. Amplitude of oscillations in both the cases is
(A) 300 (B) 1500 small. Then T1/T2 is
(C) 1200 (D) 1800
(A) (B) 1
7. A particle, whose displacement at time t is x = A sin ωt
takes time t1, in reaching from x = 0 to x = A/2 and time (C) (D)
t2 in reaching from x = A/2 to x =A. Then the ratio t1/t2
will be – 13. A particle moves such that its acceleration is given by
(A) 2:1 (B) 1:2 a = –β(x–2). Here β is a positive constant and x the
(C) 1:1 (D) 1:4 position from origin. Time period of oscillations is :

(A) 2π√β (B) 2𝜋

(C) 2𝜋 𝛽 + 2 (D) 2𝜋

159
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
14. The potential energy of a harmonic oscillator of mass 22. An accurate pendulum clock is mounted on the
2kg in its mean position is 5J. If its total energy is 9J ground floor of a high building. How much time will
and its amplitude is 0.01 m, its time period will be : it lose or gain in one day if it is transferred to top
(A) s (B) s story of a building which is h = 200m higher than the
(C) s (D) s ground floor. Radius of earth is 6.4 x 106 m.
15. A block rides on a piston that is moving vertically with (A) it will lose 6.2 s (B) it will lose 2.7s
simple harmonic motion. The maximum speed of the (C) it will gain 5.2 s (D) it will gain 1.6 s
piston is 2m/s. At what amplitude of motion will the 23. A ball of mass 2 kg hanging from a spring oscillates
block and piston separate (g = 10m/s2) with a time period 2 seconds. Ball is removed when
(A) 20 cm (B) 30 cm it is in equilibrium position, then spring shortens by
(C) 40 cm (D) 50 cm (A) g metres (B) g/2 metres
16. The linear simple harmonic motions of equal amplitude
(C) 2g meteres (D) 2 meteres
and frequency are impressed on a particle along x and y
axis respectively. The initial phase difference between 24. A particle is executing SHM with amplitude A. At
them is π/2. The resultant path followed by the particle is : displacement x = –A/4, force acting on the particle is
(A) a circle (B) a straight line F, potential energy of the particle is U, velocity of
(C) an ellipse (D) a parabola particle is v and kinetic energy is K. Assuming
17. A simple pendulum has time period T = 2s in air. If potential energy to be zero at mean position. At
the whole arrangement is placed in a non viscous displacement x =A/2
liquid whose density is ½ times the density of bob, (A) force acting on the particle will be 2F
the time period in the liquid will be – (B) potential energy of particle will be 4U
(A) 2/2 s (B) 4 sec (C) velocity of particle will be (4/5)v
(C) 22 s (D) 42 s (D) kinetic energy of particle will be 0.8 K
18. Let T1 and T2 be the time periods of two springs A 25. Two blocks of masses m1=2 kg and m2 = 8 kg are
and B when a mass m is suspended from them connected by a spring of force constant K =1000
separately. Now both the springs are connected in kg/m. If the blocks are caused to oscillate, the
parallel and same mass m is suspended with them. frequency ‘ of motion in Hertz is (g=10 m/s2):
Now let T be the time period in this position. Then
(A) T = T1 + T2 (B) T = T1T2/ (T1+T2)
2 2 2
(C) T = T1 + T2 (D) 1/T2 = 1/T12 + 1/T22
19. A particle is subjected to two simple harmonic
(A) 252/ (B) 25/2
motions in the same direction having equal
amplitudes and equal frequency. If the resulting (C) 25/2 (D) 2/25
amplitude is equal to the amplitude of individual 26. A particle undergoes simple harmonic motion having
motions, the phase difference between them is time –period T. The time taken in completing 3/8
(A) /3 (B) 2/3 oscillation from mean position is:
(C) /6 (D) /2 (A) (3/8) T (B) (5/8) T
20. In a spring block system length of the spring is (C) (5/12) T (D) (7/12) T
reduced by 1% the time period will 27. A simple spring has length l and force constant K. It
(A) increase by 2% (B) increase by 0.5% is cut into two springs of length l1 and l2 such that l1
(C) decrease by 2% (D) decrease by 0.5% = nl2 (n= an integer). The force constant of spring of
21. Two linear simple harmonic motions of equal length l1 is :
amplitude and frequency are impressed on a particle (A) K(1+n) (B) K(n+1)/n
along x and y axes respectively. The initial phase (C) K (D) K/(n+1)
difference between them is /2. The resultant path 28. In the above problem, the force constant of the spring
followed by the particle is of length l2 is
(A) a circle (B) a straight line (A) K (1+n) (B) (K/n) (1+n)
(C) an ellipse (D) a parabola (C) K (D) K/(n+1)

160
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
29. A metal bob is suspended from a coiled spring on (A) (4/3)(m/K) (B) (5/6)(m/K)
earth, when set into vertical vibrations it oscillates up (C) (1/6) (m/K) (D) (2/3)(m/K)
and down with a frequency . If the same experiment 35. A body of mass 5 gm is executing simple harmonic
is carried out in satellite circulating the earth, the motion about a point O with an amplitude of 10 cms.
frequency of vibrations will be Its maximum velocity is 100 cm/s. Its velocity will
(A)  be 50 cms/sec at a distance (in cms)
(B) zero (A) 5 cms (B) 52 cms
(C) infinite (C) 53 cms (D) 102 cms
(D) depends on distance of satellite from earth 36. A simple pendulum has a length l The inertial and
30. An object of mass 0.2 kg executes simple harmonic gravitational masses of the bob are mi and mg
oscillations along the X –axis with a frequency respectively. Then the time period T is given by
(25/) Hz. At the position x = 0.04 m, the object has (A) T = 2(mgl/mig) (B) T = 2(mil/mgg)
kinetic energy of 0.5 J and potential energy of 0.4 J. (C) T = 2(mg x mi x l/g) (D) T=2 l/ (mg x mi xg)
The amplitude of oscillations is: 37. A test tube with some lead shots in it has a total mass
(A) 0.06 m (B) 0.03 m Mgm. It floats upright in a liquid of density d gm per
(C) 0.04 m (D) 0.02 cm3. The cross –sectional area of the tube is A cm2. It
31. A smooth inclined plane having angle of inclination is pressed slightly downwards from position of stable
300 with the horizontal has a mass 2.5 kg held by a equilibrium and released, then it executes a S.H.M.
spring which is fixed at the upper end. If the mass is with a period of
taken 2.5 cm up along the surface of the inclined (A) T = 2(M/Agd) (B) T = 2(M/2Agd)
plane, the tension in the spring reduces to zero. If the (C) T = 2(2M/Agd) (D) T = 2(MA/gd)
mass is now released, the angular frequency of 38. Two pendula of lengths 1 meter and 16 meter start
oscillations (in rad/s) is about: vibrating one behind the other from the same stand.
At some instant the two are in the mean position in
the same phase. The time period of shorter pendulum
is T. The minimum time after which the two threads
of the pendula will be one behind the other is
(A) 7 (B) 14 (A) T/4 (B) T/3
(C) 0.7 (D) 1.4 (C) 4T/3 (D) 4T
32. In a simple harmonic motion, when the displacement 39. Two S.H.M. are represented by the equations
is one –half of the amplitude, what fraction of the y1=10 sin (3t+/4)cm andy2 = 5 [sin 3t +3 cos 3t]
total energy is potential energy? cm The phase difference in two S.H.M. is
(A) ¼ (B) ½ (A) /4 (B) /3
(C) ¾ (D) 0
(C) /12 (D) 2/7
33. A particle moves according to law x =a cost. The
40. A simple pendulum set up to swing in front of a
distance covered by it in 2.5 second is :
second’s pendulum of a clock is seen to gain so that
(A) 2a (B) 3a
the two swing in phase at intervals of 21 seconds.
(C) 5a (D) 9a
Then the time of the vibration of the simple
34. One end of a spring of force constant K is fixed to a
pendulum is
vertical wall and other to a body of mass m resting
(A) 2 seconds
on a smooth horizontal surface. There is another wall
(B) 1.83 seconds
at a distance x0 from the body. The spring is then
(C) 2.17 seconds
compressed by 2x0 and released. The time taken to
(D) either 1.83 seconds or 2.17 seconds
strike the wall from its compressed position is:

161
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
41. A spring has a spring constant K. It is cut into two 49. Five identical springs are used in the following three
equal lengths and the two cut pieces are connected in configurations. The time periods of vertical
parallels then the spring constant of the parallel oscillations in configurations (a), (b) and (c) are in
combination is the ratio
(A) K (B) 2K
(C) 4K (D) K/2
42. When a mass m is attached to a spring, it normally
extends by 0.2 metre. The mass m is given a slightly
additional extension and released, then its time (A) 1:2:12 (B) 2:2 :1/2
period, is (C) 1/2 : 2:1 (D) 2:1/2 :1
(A) 2/2 sec (B) 2/7 sec 50. The displacement of an oscillating particle varies
(C) 7 sec (D) 1/7 sec with time (in seconds) according to the equation
43. Damping of an harmonic oscillator causes Y = sin (/2)(t/2 +1/3)where y is in cm. The
(A) an increase in frequency maximum acceleration of the particle is
(B) a decrease in frequency approximately
(C) no change in frequency (A) 5.21 cm/sec2 (B) 3.62 cm/sec2
(D) a change in frequency which changes with the (C) 1.81 cm/sec2 (D) 0.62 cm/sec2
amount of damping 51. For a simple harmonic oscillator, the potential energy
44. A loaded vertical spring executes simple harmonic is equal to kinetic energy
oscillations with period of 4 s. The difference (A) once during each cycle (B) twice during each cycle
between the kinetic energy and potential energy of (C) when x =a/√2 (D) when x = a
this system oscillates with a period of 52. A particle, with restoring force proportional to
displacement and resisting force proportional to
(A) 1 s (B) 2 s (C) 4 s (D) 8 s
velocity is subjected to a force F sin t. If the
45. A seconds pendulum is mounted in a rocket. Its
period of oscillation decreases when the rocket amplitude of the particle is maximum for  = 1 and
(A) moves round the earth in a geostationary orbit the energy of the particle is maximum for  = 2 then
(B) moves up with a uniform velocity (A) 1=0 and 20 (B) 1=0 and 2 = 0
(C) moves up with uniform acceleration (C) 10 and 2 = 0 (D) 10 and 20
(D) comes down with uniform acceleration 53. A coin is placed on a horizontal platform, which
46. The displacement of a particle executing simple undergoes vertical S.H.M. of angular frequency.
harmonic vibration of amplitude a in one time period is The amplitude of oscillations is gradually increased.
The coin will loose contact with the platform for the
(A) a (B) 2a
first time (i) at the higher position of the platform (ii)
(C) 4a (D) zero
at the mean position of the platform (iii) for an
47. The ratio of mean value of potential energy taken
amplitude of g/2 (iv) for an amplitude of 2/
over displacement y to the total energy of harmonic
(A) only (i) is correct
oscillator is
(B) (i) and (iii) are correct
(A) 1/3 (B) 3/1
(C) (i), (ii) and (iii) are correct
(C) 1/2 (D) 2/1
(D) only (iii) is correct
48. The displacement Y of a particle executing periodic 54. A simple harmonic oscillator has a period T and
motion is given by Y = 4 cos2(t/2) sin (1000t). energy E. The amplitude of the oscillator is doubled.
The expression may be considered to be a result of Choose the correct answer.
the super position of n independent harmonic (A) period and energy get doubled
motions. Then n is equal to (B) period gets doubled while energy remains the same
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) energy gets doubled while period remains the same
(C) 3 (D) 4 (D) period remains the same and energy becomes
four times

162
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
55. The periodic time T of a simple pendulum are 62. A particle of mass m is allowed to oscillate near the
observed, for different length L. If a graph of ‘log T’ minimum of a vertical parabolic path having the
against ‘logL’ plotted, the slope of the graph at T = 2 equation x2 = 4ay. The angular frequency of small
s is oscillations is given by :
(A) 2 (B) 1/2
(C) 2 (D) 1/2
56. A body having natural frequency v’ is executing
forced oscillations under a driving force of frequency
v. The system will vibrate
(A) with frequency of driving force v (A) 𝑔𝑎 (B) 2𝑔𝑎
(B) with its natural frequency v’
(C) with mean frequency of the two [(v+v’)/2] (C) (D)
(D) none of the above 63. The bob of a simple pendulum of length L is released
57. A horizontal plank has a rectangular block placed on at time t =0, from the position of small angular
it. The plank starts oscillating vertically and simple displacement. Its linear displacement at time t is
harmonically with an amplitude of 40 cm. The block given by :
just loses contact with the plank when the latter is
monetary at rest. Then (A) x = Lθ cos 𝑡 (B) x = Lθ cos 2𝜋 𝑡
(A) the period of oscillation is 2/5 sec
(C) x= Lθ sin 2𝜋 𝑡 (D) x = Lθ sin 2𝜋 𝑡
(B) the block weighs double its weight when the
plank is at one of the position of momentary at 64. A particle executing SHM from an extreme end of
rest the path towards the centre is observed to be at
(C) the block weighs 1.5 times its weight on the distances x1, x2 and x3 from the centre, at the ends of
plank half way down three successive seconds. Its time period of
(D) the block weighs its true weight on the plank, oscillation is 𝑢𝑠𝑒 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝜃 = :
when the latter moves fastest
58. A system in damped vibrations is acted upon by an (A) (B) 2πθ
external periodic force. When the damping is small,
(C) (D)
resonance is :
65. The potential energy (EP) of three simple harmonic
(A) sharp (B) flat
oscillations varies with displacement x as shown in
(C) absent (D) half sharp and half flat
figure. These oscillations have the same mass but
59. A second’s pendulum is kept in a satellite revolving
different amplitudes A1, A2 and A3. Their
at a height 3 Re from earth’s surface. Its time period
characteristic frequency v1, v2 and v3 are related to
will be –
each other as:
(A) infinity (B) zero
(C) second (D) 2√3 second
60. The composition of two simple harmonic motions of
equal periods at right angle to each other and with a
phase difference of π results in the displacement of
the particle along :
(A) circle (B) figure of eight
(C) straight line (D) ellipse
61. Two particles are executing S.H.M. given below (A) = = (B) v1A1 = v2A2 = v3A3
y1 = a sin t, y2 = (a/√2) sin t + (a/√2) cos t.
(C) v1>v2>v3 (D) v1<v2<v3
The ratio of amplitudes of first and second S.H.M. is
(A) 1/1 (B) 1/√2
(C) 1/2 (D) √2/1
163
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
66. A particle executes SHM on a straight line. At two 73. The arrangement shown in the figure is rotated with a
positions its velocity is u and v while acceleration, α constant angular velocity about a vertical axis. The
and β respective [β>α>0], the displacement between period of small oscillations of the block is:
these two positions is :
(A) (B)

(C) (D)
67. The total energy of the particle executing simple
harmonic motion is directly proportional to – (A) 2π √(m/k) (B) 2π √(m/2k)
(C) 2π √[m/(2k –mω )] 2 (D) 2π √[m/(k –mω2)]
(A) the square of amplitude of motion
(B) the amplitude of motion 74. The displacement of a particle executing S.H.M. is
(C) the frequency of oscillator given by y = 5 sin 2πt the acceleration produced in the
(D) the displacement from mean position. particle is
(A) –20 π2 sin 2π t (B) 20 π2 sin 2π t
68. Two bodies M and N of equal mass are suspended from
(C) –10 π sin 2π t (D) +10 π sin 2π t
two springs of force constant K1 and K2 respectively.
75. The bob of a simple pendulum of mass m is displaced
Both the bodies oscillate vertically such that their
from its equilibrium position through height h and then
maximum velocities are equal. The ratio of amplitudes
released. It vibrates with a time period of 2 seconds.
of M and N will be –
The tension in the bob when the bob passes through
(A) K2/K1 (B) K1/K2
mean position
(C) √( K2/K1) (D) √( K1/K2) (A) m (g +2π2h) (B) m (g +π2h)
69. When the period of oscillation of a body executing simple 2
(C) m (g +π h/2) (D) m (g +π2h/3)
harmonic motion is doubled, its energy becomes 76. A particle is executing simple harmonic motion. Its
(A) double (B) one fourth velocities are V1 and V2 for displacements y1 and y2
(C) half (D) four times respectively. Then its time period is :
70. Which of the following is a necessary and sufficient (A) 2π √[(V12 –V22)/(y22 –y12)]
condition for S.H.M.? (B) 2π √[ (y22 –y12)/ (V12 –V22)]
(A) constant period (C) 2π √[(V1y1)/ (V2y2)]
(B) constant acceleration (D) 2π √[(y1y2)/ (V1V2)]
(C) direct proportionality between acceleration and 77. A point mass is subjected to two simultaneous
displacement from equilibrium position sinusoidal displacements in x –direction, x1(t) = A sin
(D) proportionality between restoring force and ωt and x2(t) = A sin 𝜔𝑡 + . Adding a third
displacement from equilibrium position. sinusoidal displacement x3(t) = B sin (ωt+φ) brings the
71. A simple pendulum of a period T has a metal bob which is mass to a complete rest. The value of B and φ are
negatively charged. If it is allowed to oscillate above a large
(A) √2𝐴, (B) 𝐴,
positively charged metallic plate, its period
(A) remains the same (C) √3𝐴, (D) 𝐴,
(B) decreases 78. A highly rigid cubical block A of mass M and side L is
(C) increases fixed rigidly on the another cubical block of same
(D) nothing can be said definitely dimensions and low modulus of rigidity η such that the
72. A point mass m is suspended at the end of a massless lower face of A completely covers the upper face of B.
wire of length L and cross –sectional A. If E is the The lower face of B is rigidly held on a horizontal
Young’s modulus of the wire, then the frequency of surface. A small force F is applied perpendicular to one
oscillation for the simple oscillation along the vertical of the side faces of A. After the force is withdrawn,
direction is : block A executes small oscillations, the time period of
which is given by :
(A) 2π √(EA/mL) (B) (1/2π) √(EA/mL)
(C) (1/2π) √(AL/mE) (D) (1/2π) √(mL/AE) (A) 2𝜋 𝑀𝐿𝜂 (B) 2𝜋

(C) 2𝜋 (D) 2𝜋

164
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
79. A block of mass M is suspended from a light spring of 81. A particle of mass m is attached to three identical
force constant k. Another mass m moving upwards with springs A, B and C each of force constant k as shown in
velocity v hits the mass M and gets embedded in it. figure. If the particle of mass m is pushed slightly
What will be the amplitude of the combined mass? against the spring A and released, then the time then the
(A) (B) time period of oscillation is:
( ) ( )

(C) (D)
( ) ( )
80. A test tube with some lead shots in it has total mass m.
Its cross section is a. It floats upright in a liquid of
density d. From its equilibrium position, it is pushed
down a bit and then released. It will oscillate up and
down with a period : 2m m
(A) 2 (B) 2
(A) 2𝜋 (B) 2𝜋 k 2k
m m
(C) 2𝜋 (D) 2𝜋 (C) 2 (D) 2
k 3k
ANSWER KEY

1 A 28 A 55 B
2 B 29 A 56 A
3 C 30 A 57 B
4 A 31 B 58 A
5 B 32 A 59 A
6 C 33 C 60 C
7 B 34 D 61 A
8 C 35 C 62 C
9 A 36 B 63 A
10 A 37 A 64 A
11 B 38 C 65 D
12 C 39 C 66 D
13 B 40 B 67 A
14 A 41 C 68 C
15 C 42 B 69 B
16 A 43 B 70 C
17 C 44 B 71 B
18 D 45 C 72 B
19 B 46 D 73 C
20 D 47 A 74 A
21 A 48 C 75 A
22 B 49 A 76 B
23 A 50 D 77 B
24 BD 51 C 78 D
25 B 52 C 79 C
26 C 53 B 80 B
27 B 54 D 81 B

165
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 WAVES
A wave is a disturbance which propagates in space, transport energy from one place to another without the transport of
matter.
(a) Elasticity and (b) Inertia are required properties of a medium for propagation of mechanical waves.
Example – Ripples on a pond, sound we hear etc.
Wave

Based on motion Based on energy

Based on medium Based on direction
of the particles of propagation of propagation
medium

Mechanical Electro
wave magnetic Progressive
Longitudinal Transverse Stationary
wave wave
wave wave wave

One dimensional Two dimensional Three

wave wave dimensional
wave
EQUATION OF PROGRESSIVE WAVE IN (+) X y
Particles velocity v =, for a given x
DIRECTION t
 x 2
y = a sin   t    WAVE NUMBER (k) : k =
 v 
2  PHASE DIFFERENCE & PATH DIFFERENCE:
(a) k = (b) v =
 T Suppose 1 and 2 are the phases of particles at distance
2 x1 and x2 in time t
(c) = kv (d)  = x
 t x  t x 
1= 2   1  and 2 = 2   2 
Standard form: y = a sin (t – ) T   T  
(a) y = a sin (t – kx) 2 2
 2  so 1 – 2 = (x2 – x1)   = . x
(b) y = a sin  t  x  
   Note: When x =  then  = 2.
  Hence the phase difference between two particles is
(c) y = a sin 2  vt  
  when the path difference is . So particles are in the
2  xT  same phase.
(d) y = a sin t  
T    EQUATION RELATING PHASE DIFFERENCE &
dx TIME DIFFERENCE :
WAVE SPEED (v): Wave velocity v = Suppose 1 and 2 are the phases of a particle at time t1
dt
INTENSITY (I): and t2. When the particle is at x distance then,
It is the amount of energy passing per unit time through  t1 x  t x
unit perpendicular area. I = 22n2a2 v 1 = 2    and 2 = 2  2  
 T   T 
Where  is density of medium
2 2
ENERGY DENSITY (E): 1 – 2 = (t1 – t2)   = . t
It is the amount of energy per unit volume. T T
Energy int ensity Note: When  = 2 then t = T
E= = 22n2 a2  Hence after one time period phase of oscillation becomes
Energy velocity
same.
WAVE PRESSURE :
When a wave is incident on a surface then it produces
pressure on it called wave pressure.
PARTICLE VELOCITY :
The velocity with which particles of the medium oscillate
is called particle velocity.
In wave equation y = A sin (t–kx)

166
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 
Velocity of wave along a string 
  FROM RARE TO DENSER MEDIUM :

 
F  R F
yi = ai sin (t – k1x)
yr = –ar sin (t + k1x)
F
v= yt = at sin (t – k2x)
µ
FROM DENSER TO RARE MEDIUM :
Note: If A is area of cross-section and  is density = A
F
So velocity v =
A
SUPERPOSITION OF WAVES LEADS TO: yi = ai sin (t – k1x)
(a) Interference (b) Beats
yr = ar sin (t + k1x)
(c)Stationary wave (d) Lissajous figure
Interference: When two waves of equal frequency and yt = at sin (t – k2x)
nearly equal amplitude travelling in the same direction AMPLITUDE OF REFLECTED & TRANSMITTED
having same state of polarisation in a medium WAVE
superimpose, then intensity is different at different Two conditions are necessary for the wave to go from
points. At some points intensity is large, where as at one medium to another.
other points it is nearly zero. This phenomenon is called (a)Wave should be continuous at the boundary.
interference of waves. (b)Slope of the wave should be continuous at the
y1 = a1 sin ( t – kx) boundary.
y2 = a2 sin (t – kx + ) k  k2
at = 1 .a
k1  k 2 i
y = a sin (t – kx + )
2k 1
a1  a 2  2a1 a 2 cos 
2 2 at = .ai
a= k1  k 2
a 2 sin 
tan =
a 1  a 2 cos  Standing Waves
 = 1 + 2 +2 I1I 2 cos When two waves of same frequency and amplitude
propagate in opposite directions, then these waves
(a) Constructive Interference : amax = a1 + a2
superimpose to form stationary waves.
max =  I1  I 2  2
= I1+I2+2 I1I 2 (a) The disturbance is confined to the region where it is
(b) Destructive Interference :  = (2n – 1) produced.
(b) Different particles move with different amplitudes.

Path difference x = (2n – 1) IHere all the particles cross their mean position together.
2
(d) Energy of one region remain confined in that region
Hence amin = a1 – a2
only i.e it does not propagate.
min =  I1  I 2 2
= I1+I2 – 2 I1I 2 (e) In standing waves, some particles remains at rest,
called as nodes where as some under go maximum
Reflection and refraction of waves displacement called antinodes
When waves are incident on a boundary between two
media, a part of incident waves are reflected back into
the same medium where as the remaining is partly
absorbed and partly transmitted into other medium. This
phenomenon obeys the laws of reflection and refraction.
The frequency of these wave remains constant i.e does
not change. i = r = t = 


167
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 .S. No. When reflected from free end When reflected from rigid end
1. yi = a sin (t – kx) yi = a sin (t – kx)
yr = a sin (t + kx) yr = – a sin (t + kx)
2. By principle of superposition By principle of superposition
y = yi + yr = 2a sin t cos kx y = yi + yr = – 2a cos t – sin kx
3. Maximum displacement from mean position Maximum displacement from mean
R = 2a cos kx position R = 2a sin kx
4. Amplitude is maximum when cos kx = ± 1 Amplitude is maximum when sin kx = ± 1
n n   
kx = np  x =  kx = (2n + 1)  x = (2n + 1) =(2n+1)
k 2 2 2k 4
5. Amplitude is maximum at antinode Amplitude is maximum at antinode
i.e. at x = 0, /2, 2/2 ..... i.e. at x = /4, 3/4, 5/4 ......
6.  
Distance between two consecutive antinode is Distance between two consecutive antinode is
2 2
7. If cos kx = 0 then displacement of particle is If sin kx = 0 then displacement of particle is always
always zero i.e. position of node zero i.e. position of node
  n
kx = (2n + 1) x = (2n + 1) kx = n p × =
2 4 2
8.  
Distance between two consecutive node is Distance between two consecutive nodes is
2 2

CHARACTERISTICS OF STATIONARY WAVES : (f)All the particles of the medium between two nodes
Figure shows the resultant (thick line) of two waves vibrate in same phase with same frequency but with
• different amplitudes.
• • • •
(g)Since nodes are permanently at rest, so energy cannot
• •

• • • • •
be transmitted across them.
Vibration of string
• •
• • • •
FIXED AT BOTH ENDS
• F
Velocity of the wave in string is given by : v=
• • • • • µ
•
• • • •
Where F is tension in the string
• • is mass per unit length
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(thin and dotted) traveling in opposite direction at instants t Fundamental 1 = 2 
1st harmonic P=1
TT
= 0, ,     Where T is the time period of wave.
4 2
First overtone  2 = 2
(a)There are certain point (1,3,5,7) in the medium whose 2nd harmonic
P=2
displacement are zero at all times. Such points are called 3 = 2 
Second overtone P=3
nodes. 3rd harmonic
(b)There are certain points (2, 4, 6) in the medium whose If  is length of the wire then
displacements vary periodically between zero and For fundamental mode  = /2 or  = 2 
maximum. Such points are called antinodes. v 1 F
(c)Wavelength and frequency of the resultant wave is 0 = = 
equal to that of individual wave.
2  2  µ
(d) Amplitude of the resultant wave is double the 2 2
For first overtone  = or  =
amplitude of the individual wave. 2 2
(e) There are alternate position of nodes and antinodes. For second overtone  = 3/2 or  = 2/3
The distance between two successive nodes or antinodes 3v 3 F P F
  v2 = =  vP =
is where as that between node and antinode is . 2 2 µ 2 µ
2 4 Here all harmonics are present in a string

168
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 FREE AT ONE END : 1  2
(a) Law of length  F   
For fundamental mode  = /4 or  = 4  2 1
v 1 F Where F & are constants
 = = 
4 4 µ 1 F1
(b) Law of Tension : F  = 
For first overtone  = 3/4 or  = 4/3 2 F2
Where  and  are constants
1 = 4  P= 1
Fundamental 1 v µ2
(c) Law of Mass :  1 =  
µ v2 µ1
First overtone 2 = 4  / 3 Where  and F are constants
P= 2
 r
3 = 4  / 5 (d) Law of Radius :r 1 = 2 
Second overtone P= 3 2 r1
 Where  and F are constants
3v 3 F 1 1  2
    (e) Law of Density :  = 1 =
4 4     2 1
 For second overtone  = 5/4 or  = 4/5 Where  , r and F are constants
1 (f) General formula :
P
5v 5 F 2 F P F P Mg P Mg
2    P =    
4 4  2  2 µ 2 r 2 2 r 
SONOMETER :
Comparison between progressive wave and stationary wave :
S. No. Progressive wave Stationary wave
1. These waves advance in a medium with a These waves remain stationary between two boundaries
definite velocity in the medium.
2. These waves transmit energy in the medium. These waves do not transmit energy in the medium.
3. In these waves, at no instant all the particles of In these waves, all particles of the medium pass
medium pass through their mean positions through their mean positions simultaneously.
simultaneously .
4. In these waves, all particles of the medium In these waves, except nodes, all other particles of the
vibrate and amplitude of vibration is same medium vibrate. The amplitude is zero at the node
for all of them and maximum at the antinodes.
MELDE’S EXPERIMENTS :
(a) This is an experimental show of transverse stationary wave.
(b) Unknown frequency of tuning fork can be determined.
(c) Laws of transverse vibration in stretched string can be proved.
[Link]. Transverse Arrangement Longitudinal Arrangement
1.

2. Oscillation of tuning fork arms is perpendicular to string. Oscillation of tuning forks is parallel to the string.

3. To complete one oscillation tuning fork and string String complete one oscillation in same time in
both takes same time. which tuning fork completes two oscillation.
4. If P be number of loops in string then If P be number of loops in string then
 P F  2P F
=P ; = =P ;=
2 2 µ 2 2 µ

1. Nature of sound waves

169
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 (a) Audible waves : Sound waves with frequency 3. Relation between pressure and
between 20 Hz and 20,000 Hz are called audible displacement equation of sound wave
waves.
(b) Infrasonic waves : Sound waves whose frequency Consider a sound wave going in X direction in a
lie below 20 Hz are called infrasonic waves. medium. At time t, the position of the particle suffering
(c) Ultrasonic waves : Sound waves whose frequency a displacement s is given by
is greater than 20000 Hz are called ultrasonic s = s0 sin (t – kx) ..........(1)
waves. If we consider the element confined within x and x +
Sound waves propagate in the form of compression and x having area of cross-section A than the volume of
rarefaction of medium. Due to propagation of these this element is V = A.x. Now as the wave passes from
waves, pressure varies periodically in sinusoidal one end to another it causes an increase in volume given
fashion. If P0 is the normal pressure then excess by
pressure varies which is given by dV = (s +s – s)A = s.A
Pf – P0 = P0sin t V As s s
 Volume strain =    
or P = P0 sin t V Ax x x
Where P0 is amplitude of pressure variation and P is s dV
 So  = – s0 k cos(t – kx) {from eqn. (1)}
excess pressure i.e. above or below the normal value. x V
If B is the bulk modulus of material then,
S S + S

2. Equation of sound waves

A sound wave is explained either by longitudinal
displacement suffered by the particles of the medium or x x+ x
by excess pressure generated due to compression and P
B =–
rarefaction. dV
(a) If P(0,t) is known and sound wave is propagating in V
+X direction dV P
 =–
P(x,t) = P(0, t – x/v) V B
= P0 sin (t – x/v) P
 = – s0 k cos (t – kx)
(b) If P(0,t) is known i.e. P(0,t) = P0 sin t and sound B
wave is propagating in –X direction P = s0 kB cos (t – kx)
P(x,t) = P(0, t + x/v) P = P0 cos (t – kx) Where
= P0 sin(t + x/v) 2s 0 B
(c) If P(x, 0) is known i.e. P(x,0) = P0sin kx and sound P0 = s0 k B =

wave is propagating in +X direction The pressure wave is 90º out of phase w.r. t
P(x,t) = P(x – vt, 0) displacement wave i.e. displacement is maximum when
= P0 sin k(x – v t) pressure is minimum and vice versa.
P = P0 sin (kx –t) 4. Velocity of sound waves
(d) If P(x,0) is known i.e. P(x,0) = P0 sin kx and sound Assume a sound wave going in +X direction and is
wave in propagating in –X direction represented by equation
P(x,t) = P(x + vt, 0) s = s0 sin t – kx ...(i)
= P0 sin k(x + vt) The pressure variation is given by
P = P0 sin (kx +t) P = P0 cos (t – kx) ...(ii)
These are the equation of sound wave in terms of pressure. (P + dP)A
PA
While obtaining them in terms of displacement of medium
particles, we have to proceed in the same manner as that
being done in transverse wave. So we have x x-dx
s = s0 sin (t – kx) From the figure it is clear that resultant force on the
element at time t is
F = PA – (P + dP)A = – dP.A

170
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
From eqn. (ii) P
dP = –P0 sin (t – kx). (–k) dx v=

= kP0 sin (t – kx)dx Now if P = 1.01 x 105 N/m2 and = 1.29 kg/m3
So Net force F = –k P0 sin (t – kx) [Link] So speed of sound in air at C is
If  is density of fluid then mass of the element is Adx. 1.01  10 5
So acceleration of the particle is = = 280 m/s
1.29
F kP0 sin(t  kx )
= = ...(iii) But by experiment, speed of sound in air is
.[Link]  331 m/s. Hence the above formula was modified by
But acceleration of the medium particle is given by  Laplace. He assumed that temperature of the gas
2
 s does not remain constant and assume sound
= 2
= –2 s0 sin(t–kx)
...(iv) propagation to be adiabatic process.
t
PV = constant
Comparing (iii) and (iv)
Taking logarithm
kP
–s02 sin (t – kx) = – 0 sin (t – kx) log P +  log V = constant

P V
kP0 or  =0
s02 = P V
 P
B= = P
kP0 V
   = V
s 0 P
So speed of sound in gas V =
Put P0 = 2s0B/ 
k 2s 0 B k.k.B B Note:(1)In the case of gases
  = .  =k
s 0    Mass
= and PV = nRT
Volume
2 B
or 2n = Mass
  where n =
[Link].M
1 B
n= RT
  v=
M
B (2) From kinetic theory of gases,
Thus v = n =
 3RT
vrms =
FOR SOLIDS, speed of sound wave is given by M
Y v  3
v= =  vrms = v.
 v rms 3 
Where Y is young’s modulus of the solid and is (3) Average speed of the molecules of a gas is
density of solid. vav = 0.92 vrms
B (4) Most probable speed is given by
FOR LIQUIDS v =
 vmp = 0.816 vrms
FOR GASES (5)  = CP/CV and has values and for mono, dia
According to Newton, when a sound wave and polyatomic gases respectively.
propagates in a gas, the temperature variations are
5. Factors affecting speed of sound in gas
negligible i.e the temperature is constant. Hence
propagation of sound is an isothermal process. So The speed of sound in a gas depends on the temperature,
by Boyle’s law relative humidity and pressure.
PV = Constant or PV + VP = 0 (a) Effect of temperature : Velocity of sound in gas is
given by
P
B=  =P RT
V P
V v= =
Hence speed of sound in gas is given by  M

171
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 2
 t  2Bs0 
vt = v0 1   I=
 546  2
(b) Effect of Relative Humidity : With increase in P0 
2
humidity, density decreases and hence velocity of I=
4B
sound increases. In rainy seasons, sound travels
Hence Intensity is proportional to the square of pressure
faster as compared to the summer.
amplitude.
(c) Effect of Pressure :
(i) If the source is a point source, then with increase in
The speed of sound in a gas is given by
distance from the source, the intensity decreases i.e
P P Q
v= r

From the formula it looks as if speed W
I =
changes with pressure. But we have 4r 2
P RT 1
v= = or I 2
 M r
(ii) If a sound source is a line source emitting sound
So at constant temperature, if P changes then also
than intensity at a distance r is given by
changes such that P/is constant. Hence pressure r
dose not have any effect on velocity of sound till
temperature remains constant.

6. Intensity of sound waves
When the wave travels in a medium it carries energy
with it. The intensity of a sound wave is defined as the W
average energy transmitted per unit normal area per unit I=
2r
second i.e. power per unit area.
6.1 LOUDNESS OF A SOUND:
Consider a sound wave travelling along x direction. We
It depends on the intensity and frequency of sound.
have
But human ear responds to sound intensities over a
s = s0 sin (t – kx) wide range. Hence a logarithmic scale of intensity
and P = P0 cos (t – kx) i.e sound level was given by
2s 0 B I
Where P0 = SL = 10 log10
 I0
Now if we assume a cross-section of area A on which a Where I is intensity of sound and I0 is threshold of
force pA is exerted so that points of application move human ear.
with a speed . Hence power (W) transmitted 6.2 RELATIVE SOUND LEVEL:
W = Force × Velocity It is the comparison between two different sounds
s which is given by
= PA ×
t I I
SL1 – SL2 = 10 log 1 – 10 log 2
PA (P + dP)A I0 I0
I
SL1 – SL2 = 10 Log 1
x x-dx I2
s 6.3 PITCH :
But intensity is Power/Area i.e. I = P. It is the characteristic of sound which differentiates
t
I(t) = P0 cos (t – kx). s0 cos (t – kx) between the shrill or grave sound. It depends on the
frequency of sound.
= P0 s0  cos2 (t – kx)
6.4 QUALITY OF SOUND :
T It is the characteristics which differentiates between
=
 ( t )
  0 the sounds of same intensity and frequency.
T Note :
So intensity I is equal to average power transmitted over 1. Energy associated with the sound wave is given by
unit area i.e 1
E = 2 [Link]
2

172
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 2. Power i.e Rate of energy is given by p 2 sin 
tan =
1 p1  p 2 cos 
P = v2A
2 (i) For constructive interference
3. Intensity = Energy density × velocity  = 2n and Dx = n 
7. Interference of sound waves   p = p1 + p2
According to principle of Superposition, when two or (ii) For destructive interference
more sound waves pass through the same point then the  1
 = (2n + 1) and x =  n    
resultant disturbance is the sum of disturbance produced  2
by individual sound waves. At some points intensity is
  p = |p1 – p2|
maximum where as at some other points it is minimum
(a) If p1 = p2 and x = /2
making the condition of constructive interference and
destructive interference. Resultant p = 0 i.e. no sound
Consider two waves of same frequency and same (b) If x =  i.e =2 and p1 = p2
amplitude reaching at point p from two sources S1 and p 02 = p12 + p12 + 2 p1 p1 cos 2
S2. Let p1 and p2 be the pressure amplitude of wave {from eqn(3)}
from s1 and s2 so that pressure change at O is given by = 4 p12
S1 p0 = 2p1
i.e amplitude of resultant wave becomes two times
O and hence resultant intensity of sound becomes four
x + x times the intensity due to individual source.
S2
P1 = p1 sin (kx – t)
8. Reflection of sound waves
P2 = p2 sin [(kx – t) + ]
The two conditions under which reflection of sound
2x takes place are :
where  = is the phase difference between two
 (a) Discontinuity in the medium i.e wave is continuous at
waves. Hence resultant wave at P is, the boundary. When a sound wave is reflected from a
P = P1 + P2 rigid boundary, the particle are not able to vibrate at the
= p1 sin (kx – t) + p2 sin (kx – t +) boundary. So a reflected wave is generated. This wave
interferes with the incident wave so that net
= p1 sin (kx – t) + p2 sin (kx –t) cos
displacement is zero giving rise to maximum variation
+ p2 sincos (kx – t) in pressure. Hence phase of reflected wave remains
= (p1 + p2 cos) sin (kx – t) same i.e a compression pulse is reflected as compression
+ p2 sin cos (kx – t) pulse and vice versa.
(b) Low pressure region: When the sound wave travels in
Let p1 + p2 cos  = p0 cos  ...(1)
open tube, it gets reflected from the open end by which
and p2 sin  = p0 sin    (2) force is exerted on the particles due to outside air. This
P = p0 cos  sin (kx – t) + p0 sin cos (kx – t) force is of small magnitude and so the particles vibrate
P = p0 sin (kx – t + ) with increased amplitude. So pressure remains at
Squaring and adding eqn (1) and (2) average value by which the phase change of  occurs.
Hence compression pulse is reflected as rarefaction
(p0 cos)2 + (p0 sin)2
pulse and vice versa.
= (p1 + p2 cos)2 + (p2 sin)2 (c) Echo is an example of reflection of sound from a distant
p02 = p12 + p22 cos2 + 2p1 p2 cos + p22 sin 2 object. If there is a sound reflector at a distance d from
p02 = p12 + p22 + 2 p1 p2 cos ...(3) the source then time taken to hear the echo is 2d/v.
Where d is distance of object to source.
p0 = p12  p 22  2p1 p 2 cos  Note - Multiple or successive echoes will be produced
Dividing eqn (2) by (1) we have where there are two or more reflectors.
p 0 sin  p 2 sin  9. Stationary wave

p 0 cos  p1  p 2 cos 

173
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 When two exactly identical sound wave propagate in
Case A N A
opposite direction superimpose then resultant wave is
called stationary wave.
pA = p0 sin (kx –t) Case B N A N A
pB = p0 sin (kx +t)
By principle of superposition,
Case C N A N A N A
p = pA + pB
= p0 sin (kx –t) + p0 sin (kx + t)   In term of displacement
= 2 p0 sin kx cos t
A N
Thus amplitude of oscillation of the resultant wave is
2p0 sin kx which depends on parent wave. The results
obtained from above equation are – A N A N
(i) Different points oscillate with different amplitude.
(ii) Few points oscillate with maximum amplitude (pressure
amplitude). The point with maximum amplitude A N AN A N
(pressure variation) are called pressure antinodes. In
terms of displacement they are referred as displacement In terms of pressure
node because at these points, displacement amplitude is Case A 
zero.  = /4 = 4
(iii) Few points with minimum amplitude (pressure n1 = v/ = v/4 fundamental frequency
amplitude). The point with minimum amplitude Case B 
(pressure variation) are called pressure nodes. In terms    = 3/4  = 4/3
of displacement, they are referred as displacement n2 = v/ = 3v/4 First overtone frequency
antinodes because at these displacement amplitude is
Case C 
maximum.
   = 5/4  = 4/5
(iv) Separation between two consecutive nodes and
n3 = v/ = 5v/4 Second overtone frequency
antinodes is /2.
Hence frequencies of the fundamental tone and the
10. Vibration of air columns
overtones are given by the relation
When two longitudinal waves of same frequency and n1 : n2 : n3 ..........= 1 : 3 : 5........
amplitude travel in a medium in opposite directions then
10.2VIBRATION OF AIR COLUMNS IN OPEN
by superposition; standing waves are produced. These
ORGAN PIPE :
waves are produced in air columns in cylindrical tube of
The tube which is open at both ends is called an
uniform diameter. These sound producing tubes are
open organ pipe. On blowing air at the open end, a
called organ pipes.
wave travel towards the other end from where it is
10.1VIBRATION OF AIR COLUMN IN CLOSED
reflected back. As the wave reaches the first end, it
ORGAN PIPE :
is reflected again. Thus two longitudinal waves
The tube which is closed at one end and open at the
travel in opposite direction to superpose and
other end is called closed organ pipe. On blowing air
produce stationary wave. Now the pipe is open at
at the open end, a wave travels towards closed end
both ends by which an antinode is formed at open
from where it is reflected towards open end. As the
end. Hence on blowing air at the open end
waves reaches open end, it is reflected again. So two
antinodes are formed at each end and nodes in the
longitudinal waves travel in opposite directions to

superpose and produce stationary waves. At the closed middle. If  is length of the pipe and 1 be the
end there is a node since particles does not have 
freedom to vibrate where as at open end there is an wavelength.
antinode because particles have greatest freedom to
Case A A N A N A N
vibrate. Hence on blowing air at the open end, the air
column vibrates forming antinode at free end and node
at closed end. If  is length of pipe and  is
Case B A A NA N A N A N
wavelength
N
In terms of displacement In term of pressure

174
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 Case A 
  = /2  = 2
v is velocity of sound in organ pipe
A scale
n1 = v/ = v/2 Fundamental frequency O

Case B 
 = 2/2  = 2/2 B C
Thus frequency n2 = v/
First overtone frequency
D
n2 = 2v/2
Sensitive flame
Hence frequencies of fundamental tone and
overtones are given by the relation Suppose destructive interference occurs at D for
n1 : n2 : n3.......= 1 : 2 : 3...... some position of C. If now tube C is moved so that
Note. interference condition is disturbed and again by
(1) A rod clamped at one end or a string fixed at one moving a distance x, destructive interference occurs
end is similar to vibration of closed end organ pipe. so that
(2) A rods clamped in the middle is similar to the 2x = 
vibration of open end organ pipe. similarly if the distance moved between successive
(3) If an open pipe is half submerged in water, it constructive and destructive interference is x then
becomes a closed organ pipe of length half that of 
2x =
open pipe i.e frequency remain same. 2
(4) At open ends in organ pipe antinode is slightly Now by having value of x, speed of sound is given
outside the pipe. So distance of antinode from open by
end is called end correction. Due to finite v = n
momentum of air particles the end correction was 11.2 KUNDT’S TUBE : It is a tube used to determine
done by which speed of sound in different gases. It consists of a
x glass tube in which a small quantity of lycopodium
powder is spread. The tube is rotated so that powder
starts slipping. Now rod CD is rubbed at end D so
L that stationary waves form. The disc C vibrates so
that air column also vibrates with the frequency of
the rod. The piston P is adjusted so that frequency
v v of air column become same as that of rod. So
c = and O =
4(L  0.6r ) 2(L  1.2r ) resonance occurs and column is thrown into
Where r is radius of pipe. stationary waves. The powder sets into oscillations
11. Apparatus for determining speed of at antinodes while heaps of powder are formed at
sound nodes.
11.1 QUINCK’S TUBE :
It consists of two U shaped metal tubes. Sound
P M D
waves with the help of tuning fork are produced at C
A which travel through B & C and comes out at D
where a sensitive flame is present. Now the two
N N N N N
waves coming through different paths interfere and a/2
flame flares up. But if they are not in phase, r
destructive interference occurs and flame remains For rod r =
2
undisturbed.
r = 2r
and vr = nr = n (2r)
a
For air a =
2
a = 2a
and va = na = n.(2a)

175
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 vr  p
so = r (x = 0)
va a
r
vr = va. Resultant t1 t2
a pressure
(x = 0)
11.3 RESONANCE TUBE :
It is a closed organ pipe having air column of
variable length. If the frequency of a tuning fork is
same as the frequency of vibration of air column in
the tube then intensity of sound becomes maximum. Intensity
This is said to be the condition of resonance.
The frequency is given by
n
Thus frequency of variation of amplitude =
 2
n1  n 2
=
2
(2n  1)v We can explain the formation of beats graphically also.
 =
4 Ist figure shows the variation of pressure as a function
(2n  1)v of time at x = 0. At t = 0, two waves produce a change
or  =
in pressure by which phase different grows. At time t1
4v
Here frequency is constant and length is variable. the two pressure changes becomes out of phase and the
When water level in resonance tube is lowered, it resultant becomes zero. At time t2 the phase difference
gives resonance with same frequency at different increases and hence the formation of beats occur.
length. frequency of variation of intensity 
On neglecting the end correction, if  is the  n = |n1 – n2| = Beat frequency
minimum length of pipe for resonance, then other 12.1 BEAT TIME PERIOD :
length for resonance are 3, 5, 7,.......... Time interval between two successive maxima or
If we include the end correction, if is minimum minima is called Beat time period (T).
length of pipe for resonance and x is end correction. 12.2 BEAT FREQUENCY :
Then other lengths of pipe for resonance are Number of beats per second is called Beat
(1 + x) : (2 + x) : (3 + x)....... = 1 : 3 : 5...... frequency. If frequency of parent waves are n1 and
12. Beats n2, then
When two sound waves of same amplitude travelling in Beat frequency = |n1 – n2|
same direction with different frequency superimpose, 1
Beats time period =
then intensity varies periodically with time. This effect | n1  n 2 |
is called Beats. Note :
Consider two sound waves of frequency n1 and n2
(i) The frequency n1  n 2 should not be very large
propagating in the same direction so we have
otherwise beats are not audible. It should be less
than 16 Hertz.
y1 = a sin (2n1t – kx)
(ii) Determination of unknown frequency with the help
y2 = a sin (2n2t – kx) of beats.
where n1 – n2 = n (a) If tuning fork of unknown frequency (n2)
By principle of superposition oscillates with tuning fork of known frequency
y = y1 + y2 (n1) producing n beats then n2 = n1n
= a [sin(2n1t – kx) + sin (2n2t – kx)] (b) If wax is applied to arm of tuning fork of
= a [sin{2(n2 +n)t – kx} + sin (2n2t – kx)] unknown frequency. Then its frequency
decreases. Hence it oscillate with tuning fork of
CD CD unknown frequency if
But sinC + sinD = 2sin   cos  
 2   2  (i) Beat frequency increases then n2 = n1 – n
y = [2a cos (nt)] sin [2n2t +nt – kx] (ii) Beat frequency decreases then n2 = n1 + n

176
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 (c) If arm of tuning fork of unknown frequency is (d) If n tuning fork are arranged in series that each
filed then its frequency increases. Hence it tuning fork produces N beats with the previous
oscillates with tuning fork of known frequency one and frequency of last tuning fork is P times
if of first tuning fork then frequency of first
(i) Beat frequency increases then n2 = n1 + n (n  1) N
tuning fork. =
(ii) Beat frequency decreases then n2 = n1 – n P 1

Doppler Effect  v 
The apparent change in frequency or wavelength n = n  
 v  vs 
observed by the observer when there is a relative motion
S vs O vO
between the source and the observer is known as
But here observer is going away from the source hence
Doppler’s effect.
apparent frequency from 2.2 is
Sound source is moving and observer is stationary:
(a) If source is moving towards stationary observer  v  vo 
n = n  
 v   v 
Apparent Frequency, n =   .n Substitute value of n’ from above, we get
 v  vs 
 v  vo 
 v  vs  n = n  
Apparent wavelength, ´ =     v – vs 
 v 
(b) When the sound source moves away from the observer  v  vs 
Apparent wavelength  =  
then apparent frequency  v  vo 
 v  v (b) If both source and observer are moving towards each
n =   n
other then
 v  vs  S O
n < n ; v + vs > v  v  vo   v  vs 
n = n   and  =   
 v  vs   v  vs   v  vo 
Apparent wavelength  =    S vs vO O
 v 
(c) If both source and observer are moving away from each
Sound source is stationary and observer is moving: other then
(a) If observer is moving towards stationary source
 v  vo   v  vo   v  vs 
Apparent Frequency, n = n   n = n   and  =   
 v 
 v  vs   v  vo 
n > n v + vo > v vO O S vs
 v  (d) If the observer is approaching towards the receding
Apparent wavelength  =   
source
 v  vo 
(b) When the observer moves away from the sound source  v  vo   v  vs 
n = n   and  =   
then apparent frequency  v  vs   v  vo 
 v  vo  vs S v0 O
n = n  
 v  Note:
(1) If the medium is moving in the direction of sound
 n < n  v – vo < v
with velocity vm then its velocity is added to the
 v  velocity of sound i.e. (v + vm)
Apparent wavelength  =   
 v  vo  (2) If the medium is moving in the direction opposite to
Both the sound source and observer are moving: that of sound with velocity vm, then the velocity
There are four cases under which apparent frequency becomes (v – vm).
i.e.
(a) Suppose the source and observer both are moving with 3. Doppler's effect in reflection of
velocities vs and vo in the direction of sound. sound(Echo)
Now if only the source were moving than from 2.1 we When the sound is reflected from the reflector the
have observer receives two notes one directly from the source

177
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 and other from the reflector. If the two frequencies are observer. The waves travelling from source proceeds
different then superposition of these waves result in towards observer with wavelength.
beats and by the beat frequency we can calculate speed v
= source observer
of the source. If the source is at rest and reflector is 
moving towards the source with speed u, then apparent Now the source starts moving with uniform acceleration
frequency heard by reflector a towards the observer. The wavelength of the waves
vu heard by observer decreases. The source travel a
n1 =  n
 v  distance of ½ aT2 so that the new wavelength becomes
Now this frequency n1 acts as a source so that apparent  =  – ½ aT2
frequency received by observer is Hence the apparent frequency,
v v
 v   v  vu = =
n2 = n1   =  × n ´  – aT 2
1
vu vu  v  2
vu v v
n2 = n   If u < v = =
vu v 1 1
2 2 v –a
– .a.  2 2
 u   u  1  2 
n 2 = n 1   1  
 v  v 2 2 v
 =
2
 2u  2 v – a
 u
 n 1    n 1   5. Doppler's effect in SHM
 v  v
Beat frequency n = n2 – n Consider a particle executing simple harmonic motion.
u The observer is situated at some distance from the
S particle in the plane of vibration. While performing
V SHM, once a particle moves away from the source so
that the frequency heard by the observer is
R
v
V  = 
v  vs
S where vs is the velocity of source (particle).
 2u  v  n  In the second case the source approaches the observer so
n =   n  u =  
 v 2 n  that apparent frequency is
Note : When source and observer are not moving in the v
 = 
same straight line. v – vs
v v Now the frequency width = – 
v v
=  –  
v – vs v  vs
 
S  v(v  vs ) – v(v – vs ) 
vs'cos  vs'cos  O    
Resolve the velocities of source and observer along  v 2 – vs2 
line joining them 2v vs
if vs = velocity of source  
v2 – vs2
v0 = velocity of observer
then vs cos  = component of velocity of source
along line joining them 6. Doppler's effect in kinematics 
vs cos  = component of velocity of observer along Consider that source and observer are moving in the
line joining them same direction. The source is moving with velocity us
4. Doppler's effect when source is and acceleration a such that
accelerating towards observer vs = us + at
Consider a source which is emitting a sound of ss = ust + ½ at2
frequency . It is placed at a large distance from the

178
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 The sound is emitted by the source at time t which is
heard by the observer is
vo = uo + at´
so = uot + ½ at’2
Therefore the sound travels a distance ss– so and takes
time (t – t) to travel this distance.
8. Conditions when doppler's effect is not
ss – so = (t – t)v
observed for sound waves
where v is the speed of the sound in air accelerating towards observer
(a) When the source of sound and observer both are at
s –s
t = t´ – s o rest then Doppler effect is not observed.
v (b) When the source and observer both are moving with
From this velocity of source and observer can be found same velocity in same direction.
out. So the observed frequency (c) When the source and observer are moving mutually
v  vo in perpendicular directions.
n = no
v  vs (d) When the medium only is moving.
7. Doppler's effect at high speed (e) When the distance between the source and observer
is constant.
When speed of the source or observer becomes equal or
greater than that of sound then the formula of Doppler’s 9. Doppler's effect in light
effect fails. The velocity of light in free space is independent of the
(a) If the speed of the source or observer is comparable motion of the source or observer and is a universal
to the speed of sound then wave does not propagate constant given by c = 3 × 108 m/s. Thus the doppler’s
at normal phase velocity and its shape also changes effect in light depends only upon the relative motion of
with time so this effect does not succeed. the light source and the observer and it does not matter
(b) If the speed of the source or the observer is greater which one is moving. Hence Doppler’s effect in light is
than speed of sound then two conditions occur symmetrical.
(i) If speed of the source is greater than speed of 1 VC
 =
sound then source goes ahead of the sound  v2 
waves and Doppler’s effect would not take 1   2 
place. c 
(ii) If speed of the observer is greater than speed of v
= .
sound then in the condition when observer is c
moving away from the source, the sound waves v
will never reach the observer and Doppler’s   = .
c
effect would not take place. Hence frequency increases and wavelength
(iii) When speed of source is greater than speed of decreases by which spectral line shifts towards blue
sound, it is called supersonic speed and ratio end of the spectrum. This is known as Blue shift.
 
vs
v is mach number. So a conical wave front
10. Applications of doppler's effect
of high energy pressure waves are continuously (a) To determine the width of spectral line.
produced. These are referred as shock waves (b) To determine the velocity of stars and galaxies.
which produces a sonic boom of sound when (c) To determine the frequency of tuning fork.
intercepted. Hence shock waves are generated (d) To determine the speed of rotation of sun.
continuously till vs > v. (e) In the discovery of saturn rings and twin stars.
(f) In E.C.G.

179
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 HOME ASSIGNMENT
1. An observer is standing at the bank of sea and finds that (A) 340 Hz (B) 510 Hz
54 waves are reaching the bank per minute. If the (C) 42.5 Hz (D) none of these
wavelength of waves is 10 metre then their speed will be: 10. A person, standing between two parallel hills fires a gun.
(A) 3 m/s (B) 9 m/s He hears the first echo after 1.5 sec and second after 2.5
(C) 332 m/s (D) zero sec. if speed of sound is 332 m/s, calculate the distance
2. The distance between two particles on a string is between the hills. When will he hear the third echo :
10cm. If the frequency of wave propagating in it is (A) 4 sec (B) 5 sec
400 Hz and its speed is 100m/s then the phase (C) 6.5 sec (D) 9 sec
difference between the particles will be – 11. In a plane progressive harmonic wave particles speed
(A) 0.8 π radian (B) 0.4 π radian is always less than the wave speed if
(C) 0.2 π radian (D) π radian (A) amplitude of wave is less then λ/2π
3. If the adiabatic constants for helium and hydrogen (B) amplitude of wave is greater than λ/2π
gases at the same temperature are 5/3 and 7/5 (C) amplitude of wave is less than λ
respectively, then the ratio of velocity of sound in (D) amplitude of wave is greater than λ/π
these gases will be – 12. The amplitude of wave disturbance propagation in a
(A) 5:√42 (B) √42 : 5 positive x –axis is given by y = at t = 0 and y =
(C) 5 : 42 (D) 42 : 5
4. The frequency of tuning fork is 384 m/s and velocity ( )
at t = 2s, where x and y are in metres. The
of sound in air is 352 m/s. Find how far the sound shape of the disturbance does not change during the
has transverse while the fork completes 36 vibrations propagation. The velocity of the wave is :
(A) 11 m (B) 22m (A) 1 m/s (B) 0.5 m/s
(C) 33 m (D) 44 m (C) 2 m/s (D) 4 m/s
5. Speed of transverse wave in a string of density 13. The linear density of a vibrating string is 1.3 x 10-4
100 kg/m3 and area of cross –section 10mm2 under a kg/m. A transverse wave is propagating on the string
tension of 103 N is: and is described by the equation y = 0.021 sin
(A) 100 m/s (B) 1000 m/s (x+30t) where x and y are in meters and t in seconds.
(C) 200 m/s (D) 2000 m/s What is the tension in the string?
6. A string of length L and mass M hangs freely from a (A) 110 N (B) 220 N
fixed point. Then the velocity of transverse waves (C) 117 N (D) 190 N
along the string at a distance x from the free end is : 14. A transverse wave is described by the equation y = y0
(A) 𝑔𝑙 (B) 𝑔𝑥 sin 2π 𝑓𝑡 − . The maximum particle velocity is
(C) gL (D) gx equal to four times the wave velocity if :
7. A man on the ground finds that when, he sees a jet
(A) 𝜆 = (B) 𝜆 =
plane just over his head, the sound is heard at an angle
of 300 with the vertical from his left. If the velocity of (C) λ = πy0 (D) λ = 2πy0
sound is v, the velocity of jet plane must be : 15. A is singing a note and at the same time B is singing
(A) v/2 (B) 2v a note with exactly one –eight the frequency of note
√
of A. The energies of two sounds are equal, the
(C) (D) amplitude of note of B is :
√
8. Elevation of a cloud is 600 above the horizon. A (A) same as that of A
thumber is heard 8 sec after the observation of (B) twice as that of A
lighting. The speed of sound is 330 m/s. The vertical (C) four times as that of A
height of cloud from the ground is : (D) eight times as that of A
(A) 8 x 330 m (B) 8 x 330 sin 600 m 16. When a closed pipe is suddenly opened then the
(C) 8 x 330 cos 600 m (D) 8 x 330 tan 600 m second overtone of closed pipe and first overtone of
9. Two pipes of length 2m each are taken. One is closed open pipe differ by 100 Hz. The fundamental
at one end and other is open at both ends. The speed frequency of closed pipe will be –
of sound in air is 340 m/s. The frequency of which (A) 200 Hz (B) 100 Hz
both can resonate is : (C) 300 Hz (D) 400 Hz
180
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
17. An open and a closed pipe have same length. The (C) remain constant
ratio of frequencies of their nth overtone is : (D) may increase or decrease
(A) (B)
( ) 26. A fork has frequency 2% more than the standard fork
and B has a frequency 3% less than the frequency of
(C) (D) same standard fork. The forks A and B when
18. The first resonance length for a closed pipe is 60cm sounded together produce 6 beats/sec. The frequency
then the second resonance position will be obtained at of fork A is :
(A) 180 cm (B) 60cm (A) 116.4 Hz (B) 120 Hz
(C) 120 cm (D) 30 cm (C) 122.4 Hz (D) 238.8 Hz
19. In a resonance column, first and second resonances 27. Tuning fork X of frequency 258 Hz gives 8 beats/sec
are obtained at depths 22.7 cm and 70.2 cm with tuning fork Y. When Y’s prongs are cut a little
respectively. The third resonance will be obtained at and they are sounded again, the number of beats
a depth remain in the same. The original frequency of y was :
(A) 117.7 cm (B) 92.9 cm (A) 250 Hz (B) 258 Hz
(C) 115.5 cm (D) 113.5 cm (C) 264 Hz (D) 266 Hz
20. If λ1, λ2 and λ3 are the wavelengths of the waves 28. Two sounding bodies produce progressive waves given
giving resonance with the fundamental, first and by y1 = 4 sin 400 πt and y2 = 3 sin 404 πt are situated
second overtones respectively of a closed organ pipe. very near to the ears of a person who will near :
Then the ratio of wavelengths λ1:λ2:λ3 is (A) 2 beats/sec with intensity ratio 4/3 between
(A) [Link] (B) 1: : maxima and minima
(C) [Link] (D) [Link] (B) 2 beats/sec with intensity ratio 49/1 between
21. For a certain organ pipe, three successive resonance maxima and minima
frequencies are observed at 425, 595 and 765 Hz (C) 4 beats/sec intensity ratio 7/2 between maxima
respectively. Taking the speed of sound in the air to and minima
be 340 meter per second. Explain whether the pipe is (D) 4 beats/sec with intensity ratio 4/3 between
(A) closed at one end (B) open at both ends maxima and minima
(C) closed at both ends (D) none of these 29. A tuning fork vibrating with a sonometer wire of 20cm
22. Two tuning forks A and B produce 6 beats/sec. The length, produces 5 beats/sec. The beat frequency does
fork A is in unison with a closed pipe of length 15cm not change if the length of the wire is changed to 21cm.
and fork B is in unison with an open pipe of length What is the frequency of tuning fork in Hertz?
30.5cm. The frequencies of these forks are respectively (A) 200 Hz (B) 205 Hz
(A) 366 Hz and 372 Hz (B) 366 Hz and 360 Hz (C) 210 Hz (D) 220 Hz
(C) 360 Hz and 354 Hz (D) 354 Hz and 348 Hz 30. A plane of sound travelling in air is incident upon a
23. The speed of sound wave in a gas, in which two water surface. Calculate the critical angle for total
waves of wavelengths 1.0 m and 1.02 m produce 6 internal reflection from air to water, assuming Snell’s
beats per second is law to hold. Speed of sound in air = 350 m/s, speed of
(A) 350 m/s (B) 306m/s sound in water = 1400 m/s
(A) sin  0.5 (B) sin  0.25 
1 1
(C) 380 m/s (D) 410 m/s
24. A source of frequency 10 kHz when vibrated over
(C) sin  0.75 
1
(D) None of these
the mouth of a closed organ pipe is in unison at 300
K. The beats produced per second when temperature 31. A thin plane membrane separates hydrogen at 70C
rises by 1 K is (ignore length vibration) from hydrogen at 470C, both being at same pressure.
(A) 30 Hz (B) 13.33 Hz If a collimated sound beam travelling from cooler gas
(C) 16.67 Hz (D) 40 Hz makes an angle of incidence 300 at the membrane,
25. A closed organ pipe and an open organ pipe of same what is the angle of refraction?
length produce four beats in their fundamental mode (A) r = sin-1 (B) r = sin-1
when sounded together. If length of the open organ
pipe is increased, then the number of beats will (C) r = cos-1 (D) r = cos-1
(A) increase
(B) decrease
181
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
32. Two speakers connected to the same source of fixed (C) if vs<<V where V is speed of sound
frequency are placed 2m apart in a box. A sensitive
(D) if vs<<V where V is speed of sound
microphone placed at a distance of 0.4m from their mid
–point along the perpendicular bisector shows 38. Two tuning forks with natural frequency 340 Hz each
maximum response. The box is slowly rotated till the move relative to a stationary observer. One fork moves
speakers are in line with the microphone. The distance away from the observer, while the other moves towards
between the mid –point of the speakers and the him at the same speed. The observer hears beats of
microphone remains unchanged exactly 5 maximum frequency 3Hz. Find the speed of the tuning forks
responses are observed in the microscope in doing this. (A) 1.9 m/s (B) 1.5 m/s
Calculate the wavelength of sound wave (C) 2.0 m/s (D) 3.0 m/s
(A) 0.4m (B) 0.6m 39. A car travels at a speed of 20m/s towards a high wall.
(C) 0.8m (D) 1.0m The driver sounds a horn of frequency 124 sec-1. If
33. In a large room a person receives direct sound waves velocity of sound in air is 330 m/s, the frequency of
from a source 120 m away from him. He also receives reflected sound heard by driver is :
waves from the same source which reach him after (A) 140 Hz (B) 280 Hz
being reflected from the 25m high ceiling at a point half (C) 148 Hz (D) 109 Hz
way between them. For which wavelengths will these 40. A train has just completed a U –curve in a track
two sound waves interfere constructively? which is a semi –circle. The engine is at the forward
end of the semi –circular part of the track while the
(A) 20, , (B) 10, ,
last carriage is at the rear end of the semi –circular
(C) 30, , (D) none of these track. The engine blows a whistle of frequency 200
34. A long cylindrical tube carries a highly polished piston Hz. Speed of sound is 340 m/s and the speed of train
and has a side opening. A tuning fork of frequency v is is 30 m/s. Then the apparent frequency as observed
sounded at the open end of the tube. The intensity of the by the passenger in the middle of the train is :
sound heard by the listener changes if the piston is (A) 181 Hz (B) 188 Hz
moved in or out. At a particular position of the piston (C) 200 Hz (D) 219 Hz
he hears a maximum sound. When the piston is moved 41. A train is blowing a whistle moves with a constant
through a distance of 9cm, the intensity of sound velocity v away from an observer on the ground. The
becomes minimum in time. If the speed of sound is 360 ratio of the natural frequency of whistle to that
m/s, the value of v is measured by the observer is found to be 1.2. If the
(A) 129.6 Hz (B) 500 Hz train is at rest and the observer moves away from it at
(C) 1000 Hz (D) 2000 Hz the same velocity, the ratio would be given by :
35. A sound wave of wavelength 0.4m enters the tube S. (A) 0.91 (B) 1.25
The smallest radius r of the circular segment to hear (C) 1.52 (D) 1.02
minimum at detector D must be 42. Two cars are moving on two perpendicular roads
(A) 1.75m (B) 0.175 m towards a crossing with uniform speeds of 72 km/hr and
(C) 0.93 m (D) 9.3 m 36 km/hr. In first car blows horn of frequency 280 Hz,
36. A tuning fork of frequency 90 Hz is sound and then the frequency of horn heard by the driver of second
moved towards a stationary observer with a velocity car when the line joining the cars makes an angle of 450
equal to one –tenth the velocity of sound. Calculate with the roads, will be (velocity of sound = 340 m/s)
the frequency of the note heard by the observer. (A) 321 Hz (B) 298 Hz
(A) 150 Hz (B) 100 Hz (C) 289 Hz (D) 280 Hz
(C) 75 Hz (D) 50 Hz 43. The noise level in ordinary conversation is
37. A train is approaching with speed vs. It gives a (A) 20 dB (B) 65 dB
whistle of natural frequency v. The change in (C) 100 dB (D) 120 dB
frequency when train passes the observer is 44. A beam of sound is 106 times as intense as that with
minimum audible intensity. The loudness of beam is
(A) if vs<<V where V is speed of sound
thus :
(B) if vs<<V where V is speed of sound (A) 106 dB (B) 6 dB
(C) 60 dB (D) 0.6 dB
182
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
45. The intensity of a sound gets reduced by 20% on (A) 0.72 metre (B) 0.18 metre
passing through a slab. The reduction in intensity on (C) 0.12 metre (D) 0.36 metre
passage through two consecutive slabs, is : 54. A transverse wave is described by the equation
(A) 40% (B) 36% y = y0 sin 2π [ƒt –X/λ]. The maximum particle
(C) 30% (D) 50% velocity is equal to four times the wave velocity if
46. The effect of sound pulse lasts on the ear for 0.1 (A) λ = π y0/4 (B) λ = π y0/2
second. Thus for a person to hear the echo of a sharp (C) λ = π y0 (D) λ = 2π y0
sound, the minimum distance of the reflector in terms 55. If u represents the velocity of a supersonic aeroplane
of speed of sound v is and v the velocity of sound, then the Mach number is
(A) v/10 (B) v/20 (A) u/V (B) V/u
(C) v/5 (D) v/40 (C) u+V (D) u –V
47. A man standing symmetrically between two cliffs claps 56. Two wires of equal radii, one of copper and another
his hands and starts hearing a series of echoes at of aluminium, are stretched by equal tensions. The
intervals of 1 sec. Since the speed of sound in air is 340 speed of transverse waves is
m/s, the distance between the parallel cliffs must be – (A) more in copper wire
(A) 340 metres (B) 680 metres (B) more in aluminium wire
(C) 1020 metres (D) 170 metres (C) same in both wires
48. A man standing unsymmetrically between two (D) dependent upon length of the wire
parallel cliffs claps his hands and starts hearing series 57. If the wavelength of a sound wave in a medium is
of echoes at intervals of 1 second. If the speed of reduced by 50%, then the percent change in its
sound in air is 340 m/s then the distance between the frequency is
two parallel cliffs, is (A) – 50% (B) – 100%
(A) 340 metres (B) 510 metres (C) + 100% (D) + 50%
(C) 680 metres (D) 170 metres 58. A change in temperature affects which property of
49. If C0 and C denote the sound velocity and root mean sound?
square velocity of molecules in a gas, then (A) frequency (B) amplitude
(A) C0> C (C) wavelength (D) loudness
(B) C0 = C 59. If two tuning forks A and B are sounded together
(C) C0 = C (γ/3)1/2 they produce 4 beats per seconds A is then slightly
(D) C0 and C are not related loaded with wax, they produce two beats when
50. If amplitude of waves at distance r from a point sounded again. The frequency of A is 256. The
source is A. The amplitude at a distance 2r will be – frequency of B will be
(A) 2A (B) A (A) 250 (B) 252
(C) A/2 (D) A/4 (C) 260 (D) 262
51. A person places his ear at the end of a long steel 60. Sound waves from a whistle of frequency 1100 Hz
pipe. He hears two distinct sounds at an interval of reach a point by two different paths. When the paths
0.5 second when another person hammers at the differ by 15 cms or 45 cms there is silence at that
other end of the pipe. If the speed of sound in metal point. The speed of sound is
and air are 3630 m/sec and 330 m/sec respectively, (A) 1100 x 15 cm/sec (B) 1100 x 30 cm/sec
then the distance between the two persons is (C) 1100 x 45 cm/sec (D) 1100 x 60 cm/sec
(A) 363 metres (B) 181.5 metres 61. A number of tuning forks are arranged in the order of
(C) 90.75 metres (D) 1815 metres increasing frequency and any two successive tuning
52. The minimum intensity of audibility of sound is 10-12 forks produce 4 beats per second, when sounded
watt per metre2. The intensity of sound is 10-9 watt per together. If the last tuning fork has a frequency
metre2. The intensity level of this sound in decibels is octave higher than that of the first tuning fork and the
(A) 1000 (B) 100 frequency of first tuning fork is 256 Hz, then the
(C) 30 (D) 3 number of tuning fork is
53. The distance between two points differing in phase (A) 63 (B) 64
by 600 on a wave having a wave velocity 360 m/sec (C) 65 (D) 66
and frequency 500 Hz is

183
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
62. A vibrating tuning fork of frequency n is placed near the 68. A tuning fork vibrating with a sonometer having 20
open end of a long cylindrical tube. The tube has a side cm wire produces 5 beats per second. The beat
opening and is fitted with a movable reflecting piston. frequency does not change if the length of the wire is
As the piston is moved through 8.75 cms, the intensity changed to 21 cm. The frequency of the tuning –fork
of sound changes from a maximum to minimum. If the (in hertz) must be
speed of sound is 350 metre per second, then n is (A) 200 (B) 210
(C) 205 (D) 215
69. When the string of the sonometer of length l between
the bridges vibrated in the second overtone, the
(A) 500 Hz (B) 1000 Hz amplitude of vibration is maximum at
(C) 2000 Hz (D) 4000 Hz (A) l/2
63. Two periodic waves of intensities I1 and I2 pass (B) l/4 and 3l/4
through a region at the same time in the same (C) l/6, 3l/6 and 5l/6
direction. The sum of the maximum and minimum (D) l/8, 3l/8, 5l/8 and 7l/8
intensities is 70. Two identical sonometer wires have a fundamental
(A) (√I1 + √I2)2 (B) (√I1 - √I2)2 frequency of n Hz when kept under tension T. Then
(C) I1 + I2 (D) 2(I1 + I2) the fractional increase in tension of one wire given
64. A source of sound moves towards an observer with a Δn beats when both wire vibrate together is
velocity equal of that of sound. If the source (A) ΔT/T = 2Δn/n (B) ΔT/T = Δn/n
produced n waves per second, then the observer (C) ΔT/T = Δn/2n (D) ΔT/T = -Δn/n
moving with the source receives 71. Three resonant frequencies of the sonometer wire are
(A) n waver per second 90 Hz, 150 Hz and 210 Hz. If the length of the string
(B) 2n waver per second is one metre then the speed of transverse waves in the
(C) zero waver per second wire is
(D) n/2 waver per second (A) 30 m/sec (B) 60 m/sec
65. A train has just completed a U –Curve in a track which (C) 90 m/sec (D) 120 m/sec
is a semi –circle. The engine is at the forward end of the 72. An open end organ pipe is excited to support the
semi circular part of the track while the last carriage is second overtone. It is found that air in the pipe has
at the rear end of the semi circular track. The driver (A) three nodes and three antinodes
blows a whistle of frequency 200 Hz. Velocity of sound (B) three nodes and four antinodes
is 340 m/sec. Then the apparent frequency as observed (C) four nodes and three antinodes
by a passenger in the middle of the train, when the (D) four nodes and four antinodes
speed of the train is 30 m/sec is 73. The end correction of a resonance column is 1.0 cm.
(A) 219 Hz (B) 188 Hz If the shorter length resonating with a tuning fork is
(C) 200 Hz (D) 181 Hz 15.0 cms, the next resonating length is
66. If n1, n2, n3 ……………are the frequencies of (A) 31 cms (B) 45 cms
segments of a stretched string, the frequency n of the (C) 46 cms (D) 47 cms
string is given by 74. Air is blown at mouth of a tube (length equal to) 25
(A) n = n1 +n2 +n3…….. cms and diameter equal to 2 cm, open at both ends as
(B) n = √(n1 x n2 x n3 ….) shown in the adjoining diagram. Velocity of sound is
(C) 1/n (B) 1/n1 + 1/n2 +1/n3 + …. 330 metre per second. The sound emitted by the tube
(D) none of these will have all the frequencies in the group
67. A stretched string of one metre length,fixed at both
ends, having a mass of 5 x 10-4 kg. is under a tension
of 20 newton. It is plucked at a point situated at 25
cm from one end. The stretched string would vibrate (A) 660, 1320, 2640 Hz (B) 660, 1000, 3300 Hz
with a frequency of (C) 302, 684,1320 Hz (D) 330, 990, 1690 Hz
(A) 400 Hz (B) 100 Hz
(C) 200 Hz (D) 256 Hz

184
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
75. A pipe closed at one end open at the other end,
resonates with sound waves of frequency 135 Hz and
also 165 Hz but not with any wave of frequency
intermediate between these two. Then the frequency
(A) (B)
of the fundamental tone is
(A) 30 Hz (B) 15 Hz
(C) 60 Hz (D) 7.5 Hz
76. A source of frequency 10kHz when vibrated over the
mouth of a closed organ pipe is in unison at 300 K. (C) (D)
The beats produced when temperature rises by 1K is
83. Equations of two progressive waves at a certain point
(A) 30 Hz (B) 13.33 Hz
in a medium are given by y1 = a sin (ωt + Φ1) and
(C) 16.67 Hz (D) 40 Hz
y2 = a sin (ω t + Φ2). If amplitude and time period of
77. If λ1, λ2 and λ3 are the wavelengths of the waves
resultant wave formed by the superposition of these
giving resonance with the fundamental, first and
two waves is same as that of both the waves, then
second overtones respectively of a closed organ pipe.
Φ1 –Φ2 is
Then the ratio of wavelengths λ1 :λ2 :λ3 is
(A) π/3 (B) 2π/3
(A) [Link] (B) 1:1/3:1/5 (C) π/6 (D) π/4
(C) [Link] (D) [Link]
84. Velocity of sound in an open organ pipe is 330 m/s.
78. An open and a closed pipe have same length. The
The frequency of wave is 1.1 kHz and the length of
ratio of frequencies of their nth overtone is
tube is 30 cm. To which harmonic does this frequency
(A) (n+1)/(2n+1) (B) 2(n+1)/(2n+1)
corresponds
(C) n/(2n+1) (D) (n+1)/2n
(A) 2nd (B) 3rd
79. A closed organ pipe and an open organ pipe of same
(C) 4th (D) 5th
length produce four beats in their fundamental mode
85. When an aeroplane attains a speed higher than the
when sounded together. If length of the open organ
velocity of sound in air, a loud bang is heard. This is
pipe is increased, then the number of beats will
because:
(A) increase
(A) it explodes
(B) decrease
(B) it produces a shock wave which is received as the
(C) remain constant
bang
(D) may increase or decrease
(C) the normal engine noises undergo a Doppler shift
80. Two pipes have each of length 2m. One is closed at
to generate the bang
one end and the other is open at both ends. The speed
(D) its wings vibrate so violently that the bang is heard
of sound in air is 340 m/s. The frequency at which
86. A soldier sets his watch on hearing a distant siren.
both can resonate is
His watch will record :
(A) 340 Hz (B) 510 Hz
(A) less than actual time (B)more than actual time
(C) 42.5 Hz (D) none of these
(C) perfectly correct time (D) nothing can be said
81. Two sound sources are moving in opposite directions
87. The velocity of sound is generally greater in solids
with velocities v1 and v2 (v1>v2). Both are moving
than in gases because:
away from a stationary observer. The frequency of
(A) the density of solids is high but the elasticity is low
both the sources is 900 Hz. What is the value of v1 –
(B) the density of solids is high and the elasticity is high
v2 so that the beat frequency observed by the
(C) the density and elasticity of solids are low
observer is 6 Hz. Speed of sound v = 300 m/s. Given
(D) the density of solids is low but the elasticity is high
that v1 and v2<<v
88. The equation of a progressive wave is given by:
(A) 1 m/s (B) 2 m/s
y = 4 sin[π (t/5 – x/9) +π/6]where x and y are in
(C) 3 m/s (D) 4 m/s
metre. Then which of the following is correct:
82. An observer starts moving with uniform acceleration a
(A) v = 5cm (B) λ = 18 m
towards a stationary sound source of frequency ƒ0. As
(C) A = 0.04 cm (D) ƒ = 50 Hz
the observer approaches the source, the apparent
frequency ƒ heard by the observer varies with time t as

185
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
89. A man on the ground finds that when he sees a jet plane frequency n. The entire tube is then heated carefully
just over his head, the sound is heard at an angle of 300 so that at equilibrium temperature its length change
with the vertical from his left. If the velocity of sound is by l. If the change in velocity V of sound is v, the
v, the velocity of jet plane must be : resonance will now be produced by tuning fork of
(A) v/2 (B) 2v frequency :
(C) √3v/2 (D) (2/√3) v V u V u
(A) (B)
90. A man stands in a narrow, steep –sided valley. When 4( L  l ) 4( L  l )
he shouts he hears two echoes, one after 1 sec and
V u V u
other after 2 sec. If the velocity of sound in air is 330 (C) (D)
m/s, the width of the valley is 4( L  l ) 4( L  l )
(A) 330 m (B) 495 m 98. An open pipe 20 cm long resonates, when filled with
(C) 660 m (D) 990 m oxygen with a given tuning fork. Find the length of
91. The minimum distance of a reflector to hear the echo of the open pipe filled with hydrogen which will be in
monosyllabic sound is (speed of sound is 330 m/s): resonance with the same tuning fork. Velocity of
(A) 16.5 m (B) 33 m sound in oxygen is 320 m/s and velocity of sound in
(C) 165 m (D) 330 m hydrogen is 1280 m/s.
92. Two waves having intensities in the ratio 9:1 produce (A) 20 m (B) 80 m
interference. The ratio of maximum to (C) 100 m (D) 60 m
minimumintensities is equal to: 99. Velocity of sound in air is 320 m/s. A pipe closed at
(A) 10:8 (B) 9:1 one end has a length 1m. Neglecting end correction,
(C) 4:1 (D) 2:1 the air column in the pipe can resonate for frequency:
93. Two tuning forks have frequencies 450 Hz and 454 Hz. (A) 80 Hz only
On sounding these forks together the time interval (B) 240 Hz only
between successive maximum intensities will be – (C) 320 Hz only
(A) ¼ sec (B) ½ sec (D) 80 Hz, 240 Hz and 400 Hz
(C) 1 sec (D) 4 sec 100. An echo repeats two syllables. If the speed of sound
94. A string of length 0.4 m and mass 10-2 kg is tightly is 330 m/s, then the minimum distance of reflecting
clamped at its ends. The tension in the string is 1.6 surface is
N. Identical wave pulses are produced at one end at (A) 16.5 m (B) 33.0 m
equal intervals of time ∆t. The minimum value of ∆t (C) 66.0 m (D) 330 m
which allows constructive interference between 101. When two tuning forks A and B are sounded
successive pulses is: together x beats/sec are heard. When one prong of B
(A) 0.05 s (B) 0.10 s is loaded with a little wax, the number of beats/sec
(C) 0.20 s (D) 0.40 s decreases. If the frequency of A is n, the frequency of
95. A pipe closed at one end and open at the other B is:
resonates with a sound wave of frequency 135 Hz (A) n +x (B) n – x
2
and also 165 Hz but not with any wave of frequency (C) n –x (D) n –2x
intermediate between these two. Find the 102. An object of specific gravity ρ is hung from a thin
fundamental frequency : steel wire. The fundamental frequency for the
(A) 15 Hz (B) 20 Hz transverse standing waves in the wire in 300 Hz. The
(C) 25 Hz (D) 10 Hz object is immersed in water, so that one –half of its
96. A cylindrical tube, open at both ends has a volume is submerged. The new fundamental
fundamental frequency f in air. The tube is dipped frequency in Hz is:
1 1
vertically in water so that half of it is in water. The
(A) 300 2   1  (B) 300  2  
2 2

fundamental frequency of air column is now:  2   2  1

   
(A) f/2 (B) 3f/4
(C) f (D) 2 f (C) 300 2   (D) 300 2   1 
   2 
97. A hollow metallic tube of length L and closed at one  2  1   
end produce resonance with a tuning fork of

186
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 Passage [103–106]: One of the strings of a Guitar lies 105. The maximum transverse velocity and maximum
along the x –axis when in equilibrium. The end of the transverse acceleration at point of maximum
string at x =0 (the bridge of the guitar) is tied down. An oscillation is:
incident sinusoidal wave travels the string in the x – (A) 4.15m/s, 1.15 x 104 m/s2
direction at 143 m/s with an amplitude 0.75 mm and a (B) 4.15 m/s, –1.15 x 104 m/s2
frequency of 440 Hz. This wave is reflected from the x (C) 1.15 m/s, 4.15 x 104 m/s2
=0 end (fixed end) and the super position of incident (D) 3.98 m/s, 1.35 x 104 m/s2
and reflected traveling waves forms a standing wave 106. The driver of a car approaching a vertical wall
103. The equation of the wave representing stationary notices that the frequency of the horn of his car
wave is : changes from 400 Hz to 450 Hz after being reflected
(A) 0.75 sin 19.3 x cos 880 πt from the wall. Assuming speed of sound to be 340
(B) (0.75 x 10-3) sin 19.3 x cos 880 πt m/s the speed of approach of car towards the wall is:
(C) 1.5 x 10-3 sin 19.3 x cos 880πt (A) 10 m/s (B) 20 m/s
(D) 1.50 x 10-3 sin 19.3 x cos 440 πt (C) 30 m/s (D) 40 m/s
104. The separation between the two nearest points on
the string that do not move at all is:
(A) 0.163 m (B) 0.325 m
(C) 0.202 m (D) 0.244 m
ANSWER KEY
1 B 28 B 55 A 82 A
2 A 29 B 56 B 83 B
3 A 30 B 57 C 84 A
4 C 31 A 58 C 85 B
5 B 32 A 59 B 86 A
6 B 33 D 60 B 87 B
7 A 34 C 61 C 88 B
8 B 35 B 62 B 89 A
9 D 36 B 63 D 90 B
10 A 37 A 64 C 91 B
11 A 38 B 65 C 92 C
12 B 39 A 66 C 93 A
13 C 40 C 67 C 94 B
14 B 41 B 68 C 95 A
15 D 42 B 69 C 96 C
16 B 43 B 70 B 97 A
17 B 44 C 71 B 98 B
18 A 45 B 72 D 99 D
19 D 46 B 73 D 100 C
20 B 47 A 74 A 101 A
21 A 48 B 75 B 102 A
22 B 49 C 76 C 103 C
23 B 50 C 77 B 104 A
24 C 51 B 78 B 105 A
25 D 52 C 79 D 106 B
26 C 53 C 80 D
27 A 54 B 81 B

187
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 WINDOW TO JEE / NEET
UNITS & DIMENSIONS

1. Expression for time in terms of G (universal gravitational constant), h (Planck constant) and c (speed of light)
is proportional to: [JEE (M) 2019]
Gh hc5
(A) (B)
c3 G
c3 Gh
(C) (D)
Gh c5
2. The pitch and the number of divisions, on the circular scale, for a given screw gauge are 0.5 mm and 100
respectively. When the screw gauge is fully tightened without any object, the zero of its circular scale lies 3
divisions below the mean line. The readings of the main scale and the circular scale, for a thin sheet, are 5.5
mm and 48 respectively, the thickness of this sheet is: [JEE (M) 2019]
(A) 5.755 m (B) 5.725 mm
(C) 5.740 m (D) 5.950 mm
–3
3. The density of a material in SI units is 128 kg m . In certain units in which the unit of length is 25 cm and the
unit of mass is 50 g, the numerical value of density of the material is: [JEE (M) 2019]
(A) 410 (B) 640
(C) 16 (D) 40
4. The diameter and height of a cylinder are measured by a meter scale to be 12.6 ± 0.1 cm and 34.2 ± 0.1 cm,
respectively. What will be the value of its volume in appropriate significant figures? [JEE (M) 2019]
(A) 4260 ± 80 cm3 (B) 4300 ± 80 cm3
3
(C) 4264.4 ± 81.0 cm (D) 4264 ± 81 cm3
x2  
5. The force of interaction between two atoms is given by F   exp    ; where x is the distance, k is the
  kt 
Boltzmann constant and T is temperature and  and  are two constants. The dimension of  is:
[JEE (M) 2019]
2 2 –2 2 –4
(A) M L T (B) M LT
(C) M0L2T–4 (D) MLT–2
6. If speed (V), acceleration (A) and force (F) are considered as fundamental units, the dimension of Young's
modulus will be: [JEE (M) 2019]
(A) V–2 A2F2 (B) V–4A2F
(C) V–4A–2F (D) V–2A2F–2
7. The least count of the main scale of a screw gauge is 1 mm. The minimum number of divisions on its circular
scale required to measure 5mm diameter of wire is: [JEE (M) 2019]
(A) 50 (B) 100
(C) 200 (D) 500
l
8. Let l, r, c and v represent inductance, resistance, capacitance and voltage, respectively. The dimension of
rcv
in SI units will be: [JEE (M) 2019]
(A) [LTA] (B) [LA–2]
(C) [A–1] (D) [LT2]
9. The relative error in the determination of the surface area of a sphere is . Then the relative error in the
determination of its volume is: [JEE (M) 2018]
3
(A)  (B) 
2
188
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 5 2
(C)  (D) 
2 3
10. The characteristic distance at which quantum gravitational effects are significant, the Planck length, can be
determined from a suitable combination of the fundamental physical constants G,  and c. Which of the
following correctly gives the Planck length? [JEE (M) 2018]
(A) G  2 c 3 (B) G 2 c
1/2
 G 
(C)   (D) G 1/ 2  2 c
 c 
11. The percentage errors in quantities P, Q, R and S are 0.5%, 1%, 1.5% and 5.5% respectively in the
P 2Q 2
measurement of a physical quantity A  . The maximum percentage error in the value of A will be:
RS
[JEE (M) 2018]
(A) 6.5 % (B) 8.5 %
(C) 6.0 % (D) 7.5 %
12. The relative uncertainty in the period of a satellite orbiting around the earth is 10–2. If the relative uncertainty
in the radius of the orbit is negligible, the relative uncertainty in the mass of the earth is:
[JEE (M) 2018]
(A) 6  10 –2
(B) 10 –2

(C) 2  10 –2
(D) 3  10–2
13. The density of a material in the shape of a cube is determined by measuring three sides of the cube and its
mass. If the relative errors in measuring the mass and length are respectively 1.5% and 1%, the maximum
error in determining the density is: [JEE (M) 2018]
(A) 3.5 % (B) 4.5 %
(C) 6 % (D) 2.5 %
14. The following observations were taken for determining surface tension T of water by capillary method:
Diameter of capillary, D = 1.25 × 10–2 m [JEE (M) 2017]
–2
rise of water, h = 1.45 × 10 m
rhg
Using g = 9.80 m/s2 and the simplified relation T   103 N/m, the possible error in surface tension is
2
closest to :
(A) 2.4 % (B) 10 %
(C) 0.15 % (D) 1.5 %
e2
15. A physical quantity of the dimensions of length that can be formed out of c, G and is [c is velocity of
4 0
light, G is universal constant of gravitation and e is charge]: [JEE (M) 2017]
1/ 2 1/ 2
 e2  1  e2 
(A) c 2 G  (B)  
 4 0  c 2  G 4 0 
1/2
1 e2 1  e2 
(C) G (D) 2 G 
c 4 0 c  4 0 

189
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 16. Consider an expanding sphere of instantaneous radius R whose total mass remains constant. The expansion is
such that the instantaneous density  remains uniform throughout the volume. The rate of fractional change in
 1 d 
density   is constant. The velocity v of any point on the surface of the expanding sphere is
  dt 
proportional to [JEE (M) 2017]
(A) R 3 (B) R
2 1
(C) (D)
R3 R
17. A person measures the depth of a well by measuring the time interval between dropping a stone and receiving
the sound of impact with the bottom of the well. The error in his measurement of time is T =
0.01 seconds and he measures the depth of the well to be L = 20 meters. Take the acceleration due to gravity g
= 10ms–2 and the velocity of sound is 300 ms–1. Then the fractional error in the measurement L
is closest to: [JEE (M) 2017]
(A) 0.2% (B) 3%
(C) 5% (D) 1%
18. A student measures the time period of 100 oscillations of a simple pendulum four times. That data set is 90 s,
91 s, 95 s and 92 s. If the minimum division in the measuring clock is 1 s, then the reported mean time should
be : [JEE (M) 2016]
(A) 92  5.0s (B) 92  1.8s
(C) 92  3s (D) 92  2 s
19. A screw gauge with a pitch of 0.5 mm and a circular scale with 50 divisions is used to measure the thickness
of a thin sheet of Aluminium. Before starting the measurement, it is found that when the two jaws of the screw
gauge are brought in contact, the 45th division coincides with the main scale line and that the zero of the main
scale is barely visible. What is the thickness of the sheet if the main scale reading is 0.5mm and the 25th
division coincides with the main scale line? [JEE (M) 2016]
(A) 0.80 mm (B) 0.70 mm
(C) 0.50 mm (D) 075 mm
L
20. The period of oscillation of a simple pendulum is T  2 . Measured value of L is 20.0 cm known to 1
g
mm accuracy and time for 100 oscillations of the pendulum is found to be 90s using a wrist watch of 1 s
resolution. The accuracy in the determination of g is: [JEE (M) 2015]
(A) 1% (B) 5%
(C) 2% (D) 3%
21. A student measured the diameter of a small steel ball using a screw gauge of least count 0.001 cm. The main scale
reading is 5 mm and zero of circular scale division coincides with 25 divisions above the reference level. If screw
gauge has a zero error of –0.004 cm, the correct diameter of the ball is: [NEET 2018]
(A) 0.521 cm (B) 0.525 cm
(C) 0.529 cm (D) 0.053 cm
e2
22. A physical quantity of the dimensions of length that can be formed out of c, G and is [c is velocity of
4 0
light, G is universal constant of gravitation and e is charge] [2017]
1/2 1/2
2  e2  1  e2 
(A) c G  (B)  
 4 0  c2  G 4 0 
1/2
1 e2 1  e2 
(C) G (D) 2 G 
c 4 0 c  4 0 
190
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
23. If energy (E), velocity (V) and time (T) are chosen as the fundamental quantities, the dimensional formula of
surface tension will be: [2015]
1 2 2 2
(A) [ EV T ] (B) [ EV T ]
2 1 3 2 1
(C) [ E V T ] (D) [ EV T ]
24. If dimensions of critical velocity vc of a liquid flowing through a tube are expressed as [ x  y r x ] , where
 ,  and r are the coefficients of viscosity of liquid, density of liquid and radius of the tube respectively, then
the values of x, y and z are given by : [2015 RS]
(A) –1, –1, 1 (B) –1, –1, –1
(C) 1, 1, 1 (D) 1, –1, –1
25. If force (F), velocity (V) and time (T) are taken as fundamental units, then the dimensions of mass are:
[2014]
(A) [ FVT 1 ] (B) [ FVT 2 ]
(C) [ FV 1T 1 ] (D) [ FV 1T ]

ANSWER KEY

Questions Answers Questions Answers

1 D 14 D
2 B 15 D
3 D 16 B
4 A 17 D
5 B 18 D
6 B 19 A
7 C 20 D
8 C 21 C
9 A 22 D
10 C 23 B
11 A 24 D
12 C 25 D
13 B

191
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 MOTION IN ONE DIMENSION

1. In a car race on straight road, car A takes a time t less than car B at the finish and passes finishing point with a
speed 'v' more than that of car B. Both the cars start from rest and travel with constant acceleration a1 and a2
respectively. Then 'v' is equal to [JEE (M) 2019]
a1  a2
(A) t (B) 2a1a2 t
2
2a1a2
(C) t (D) a1a2 t
a1  a2
2. A particle starts from the origin at time t = 0 and moves along the positive x-axis. The graph of velocity with
respect to time is shown in figure. What is the position of the particle at time t = 5s? [JEE (M) 2019]

(A) 6 m (B) 9 m
(C) 3 m (D) 10 m
3. A particle is moving along a circular path with a constant speed of 10 ms–1. What is the magnitude of the
change is velocity of the particle, when it moves through an angle of 60° around the centre of the circle?
[JEE (M) 2019]
(A) zero (B) 10 m/s
(C) 10 3 m/s (D) 10 2 m/s
  
4. A particle moves from the point 2.0iˆ  4.0 ˆj m , at t = 0, with an initial velocity 5.0iˆ  4.0 ˆj ms 1. It is 
acted upon by a constant force which produces a constant acceleration  4.0iˆ  4.0 ˆj  ms 2
. What is the
distance of the particle from the origin at time 2 s? [JEE (M) 2019]
(A) 2 0 2m (B) 10 2m
(C) 5 m (D) 15 m
5. A passenger train of length 60m travels at a speed of 80 km/hr. Another freight train of length 120 m travels at a
speed of 30 km/hr. The ratio of times taken by the passenger train to completely cross the freight train when: (i)
they are moving in the same direction, and (ii) in the opposite directions is: [JEE (M) 2019]
5 25
(A) (B)
2 11
3 11
(C) (D)
2 5
6. The velocity - time graphs of a car and a scooter are shown in the figure. (i) The difference between the
distance travelled by the car and the scooter in 15 s and (ii) the time at which the car will catch up with the
scooter are, respectively. [JEE (M) 2018]

(A) 112.5 m and 15 s (B) 337.5 m and 25 s

(C) 225.5 m and 10 s (D) 112.5 m and 22.5 s

192
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
7. A man in a car at location Q on a straight highway is moving with speed v. He decides to reach a point P in a
field at a distance d from the highway (point m) as shown in the figure. Speed of the car in the field is half to
that on the highway. What should be the distance RM, so that the time taken to reach P is minimum?
[JEE (M) 2018]

d d
(A) (B)
2 3
d
(C) (D) d
2
8. All the graphs below are intended to represent the same motion. One of them does it incorrectly. Pick it up.
[JEE (M) 2018]

(A) (B)

(C) (D)

9. A body is thrown vertically upwards. Which one of the following graphs correctly represent the velocity vs
time? [JEE (M) 2017]

(A) (B)

(C) (D)
10. Preeti reached the metro station and found that the escalator was not working. She walked up the stationary
escalator in time t1. On other days, if she remains stationary on the moving escalator, then the escalator takes
her up in time t2. The time taken by her to walk up on the moving escalator will be
[JEE (M) 2017]
t1t2 t1t2
(A) (B)
t2  t1 t2  t1
t t
(C) t1  t2 (D) 1 2
2

193
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 11. Two stones are thrown up simultaneously from the edge of a cliff 240m high with initial speed of 10 m/s and
40 m/s respectively. Which of the following graph best represents the time variation of relative position of the
second stone with respect to the first? Assume stones do not rebound after hitting the ground and neglect air
resistance, take (g = 10 m/s2) [JEE (M) 2015]

(A) (B)

(C) (D)
12. A toy car wit charge q moves on a frictionless horizontal plane surface under the influence of a uniform
 
electric field E . Due to the force qE , its velocity increases from 0 to 6 m/s in one second duration. At that
instant the direction of the field is reversed. The car continues to move for two more seconds under the
influence of this field. The average velocity and the average speed of the toy car between 0 to 3 seconds are
respectively [NEET 2018]
(A) 2 m/s, 4 m/s (B) 1 m/s, 3 m/s
(C) 1.5 m/s, 3 m/s (D) 1 m/s, 3.5 m/s
13. Preeti reached the metro station and found that the escalator was not working. She walked up the stationary escalator
in time t1 . On other days, if she remains stationary on the moving escalator, then the escalator takes her up in time
t2 the time taken by her to walk up on the moving escalator will be: [NEET 2017]
t1t2 t1t2
(A) (B)
t2  t1 t2  t1
t t
(C) t1  t2 (D) 1 2
2
14. If the velocity of a particle is v  At  Bt 2 , where A and B are constants, then the distance travelled by it
between 1s and 2s is: [2016]
3
(A) A  4B (B) 3 A  7 B
2
3 7 A B
(C) A  B (D) 
2 3 2 3
15. A particle of unit mass undergoes one dimensional motion such that its velocity varies according to
v(x) = bx 2n where b and n are constants and x is the position of the particle. The acceleration of the particle as
a function of x, is given by: [2015]
(A) 2 nb 2 x 4 n 1 (B) 2b 2 x 2 n 1
(C) 2nb 2 e 4 n 1 (D) 2 nb 2 x 2 n 1

ANSWER KEY

Questions Answers Questions Answers Questions Answers

1 D 6 D 11 B
2 B 7 B 12 B
3 B 8 A 13 B
4 A 9 A 14 C
5 D 10 B 15 A

194
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 VECTORS & MOTION IN TWO DIMENSION

 
1. A particle is moving with a velocity v  K yiˆ  xiˆ , where K is a constant. The general equation for its path
is: [JEE (M) 2019]
2 2
(A) xy = constant (B) y = x + constant
(C) y = x2 + constant (D) y2 = x + constant
2. Two guns A and B can fire bullets at speeds 1 km/s and 2 km/s respectively. From a point on a horizontal
ground, they are fired in all possible directions. The ratio of maximum areas covered by the bullets fired by
the two guns, on the ground is : [JEE (M) 2019]
(A) 1 : 2 (B) 1 : 4
(C) 1 : 8 (D) 1 : 16
3. In the cube of side 'a' shown in the figure, the vector from the central point of the
face ABOD to the central point of the face BEFO will be: [JEE (M) 2019]

(A)
1
2
a iˆ  kˆ  (B)
1
2
a  ˆj  iˆ 
1
(C) a
2
 kˆ  iˆ 1
(D) a
2
 ˆj  kˆ 
4. Two forces P and Q of magnitude 2F and 3F, respectively, are at an angle  with each other. If the force Q is
doubled, then their resultant also gets doubled. Then, the angle is: [JEE (M) 2019]
(A) 30º (B) 60º
(C) 90º (D) 120º
   
5. Two vectors A and B have equal magnitudes. The magnitude of  A  B is ‘n’ times the magnitude of
   
 A  B  . The angle between A and B is: [JEE (M) 2019]

 n2  1  n  1
(A) sin 1   (B) cos 1 
 n  1  n  1
2

 n2  1   n  1
(C) cos 1   (D) sin 1 
 n  1  n  1 
2

6. A body is projected at t = 0 with a velocity 10 ms–1 at an angle of 60° with the horizontal. The radius of
curvature of its trajectory at t = 1s is R. Neglecting air resistance and taking acceleration due to gravity g = 10
ms–2, the value of R is: [JEE (M) 2019]
(A) 2.5 m (B) 10.3 m
(C) 2.8 m (D) 5.1 m
7. A person standing on an open ground hears the sound of a jet aeroplane, coming from north at an angle 60°
with ground level. But he finds the aeroplane right vertically above his position. If  is the speed of sound,
speed of the plane is: [JEE (M) 2019]
2
(A) (B) 
3
 3
(C) (D) 
2 2

195
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
8. Two particles A, B are moving on two concentric circles of radii R1 and R2 with equal angular speed . At t =
0, their positions and direction of motion are shown in the figure: [JEE (M) 2019]
  
The relative velocity  A   B at t  is given by:
2
(A)   R1  R2  iˆ (B)   R1  R2  iˆ

(C)   R1  R2  iˆ (D)   R2  R1  iˆ
        
   
9. Let A  iˆ  ˆj and B  2iˆ  ˆj . The magnitude of a coplanar vector C such that A.C  B.C  A.B is
given by: [JEE (M) 2018]
20 5
(A) (B)
9 9
9 10
(C) (D)
12 9
   
10. Three vectors P , Q and R are shown in the figure. Let S be any point on the vector R . The distance between the
   
point P and S is b R . The general relation among vectors P , Q and S is: [JEE (M) 2017]

     
(A) S   b  1 P  bQ  
(B) S  1  b 2 P  bQ
     
(C) S  1  b  P  b Q (D) S   b  1 P  bQ
2

11. The x and y coordinates of the particle at any time are x = 5t – 2t2 and y = 10t respectively, where x and y are
in meters and t in seconds. The acceleration of the particle at t = 2s is: [JEE (M) 2017]
(A) 5 m/s2 (B) – 4 m/s2
(C) – 8 m/s2 (D) 0
12. The x and y coordinates of the particle at any time are x  5t  2t 2 and y  10t respectively. Where x and y
are in meters and t in seconds the acceleration of the particle at t = 2s is [NEET 2017]
(A) 5 m/s2 (B) –4 m/s2
(C) –8 m/s2 (D) 0
13. If the magnitude of sum of two vectors is equal to the magnitude of difference of the two vectors, the angle
between these vectors is: [NEET 2016]
o o
(A) 0 (B) 90
(C) 45o (D) 180o

14. A particle moves so that its position vector is given by r  cos  t xˆ  sin  t yˆ . Where  is a constant.
Which of the following is true? [NEET 2016]

(A) Velocity and acceleration both are perpendicular to r

(B) Velocity and acceleration both are parallel to r

(C) Velocity is perpendicular to r and acceleration is directed towards the origin.

(D) Velocity is perpendicular to r and acceleration is directed away from the origin

196
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
15. A ship A is moving West wards with a speed of 10 km h–1 and a ship B 100 km south of A, is moving North
wards with a speed of 10 km h–1 the time after which the distance between them becomes shortest is
[AIPMT 2015]
(A) 5 h (B) 5 2 h
(C) 10 2h (D) 0 h

16. The position vector of a particle R as a function of time is given by: [AIPMT 2015]

R  4 sin(2 )i  4 cos(2 t ) ˆj
Where R is in meter, t in seconds and iˆ and ĵ denote unit vectors along x and y directions, respectively.
Which one of the following statements is wrong for the motion of particle?
V2
(A) Magnitude of acceleration vector is , Where V is the velocity of particle.
R
(B) Magnitude of the velocity of particle is 8 meter//second
(C) path of the particle is a circle of radius 4 meter

(D) Acceleration vector is along R
  t t
17. If vectors A  cos tiˆ  sin tjˆ and B  cos i  sin j are functions of time, then the value of t at
2 2
which they are orthogonal to each other is: [AIPMT 2015]
 
(A) t  (B) t 
2 

(C) t  0 (D) t 
4
ANSWER KEY

Questions Answers Questions Answers

1 B 10 D
2 D 11 B
3 B 12 B
4 D 13 B
5 C 14 C
6 C 15 A
7 C 16 B
8 D 17 B
9 B

197
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 LAWS OF MOTION

1. A block of mass 10 kg is kept on a rough inclined plane as shown in the figure. A force of 3 N is applied on
the block. The coefficient of static friction between the plane and the block is 0.6. What should be the
minimum value of force P, such that the block does not move downward? [JEE (M) 2019]
-2
(take g = 10 ms )

(A) 32 N (B) 25 N
(C) 23 N (D) 18 N
2. A mass of 10 kg is suspended vertically by a rope from the roof. When a horizontal force is applied on the
rope at some point, the rope deviated at an angle of 45° at the roof point. If the suspended mass is at
equilibrium, the magnitude of the force applied is (g = 10 ms–2) [JEE (M) 2019]
(A) 200 N (B) 100 N
(C) 140 N (D) 70 N
3. A piece of wood of mass 0.03 kg is dropped from the top of a 100 m height building. At the same time, a
bullet of mass 0.02 kg is fired vertically upward, with a velocity 100 ms–1, from the ground. The bullet gets
embedded in the wood. Then the maximum height to which the combined system reaches above the top of the
building before falling below is: (g =10ms–2) [JEE (M) 2019]
(A) 30 m (B) 10 m
(C) 40 m (D) 20 m
4. A particle of mass m is moving in a straight line with momentum p. Starting at time t = 0, a force F = kt acts in
the same direction on the moving particle during time interval T so that its momentum changes from p to 3p.
Here k is a constant. The value of T is: [JEE (M) 2019]
p 2p
(A) 2 (B)
k k
2k k
(C) (D) 2
p p
5. A given object takes n times more time to slide down a 45o rough inclined plane as it takes to slide down a
perfectly smooth 45o incline. The coefficient of kinetic friction between the object and the incline is:
[JEE (M) 2018]
1 1
(A) 1 (B) 1 
n2 n2
1 1
(C) (D)
2  n2 1  n2
6. A body of mass 2 kg slides down with an acceleration of 3 m/s2 on a rough inclined plane having a slope of
30o. The external force required to take the same body up the plane with the same acceleration will be: (g = 10
m/s2) [JEE (M) 2018]
(A) 6 N (B) 14 N
(C) 4 N (D) 20 N
7. Two masses m1 = 5kg and m2 = 10kg, connected by an inextensible string over a frictionless pulley, are moving
as shown in the figure. The coefficient of friction of horizontal surface is 0.15. The minimum weight m that
should be put on top of m2 to stop the motion is : [JEE (M) 2018]
198
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 (A) 27.3 kg (B) 43.3 kg
(C) 10.3 kg (D) 18.3 kg
8. A point particle of mass m, moves along the uniformly rough track PQR as shown in
the figure. The coefficient of friction, between the particle and the rough track equals
. The particle is released, from rest, from the point P and it comes to rest at a point
R. The energies, lost by the ball, over the parts, PQ and QR, of the track, are equal to
each other, and no energy is lost when particle changes direction from PQ to QR.
The values of the coefficient of friction  and the distance x(= QR), are, respectively
close to: [JEE (M) 2016]
(A) 0.2 and 3.5 m (B) 0.29 and 3.5 m
(C) 0.29 and 6.5 m (D) 0.2 and 6.5 m
9. Given in the figure are two blocks A and B of weight 20 N and 100 N respectively. These are
being pressed against a wall by a force F as shown in figure. If the coefficient of friction
between the blocks is 0.1 and between block B and the wall is 0.15, the frictional force applied
by the wall in block B is [JEE (M) 2015]
(A) 100 N (B) 80 N
(C) 120 N (D) 150 N
10. When an object is shot from the bottom of a long smooth inclined plane kept at an angle 60° with horizontal,
it can travel a distance x1 along the plane. But when the inclination is decreased to 30° and the same object is
shot with the same velocity, it can travel x2 distance. Then x1 : x2 will be: [NEET 2019]
(A) 1: 2 (B) 2 :1
(C) 1: 3 (D) 1: 2 3

11. A particle moving with velocity V is acted by three forces shown by the vector triangle PQR. The velocity of
the particle will: [NEET 2019]

(A) Increase (B) Decrease


(C) Remain constant (D) Change according to the smallest force QR
12. A block of mass m is placed on a smooth inclined wedge ABC of inclination  as shown in the figure. The
wedge is given an acceleration ‘a’ towards the right. The relation between a and  for the block to remain
stationary on the wedge is [NEET 2018]

g g
(A) a  (B) a 
cosec sin
(C) a  g tan  (D) a  g cos 

199
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
13. Two blocks A and B of masses 3m and m respectively are connected by a massless and inextensible string.
The whole system is suspended by a massless spring as shown in figure. The magnitudes of acceleration of A
and B immediately after the string is cut, are respectively: [NEET 2017]

g
(A) ,g (B) g , g
3
g g g
(C) , (D) g ,
3 3 3
14. One end of string of length l is connected to a particle of mass ‘m’ and the other end is connected to a small
peg on a smooth horizontal table. If the particle moves in circle with speed ‘v’ the net force on the particle
(directed towards centre) will be (T represents the tension in a string): [NEET 2017]
mv 2 mv 2
(A) T  (B) T 
l l
(C) zero (D) T
15. Three blocks A, B and C of masses 4 kg, 2kg and 1 kg respectively, are in contact on a frictionless surface, as
shown. If a force of 14 N is applied on the 4 kg block then the contact force between A and B is
[2015]

(A) 6 N (B) 8 N
(C) 18 N (D) 2 N
16. A block A of mass m1 rests on a horizontal table. A light string connected to it passes over a frictionless
pulley at the edge of table and from its other end another block B of mass m2 is suspended. The coefficient of
kinetic friction between the block and the table is k . When the block A is sliding on the table, the tension the
string is [2015]
(m2   k m1 ) g m1m2 (1  k ) g
(A) (B)
(m1  m2 ) m1  m2
m1m2 (1  k ) g (m2  k m1 ) g
(C) (D)
(m1  m2 ) (m1  m2 )
17. A plank with a box on it at one end is gradually raised about the other end. As the angle of inclination with the
horizontal reaches 30o the box starts to slip and slides 4.0 m down the plank in 4.0 s. The coefficients of
static and kinetic friction between the box and the plank will be, respectively: [2015 RS]

(A) 0.6 and 0.5 (B) 0.5 and 0.6

(C) 0.4 and 0.3 (D) 0.6 and 0.6

200
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
18. A block of mass 10 kg is in contact against the inner wall of a hollow cylindrical drum of radius 1 m. The
coefficient of friction between the block and the inner wall of the cylinder is 0.1. The minimum angular
velocity needed for the cylinder to keep the block stationary when the cylinder is vertical and rotating about
its axis, will be: (g 10 m/s2) [NEET 2019]
10
(A) 10 rad/s (B) rad/s
2
(C) 10 rad/s (D) 10 rad/s
19. A car is negotiating a curved road of radius R. The road is banked at an angle  , the coefficient of friction between
the tyres of the car and the road is  s . The maximum safe velocity on this road is: [NEET 2016]

s  tan   s  tan 
(A) gR 2 (B) gR
1   s tan  1  s tan 
g  s  tan  g s  tan 
(C) (D)
R 1  2 tan  R 2 1  s tan 
20. What is the minimum velocity with which a body of mass m must enter a vertical loop of radius R so that it
can complete the loop? [NEET 2016]
(A) gR (B) 2gR
(C) 3gR (D) 5gR
r
21. Two stones of masses m and 2 m are whirled in horizontal circles, the heavier one in radius and the lighter
2
one in radius r. The tangential speed of lighter stone is n times that of the value of heavier stone when they
experience same centripetal forces. The value of n is [2015 RS]
(A) 3 (B) 4
(C) 1 (D) 2

ANSWER KEY

Questions Answers Questions Answers

1 A 12 C
2 B 13 A
3 C 14 D
4 A 15 A
5 B 16 B
6 D 17 A
7 A 18 C
8 B 19 B
9 C 20 D
10 C 21 D
11 C

201
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 WORK, POWER & ENERGY

1. Three blocks A, B and C are lying on a smooth horizontal surface, as shown in the figure. A and B have equal
masses, m while C has mass M. Block A is given an brutal speed v towards B due to which it collides with B
5
perfectly inelastically. The combined mass collides with C, also perfectly inelastically th of the initial kinetic
6
energy is lost in whole process. What is value of M/m? [JEE M 2019]

(A) 4 (B) 5
(C) 3 (D) 2
2. A force acts on a 2 kg object so that its position is given as a function of time as x = 3t2 + 5. What is the work
done by this force in first 5 seconds? [JEE M 2019]
(A) 850 J (B) 900 J
(C) 950 J (D) 875 J
3. A block of mass m is kept on a platform which starts from rest with constant acceleration g/2 upward, as
shown in fig. Work done by normal reaction on block in time t is: [JEE M 2019]

3mg 2t 2
(A) 0 (B)
8
mg 2t 2 mg 2t 2
(C)  (D)
8 8
    
4. A particle which is experiencing a force, given by F  3i  12 j , undergoes a displacement of d  4 i . If the
particle had a kinetic energy of 3 J at the beginning of the displacement, what is its kinetic energy at the end of
the displacement? [JEE M 2019]
(A) 15 J (B) 10 J
(C) 12 J (D) 9 J
5. A body of mass 1 kg falls freely from a height of 100 m on a platform of mass 3 kg which is mounted on a
spring having spring constant k = 1.25 × 106 N/m. The body sticks to the platform and the spring's maximum
compression is found to be x. Given that g = 10 ms–2, the value of x will be close to:
[JEE M 2019]
(A) 4 cm (B) 8 cm
(C) 80 cm (D) 40 cm
6. A simple pendulum, made of a string of length l and a bob of mass m, is released from a small angle 0. It
strikes a block of mass M, kept on a horizontal surface at its lowest point of oscillations, elastically. It bounces
back and goes up to an angle 1. Then M is given by: [JEE M 2019]
m  0  1  m  0  1 
(A)   (B)  
2  0  1  2  0  1 
 0  1   0  1 
(C) m   (D) m  
 0  1   0  1 

202
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
7. A soap bubble, blown by a mechanical pump at the mouth of a tube, increases in volume, with time, at a
constant rate. The graph that correctly depicts the time dependence of pressure inside the bubble is given by:
[JEE M 2019]

(A) (B)

(C) (D)
8. An automobile, travelling at 40 km/h, can be stopped at a distance of 40 m by applying brakes. If the same
automobile is travelling at 80 km/h, the minimum stopping distance, in meters, is (assume no skidding)
[JEE M 2018]
(A) 100 m (B) 75 m
(C) 160 m (D) 150 m
9. A proton of mass m collides elastically with a particle of unknown mass at rest. After the collision, the proton
and the unknown particle are seen moving at an angle 90o with respect to each other. The mass of unknown
particle is: [JEE M 2018]
(A) m (B) 2m
m m
(C) (D)
3 2
10. Two particles of the same mass m are moving in circular orbits because of force, given by
16 3
F r   r
r
The first particle is at a distance r = 1, and the second, at r = 4. The best estimate for the ratio of kinetic
energies of the first and the second particle is closest to: [JEE M 2018]
(A) 6  10 –2
(B) 10–1

(C) 3  10–3
(D) 6  102
11. A body of mass m starts moving from rest along x-axis so that its velocity varies as v  a s where a is a
constant and s is the distance covered by the body. The total work done by all the forces acting on the body in
the first t seconds after the start of the motion is: [JEE M 2018]
1 42
(A) ma t (B) 4ma 4t 2
4
1 42
(C) ma t (D) 8ma 4t 2
8
k
12. A particle is moving in a circular path of radius “a” under the action of an attractive potential U   . Its
2r 2
total energy is :- [JEE M 2018]
k
(A) (B) zero
2a 2
3 k k
(C)  (D) 
2 a2 2a 2

203
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
13. It is found that if a neutron suffers an elastic collinear collision with deuterium at rest, fractional loss of its
energy is Pd ; while for its similar collision with carbon nucleus at rest, fractional loss of energy is Pc . The
values of Pd and Pc are respectively: [JEE M 2018]
(A) (.28, .89) (B) (0, 0)
(C) (0, 1) (D) (.89, .28)
14. In a collision, a particle with an initial speed v0 strikes a stationary particle of the same mass. If the final total
kinetic energy is 50% greater than the original kinetic energy, the magnitude of the relative velocity between
two particles, after collision, is: [JEE M 2018]
v0
(A) (B) 2v0
4
v v0
(C) 0 (D)
2 2
15. A body of mass m = 10–2 kg is moving in a medium and experiences a frictional force F = –kv2. Its initial
1 2
speed is v0 = 10 ms–1. If, after 10s, its energy is mv0 , the value of k will be: [JEE M 2017]
8
(A) 10–4 kg m–1 (B) 10–1 kg m–1 s–1
–3 –1
(C) 10 kg m (D) 10–3 kg s–1
16. A person trying to lose weight by burning fat lifts a mass of 10 kg upto a height of 1m 1000 times. Assume that the
potential energy lost each time he lowers the mass is dissipated. How much fat will he use up considering the work
done only when the weight is lifted up? Fat supplies 3.8  107 J of energy per kg which is converted to mechanical
energy with a 20% efficiency rate. Take g = 9.8 ms–2. [JEE M 2016]
(A) 9.89  10 kg
–3
(B) 12.89  10 kg
–3

(C) 2.45  10 kg
–3
(D) 6.45  10–3 kg
17. A particle of mass m moving in the x direction with speed 2v, is hit by another particle of mass 2m moving in
the y direction with speed v. If the collision is perfectly inelastic, the percentage loss in the energy during the
collision is close to: [JEE M 2015]
(A) 56% (B) 62%
(C) 44% (D) 50%
18. Body A of mass 4m moving with speed u collides with another body B of mass 2m, at rest. The collision is
head on and elastic in nature. After the collision the fraction of energy lost by the colliding body A is:
[NEET 2019]
1 8
(A) (B)
9 9
4 5
(C) (D)
9 9
19. A mass m is attached to a thin wire and whirled in a vertical circle. The wire is most likely to break when:
[NEET 2019]
(A) The mass is at the highest point (B) The wire is horizontal
(C) The mass is at the lowest point (D) Inclined at an angle of 60° from vertical
20. Consider a drop of rain water having mass 1g failing from a height of 1 km. It hits the ground with a speed of
50 m/s. Take ‘g’ constant with a value 10 m/s2. The work done by the (i) gravitational force and the (ii)
resistive force of air is [NEET 2017]
(A) (i) 1.25 J (ii) –8.25 J (B) (i) 100 J (ii) 8.75 J
(C) (i) 10 J (ii) –8.75 J (D) (i) –10 J (ii) –8.25 J

204
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
21. Two similar springs P and Q have spring constants KP and KQ, such that KP > KQ. They are stretched, first by
the same amount (case a) then by the same force (case b). The work done by the springs WP and WQ are
related as, in case (a) and case (b), respectively. [2015]
(A) WP = WQ; WP = WQ (B) WP > WQ; WP > WQ
(C) WP < WQ; WP < WQ (D) WP = WQ; WP > WQ
22. A particle of mass 10 g moves along a circle of radius 6.4 cm with a constant tangential acceleration. What is
the magnitude of this acceleration if the kinetic energy of the particle becomes equal to 8  10–4 J by the end
of the second revolution after the beginning of the motion? [2016]
2 2
(A) 0.1 m/s (B) 0.15 m/s
2
(C) 0.18 m/s (D) 0.2 m/s2
23. A block of mass 10 kg, moving in x direction with a constant speed of 10 ms–1, is subject to a retarding force
F = 0.1  J/m during its travel from x = 20 m to 30m. Its final KE will be: [2015]
(A) 450 J (B) 275 J
(C) 250 J (D) 475 J


24. A body of mass 1kg begins to move under the action of a time dependent force F  2tiˆ  3t 2 ˆj N, where iˆ
and ĵ are unit vectors along x and y axis. What power will be developed by the force at the time t?
[2016]

(A) 2t  3t W
2 3
 
(B) 2t  4t W
2 4

(C)  2t  3t 4 W (D)  2t  3t 5 W
3 3

25. A particle of mass m is driven by a machine that delivers a constant power k watts. If the particle starts from
rest the force on the particle at time t is [2015]
(A) mk t 1/ 2 (B) 2mk t 1/ 2
1 mk 1/2
(C) mk t 1/2 (D) t
2 2
26. The heart of man pumps 5 litres of blood through the arteries per minute at a pressure of 150 mm of mercury.
If the density of mercury be 13.6  103 kg/m3 and g = 10 m/s2 then the power of heart in watt is:
[2015 RS]
(A) 2.32 (B) 3.0
(C) 1.50 (D) 1.70
27. A body projected vertically from the earth reaches a height equal to earth’s radius before returning to the
earth. The power exerted by the gravitational force is greatest [NEET 2017]
(A) at the highest position of the body
(B) at the instant just before the body hits the earth
(C) it remains constant all through
(D) at the instant just after the body is projected
  
28. Two particles A and B, move with constant velocities v1 and v2 . At the initial moment their position vectors r1 and

r2 respectively. The condition for particles A and B for their collision is [2015 RS]
      
(A) r1 .v1  r2 .v2 (B) r1  v1  r2  v2
   
    r1  r2 v2  v1
(C) r1  r2  v1  v2 (D)     
r1  r2 v2  v1

205
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
29. On a frictionless surface a block of mass M moving at speed v collides elastically with another block of same
mass M which is initially at rest. After collision the first block moves at an angle  to its initial direction and
v
has a speed . The second block’s speed after the collision is: [2015 RS]
3
3 3
(A) v (B) v
4 2
3 2 2
(C) v (D) v
2 3
30. A ball is thrown vertically downwards from a height of 20m with an initial velocity v0. It collides with the
ground loses 50 percent of its energy in collision and rebounds to the same height. The initial velocity v0 is:
(Take g = 10 ms–2) [2015 RS]
–1 –1
(A) 20 ms (B) 28 ms
–1
(C) 10 ms (D) 14 ms–1
31. A ball moving with velocity 2 m/s collides head on with another stationary ball of double the mass. If the
coefficient of restitution is 0.5, then their velocities (in m/s) after collision will be [2017]
(A) 0, 1 (B) 1, 1
(C) 1, 0.5 (D) 0, 2

ANSWER KEY

Questions Answers Questions Answers

1 A 17 A
2 B 18 B
3 B 19 C
4 A 20 C
5 A 21 B
6 C 22 A
7 D 23 D
8 C 24 D
9 A 25 D
10 A 26 D
11 C 27 B
12 B 28 D
13 D 29 D
14 B 30 A
15 A 31 A
16 B

206
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 SYSTEM OF PARTICLES & ROTATIONAL MOTION

1. An L-shaped object, made of thin rods of uniform mass density, is suspended with a string as shown in figure. If
AB = BC, and the angle made by AB with downward vertical is , then:
[JEE (M) 2019]
2 1
(A) tan   (B) tan  
3 3
1 1
(C) tan   (D) tan  
2 2 3
m
2. Two masses m and are connected at the two ends of a massless rigid rod of
2
length l. The rod is suspended by a thin wire of torsional constant k at the centre of mass of the rod-mass system
(see figure). Because of torsional constant k, the restoring torque is   k for angular displacement 0. If the rod is
rotated by 0 and released, the tension in it when it passes through its mean position will be: [JEE (M) 2019]
3k 02 k 02
(A) (B)
l 2l
2k02 k 02
(C) (D)
l l
3. If the angular momentum of a planet of mass m, moving around the Sun in a circular orbit is L, about the
center of the Sun, its areal velocity is [JEE (M) 2019]
4L L
(A) (B)
m m
L 2L
(C) (D)
2m m
4. A rod of length 50cm is pivoted at one end. It is raised such that if makes an angle of 30° from the horizontal
as shown and released from rest. Its angular speed when it passes through the horizontal (in rad s–1) will be (g
= 10ms–2) [JEE (M) 2019]
30
(A) 30 (B)
2
30 20
(C) (D)
2 3
5. To mop-clean a floor, a cleaning machine presses a circular mop of radius R vertically down with a total force
F and rotates it with a constant angular speed about its axis. If the force F is distributed uniformly over the
mop and if coefficient of friction between the mop and the floor is μ, the torque, applied by the machine on the
mop is: [JEE (M) 2019]
2  FR
(A)  FR (B)
3 3
 FR  FR
(C) (D)
2 6
6. A homogeneous solid cylindrical roller of radius R and mass M is pulled on a cricket pitch by a horizontal force.
Assuming rolling without slipping, angular acceleration of the cylinder is: [JEE (M) 2019]
3F F
(A) (B)
2mR 3mR

207
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 2F F
(C) (D)
3mR 2mR
7. A rigid massless rod of length 3l has two masses attached at each end as shown in the figure. The rod is
pivoted at point P on the horizontal axis (see figure). When released from initial horizontal position, its
instantaneous angular acceleration will be: [JEE (M) 2019]

g 7g
(A) (B)
2l 3l
g g
(C) (D)
13l 3l
8. Two identical spherical balls of mass M and radius R each are stuck on two ends of a rod of length 2R and
mass M (see figure). The moment of inertia of the system about the axis passing perpendicularly through the
centre of the rod is: [JEE (M) 2019]

152 17
(A) MR 2 (B) MR 2
15 15
137 209
(C) MR 2 (D) MR 2
15 15
9. An equilateral triangle ABC is cut from a thin solid sheet of wood. (see figure) D, E and F are the mid-points of its
sides as shown and G is the centre of the triangle. The moment of inertia of the triangle about an axis passing
through G and perpendicular to the plane of the triangle is I0. It the smaller triangle DEF is removed from ABC, the
moment of inertia of the remaining figure about the same axis is I. Then: [JEE (M) 2019]

9 3
(A) I  I0 (B) I  I0
16 4
I 15
(C) I  0 (D) I  I0
4 16
  
10. A slob is subjected to two forces F1 and F2 of same magnitude F as shown in the figure. Force F2 is in XY-
 
 
plane while force F1 acts along z-axis at the point 2i  3 j . The moment of these forces about point O will
be: [JEE (M) 2019]

208
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 
(A) 3iˆ  2 ˆj  3kˆ F  
(B) 3iˆ  2 ˆj  3kˆ F 
(C)  3iˆ  2 ˆj  3kˆ  F (D)  3iˆ  2 ˆj  3kˆ  F
11. A string is wound around a hollow cylinder of mass 5 kg and radius 0.5 m. If the string is now pulled with a
horizontal force of 40 N, and the cylinder is rolling without slipping on a horizontal surface (see figure), then
the angular acceleration of the cylinder will be (Neglect the mass and thickness of the string):
[JEE (M) 2019]

(A) 12 rad/s2 (B) 16 rad/s2

2
(C) 10 rad/s (D) 20 rad/s2
12. The magnitude of torque on a particle of mass 1kg is 2.5 Nm about the origin. If the force acting on it is 1
N, and the distance of the particle from the origin is 5m, the angle between the force and the position vector is
(in radians): [JEE (M) 2019]
 
(A) (B)
8 6
 
(C) (D)
4 3
13. A circular disc D1 of mass M and radius R has two identical discs D2 and D3 of the same mass M and radius R
attached rigidly at its opposite ends (see figure). The moment of inertia of the system about the axis OO',
passing through the centre of D1, as shown in the figure, will be: [JEE (M) 2019]

2
(A) 3MR2 (B) MR 2
3
4 2
(C) MR2 (D) MR
5
14. Let the moment of inertia of a hollow cylinder of length 30 cm (inner radius 10 cm and outer radius 20 cm),
about its axis be I. The radius of a thin cylinder of the same mass such that its moment of inertia about its axis
is also I, is: [JEE (M) 2019]
(A) 12 cm (B) 18 cm
(C) 16 cm (D) 14 cm

15. The position vector of the centre of mass r cm of an symmetric uniform bar of negligible area of cross-
section as shown in figure is: [JEE (M) 2019]

 13 5  11 3
(A) r cm  Lxˆ  Lyˆ (B) r cm  Lxˆ  Lyˆ
8 8 8 8

209
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
  3 11  5 13
(C) r cm  Lxˆ  Lyˆ (D) r cm  Lxˆ  Lyˆ
8 8 8 8
16. A particle of mass 20 g is released with an initial velocity 5 m/s along the curve from the point A, as shown in the
figure. The point A is at height h from point B. The particle slides along the frictionless surface. When the particle
reaches point B, its angular momentum about O will be: (Take g = 10 m/s2) [JEE (M) 2019]

(A) 8 kg-m2/s (B) 6 kg-m2/s

(C) 3 kg-m2/s (D) 2 kg-m2/s
17. The moment of inertia of a solid sphere, about an axis parallel to its diameter and at a distance of x from it, is
I(x). Which one of the graphs represents the variation of I (x) with x correctly? [JEE (M) 2019]

(A) (B)

(C) (D)
18. A force of 40 N acts on a point B at the end of an L-shaped object, as shown in the figure. The angle  that
will produce maximum moment of the force about point A is given by: [JEE (M) 2018]

1
(A) tan   (B) tan   4
2
1
(C) tan   2 (D) tan  
4
19. A uniform rod AB is suspended from a point X, at a variable distance x from A, as shown. To make the rod
horizontal, a mass m is suspended from its end A. A set of (m, x) values is recorded. The appropriate variables
that give a straight line, when plotted, are: [JEE (M) 2018]

1
(A) m, (B) m, x 2
x2
1
(C) m , x (D) m,
x
210
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 R
20. From a uniform circular disc of radius R and mass 9M, a small disc of radius is removed as shown in the
3
figure. The moment of inertia of the remaining disc about an axis perpendicular to the plane of the disc and
passing through centre of disc is: [JEE (M) 2018]

40
MR 2 2
(A) 9 (B) 10 MR
37
MR2 2
(C) 9 (D) 4 MR
21. Seven identical circular planar disks, each of mass M and radius R are welded symmetrically as shown. The
moment of inertia of the arrangement about the axis normal to the plane and passing through the point P is:
[JEE (M) 2018]

55 73
MR 2 MR 2
(A) 2 (B) 2
181 19
MR 2 MR 2
(C) 2 (D) 2
22. The moment of inertia of a uniform cylinder of length l and radius R about its perpendicular bisector is I.
l
What is the ratio such that the moment of inertia is minimum? [JEE (M) 2017]
R
3
(A) 1 (B)
2
3 3
(C) (D)
2 2
23. A slender uniform rod of mass M and length l is pivoted at one end so that it can rotate in a vertical plane (see
figure). There is negligible friction at the pivot. The free end is held vertically above the pivot and then released. The
angular acceleration of the rod when it makes an angle  with the vertical is [JEE (M) 2017]

3g 2g
(A) cos  (B) cos 
2l 3l
3g 2g
(C) sin  (D) sin 
2l 3l

211
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
24. A magnetic needle of magnetic moment 6.7  10–2 Am2 and moment of inertia 7.5  10–6 kg m2 is performing
simple harmonic oscillations in a magnetic field of 0.01 T. Time taken for 10 complete oscillations is:
[JEE (M) 2017]
(A) 6.98 s (B) 8.76 s
(C) 6.65 s (D) 8.89 s
25. A roller is made by joining together two cones at their vertices O. It is kept on two rails AB and CD, which are
placed asymmetrically (see figure), with its axis perpendicular to CD and its centre O at the centre of line joining
AB and Cd (see figure). It is given a light push so that it starts rolling with its centre O moving parallel to CD in the
direction shown. As it moves, the roller will tend to: [JEE (M) 2016]

(A) go straight (B) turn left and right alternately

(C) turn left (D) turn right
26. From a solid sphere of mass M and radius R a cube of maximum possible volume is cut. Moment of inertia of
cube about an axis passing through its center and perpendicular to one of its faces is:
[JEE (M) 2015]
5h 3h 2
(A) (B)
8 8R
h2 3h
(C) (D)
4R 4
27. Distance of the centre of mass of a solid uniform cone from its vertex is z0 . If the radius of its base is R and
its height is h then z0 is equal to : [JEE (M) 2015]
5h 3h 2
(A) (B)
8 8R
h2 3h
(C) (D)
4R 4
28. Which of the following statements are correct? [2017]
(A) Centre of mass off a body always coincides with the centre of gravity of the body
(B) Centre of mass of a body is the point at which the total gravitational torque on the body is zero
(C) A couple on a body produce both translational and rotation motion in a body
(D) Mechanical advantage greater than one means that small effort can be used to lift a larger load
(A) (A) and (B) (B) (B) and (C)
(C) (C) and (D) (D) (B) and (D)
29. A rope is wound around a hollow cylinder of mass 3kg and radius 40 cm. what is the angular acceleration of
the cylinder if the rope is pulled with a force of 30 N? [2017]
(A) 0.25 rad/s 2 (B) 25 rad/s 2
(C) 5 m/s 2 (D) 25 m/s 2
30. A uniform circular disc of radius 50 cm at rest is free to turn about an axis which is perpendicular to its plane and
passes through its centre. It is subjected to a torque which produces a constant angular acceleration of 2.0 rad s-2. Its
net acceleration in ms-2 at the end of 2.0 s is approximately: [2016]
(A) 8.0 (B) 7.0
(C) 6.0 (D) 3.0

212
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
31. A mass m moves in a circle on a smooth horizontal plane with velocity v0 at a radius R0 . The mass is
attached to string which passes through a smooth hole in the plane as shown.
R0
The tension in the string is increased gradually and finally m moves in a circle of radius . The final value
2
of the kinetic energy is [2015]

1 2
(A) mv0 (B) 2mv02
4
1 2
(C) mv0 (D) mv02
2
32. A rod of weight W is supported by two parallel knife edges A and B and is in equilibrium in a horizontal
position. The knives are at a distance d from each other. The centre of mass of the rod is at distance x from A.
The normal reaction on A is [2015]
Wd W (d  x)
(A) (B)
x x
W (d  x) Wx
(C) (D)
d d
1
33. An automobile moves on a road with a speed of 54 km h . The radius of its wheels is 0.45 m and the
moment of inertia of the wheel about its axis of rotation is 3 kg m2. If the vehicle is brought to rest in 15s, the
magnitude of average torque transmitted by its brakes to the wheel is: [2015 RS]
(A) 8.58 kg m 2 s 2 (B) 10.86 kg m 2 s 2
(C) 2.86 kg m 2 s 2 (D) 6.66 kg m 2 s 2
34. Point masses m1 and m2 are placed at the opposite ends of a rigid rod of length L, and negligible mass. The
rod is to be set rotating about an axis perpendicular to it. The position of point P on this rod through which the
axis should pass so that the work required to set the rod rotating with angular velocity 0 is minimum, is
given by : [2015 RS]

m1 m2
(A) x  L (B) x  L
m2 m1
m2 L m1L
(C) x  (D) x 
m1  m2 m1  m2
 
35. A force F  iˆ  3 ˆj  6kˆ is acting at a point r  2iˆ  6 ˆj 12kˆ . The value of  for which angular
momentum about origin is conserved is : [2015 RS]
213
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 (A) 2 (B) zero
(C) 1 (D) –1
36. A disc of radius 2 m and mass 100 kg rolls on a horizontal floor. Its centre of mass has speed of 20 cm/s. How
much work is needed to stop it? [NEET 2019]
(A) 3 J (B) 30 KJ
(C) 2 J (D) 1 J
37. Two discs of same moment of inertia rotating about their regular axis passing through centre and
perpendicular to the plane of disc with angular velocities 1 and 2 . They are brought into contact face to
face coinciding the axis of rotation. The expression for loss of energy during this process is:
[2017]
1
(B) I (1   2 )
2
(A) I (1   2 ) 2
4
1 1
(C) (1   2 ) 2 (D) I (1   2 ) 2
8 2
38. From a disc of radius R and mass M, a circular hole of diameter R, whose rim passes through the centre is cut.
What is the moment of inertia of the remaining part of the disc about a perpendicular axis, passing through the
centre? [2016]
2 2
(A) 15 M R /32 (B) 13 M R /32
2
(C) 11 M R /32 (D) 9 M R 2 /32
39. Three identical spherical shells, each of mass m and radius r are placed as shown in figure. Consider an axis
XX which is touching to two shells and passing through diameter of third shell. Moment of inertia of the
system consisting of these three spherical shells about XX axis is [2015]

16
(A) 3m r 2 (B)mr 2
5
11
(C) 4mr 2 (D) mr 2
5
40. A disk and a sphere of same radius but different masses roll off on two inclined planes of the same
altitude and length. which one of the two objects gets to the bottom of the plane first? [2016]
(A) Disk (B) Sphere
(C) Both reach at the same time (D) Depends on their masses

ANSWER KEY

Questions Answers Questions Answers Questions Answers Questions Answers

1 B 11 B 21 C 31 B
2 D 12 B 22 C 32 C
3 C 13 A 23 C 33 D
4 A 14 C 24 C 34 C
5 A 15 A 25 C 35 D
6 C 16 B 26 A 36 A
7 C 17 B 27 D 37 A
8 C 18 A 28 D 38 B
9 D 19 D 29 B 39 C
10 D 20 D 30 A 40 B

GRAVITATION
214
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
1. The energy required to take a satellite to a height 'h' above Earth surface (radius of Earth = 6.4 × 103 km) is E1
and kinetic energy required for the satellite to be in a circular orbit at this height is E2. The value of h for
which E1 and E2 are equal, is: [JEE (M) 2019]
(A) 1.28 × 104 km (B) 6.4 × 103 km
(C) 3.2 × 103 km (D) 1.6 × 103 km
2. A satellite is moving with a constant speed v in circular orbit around the earth. An object of mass 'm' is ejected
from the satellite such that it just escapes from the gravitational pull of the earth. At the time of ejection, the
kinetic energy of the object is: [JEE (M) 2019]
3
(A) mv 2 (B) mv2
2
1
(C) 2mv2 (D) mv 2
2
31 11
3. Two stars of masses 3 × 10 kg each, and at distance 2 × 10 m rotate in a plane about their common centre of
mass O. A meteorite passes through O moving perpendicular to the star's rotation plane. In order to escape
from the gravitational field of this double star, the minimum speed that meteorite should have at O is: (Take
Gravitational constant, G = 6.67 ×10–11 Nm2 kg–2) [JEE (M) 2019]
(A) 1.4 × 105 m/s (B) 24 × 104 m/s
(C) 3.8 × 104 m/s (D) 2.8 × 105 m/s
4. A satellite is revolving in a circular orbit at a height h from the earth surface, such that h << R where R is the radius
of the earth. Assuming that the effect of earth's atmosphere can be neglected the minimum increase in the speed
required so that the satellite could escape from the gravitational field of earth is: [JEE (M) 2019]
(A) gR  2 1  (B) 2gR
gR
(C) gR (D)
2
5. The mass and the diameter of a planet are three times the respective values for the Earth. The period of
oscillation of a simple pendulum on the Earth is 2s. The period of oscillation of the same pendulum on the
planet would be: [JEE (M) 2019]
(A) 2 s (B) 2 3s
3
3 3
(C) s (D)
s
2 2
6. A straight rod of length L extends from x = a to x = L + a. The gravitational force acting on a point mass 'm' at
x = 0, if the mass per unit length of the rod is A + Bx2, is given by: [JEE (M) 2019]
  1 1   1 1  
(A) Gm  A     BL  (B) Gm  A     BL 
  aL a
    a aL 
  1 1   1 1  
(C) Gm  A     BL  (D) Gm  A     BL 
 aL a   a aL 
7. A satellite of mass M is in a circular orbit of radius R about the centre of the earth. A meteorite of the same
mass, falling towards the earth, collides with the satellite completely inelastically. The speeds of the satellite
and the meteorite are the same, just before the collision. The subsequent motion of the combined body will be:
[JEE (M) 2019]
(A) in a circular orbit of a different radius (B) in the same circular orbit of radius R
(C) in an elliptical orbit (D) such that it escapes to infinity
8. Two satellites, A and B, have masses m and 2m respectively. A is in a circular orbit of radius R, and B is in a
circular orbit of radius 2R around the earth. The ratio of their kinetic energies, TA/TB, is:
[JEE (M) 2019]
215
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 1
(A) 2 (B)
2
1
(C) 1 (D)
2
9. A body of mass m is moving in a circular orbit of radius R about a planet of mass M. At some instant, it splits into
R
two equal masses. The first mass moves in a circular orbit of radius , and the other mass, in a circular orbit of
2
3R
radius . The difference between the final and initial total energies is: [JEE (M) 2018]
2
GMm GMm
(A)  (B) 
6R 2R
GMm GMm
(C)  (D) 
2R 6R
10. Take the mean distance of the moon and the Sun from the earth to be 0.4 ×106 km and 150 ×106 km
respectively. Their masses are 8 × 1022 kg and 2 × 1030 kg respectively. The radius of the earth is 6400 km.
Let F1 be the difference in the forces exerted by the moon at the nearest and farthest points on the earth and
F2 be the difference in the force exerted by the Sun at the nearest and farthest points on the earth. Then, the
F1
number closest to is : [JEE (M) 2018]
F2
(A) 2 (B) 0.6
(C) 6 (D) 10–2
11. A particle is moving with a uniform speed in a circular orbit of radius R in a central force inversely proportional to
the nth power of R. If the period of rotation of the particle is T, then, [JEE (M) 2018]
n n 1
1
(A) T  R 2 (B) T  R 2

n 3
(C) T  R 2 (D) T  R 2 for any n
12. A satellite is revolving in a circular orbit at a height ‘h’ from the earth’s surface (radius of earth R; h<<R). The
minimum increase in its orbital velocity required, so that the satellite could escape from the earth’s
gravitational field, is close to: (Neglect the effect of atmosphere) [JEE (M) 2016]
(A) gR / 2 r (B) gR  2 1 
(C) 2gR (D) gR
13. From a solid sphere of mass M and radius R, a spherical portion of radius R/2 is removed, as shown in the
figure. Taking gravitational potential V = 0 at r =  , the potential at the centre of the cavity thus formed is:
(G = gravitational constant) [JEE (M) 2015]

2GM 2GM
(A) (B)
3R R
G M G M
(C) (D)
2R R
14. The kinetic energies of a planet in an elliptical orbit about the Sun, at positions A, B and C are KA, KB and KC,
respectively. AC is the major axis and SB is perpendicular to AC at the position of the Sun S as shown in the
figure. Then [NEET 2018]

216
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 (A) KB < KA < KC (B) KA > KB > KC
(C) KA < KB < KC (D) KB > KA > KC
15. Kepler’s third law states that square of period of revolution (T) of a planet around the Sun, is proportional to
third power of an average distance r between Sun and planet i.e. T2 = Kr3 here K is constant. If the masses of
Sun and planet are M and m respectively then as per Newton’s law of gravitational force of attraction between
GMm
them is F  , here G is gravitational constant. The relation between G and K is described as
r2
[2015]
(A) GMK = 4 2
(B) K = G
1
(C) K  (D) GK = 42
G
16. Two astronauts are floating in gravitational free space after having lost contact with their spaceship. The two
will [2017]
(A) move towards each other. (B) move away from each other.
(C) become stationary. (D) keep floating at the same distance between them.
17. Two spherical bodies of mass M and 5M and radii R and 2R released in free space with initial separation
between their centres equal to 12R. If they attract each other due to gravitational force only, then the distance
covered by the smaller body before collision is [2015]
(A) 4.5 R (B) 7.5 R
(C) 1.5 R (D) 2.5 R
18. A body weighs 200 N on the surface of the earth. How much will it weigh half way down to the centre of the
earth? [NEET 2019]
(A) 150 N (B) 200 N
(C) 250 N (D) 100 N
19. The work done to raise a mass m from the surface of the earth to a height h, which is equal to the radius of the
earth, is: [NEET 2019]
(A) mgR (B) 2mgR
1 3
(C) mgR (D) mgR
2 2
20. The acceleration due to gravity at a height 1 km above the earth is the same as at a depth d below the surface
of earth. Then [2017]
3
(A) d  1 km (B) d  km
2
1
(C) d  2 km (D) d  km
2
21. At what height from the surface of earth the gravitational potential and the value of g are -5.4  107 J kg-1 and
6.0 ms-2 respectively? Take the radius of earth as 5400 km. [2016]
(A) 2600 km (B) 1600 km
(C) 1400 km (D) 2000 km
22. If the mass of the Sun were ten times smaller and the universal gravitational constant were ten times larger in
magnitude, which of the following is not correct? [NEET 2018]
(A) Time period of a simple pendulum on the Earth would decrease.
(B) Walking on the ground would become more difficult.
(C) Raindrops will fall faster.
(D) ‘g’ on the Earth will not change.

217
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
23. The ratio of escape velocity at earth (ve) to the escape velocity at a planet (vp) whose radius and mean density
are twice as that of earth is : [2016]
(A) 1: 2 (B) 1 : 2 2
(C) 1: 4 (D) 1: 2
24. A satellite S is moving in an elliptical orbit around the earth. The mass of the satellite is very small compared
to the mass of the earth. Then, [2015 RS]
(A) the total mechanical energy of S varies periodically with time.
(B) the linear momentum of S remains constant in magnitude.
(C) the acceleration of S is always directed towards the centre of the earth.
(D) the angular momentum of S about the centre of the earth changes in direction, but its magnitude remains
constant.
25. A remote-sensing satellite of earth revolves in a circular orbit at a height of 0.25106 m above the surface of
earth. If earth’s radius is 6.38106 m and g = 9.8 ms-2, then the orbital speed of the satellite is:
[2017 RS]
-1 -1
(A) 8.56 kms (B) 9.13 kms
(C) 6.67 kms-1 (D) 7.76 kms-1

ANSWER KEY

Questions Answers Questions Answers

1 C 14 B
2 B 15 A
3 D 16 A
4 A 17 B
5 B 18 D
6 B 19 C
7 C 20 C
8 C 21 A
9 D 22 D
10 A 23 B
11 B 24 C
12 B 25 D
13 D

218
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF SOLIDS & FLUIDS
1. The top of a water tank is open to air and its water level is maintained. It is giving out 0.74 m3 water per
minute through a circular opening of 2 cm radius in its wall. The depth of the centre of the opening from the
level of water in the tank is close to: [JEE (M) 2019]
(A) 9.6 m (B) 4.8 m
(C) 2.9 m (D) 6.0 m
2. Water flows into a large tank with flat bottom at the rate of 10–4 m3 s–1. Water is also leaking out of a hole of
area 1 cm2 at its bottom. If the height of the water in the tank remains steady, then this height is:
[JEE (M) 2019]
(A) 4 cm (B) 2.9 cm
(C) 1.7 cm (D) 5.1 cm
3. A liquid of density  is coming out of a hose pipe of radius a with horizontal speed v and hits a mesh. 50% of
the liquid passes through the mesh unaffected. 25% loses all of its momentum and 25% comes back with the
same speed. The resultant pressure on the mesh will be: [JEE (M) 2019]
2 3
(A) pv (B) pv 2
4
1 1
(C) pv 2 (D) pv 2
2 4
4. A load of mass M kg is suspended from a steel wire of length 2 m and radius 1.0 mm in Searle's apparatus
experiment. The increase in length produced in the wire is 4.0 mm. Now the load is fully immersed in a liquid
of relative density 2. The relative density of the material of load is 8. The new value of increase in length of
the steel wire is: [JEE (M) 2019]
(A) 4.0mm (B) 3.0mm
(C) 5.0mm (D) zero
5. A long cylindrical vessel is half filled with a liquid. When the vessel is rotated about its own vertical axis, the liquid
rises up near the wall. If the radius of vessel is 5 cm and its rotational speed is 2 rotations per second, then the
difference in the heights between the centre and the sides, in cm, will be: [JEE (M) 2019]
(A) 1.2 (B) 0.1
(C) 2.0 (D) 0.4
6. A soap bubble, blown by a mechanical pump at the mouth of a tube, increases in volume, with time, at a
constant rate. The graph that correctly depicts the time dependence of pressure inside the bubble is given by :
[JEE (M) 2019]

(A) (B) (C) (D)

7. A thin uniform tube is bent into a circle of radius r in the vertical plane. Equal volumes of two immiscible liquids,
whose densities are 1 and 2 (1 > 2), fill half the circle. The angle  between the radius vector passing through the
common interface and the vertical is: [JEE (M) 2018]
  1   2    2 
(A)   tan 1   (B)   tan 1  
2  1   2  2  1 

        
(C)   tan 1   1  (D)   tan1   1 2 
 2   2  1  2 

219
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 5r
8. What an air bubble of radius r rises from the bottom to the surface of a lake, its radius becomes . Taking
4
the atmospheric pressure to be equal to 10 m height of water column, the depth of the lake would
approximately be (ignore the surface tension and the effect of temperature): [JEE (M) 2018]
(A) 11.2 m (B) 10.5 m
(C) 9.5 m (D) 8.7 m
9. A small soap bubble of radius 4 cm is trapped inside another bubble of radius 6 cm without any contact. Let P2 be
the pressure inside the inner bubble and P0, the pressure outside the outer bubble. Radius of another bubble with
pressure difference P2 – P0 between its inside the outside would be: [JEE (M) 2018]
(A) 12 cm (B) 4.8 cm
(C) 2.4 cm (D) 6 cm

10. A solid sphere of radius r made of a soft material of bulk modulus K is surrounded by a liquid in a cylindrical
container. A massless piston of area “a” floats on the surface of the liquid, covering entire floats on the surface of the
liquid, covering entire cross section of cylindrical container. When a mass m is placed on the surface of the piston to
compress the liquid, the fractional decrement in the radius of the sphere,  dr  , is: [JEE (M) 2018]
 r 
mg mg
(A) Ka (B) (C) (D) K a
3mg 3Ka Ka mg
11. The mass of a hydrogen molecule is 3.32  10 kg. If 10 hydrogen molecules strike, per second, a fixed
–27 23

wall of area 2 cm2 at an angle of 45 to the normal, and rebound elastically with a speed of 103 m/s, then the
pressure on the wall is nearly: [JEE (M) 2018]
(A) 4.70  103 N/m2 (B) 2.35  102 N/m2
(C) 4.70  102 N/m2 (D) 2.35  103 N/m2
12. A soap bubble, having radius of 1 mm, is blown from a detergent solution having a surface tension of
2.5 × 10–2 N/m. The pressure inside the bubble equals at a point Z0 below the free surface of water in a
container. Taking g = 10 m/s2, density of water = 103 kg/m3, the value of Z0 is: [NEET 2019]
(A) 100 cm (B) 10 cm
(C) 1 cm (D) 0.5 cm
13. A copper rod of 88 cm and an aluminium rod of unknown length have their increase in length independent of
increase in temperature. The length of aluminium rod is: (Cu = 1.7 × 10–5 K–1 and Al = 2.2 × 10–5 K–1)
[NEET 2019]
(A) 6.8 cm (B) 113.9 cm
(C) 88 cm (D) 68 cm
14. When a block of mass M is suspended by a long wire of length L, the length of the wire becomes (L + l). The
elastic potential energy stored in the extended wire is: [NEET 2019]
1 1
(A) Mgl (B) M g L (C) M gl (D) MgL
2 2
ANSWER KEY
Questions Answers Questions Answers Questions Answers
1 B 6 D 11 D
2 D 7 D 12 C
3 B 8 C 13 D
4 B 9 C 14 C
5 C 10 B

220
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS
1. A gas can be taken from A to B via two different processes ACB and ADB.

When path ACB is used 60 J of heat flows into the system and 30 J of work is done by the system. If path
ADB is used work done by the system is 10 J. The heat Flow into the system in path ADB is:
[JEE (M) 2019]
(A) 80 J (B) 20 J
(C) 100 J (D) 40 J
2. A mixture of 2 moles of helium gas (atomic mass = 4 u), and 1 mole of argon gas (atomic mass = 40 u) is kept
 Vrms (helium) 
at 300 K in a container. The ratio of their rms speeds   is close to:
 Vrms (argon) 
[JEE (M) 2019]
(A) 2.24 (B) 0.45
(C) 0.32 (D) 3.16
3. A rod, of length L at room temperature and uniform area of cross section A, is made of a metal having
coefficient of linear expansion /°C. It is observed that an external compressive force F, is applied on each of
its ends, prevents any change in the length of the rod, when its temperature rises by T K. Young's modulus,
Y, for this metal is: [JEE (M) 2019]
F F
(A) (B)
2AαΔT Aα(ΔT - 273)
F 2F
(C) (D)
AαΔT AαΔT
4. Temperature difference of 120°C is maintained between two ends of a uniform rod AB of length 2L. Another
bent rod PQ, of same cross section as AB and length 3L/2, is connected across AB (See figure). In steady
state, temperature difference between P and Q will be close to: [JEE (M) 2019]

(A) 60 C (B) 75 C

(C) 35 C (D) 45 C
5. A 15 g mass of nitrogen gas is enclosed in a vessel at a temperature 27°C. Amount of heat transferred to the
gas, so that rms velocity of molecules is doubled, is about: [JEE (M) 2019]
[Take R = 8.3 J/ K mole]
(A) 10 kJ (B) 0.9 kJ
(C) 6 kJ (D) 14 kJ
6. Two Carnot engines A and B are operated in series. The first one, A, receives heat at T1(= 600K) and rejects
to a reservoir at temperature T2. The second engine B receives heat rejected by the first engine and, in turn,
rejects to a heat reservoir at T3(= 400 K). Calculate the temperature T2 if the work outputs of the two engines
are equal: [JEE (M) 2019]
(A) 400 K (B) 600 K
(C) 500 K (D) 300 K
221
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
7. A heat source at T= 103 K is connected to another heat reservoir at T= 102 K by a copper slab which is 1 m
thick. Given that the thermal conductivity of copper is 0.1 WK-1 m-1, the energy flux through it in the steady
state is : [JEE (M) 2019]
(A) 90 Wm-2 (B) 200 Wm-2
(C) 65 Wm-2 (D) 120 Wm-2
8. Three Carnot engines operate in series between a heat source at a temperature T1 and a heat sink at
temperature T4 (see figure). There are two other reservoirs at temperature T2, and T3, as shown, with T1 > T2 >
T3 > T4. The three engines are equally efficient if: [JEE (M) 2019]

(A) T2  T12T4  ; T3  T1T42  (B) T2  T1T42  ; T3  T12T4 

1/3 1/3 1/3 1/3

(C) T2  T13T4  ; T3  T1T43  (D) T2  T1T4  ; T3  T12T4 

1/ 4 1/ 4 1/ 2 1/3

9. An unknown metal of mass 192 g heated to a temperature of 100ºC was immersed into a brass calorimeter of
mass 128 g containing 240 g of water a temperature of 8.4ºC. Calculate the specific heat of the unknown
metal if water temperature stabilizes at 21.5ºC. (Specific heat of brass is 394 J kg-1K-1).
[JEE (M) 2019]
(A) 1232 J kg-1K-1 (B) 458 J kg-1K-
(C) 654 J kg-1K- (D) 916 J kg-1K-
10. Half mole of an ideal monoatomic gas is heated at constant pressure of 1 atm from 20 ºC to 90ºC. Work done
by gas is close to: (Gas constant R = 8.31 J /mol.K) [JEE (M) 2019]
(A) 73 J (B) 291 J
(C) 581 J (D) 146 J
11. Two kg of a monoatomic gas is at a pressure of 4  10 N/m2. The density of the gas is 8 kg/m3. What is the
4

order of energy of the gas due to its thermal motion? [JEE (M) 2019]
3 5
(A) 10 J (B) 10 J
(C) 106 J (D) 104 J
12. A rigid diatomic ideal gas undergoes an adiabatic process at room temperature. The relation between
temperature and volume of this process is TVX = constant, then x is : [JEE (M) 2019]
(A) 5 (B) 2
3 5
2
(C) (D) 3
3 5
13. The gas mixture consists of 3 moles of oxygen and 5 moles of argon at temperature T. Considering only
translational and rotational modes, the total internal energy of the system is: [JEE (M) 2019]
(A) 12 RT (B) 20 RT
(C) 15 RT (D) 4 RT
14. Ice at –20° C is added to 50 g of water at 40°C. When the temperature of the mixture reaches 0°C, it is found
that 20 g of ice is still un-melted. The amount of ice added to the water was close to …… .
(Specific heat of water = 4.2 J/g/°C, and Specific heat of Ice = 2.1 J/g/°C )
(Heat of fusion of water at 0°C = 334 J/g) [JEE (M) 2019]
(A) 50 g (B) 40 g
(C) 60 g (D) 100 g
222
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
15. Two rods A and B of identical dimensions are at temperature 30°C. If A is heated up to 180°C and B up to
T°C, then the new lengths are the same. If the ratio of the coefficients of linear expansion of A and B is 4 : 3,
then the value of T is : [JEE (M) 2019]
(A) 270°C (B) 230°C
(C) 250°C (D) 200°C
16. When 100 g of a liquid A at 100°C is added to 50 g of a liquid B at temperature 75°C, the temperature of the
mixture becomes 90°C. The temperature of the mixture, if 100 g of liquid A at 100°C is added to 50 g of
liquid B at 50°C, will be:- [JEE (M) 2019]
(A) 80C (B) 60C
(C) 70C (D) 85C
17. In a process, temperature and volume of one mole of an ideal monoatomic gas are varied according to the
relation VT = K, where K is a constant. In this process the temperature of the gas is increased by T. The
amount of heat absorbed by gas is (R is gas constant): [JEE (M) 2019]
1 3
(A) R T (B) R T
2 2
1 2K
(C) KR T (D) T
2 3
18. A metal ball of mass 0.1 kg is heated upto 500°C and dropped into a vessel of heat capacity 800 JK-1 and
containing 0.5 kg water. The initial temperature of water and vessel is 30°C. What is the approximate
percentage increment in the temperature of the water? [Specific Heat Capacities of water and metal are,
respectively, 4200 J kg-1K-1 and 400 J kg-1K-1] [JEE (M) 2019]
(A) 30% (B) 20%
(C) 25% (D) 15%
19. A cylinder of radius R is surrounded by a cylindrical shell of inner radius R and outer radius 2R. The thermal
conductivity of the material of the inner cylinder is K1 and that of the outer cylinder is K2. Assuming no loss of
heat, the effective thermal conductivity of the system for heat flowing along the length of the cylinder is:
[JEE (M) 2019]
K1 +K 2
(A) K1 + K2 (B)
2
2K1 +3K 2 K +3K 2
(C) (D) 1
5 4
20. An ideal gas occupies a volume of 2m3 at a pressure of 3  106 Pa. The energy of the gas is:
[JEE (M) 2019]
(A) 3  10 2 8
(B) 10 J
(C) 6  104 J (D) 9  106 J
21. For the given cyclic process CAB as shown for a gas , the work done is: [JEE (M) 2019]

(A) 1 J (B) 5 J
(C) 10 J (D) 30 J

223
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
22. A vertical closed cylinder is separated into two parts by a frictionless piston of mass m and of negligible
thickness. The piston is free to move along the length of the cylinder. The length of the cylinder above the
piston is 1 , and that below the piston is  2 , such that 1   2 . Each part of the cylinder contains n moles of
an ideal gas at equal temperature T. If the piston is stationary, its mass, m, will be given by:
(R is universal gas constant and g is the acceleration due to gravity) [JEE (M) 2019]
nRT 1 1 nRT  1   2 
(A)    (B)  
g   2 1  g  1 2 
RT  21   2  RT  1  3 2 
(C)   (D)  
g  1 2  ng  1 2 
23. An ideal gas is enclosed in a cylinder at pressure of 2 atm and temperature, 300 K. The mean time between
two successive collisions is 6 × 10-8 s. If the pressure is doubled and temperature is increased to 500 K, the
mean time between two successive collisions will be close to: [JEE (M) 2019]
(A) 4  10 s-8
(B) 3  10 s
-6

(C) 2  10 s-7
(D) 0.5  10-8 s
24. In which of the following process, heat is neither absorbed nor released by a system?
[JEE (M) 2019]
(A) Isothermal (B) Adiabatic
(C) Isobaric (D) Isochoric
25. Increase in temperature of a gas filled in a container would lead to: [JEE (M) 2019]
(A) Increase in its mass (B) Increase in is kinetic energy
(C) Decrease in its pressure (D) Decrease in intermolecular distance
26. The unit of thermal conductivity is: [JEE (M) 2019]
-1 -1 -1
(A) J m K (B) J m K
-1
(C) W m K (D) W m-1 K-1
27. An ideal gas undergoes a quasi static, reversible process in which its molar heat capacity C remains constant. If
during this process the relation of pressure P and volume V is given by PVn =constant, then n is given by (Here CP
and CV are molar specific heat at constant pressure and constant volume, respectively): [JEE (M) 2016]
CP  C CV  C
(A) n  (B) n 
C  CV C  CP
CP C  CP
(C) n  (D) n 
CV C  CV
28. A pendulum clock loses 12s a day if the temperature is 40C and gains 4s a day if the temperature is 20C.
The temperature at which the clock will show correct time, and the co-efficient of linear expansion () of the
metal of the pendulum shaft are respectively: [JEE (M) 2016]
(A) 30C; = 1.8510 /C
-3
(B) 55C; = 1.8510 /C
-2

(C) 25C; = 1.8510 /C

-5
(D) 60C; = 1.8510-4/C
29. ‘n’ moles of an ideal gas undergoes a process A  B as shown in figure. The maximum temperature of the
gas during the process will be: [JEE (M) 2016]

9 PV
0 0 9PV
0 0 9 PV
0 0 3PV
0 0
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2nR nR 4nR 2nR
224
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
30. Consider an ideal gas confined in an isolated closed chamber. As the gas undergoes an adiabatic expansion,
the average time of collision between molecules increases as Vq, where V is the volume of the gas. The value
 C 
of q is :    p  [JEE (M) 2015]
 Cv 
 1  1
(A) (B)
2 2
3  5 3  5
(C) (D)
6 6
31. Consider a spherical shell of radius R at temperature T. The black body radiation inside it can be considered
U 1U 
as an ideal gas of photons with internal energy per unit volume u   T 4 and pressure p    . If the
V 3 V 
shell now undergoes an adiabatic expansion the relation between T and R is:
[JEE (M) 2015]
1 1
(A) T  (B) T 
R R3
(C) T  e  R (D) T  e3R
32. A solid body of constant heat capacity 1J/C is being heated by keeping it in contact with reservoirs in two
ways: [JEE (M) 2015]
(i) Sequentially keeping in contact with 2 reservoirs such that each reservoir supplies same amount of heat.
(ii) Sequentially keeping in contact with 8 reservoirs such that each reservoir supplies same amount of heat.
In both the cases body is brought from initial temperature 100C to final temperature 200C. Entropy change
of the body in the two cases respectively is:
(A) ln2, 2ln2 (B) 2ln2, 8ln2
(C) ln2, 4ln2 (D) ln2, ln2
33. In which of the following processes, heat is neither absorbed nor released by a system?
[NEET 2019]
(A) isochoric (B) isothermal
(C) adiabatic (D) isobaric
34. Increase in temperature of a gas filled in a container would lead to
[NEET 2019]
(A) decrease in intermolecular distance (B) increase in its mass
(C) increase in its kinetic energy (D) decrease in its pressure
2
35. A sample of 0.1 g of water at 100 C and normal pressure ( 1.013 10 N m ) requires 54 cal of heat energy
o 5

o
to convert to steam at 100 C . If the volume of the steam produced is 167.1 cc, the change in internal energy
of the sample, is [NEET 2018]
(A) 104.3 J (B) 208.7 J
(C) 42.2 J (D) 84.5 J
36. The volume (V) of a monoatomic gas varies with its temperature (T), as shown in the graph. The ratio of work
done by the gas, to the heat absorbed by it, when it undergoes a change from state A to state B, is
[NEET 2018]

(A) 2/5 (B) 2/3

(C) 1/3 (D) 2/7
225
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
37. The efficiency of an ideal heat engine working between the freezing point and boiling point of water is
[NEET 2018]

(A) 26.8% (B) 20%

(C) 6.25% (D) 12.5%
38. Thermodynamic processes are indicated in the following diagram.
[NEET 2017]

Match the following

Column- I Column-II
P. Process I A. Adiabatic
Q. Process II B. Isobaric
R. Process III C. Isochoric
S. Process IV D. Isothermal
(A) P  C, Q  A, R  D, S  B (B) P  C, Q  D, R  B, S  A
(C) P  D, Q  B, R  A, S  C (D) P  A, Q  C , R  D, S  B
39. A carnot engine having an efficiency of 1/10 as heat engine, is used as a refrigerator. If the work done on the
system is 10J, the amount of energy absorbed from the reservoir at lower temperature is
[NEET 2017]
(A) 90 J (B) 99 J
(C) 100 J (D) 1 J
40. One mole of an ideal monoatomic gas undergoes a process described by the equation PV  constant. The
3

heat capacity of the gas during this process is [NEET-II 2016]

3 5
(A) R (B) R
2 2
(C) 2R (D) R
41. The temperature inside a refrigerator is t C and the room temperature is t1o C . The amount of heat delivered
o
2

to the room for each joule of electrical energy consumed ideally will be [NEET-II 2016]
t1 t1  273
(A) (B)
t1  t2 t1  t2
t2  273 t1  t2
(C) (D)
t1  t2 t1  273
42. A gas is compressed isothermally to half its initial volume. The same gas is compressed separately through an
adiabatic process until its volume is again reduced to half. Then [NEET-I 2016]
(A) Compressing the gas isothermally or adiabatically will require the same amount of work
(B) Which of the case (whether compression through isothermal or through adiabatic process) requires more
work will depend upon the atomicity of the gas
(C) Compressing the gas isothermally will require more work to be done.
(D) Compressing the gas through adiabatic process will require more work to be done

226
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
43. A refrigerator works between 4oC and 30oC. It is required to remove 600 calories of heat every second in
order to keep the temperature of the refrigerated space constant. The power required is (Take 1 cal = 4.2 joule)
[NEET-I 2016]
(A) 236.5 W (B) 2365 W
(C) 2.365 W (D) 23.65 W
44. An ideal gas is compressed to half its initial volume by means of several processes. Which of the process
results in the maximum work done on the gas? [2015]
(A) Isochoric (B) Isothermal
(C) Adiabatic (D) Isobaric
45. The coefficient of performance of a refrigerator is 5. If the temperature inside freezer is –20 oC the
temperature of the surroundings to which it ejects heat is [2015]
o o
(A) 11 C (B) 21 C
(C) 31 oC (D) 41 oC
1
46. A Carnot engine, having an efficiency of as heat engine, is used as a refrigerator If the work done on the
10
system is 10 J, the amount of energy absorbed from the reservoir at lower temperature is
[2015 Cancelled]
(A) 90 J (B) 1 J
(C) 100 J (D) 99 J
47. One mole of an ideal diatomic gas undergoes a transition from A to B along a path AB as shown in the figure.
The change in internal energy of the gas during the transition is [2015 Cancelled]

(A) 20 J (B) –12 kJ

(C) 20 kJ (D) –20 kJ
48. Figure below shows two paths that may be taken by a gas to go from a state A to a state C. In process AB,400
J of heat is added to the system and in process BC, 100 J of heat is added to the system. The heat absorbed by
the system in the process AC will be [2015 Cancelled]

(A) 460 J (B) 300 J

(C) 380 J (D) 500 J
 Cp 
49. The value of     , for hydrogen, helium and another ideal diatomic gas X (whose molecules are not
 Cv 
rigid but have an additional vibrational mode), are respectively equal to [Odisha NEET 2019]
7 5 9 5 7 9
(A) , , (B) , ,
5 3 7 3 5 7
5 7 7 7 5 7
(C) , , (D) , ,
3 5 5 5 3 5

227
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
50. At what temperature will the rms speed of oxygen molecules become just sufficient for escaping from the
26
Earth’s atmosphere? (Given : Mass of oxygen molecule (m)= 2.76 10 kg , Boltzmann’s constant
K B  1.38  10 23 J K 1 ) [NEET 2018]
(A) 2.508 10 K (B) 8.360  10 K
4 4

(C) 5.016 10 K (D) 1.254 10 K

4 4

51. A gas mixture consists of 2 moles of O2 and 4 moles of Ar at temperature T. Neglecting all vibrational modes,
the total internal energy of the system is [NEET 2017]
(A) 15 RT (B) 9 RT
(C) 11 RT (D) 4 RT
52. A given sample of an ideal gas occupies a volume V at a pressure P and absolute temperature T. The mass of
each molecule of the gas is m. Which of the following gives the density of the gas
[NEET-II 2016]
(A) P / ( kT ) (B) Pm / (kT)
(C) P / (kTV ) (D) mkT
53. The molecules of a given mass of a gas have r.m.s velocity of 200 ms–1 at 27oC and 1.0  105 Nm–2 pressure.
When the temperature and pressure of the gas are respectively, 127oC and 0.05  105 Nm–2, the r.m.s velocity
of its molecule in ms–1 is [NEET-I 2016]
100 2 100
(A) (B)
3 3
400
(C) 100 2 (D)
3
54. Two vessels separately contain two ideal gases A and B at the same temperature, the pressure of A being
twice that of B. Under such conditions, the density of A is found to b 1.5 times the density of B. The ratio of
molecular weight of A and B is [2015]
(A) 2 (B) 1/2
(C) 2/3 (D) 3/4

ANSWER KEY

Questions Answers Questions Answers Questions Answers

1 D 19 D 37 A
2 D 20 D 38 A
3 C 21 C 39 A
4 D 22 B 40 D
5 A 23 A 41 B
6 C 24 B 42 D
7 A 25 B 43 A
8 A 26 D 44 C
9 D 27 D 45 C
10 B 28 C 46 A
11 D 29 C 47 D
12 B 30 A 48 A
13 C 31 A 49 A
14 B 32 D 50 B
15 B 33 C 51 C
16 A 34 C 52 B
17 A 35 B 53 D
18 B 36 A 54 D

228
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 OSCILLATIONS
1. A block of mass m, lying on a smooth horizontal surface, is attached to a spring (of negligible mass) of spring
constant k. The other end of the spring is fixed, as shown in the figure. The block is initially at rest in its
equilibrium position. If now the block is pulled with a constant force F, the maximum speed of the block is:
[JEE (M) 2019]

F 2F
(A) (B)
mk mk
F F
(C) (D)
mk  mk
2. A rod of mass 'M' and length '2L' is suspended at its middle by a wire. It exhibits torsional oscillations. If two
masses each of 'm' are attached at distance 'L/2' from its centre on both sides, it reduces the oscillation
frequency by 20%. The value of ratio m/M is close to: [JEE (M) 2019]
(A) 0.17 (B) 0.37
(C) 0.57 (D) 0.77
3. A particle is executing simple harmonic motion (SHM) of amplitude A, along the x-axis, about x = 0. When
its potential energy (PE) equals kinetic energy (KE), the position of the particle will be:
[JEE (M) 2019]
A A
(A) (B)
2 2 2
A
(C) (D) A
2
4. The position co-ordinates of a particle moving in a 3-D coordinate system is given by
x  a cos t
y  a sin t [JEE (M) 2019]
z  a t
The speed of the particle is:
(A) a (B) 3 a
(C) 2 a (D) 2 a
5. A train moves towards a stationary observer with speed 34 m/s. The train sounds a whistle and its frequency
registered by the observer is f1. If the speed of the train is reduced to 17 m/s, the frequency registered is f2. If
speed of sound is 340 m/s, then the ratio f1/f2 is: [JEE (M) 2019]
(A) 18/17 (B) 19/18
(C) 20/19 (D) 21/20
6. A particle executes simple harmonic motion with an amplitude of 5 cm. When the particle is at 4 cm from the
mean position, the magnitude of its velocity in SI units is equal to that of its acceleration. Then, its periodic
time in seconds is: [JEE (M) 2019]
7 3
(A)  (B) 
3 8
4 8
(C) (D)
3 3

229
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 t
7. A particle undergoing simple harmonic motion has time dependent displacement given by x(t)  Asin . The
90
ratio of kinetic to potential energy of this particle at t = 210 s will be: [JEE (M) 2019]
1
(A) 2 (B)
9
(C) 3 (D) 1
8. A simple pendulum of length 1 m is oscillating with an angular frequency 10 rad/s. The support of the pendulum
starts oscillating up and down with a small angular frequency of 1 rad/s and an amplitude of 10–2 m. The relative
change in the angular frequency of the pendulum is best given by: [JEE (M) 2019]
(A) 10-3 rad/s (B) 10-1 rad/s
(C) 1 rad/s (D) 10-5 rad/s
9. A pendulum is executing simple harmonic motion and its maximum kinetic energy is K1. If the length of the
pendulum is doubled and it performs simple harmonic motion with the same amplitude as in the first case, its
maximum kinetic energy is K2. Then: [JEE (M) 2019]
K K
(A) K 2  1 (B) K 2  1
4 2
(C) K 2  2 K1 (D) K 2  K1
10. Two light identical springs of spring constant k are attached horizontally at the two ends of a uniform
horizontal rod AB of length  and mass m. The rod is pivoted at its centre 'O' and can rotate freely in
horizontal plane. The other ends of the two springs are fixed to rigid supports as shown in figure. The rod is
gently pushed through a small angle and released. The frequency of resulting oscillation is:
[JEE (M) 2019]

1 6k 1 2k
(A) (B)
2 m 2 m
1 k 1 3k
(C) (D)
2 m 2 m
11. A simple harmonic motion is represented by:
 
y  5 sin 3 t  3 cos 3 t cm
The amplitude and time period of the motion are: [JEE (M) 2019]
3 2
(A) 5 cm, s (B) 5 cm, s
2 3
3 2
(C) 10 cm, s (D) 10 cm, s
2 3
12. A silver atom in a solid oscillates in simple harmonic motion in some direction with a frequency of 1012/sec.
What is the force constant of the bonds connecting one atom with the other? (Mole wt. of silver =108 and
Avogadro number = 6.02 × 1023 gm mole–1) [JEE (M) 2018]
(A) 7.1 N/m (B) 2.2 N/m
(C) 5.5 N/m (D) 6.4 N/m

230
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
13. A particle is executing simple harmonic motion with a time period T. AT time t = 0, it is at its position of
equilibrium. The kinetic energy-time graph of the particle will look like [JEE (M) 2017]

(A) (B)

(C) (D)
14. A particle performs simple harmonic motion with amplitude A. Its speed is tripled at the instant that is at a distance
2A
from equilibrium position. The new amplitude of the motion is: [JEE (M) 2016]
3
7A
(A) A 3 (B)
3
A
(C) 41 (D) 3A
3
15. For a simple pendulum, a graph is plotted between its kinetic energy (KE) and potential energy (PE) against
its displacement d. Which one of the following represents these correctly? (graphs are schematic and not
drawn to scale) [JEE (M) 2015]

(A) (B)

(C) (D)

16. A pendulum made of a uniform wire of cross sectional area A has time period T. When an additional mass M
s added to its bob, the time period changes to TM . If the Young’s modulus of the material of the wire is Y then
1
is equal to (g = gravitational acceleration) [JEE (M) 2015]
Y
  TM  2  A   T 2  A
(A) 1     (B) 1    
  T   Mg   TM   Mg
 TM 2  A  TM 2  Mg
(C)    1 Mg (D)    1 A
 T    T  
17. The displacement of a particle executing simple harmonic motion is given by y  A0  A sin  t  Bcos  t .
Then the amplitude of its oscillation is given by [NEET 2019]
(A) A+B (B) A0  A2  B 2
(C) A2  B 2 (D) A02  ( A  B ) 2
18. Average velocity of a particle executing SHM in one complete vibration is [NEET 2019]
A
(A) zero (B)
2
A 2
(C) A (D)
2

231
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
19. The radius of circle, the period of revolution, initial position and sense of revolution are indicated in the figure
y -projection of the radius vector of rotating particle P is [NEET 2019]

 t 
(A) y (t )  3cos   , where y in m (B) y (t )  3cos 2 t , where y in m
 2
 t   3 t 
(C) y (t )  4sin   , where y in m (D) y (t)  3cos   , where y in m
 2  2 
20. The distance covered by a particle undergoing SHM in one-time period is (amplitude =A)
[Odisha NEET 2019]
(A) zero (B) A
(C) 2A (D) 4A
21. A pendulum is hung from the roof of a sufficiently high building and is moving freely to and from like a
simple harmonic oscillator. The acceleration of the bob of the pendulum is 20 ms–2 at a distance of 5 m from
the mean position. The time period of oscillation is [NEET 2018]
(A) 2 s (B)  s
(C) 2 s (D) 1 s
22. A spring of force constant k is cut into lengths of ratio [Link]. They are connected in series and the new force constant
is k. Then they are connected in parallel and force constant is k. Then k:k is [NEET 2017]
(A) 1:9 (B) 1:11
(C) 1:14 (D) 1:6
23. A particle executes linear simple harmonic motion with an amplitude of 3 cm. When the particle is at 2 cm
from the mean position, the magnitude of its velocity is equal to that of its acceleration. Then its time period
in seconds is [NEET 2017]
5 4
(A) (B)
2 5
2 5
(C) (D)
3 
24. A body of mass m is attached to the lower end of a spring whose upper end is fixed. The spring has negligible
mass. When the mass m is slightly pulled down and released, it oscillated with a time period of 3 s. when the
mass m is increased by 1 kg, the time period of oscillations becomes 5 s. The value of m in kg is
[NEET-II 2016]
3 4
(A) (B)
4 3
16 9
(C) (D)
9 16
25. A particle is executing a simple harmonic motion. Its maximum acceleration is  and maximum velocity is
 . Then, its time period of vibration will be [2015]
2 2
(A) (B)
 
2 
(C) 2 (D)
 
232
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
26. A particle is executing SHM along a straight line. Its velocities at distances x1 and x2 from the mean position
are V1 and V2 respectively. Its time period is [2015 Cancelled]

V12  V22 V12  V22

(A) 2 (B) 2
x12  x22 x12  x22
x12  x22 x22  x12
(C) 2 (D) 2
V12  V22 V12  V22

ANSWER KEY

Questions Answers Questions Answers

1 C 14 B
2 B 15 D
3 C 16 C
4 C 17 C
5 B 18 A
6 D 19 A
7 C 20 D
8 A 21 B
9 C 22 B
10 A 23 B
11 D 24 D
12 A 25 B
13 B 26 D

233
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
 WAVES
1. A heavy ball of mass M is suspended from the ceiling of a car by a light string of mass m (m<<M). When the
car is at rest, the speed of transverse waves in the string is 60 ms-1. When the car has acceleration a, the wave-
speed increases to 60.5 ms-1. The value of a, in terms of gravitational acceleration g, is closest to:
[JEE (M) 2019]
g g
(A) (B)
5 20
g g
(C) (D)
10 30
2. A musician using an open flute of length 50 cm produces second harmonic sound waves. A person runs towards
the musician from another end of a hall at a speed of 10 km/h. If the wave speed is 330 m/s, the frequency heard by
the running person shall be close to: [JEE (M) 2019]
(A) 753 Hz (B) 500 Hz
(C) 333 Hz (D) 666 Hz
3. A string of length 1 m and mass 5 g is fixed at both ends. The tension in the string is 8.0 N. The string is set
into vibration using an external vibrator of frequency 100 Hz. The separation between successive nodes on the
string is close to: [JEE (M) 2019]
(A) 16.6 cm (B) 20.0 cm
(C) 10.0 cm (D) 33.3 cm
4. A closed organ pipe has a fundamental frequency of 1.5 kHz. The number of overtones that can be distinctly
heard by a person with this organ pipe will be: (Assume that the highest frequency a person can hear is 20,000
Hz) [JEE (M) 2019]
(A) 7 (B) 5
(C) 6 (D) 4
5. Equation of travelling wave on a stretched string of linear density 5 g/m is y = 0.03 sin (450 t – 9x) where
distance and time are measured is SI units. The tension in the string is:
[JEE (M) 2019]
(A) 10 N (B) 12.5 N
(C) 7.5 N (D) 5 N
6. A travelling harmonic wave is represented by the equation y (x, t) = 10-3 sin (50 t + 2x), where x and y are in
meter and t is in seconds. Which of the following is a correct statement about the wave?
The wave is propagating along the [JEE (M) 2019]
(A) negative x-axis with speed 25ms-1
(B) The wave is propagating along the positive x-axis with speed 25 ms-1
(C) The wave is propagating along the positive x-axis with speed 100 ms-1
(D) The wave is propagating along the negative x-axis with speed 100 ms-1
7. A resonance tube is old and has jagged end. It is still used in the laboratory to determine velocity of sound in
air. A tuning fork of frequency 512 Hz produces first resonance when the tube is filled with water to a mark
11 cm below a reference mark, near the open end of the tube. The experiment is repeated with another fork of
frequency 256 Hz which produces first resonance when water reaches a mark 27 cm below the reference
mark. The velocity of sound in air, obtained in the experiment, is close to: [JEE (M) 2019]
(A) 328 ms-1 (B) 322 ms-1
(C) 341 ms-1 (D) 335 ms-1
8. A tuning fork vibrates with frequency 256 Hz and gives one beat per second with the third normal mode of
vibration of an open pipe. What is the length of the pipe? (Speed of sound in air is 340 ms–1)
[JEE (M) 2018]
(A) 190 cm (B) 180 cm
(C) 200 cm (D) 220 cm

234
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
9. 5 beats/second are heard when a turning fork is sounded with a sonometer wire under tension, when the length of
the sonometer wire is either 0.95m or 1m. The frequency of the fork will be: [JEE (M) 2018]
(A) 17.3 GHz (B) 15.3 GHz
(C) 10.1 GHz (D) 12.1 GHz
10. Two sitar strings, A and B, playing the note ‘Dha’ are slightly out of tune and produce beats of frequency 5
Hz. The tension of the string B is slightly increased and the beat frequency is found to decrease by 3 Hz. If the
frequency of A is 425 Hz, the original frequency of B is: [JEE (M) 2018]
(A) 428 Hz (B) 430 Hz
(C) 420 Hz (D) 422 Hz
11. A granite rod of 60 cm length is clamped at its middle point and is set into longitudinal vibrations. The density
of granite is 2.7  103 kg/m3 and its Young’s modulus is 9.27  1010 Pa. What will be the fundamental
frequency of the longitudinal vibrations? [JEE (M) 2018]
(A) 2.5 kHz (B) 10 kHz
(C) 7.5 kHz (D) 5 kHz
12. An observer is moving with half the speed of light towards a stationary microwave source emitting waves at
frequency 10 GHz. What is the frequency of the microwave measured by the observer?
(speed of light = 3 × 108ms–1) [JEE (M) 2017]
(A) 17.3 GHz (B) 15.3 GHz
(C) 10.1 GHz (D) 12.1 GHz
13. A pipe open at both ends has a fundamental frequency f in air. The pipe is dipped vertically in water so that
half of it is in water. The fundamental frequency of the air column is now: [JEE (M) 2016]
(A) 2f (B) f
f 3f
(C) (D)
2 4
14. A uniform string of length 20 m is suspended from a rigid support. A short wave pulse is introduced at its
lowest end. It starts moving up the string. The time taken to reach the support is: [JEE (M) 2016]
(A) 2 2s (B) 2s
(C) 2 2s (D) 2s
–1
15. A train is moving on a straight track with speed 20 ms . It is blowing its whistle at the frequency of 1000 Hz.
The percentage change in the frequency heard by a person standing near the track as the train passes him
is(speed of sound = 320 ms 1 ) close to: [JEE (M) 2015]
(A) 18% (B) 24%
(C) 6% (D) 12%
16. A tuning fork with frequency 800 Hz produces resonance in a resonance column tube with upper end open
and lower end closed by water surface. Successive resonance are observed at length 9.75 cm, 31.25 cm and
52.75 cm. The speed of sound in air is [Odisha NEET 2019]
(A) 500 m/s (B) 156 m/s
(C) 344 m/s (D) 172 m/s
17. A tuning fork is used to produce resonance in a glass tube. The length of the air column in this tube can be
adjusted by a variable piston. At room temperature of 27oC two successive resonances are produced at 20 cm
and 73 cm of column length. If the frequency of the tuning fork is 320 Hz, the velocity of sound in air at 27oC
is [NEET 2018]
(A) 330 ms–1 (B) 339 ms–1
(C) 350 ms–1 (D) 300 ms–1
18. The fundamental frequency in an open organ pipe is equal to the third harmonic of a closed organ pipe. If the
length of the closed organ pipe is 20 cm, the length of the organ pipe is [NEET 2018]
(A) 13.2 cm (B) 8 cm
(C) 12.5 cm (D) 16 cm
235
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
19. The two nearest harmonics of at tube closed a one end and open at other end are 220 Hz and 260 Hz. What is
the fundamental frequency of the system? [NEET 2017]
(A) 20 Hz (B) 30 Hz
(C) 40 Hz (D) 10 Hz
20. Two cars moving in opposite directions approach each other with speed of 22 ms–1 and 16.5 ms–1 respectively.
The driver of the first car blows a horn having a frequency 400 Hz. The frequency heard by the driver of the
second car is (velocity of sound is 340 ms–1) [NEET 2017]
(A) 361 Hz (B) 411 Hz
(C) 448 Hz (D) 350 Hz
21. The second overtone of an open organ pipe has the same frequency as the first overtone of a closed pipe L
metre long. The length of the open pipe will be [NEET-II 2016]
(A) L (B) 2L
L
(C) (D) 4L
2
22. Three sound waves of equal amplitudes have frequencies (n  1), n, (n  1) . They superimpose to give beats.
The number of beats produced per second will be [NEET-II 2016]
(A) 1 (B) 4
(C) 3 (D) 2
23. A siren emitting a sound of frequency 800 Hz moves away from an observer towards a cliff at a speed of 15
ms–1. Then, the frequency of sound that the observer hears in the echo reflected from the cliff is (Take velocity
of sound in air = 330 m s–1) [NEET-I 2016]
(A) 8.38 Hz (B) 885 Hz
(C) 765 Hz (D) 800 Hz
24. An air column, closed at one end and open at the other, resonates with a tuning fork when the smallest length
of the column is 50 cm. The next larger length of the column resonating with the same tuning fork is
[NEET-I 2016]
(A) 150 cm (B) 200 cm
(C) 66.7 cm (D) 100 cm
25. A uniform rope of length L and mass m1 hangs vertically from a rigid support. A block of mass m2 is
attached to the free end of the rope. A transverse pulse of wavelength  1 is produced at the lower end of the
rope. The wavelength of the pulse when it reaches the top of the rope is 2 . The ratio 2 / 1 is
[NEET-I 2016]
m2 m1  m2
(A) (B)
m1 m1
m1 m1  m2
(C) (D)
m2 m2
26. A string is stretched between fixed points separated by 75.0 cm. It is observed to have resonant frequencies of
420 Hz and 315 Hz. There are no other resonant frequencies between these two. The lowest resonant
frequency for the string is [2015]
(A) 10.5 Hz (B) 105 Hz
(C) 155 Hz (D) 205 Hz
27. 4.0 g of a gas occupies 22 litres at NTP. The specific heat capacity of the gas at constant volume is 5.0 J K–1
mol–1. If the speed of sound in this gas at NTP is 952 ms–1, then the heat capacity at constant pressure is (Take
gas constant R = 8.3 JK–1 mol–1) [2015]
–1
(A) 7.0 J K mol –1
(B) 8.5 J K mol
–1 –1

(C) 8.0 J K mol

–1 –1
(D) 7.5 J K–1 mol–1

236
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114
28. A source of sound S emitting waves of frequency 100 Hz and an observer O are located at some distance from
each other. The source is moving with a speed of 19.4 ms–1 at an angle of 60o with the source observer line as
shown in the figure. The observer is at rest. The apparent frequency observed by the observer (velocity of
sound in air 330 m s–1), is [2015]

(A) 106 Hz (B) 97 Hz

(C) 100 Hz (D) 103 Hz
29. The fundamental frequency of a closed organ pipe of length 20 cm is equal to the second overtone of an organ
pipe open at both the ends. The length of organ pipe open at both the ends is [2015]
(A) 120 cm (B) 140 cm
(C) 80 cm (D) 100 cm

ANSWER KEY

Questions Answers Questions Answers

1 A 16 C
2 D 17 B
3 B 18 A
4 A 19 A
5 B 20 C
6 A 21 B
7 A 22 D
8 C 23 A
9 C 24 A
10 C 25 D
11 D 26 B
12 A 27 C
13 B 28 D
14 A 29 A
15 D

237
SCO 101, Phase-1, Urban Estate, Dugri, Near LIC Building, Ludhiana
Phone No : 8427711114